Vol V BOP

ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LTD.
(APPDCL)
2X800 MW COAL FIRED POWER PLANT

NEAR
KRISHNAPATNAM, NELLORE DIST.,
ANDHRA PRADESH, INDIA
BALANCE OF PLANT SYSTEMS & EQUIPMENT

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
VOLUME – V
TCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS LTD

73/1, ST. MARK’S ROAD
BANGALORE 560 001
INDIA
May 2008
SPEC. NO. ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LTD. SECTION: CONTENTS
TITLE SHEET 1 OF 4
TCE.5103A-H-500-001
2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM
CONTENTS
VOLUME SPECIFICATION REV. TITLE

NUMBER NO.
I TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 - SCOPE OF ENQUIRY
- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
II TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 - PROJECT INFORMATION
- SCOPE, TERMINAL POINTS AND

EXCLUSIONS
- GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
- TENDER EVALUATION
- QUALITY ASSURANCE RQUIREMENTS
- SCHEDULES INCLUDING PRICE

SCHEDULE AND PERFORMANCE
GUARANTEE SCHEDULE
III TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 MECHANICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL SYSTEM

IV TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R1
REQUIREMENTS
V TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
VI TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 CIVIL WORKS REQUIREMENTS

VII TCE.5103A-H-500-001 P0 BID DRAWINGS
ISSUE
R0
TITLE SHEET 2 OF 4
TCE.5103A-H-500-001
CONTENTS
VOLUME V: ELECTRICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
VOLUME V A
SECTION SPECIFICATION REV. TITLE NO. OF

NUMBER NO. PAGES
D3.00 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 ELECTRICAL SCOPE 08
D3.01 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 400 KV SWITCHYARD 33
DATA SHEET A3.01 24
D3.02 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 POWER TRANSFORMERS 12
DATA SHEET A3.02 10
D3.03 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 SERVICE TRANSFORMERS 07
DATA SHEET A3.03 02
D3.04 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 NEUTRAL EARTHING EQUIPMENT 02
DATA SHEET A3.04 03
D3.05 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 HT SWITCHGEAR 20
DATA SHEET A3.05 04
D3.06 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 LT SWITCHGEAR /MCC 15
DATA SHEET A3.06 04
D3.07 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 SEGREGATED / NON-SEGREGATED PHASE 03

BUS DUCTS
DATA SHEET A3.07 02
D3.08 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 UPS SYSTEM 01
DATA SHEET A3.08 03
D3.09 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 CONTROL PANELS/JB/PB 05
ISSUE
R0
TITLE SHEET 3 OF 4
TCE.5103A-H-500-001
CONTENTS
DATA SHEET A3.09 01
D3.10 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 MOTORS & ACCESSORIES 07
DATA SHEET A3.10 04
D3.11 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 CABLES & CABLE CARRIER SYSTEMS 11
DATA SHEET A3.11 02
D3.12 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 DC SYSTEM 12
DATA SHEET A3.12 04
D3.13 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION 08

SYSTEM
DATA SHEET A3.13 04
D3.14 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 LIGHTING SYSTEM 15
DATA SHEET A3.14 02
D3.15 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 10
DATA SHEET A3.15 02
D3.16 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 ELEVATORS 03
DATA SHEET A3.16 03
D3.17 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 05
DATA SHEET A3.17 07
D3.18 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 CONSTRUCTION POWER SUPPLY 02

EQUIPMENT
D3.19 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 SPARES, MAINTENANCE TOOLS & TACKLES 15
D3.20 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED AFTER 04

AWARD OF CONTRACT
D3.21 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 CODES & STANDARDS 13
D3.22 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 ELECTRICAL LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 07
ISSUE
R0
TITLE SHEET 4 OF 4
TCE.5103A-H-500-001
CONTENTS
VOLUME V: ELECTRICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
VOLUME V B
SECTION SPECIFICATION REV. TITLE NO. OF

NUMBER NO. PAGES
D3.22 TCE-M4-203-01 R8 INDUCTION MOTORS 5
R8 DATA SHEET-C 3
D3.23 TCE-M4-219-01 R7 CONTROL CABINETS 6
R7 DATA SHEET-C 1
D3.24 TCE-M4-219-11 R7 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 18
R7 DATA SHEET-C 4
D3.25 TCE-M4-203-71 R1 VARIABLE SPEED DC/AC DRIVES 19
R1 DATA SHEET-C 1
D3.26 TCE-M4-203-02 R8 INDUCTION MOTORS ADDITIONAL 4

REQUIREMENT FOR HV MOTORS
R8 DATA SHEET-C 4
D3.27 TCE-M4-203-06 R4 MOTOR OPERATED VALVE ACTUATORS 4
R4 DATA SHEET-C 1
D3.28 TCE-M4-203-11 R7 D.C. MOTORS 4
R7 DATA SHEET-C 1
ISSUE
R0
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
VOLUME – V A
SPEC.NO.
ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY VOLUME – V
TCE.5103A-H-500- LIMITED SECTION: D3 – 0
001
SHEET 1 OF 8
2 x 800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM
Package :
Balance of Plant
ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORK
1.0 SCOPE AND BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.1 The scope of Contractor shall include all electrical equipment required for the
balance of power plant and auxiliaries for two (2) units of 800 MW.
1.2 The major equipment/system covered under scope of work shall be as follows but
not limited to the same:
¾ 400 kV Switchyard complete with equipment, supporting structures, towers /

beams, Main buses, Bay buses, Reactors, insulators, clamps & connectors,
Control & relay panels, Energy meters, shield wire / Lightning Mast, SCADA,
Yard fencing and provision of gates, etc.
¾ Power Transformers – Generator Transformers (GTs), Unit Transformers

(UTs), Station Transformers (STs) complete with relay panels, Remote OLTC
Control Cabinet, all fittings and accessories. Neutral grounding resistors for
STs and UTs.
¾ Service Transformers – 11/3.3 kV and 11kV/433 V transformers for feeding

supply to auxiliary loads complete with all fittings and accessories, for feeding
supply to sea water intake pumps & auxiliary system complete with fittings and
accessories.
¾ Neutral earthing equipment – 11 kV, 3.3 kV systems for low resistance

earthing to limit the earth fault current from 300 to 400A for short duration
¾ HT Switchgear (11kV and 3.3 kV) complete with breaker / contactor /

disconnector, bus bar, Instrument Transformers, Relays, meters, terminal
blocks, Dummy Panels, Bus Trunking & accessories for unit, station and coal
and ash handling systems, for feeding supply to sea water intake pump house.
¾ LT Switchgear (415V) complete with breaker / contactor, bus bar,

Instrumentation Transformers, Relays, meters, terminal blocks, Dummy
Panels, Bus Trunking & accessories for unit (except ESP & Soot Blower
System), station, coal handling system auxiliaries, sea water intake pump
house, 220V DC Switchgear, N/E Switchgear, etc.
¾ Segregated / Non-Segregated Bus Duct – Segregated Phase Bus Duct

between UT & 11kV Switchgear & between ST & 11kV switchgear, Non-
segregated Bus Duct between 415V Service Transformer to service
switchgear with required bends, supporting structures with related civil work,
Phase Cross Over Chambers (If required).
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

CONSULTANTS: TCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED
SPEC.NO.
001
SHEET 2 OF 8
Package :
Balance of Plant
¾ UPS system – cater to critical AC loads like Instrumentation & Control,

communication, critical motors etc with 2x100% batteries, 2x100% battery
chargers etc.
¾ Control Panel / JB/ PB - Control panels for station auxiliaries like EOT crane
and Hoist electrics, trolley lines and power supply arrangement, Electrics for
ventilation, air-conditioning, DG AMF Panel, Fire Protection Panel, JBs as
required for all systems and local start/stop PB for all motors and forward
reverse off for all valve actuators.
¾ Motors & Actuators - Drive motors for all rotating mechanical equipment with
gear reducer and coupling for all equipment wherever required.
¾ Cable & Cable Carrier System - All HT/LT Power, control, fibre optic and
special cables and cable raceway system with necessary fire barriers, fire
proof sealing and coating systems, Cable supporting structures, cable
trenches, cable racks, cable trays, Duct Banks, conduits, cable laying and
cable termination. Cable carrier system shall be provided for the entire plant
including Chimney as specified elsewhere in this specification.
¾ DC System complete with Batteries, Chargers, Battery racks, Battery MCBs,

Distribution Board for unit, station, Coal handling, and switchyard area.
¾ Earthing and Lightning protection for the entire plant including Boiler & TG
area, Chimney, IDCT complete with earth grids and electrodes buried in soil in
the plant area, embedded in concrete inside the buildings to which all the
electrical equipment, metallic structures are connected to have earth continuity
for safety reasons. Lightning protection complete with vertical air termination
rods, horizontal roof conductors, down comers, test links and pipe electrodes.
¾ Lighting – shall include lighting transformers, normal and emergency DBs, AC

/ DC lighting panels, towers, poles, lighting fixtures, lamps, aviation warning
lights, Power sockets, etc for the entire plant covering all the buildings,
switchyard, outdoor areas, Chimney, IDCT outdoor lighting, roads, yards,
boundary, etc.
¾ Fire Detection & Alarm - Main Fire Alarm Panel, multi sensors, Linear heat
sensor cables, break glass type manual push buttons, etc for the entire plant.
All required cabling between equipment of this system.
¾ Elevators – Two nos. i.e. one no. each for each steam generator and one no.
in TG building.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
001
SHEET 3 OF 8
Package :
Balance of Plant
¾ Communication System – complete with EPABX telephone system, walkie-

talkie PA system, PA System Panel, master & slave clock, etc. for the entire
plant. All required cabling between equipment of this system.
¾ Construction Power Supply - Complete with 11/0.433 kV Transformer, 11kV

Switchgear, 415V Switchboard for BOP contractor, capacitor banks, 11kV
Cable / conductor connection to AP Transco grid, 11kV Cables, LV
Distribution, Maintenance of the construction power supply equipment through
out the contract period, etc.
¾ Special tools and tackles required for installation, operation and

maintenance of electrical equipment.
¾ Electrical laboratory equipment and any other equipment to make the work
complete.
1.3 The scope shall include preparation and submission of all required drawings for
Purchaser’s approval not limited to:
¾ Main One Line Diagram for Generator, Switchyard upto HT System.
¾ Detailed Single Line for Construction Power Supply.
¾ Detailed Single Line Diagram for 11 kV system.
¾ Layout drawings - Switchyard Plan and Sections, Electrical equipment

layout, cable tray and trench layout drawings, lighting layout drawings,
earthing layout drawings including earth mat, Fire Detector Layout,
Communication System Layout.
¾ Scheme drawings for Switchgear / MCC /Motor modules as per the standard
schemes enclosed.
¾ Block Interlock Diagram for Switchyard Breakers/Isolators, 11 kV / 415 V

breakers.
¾ Vendor drawings for all equipments covered in the scope, SCADA

architecture drawing.
¾ Foundation drawings with supporting calculations.
1.4 The scope shall include submission of all required design calculations for:
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
001
SHEET 4 OF 8
Package :
Balance of Plant
¾ Switchyard – Sag Tension Calculation, Calculation for cantilever strength of

all switchyard equipment, SC force calculation, Lightning Protection Design,
Bus Bar Sizing, Conductor Sizing, Design Calculation for Spacer Span.
¾ Transformer sizing (Power Transformers and Service Transformers)
¾ Neutral Grounding Resistor for ST, UT & Service Transformers.
¾ Bus Ducts – Calculation for Span and Supporting Arrangement, and bus bar
and enclosure sizing. Heat loss and temperature rise calculations for
conductor and enclosure.
¾ Sizing for MV Switchboard
¾ CT & VT Sizing ( Includes specification details)
¾ Cable Sizing –All Power Cables., Voltage Dip & Drop Calculations
¾ DG Sizing – With voltage dip calculations for starting the largest motor.
¾ Battery & Charger Sizing, Earthing Conductor Sizing with Step & Touch
potential.
¾ Lightning System Design for the entire plant.
¾ Lighting System Design, Fire Detection system Design
¾ Short Circuit Calculation for all the systems, Relay Setting and Relay Co-
ordination graphs
1.5 The contractor shall include the following schedules in his scope:
¾ Cable Schedules – Power, Control and Instrumentation Cables.
¾ Interconnection cable Schedule for all cables supplied and installed by

contractor – except power cables (including connection from electrical
equipment to Plant DCS system and TG and SG controls supplied by others)
1.6 Data Sheets for all equipments shall be included in the vendor’s scope shall be
submitted.
1.7 A brief description of scope of work, design requirement, control philosophy and
layout for complete power plant is given in the subsequent chapter for
understanding of Contractor. However, Contractor shall include complete electrics
for balance of power plant under his scope of work.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
001
SHEET 5 OF 8
Package :
Balance of Plant
1.8 The required no. of Service transformers, HT Switchgears, LT switch gears, and
MCCs being planned by the Contractor shall be furnished and it shall be subject to
approval of purchaser/purchaser's Consultant. Similarly layout of electrical
equipment in various areas including switchyard shall be provided as per approval
of purchaser/purchaser's Consultant. The minimum requirement of LT switchgear,
transformers and MCCs to be considered is given in subsequent chapters.
1.9 The technical requirement of the balance of plant equipment involved as per the
scheme is covered in appropriate sections forming part of this specification.
1.10 Any and all other works not indicated above, but required to complete the power
plant including obtaining clearance from local authorities, statutory clearances,
interaction with AP Transco etc. are included in the VENDOR’s scope and no
extras on any account of scope etc. will be entertained after placement of LoA.
1.11 The Contractor shall provide all balance of plant and equipment for the operation,
control, monitoring, protection and maintenance of the switchyard and to permit
the switchyard to be connected to AP Transco transmission system. This includes
the provision of all Plant and equipment required by AP Transco to establish an
agreed interface.
1.12 For all the inputs required by the Contractor from other packages, supply of the
required auxiliary relays and control cables, laying and termination shall be in the
scope of the Contractor. Similarly necessary contacts required by other Package
Contractors shall be provided by the BOP Contractor.
2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DESIGN
2.1 STANDARDS
The design, manufacture, assembly and testing as well as performance of the

equipment and system shall conform to the relevant IS specifications (latest
revision). In case the Contractor is not in a position to comply fully with certain IS
specifications, or in respect of certain items for which there are no IS
specifications, the Contractor may base his proposals on IEC/BS/VDE/DIN
recommendations or other reputed national or international standards subject to
the approval of the purchaser.
All equipment supplied and all work done including system design and detailed
engineering shall also comply with the statutory requirements of the Government
of India, the Government of Andhra Pradesh and with the Indian Electricity Rules.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
001
SHEET 6 OF 8
Package :
Balance of Plant
2.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The climatic conditions generally prevailing at Krishnapatnam have already been

described in other volume.
Electrical Equipment selection and derating shall generally be based on ambient

temperature of 50 deg. C. For specific hot areas like boiler, etc. the ambient
temperature conditions shall be taken into consideration and equipment suitably
derated where necessary. In hot areas of higher temperature conditions, the
equipment shall be adequately protected against damage from radiant heat and
hot air.
The equipment offered shall be suitable for smooth efficient and trouble free
service in the warm-dry continental climate of Andhra Pradesh
2.3 MAKE AND INTERCHANGEABILITY
The make of major equipment shall be limited to preferred makes indicated under
chapter ‘List of preferred makes’. If the Contractor prefers to supply other than
from the Preferred Makes list, it should be with the approval of the Purchaser.
Makes of all other equipment and accessories are subject to prior approval by the
purchaser.
Similar equipment and components shall be of same make, equipments of same

type and rating shall be interchangeable.
The purchaser has the option of selecting the manufacturers of electrical

equipment, instruments and controls and any other specialized items in the
interest of standardization and the contractor shall have to supply equipment of
the particular make, if so required.
2.4 DESIGN CRITERIA
2.4.1 Standard voltage levels
The standardized voltage levels as shall be adopted as specified elsewhere in this

specification.
2.4.2 Permissible variations:
The system unit/plant equipment shall be designed suitable for variation in voltage
and frequency as indicated in the table below:
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
001
SHEET 7 OF 8
Package :
Balance of Plant
Variation in voltage and frequency:
Sl. Description Voltage Frequency

No.
1. Permissible variation for power supply
with rated performance/rated current and
control effectiveness maintained +/- 10% +/– 5%
2. Permissible variations for control and +/ - 10% +3% to –

regulation equipment with rated 5%
performance and control quality
maintained.
2.4.3 Basic insulation levels
Equipment shall be designed suitable for basic insulation levels as given in the
Table below:
Sl.No. Nominal voltage kV BIL kV (peak)
1. 400 kV 1425
2 11 kV 75
3 3.3 kV 40
2.4.4 Symmetrical short circuit ratings
The three phase symmetrical short circuit ratings of the switchgear at different voltage
levels shall be as indicated in the Table below:
Sl.No. Voltage level Symmetrical Making

Breaking capacity Capacity
1. 400 kV 40 kA 100 kA
2. 11kV 40 kA 100 kA
3. 3.3kV 40 kA 100 kA
4. 415 V 50 kA 125 kA
5. 220 V DC 20 kA -
6 48 V DC 10 kA -
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
001
SHEET 8 OF 8
Package :
Balance of Plant
The rated short circuit withstands duration for 400 kV, 11 kV, 3.3 kV and 415V,
220 V DC, 48V DC shall be 1 sec.
2.4.5 Criteria for selection of voltage levels for motors
A.C squirrel cage induction motors of ratings upto 160 kW shall be fed at 415 V, 3
phase, 50 Hz, with DOL start as applicable. A.C motors of ratings larger than
above and upto 1500 kW shall be connected to the 11 kV systems.
2.4.6 Motor starting and permissible voltage dips:
Voltage dip on starting of the largest motor with DOL shall be limited to 15% of the
nominal voltage at the motor terminals.
2.4.7 Degree of Protection:
Degree of protection for various electrical equipment shall be as follows:
Sl. No. Equipment Degree of Protection
1 Marshalling Boxes, Panels, motors IP 55

located outdoor
2 Electrical Equipment of CH system IP55 with dust proof

enclosure
3 11/3.3 kV switchgear IPH-4 for Bus bar

chamber,IPH-6 for other
compartments
4 LT Switchgear IP 52
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LTD. VOLUME: V
SPEC. NO.
TITLE SECTION: D 3-1
TCE.5103A-H-500- 2 X 800MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 1OF 33
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
1.0 INTRODUCTION
(a) The 400 kV switchyard shall be provided for evacuation of

power generated at the plant, through six lines connecting 400
kV switchyard at the plant with APSEB grid. The 400 kV lines
will be provided by APTRANSCO where as control and
protection for the lines will be provided on the 400 kV
switchyard protection (relay & control) panel (SCP).
The required line protection panels & SCP shall be provided by

the EPC Contractor. The height of panel shall be 2400 mm and
the other details shall be given by the bidder. One panel for
each bay shall be considered in switchyard control room.
Micro processor based tri vector meter of accuracy 0.2 with

optical port and MRI shall be provided for each line.
(b) The 400 kV switchyard shall have conventional one and half
breaker switching scheme, considering the operational
advantage and economy. Drawing no. TCE.5103A-EL-738-
SK-2000 key one line diagram shows the arrangement of
circuits in the switchyard.
(c) Out of the ‘light’, ‘heavy’ and ‘very heavy’ pollutions categorised
in CEA report, the site conditions shall be considered for choice
of Creepage distance.
(d) The estimated requirement of power for construction purpose is

about 5 MVA during the peak period of construction. The
estimated power required for commissioning activity of the first
unit is about 25 MVA. Thus, the total power for construction
and commissioning activities would be about 30 MVA. For
establishing the construction power supply, two independent
11kV ring main circuits (loops) are proposed to cover all the
major load centres. For establishing the commissioning power
supply, it is required to energize 11 kV Switchgears of Unit-1
and 11kV Switchgear of the Station Switchgear. The proposed
facilities shall be furnished by the bidder for Construction and
Commissioning Power Supply.
(e) The Key one line drawing TCE.5103A-EL-738-SK-2000 indicates

the LT switchboards for Boiler, Turbine, alternate supply to STs
and emergency DG set.
2.0 SWITCHYARD CIRCUITS AND EQUIPMENTS

(a) The switchyard shall have twelve (12) bays, comprising the
following circuits :
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
Generator transformer - two (2)

Station transformer - two (2)
Outgoing lines - six (6)
Bus Reactor feeders - two (2)
The details regarding order and direction of proposed lines

shall be provided during the detailed engineering stage. The
space requirement for two bays (reactor feeders) shall be
considered. The reactor details such as reactor type,
associated protection and its connection in the switchyard shall
be in scope of the owner.
All drawings are suggested layouts only and are for general
guidance of the Bidder. The Contractor shall optimise the
layout and develop these drawings as per actual requirement,
design and submit them for Purchaser’s approval.
(b) The switchyard equipment shall be supplied and installed with

all accessories to make the switchyard complete in all respects.
The switchyard consists of but not limited to the following :
(i) 420 kV circuit breakers, isolators, current transformers

and capacitor type and electro magnetic type voltage
transformers
(ii) 360 kV lightning arrestors, wave traps & coupling

capacitors
(iii) Busbar & accessories, insulator, clamps & connectors.
(iv) Switchyard control & relay panels for all bays
(v) PL Carrier communication & associated equipment.
(vi) Switchyard structures, fence, trenches foundations &

other civil works
(vii) Back up control panel for control of switchyard

equipment
(viii) Computer based SCADA system for control, metering

and synchronisation
3.0 DESIGN CRITERIA
The switchyard shall be generally designed based on the following codes and
standards.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
a) IS-10118, Part-3: Code of practice for selection installation and

maintenance of switchgear and control gear
b) Central Board for Irrigation & Power (CBIP) - Technical Manual on

Layout of Substations
c) Indian Electricity Rules

d) Indian Electricity Grid Code
3.1 (a) Basic Insulation level
Maximum line to ground voltage for single phase to ground fault shall
not exceed 320 kV.
(b) The following standard insulation values (lightning impulse

voltage) shall be adopted as per CEA report
(i) Transformer / line/ bus reactor

Windings: 1300 kV peak
(i) Other switchyard equipment :1425 kV peak
(ii) Outgoing lines :1550 kV peak
3.2 Clearances
In line with the recommended insulation levels above, the following

minimum clearances are proposed.
(i) Phase to Phase - 4000 mm

(ii) Phase to earth - 3500 mm
(iii) Live part to ground - 8000 mm
(iv) Section clearance - 6500 mm
3.3 Creepage Distance
Considering the location of switchyard, the Creepage distance of suitable

value based on site conditions shall be provided for the following
equipment:
• Circuit breakers
• Bus post and string Insulators, isolators, lightning Arresters
• Transformer bushings
• Current and voltage Transformers
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
3.4 Current Rating

The switchyard main buses shall be designed to carry continuous current
duly taking into account the designed ambient conditions, effect of
emissivity, solar radiation, proximity & skin effect, etc. The Contractor
shall furnish necessary busbar sizing calculations to the Purchaser for
approval.
The generator transformer, station transformer and line bay buses shall
be rated according to their circuit rating. The switchyard shall be
designed for a fault level of 40 kA/1.0 sec., and dynamic rating of 100
kA/peak.
3.5 Bus Bars
(a) Busbars shall be of tubular aluminium conductors (rigid bus)

according to standard metricised iron pipe size (IPS) of suitable
size (4 inch dia)
(b) The conductor size for bus shall be based on maximum load
current with allowable temperature rise within limits during
short circuit conditions and permissible corona/voltage gradient
and effect of solar radiation. The final temperature of the
conductor when carrying full load current shall not exceed 95
deg. C with a design ambient of 50 deg. C.
(c) The conductor size and spacing shall be checked to limit the
voltage gradient to 17 kV/cm to reduce corona effect.
(d) The tension in strung bus shall be so as to limit the sag within
about 3% of the span. The tension for power conductor shall
be 1000 kg/sub-conductor.
(e) Voltage gradient criteria shall be applicable for tubular buses

as well, which determine the minimum OD of the tube.
(f) Lighting masts shall be provided for Lightning Protection of

switchyard. The contractor has to furnish all details including
calculations to the purchaser for approval.
3.6 Shield Wire ISSUE

R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
The size of the shield wire shall be based on the lightning impulse current
expected and time duration. Allowance shall be given to the final size of
the earth wire to account for corrosion during service, at a rate of 0.03
mm per annum. However, the minimum size of the shield wire shall not
be less than 70 mm2. Earth wire tension shall be 800 kg/conductor.
3.7 Insulators
(a) Tension and suspension insulator strings shall be anti fog type
selected based on the voltage, insulation level, and pollution
level and electro-mechanical strength. Creepage chosen shall
be suitable for heavy pollution, i.e., 31mm/kV.
Electromechanical strength shall be selected with factor of
safety of 2.5.
(b) Bus post insulators shall be solid core / anti fog type and shall
be selected based on the system voltage, insulation level,
mechanical strength and pollution level requirements.
(c) Insulator hardware shall be corona free up to a falling power

frequency visible discharge test voltage of 1.1 times the
maximum system voltage. All structural steel and steel
components of switchyard equipment shall be hot dip
galvanised.
3.8 Lightning Protection of Switchyard
The lightning protection of switchyard shall be done by connecting the

pinnacle points of the towers by shield wires. The zone of coverage for
the shield wire shall be considered as 60 deg. between the two shield
wires and 45 deg for end conductors.
3.9 The criteria for deciding phase to phase clearance in case of strung
conductors shall take into account the conductor swing of one of the
conductors (say R Phase) with maximum wind velocity and the adjacent
conductor (say Y phase) with 80% of maximum wind velocity at maximum
sag conditions.
3.10 In the transformer yard, the power conductor termination shall not be
tapped off directly to the Generator transformer from the strung bus
between the T.G building and switchyard. The tap-off conductor shall be
routed through a bus post insulator located near the transformer.
3.11 For the layout proposed by the CONTRACTOR the adequacy of the
cantilever strength specified shall be checked considering the following
factors of safety :
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
(a) Sum of all permanent normal loads (wind load on tubular bus +
wind load on stack + dead weight of the tubes) x 2.5 ( factor of
safety)
(b) Combination of all normal loads plus either short circuit or earth
quake load whichever is higher x 1 ( factor of safety)
3.12 The switchyard shall be designed for the seismic coefficient and wind
pressures as indicated elsewhere in specification
3.13 Design criteria for civil works and structures shall be in conformity with
relevant standards.
4.0 400 KV SWITCHYARD LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS

4.1 The CONTRACTOR shall provide for suitable dimensions in respect of
bay width, phase spacing, clearances, etc., depending on the actual
dimensions of the equipment keeping in view the design criteria /
requirements and without sacrificing any maintenance space /
conveniences.
4.2 The ACSR conductor for the connection between generator transformer
gantry and incoming gantry in the switchyard shall be properly sized for
normal current capacity and short circuit rating.
4.3 The CONTRACTOR shall note that the sequence of bays shall be so
arranged that the maximum horizontal angle of deviation of the incoming
power and shielding conductors from Generator and Station transformers
do not exceed 30 deg. C. Similarly, the point of anchoring on TG building
be such that the vertical angle of deviation is limited to 30 deg. C from
horizontal plane.
4.4 The CONTRACTOR shall adopt bolted type connectors for tubular bus
conductors, fixed type of terminal connectors for isolator terminals,
flexible type of terminal connectors for circuit breakers, current
transformers and power transformers and flexible jumper connectors for
connecting lightning arresters and voltage transformers.
4.5 The switchyard shall be provided with access ways near the current
transformers and circuit breakers, isolators, LA, marshalling boxes,
CVTs, EMVTs and cable trenches.
4.6 The cable trenches for the equipment shall be run as close to their
foundations as possible even preferably touching.
4.7 The fence provided around switchyard shall be of 3000 mm minimum

height and at a minimum distance such that section clearance is
available from any live part. It shall be suitably earthed if required by
relevant standards.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
4.8 The switchyard equipment shall be suitable for outdoor installation and
shall have tropical and fungicidal treatment. The design ambient
temperature shall be 50 deg. C.
4.9 Earth mat of suitable size with closely spaced earth conductor shall be
provided below the operating handle of individual switchyard equipment
as per the allowed step & touch potentials.
4.10 The soak pit and burnt oil pit for the line and bus reactors shall be sized
as per the norms indicated in CBIP manual for Fire protection of Power
Transformers.
5.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND ACCESSORIES
5.1 Circuit breakers
a) The circuit breakers shall be SF6 outdoor type. The circuit breaker
and its accessories shall be with IP 55 degree of protection.
b) The circuit breakers shall be electrically interlocked with associated

isolators in accordance with switchyard safety interlocking scheme.
c) The design of circuit breaker shall be such that contacts shall not
close automatically upon loss of gas / air pressure. It shall comprise of
three identical single phase units operating mechanism suitable for
single phase operation.
d) SF6 breakers shall be provided with temperature compensated SF6

density pressure switches for individual poles with separate trip, alarm
and blocking contacts.
e) DC circuits for two trip coils shall be separate and each shall be
Monitored separately.
f) Local electrical operation of the circuit breaker under the control of

local / remote switch and interlocked with isolators and earth
switches, associated with the circuit breakers, shall be provided.
g) Unit type air compressor system shall be adopted.
h) SF6 breakers shall be so designed that upon loss of pressure, the

gap between open contacts shall be suitable to withstand and at
least the rated voltage at zero gauge pressure of gas.
i) Suitable pressure switches shall be provided for loss of gas in the

circuit breaker. Suitable protection, to prevent circuit breaker
operation under low gas and / or pneumatic pressure shall be
provided.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
j) The switching surge over voltages while re-energising is required

to be limited to 2, 3 P.U.
k) Two trip coils shall be provided for greater reliability and their
power supply shall be from two different sources. The trip coils shall
have sufficient continuous rating to cater to the trip coil supervision
relay current. Each of the trip coils shall be monitored separately both
in open and close positions of the breakers.
l) Manually operated emergency trip push button or any other

device, conveniently located for mechanical tripping of all the three
phases simultaneously shall be provided.
m) Duty cycle for the breakers shall be O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO

under all fault conditions. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for rapid
auto re-closing duty.
n) All the circuit breakers in the switchyard shall be of identical

make & type with interchangeable components to the maximum extent
possible.
5.2 Operating Mechanism
a) Circuit breakers shall be operated by spring/spring charge. It shall be

anti-pumping type and trip free. One O-C-O operation shall be
possible with failure of AC supply.
b) Separate pole discrepancy circuit with proper relay and other

accessories shall be provided.
c) A closing release shall operate correctly at all values of voltage

between 85% and 110% of the rated voltage. A shunt trip shall
operate correctly under all operating conditions of the circuit breaker
up to the rated breaking capacity of the circuit breaker and at all
values of supply voltage between 70% and 110% of rated voltage.
d) Mechanical interlocks shall be provided in the operating mechanism to

prevent discharging of closing springs when the breaker is already in
the closed position. Provision shall be made to prevent a closing
operation to be carried out with the springs partially charged.
5.3 One set of SF6 gas filling, evacuation and refilling equipment consisting of
trolley mounted compressed SF6 cylinder, gas regulator with manometer
and necessary coupling for filling gas in the breaker shall be provided. 2 nos.
of SF6 gas leakage detectors shall be included in the scope of supply.
Detectors shall be of reputed make and have Visual as well as Audible sound
facility when leakage is detected.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
5.4 All circuit breakers controlling the lines shall be provided with either closing
resistors or proven controlled switching devices to reduce over voltages and
in-rush currents.
ISOLATORS
6.1 Isolators
The isolators with horizontal centre break type, horizontal upright mounted,
isolators with / without earth switch shall be supplied. A.C motor drive
mechanism for main blade and manual operation mechanism for earth blade
shall be provided.
a) Isolators shall be suitable for operation with 415 V, 3 phase, AC

motor. However, it shall also be possible to operate them manually in
the event of failure of power supply or outage of the drive motor with
proper interlock provision for isolation of motor in case of manual
operation.
b) Isolators shall be electrically interlocked with the circuit breakers in

accordance with the switchyard safety interlocking scheme.
c) Base channels and other structural steel members such as operating

pipes, phase coupling rods, operating mechanism boxes, bolts, pins,
etc. shall be hot dip galvanised. All castings except current carrying
parts shall be made of malleable cast iron or cast steel. Manual
operating handles shall be galvanised steel.
d) The isolator or earthing switch shall be provided with high current

carrying contacts on the hinge and jaw ends and all contact surfaces
shall be of silver faced copper.
e) Each pole of the isolator shall be provided with two earthing pads of non-
corrodible material at opposite ends, brazed to the channel base. Flexible
copper earth connectors shall be provided for connecting operating
handles of isolators and earthing switches to the earthing system. The
poles of the isolators shall be mechanically ganged.
Isolators shall be electrically interlocked with the circuit breakers in

accordance with the switchyard safety interlocking scheme. Required
number of auxiliary contacts shall be provided for interlocks, DCS,
SCADA & panel indications.
Flexible tinned copper connection between rotating shaft of earth switch

and frame shall have a cross-section to withstand short time withstand
current.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
Isolator and earth switch shall be mechanically interlocked such that it will
not be possible to close earth switch when the isolator is closed and vice
versa.
6.2 Operating Mechanism
a) The manual operating handles shall be mounted on the base of

supporting structure. A weather-proof galvanised sheet steel cabinet
with gasket hinged door and padlocking facility shall be provided to
house the driving mechanism, motor starters, control valve solenoids,
auxiliary switches, etc. The operating mechanism box shall have
enclosures conforming to IP-55 degree of protection.
b) Arrangement shall be provided to permit manual operation of power

isolators and earth switch. The arrangement shall be such that when
manual operating handle is in the engaged position, the power
operation shall be made inoperative. Padlocking facility shall be
provided for the manual operating handle.
7.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTS) / CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMERS (CVTs) / ELECTRO MAGNETIC VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERS (EMVTs)
7.1 EMVTs shall be provided for tariff metering and CVTs for other metering
and protection. Metering cores of CTs and EMVTs / CVTs shall be with
accuracy of 0.2S and 0.2 respectively.
a) A separate 2 core CT (for Main and Check Meters) of accuracy class

0.2S for tariff metering for each line. The VA burden of the tariff
metering CTs shall be subject to the approval of grid authorities.
b) A separate 2 winding EMVT (for Main and Check Meters) of accuracy

class 0.2 for tariff metering for each line.
c) Separate CT cores for Main-1 and Main-2 Carrier aided Distance

Protection (21) for each line.
d) The CTs and EMVTs shall be either oil filled hermetically sealed or
SF6 gas filled single phase type. The CVTs shall be oil filled single
phase type.
e) The rated burden for the metering and protection cores shall be
decided considering all the loads/relays connected, future additions,
lead burden etc.
f) The knee point voltage for PS class cores shall be decided

considering the total connected burden with adequate margin.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
g) The magnetising current at Vk/2 shall be as low as possible (say

15mA).
h) The CVT secondary shall include necessary MCBs with auxiliary

contacts for alarm for protecting the secondary winding. Further, for
the purpose of supervision on remote panel, line terminals of the
CVTs shall be brought out through second set of MCBs. All the
terminal boxes shall be powder coated with IP-55 degree of
protection.
i) CT/CVT/EMVT assembly shall be suitably braced to withstand

stresses induced due to seismic disturbances.
j) The tank/base and all exposed ferrous parts shall be hot dip
galvanised conforming to applicable standards.
k) It shall be possible to select the ratio on any core independent of the

setting in the other cores, for which purpose, tapings will have to be
provided on the secondary windings.
l) Secondary terminals of CTs shall be brought out in a weather proof

powder coated terminal box. Facility shall be provided for short
circuiting and grounding the CT secondary at the terminal box. All the
taps of each core shall be wired to Marshalling Box to facilitate ratio
changing. The box shall have a degree of protection IP-55. Tariff
metering core terminals (for connecting main and check meters) shall
be housed in separately sealable terminal boxes.
m) Oil filled insulator/bushings shall be hermetically sealed to prevent

ingress of moisture. A cushion of nitrogen gas shall be provided to
allow for expansion.
n) Tariff metering EMVT terminals (for connecting main and check

meters) shall be housed in separately sealable terminal boxes.
o) All CTs/EMVTs shall be provided with stainless steel bellows.
p) One Marshalling Box (MB) for each set of 3 CTs/CVTs/EMVTs shall

be provided .The MBs shall be fixed to the supporting structure of
CT/CVT/EMVT. The MBs shall be fitted with adequate no. of
disconnector type of test terminal boards suitable for terminating 2
nos. of 2.5 sq mm multi-strand copper wires. At least 20% spare
terminals shall be provided
q) In case of SF6 filled CTs and EMVTs, gas density monitors with
remote alarm facility shall be provided.
r) All metering CTs shall have ISF ≤ 5

ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
s) The number of CT cores shall be Four. (Two for Main I, Main II

protection metering, Busbar differential).If two bus bar differential
provided the number of CT cores shall be five
6.3.2 Tariff metering and associated CTs & PTs shall comply with the requirements
of CEA regulations on installation and operation of energy meters and shall
also comply with the requirements of grid authorities.
6.3.3 Neutral of all cores of CTs, CVTs and EMVTs shall be formed in marshalling
box of the respective equipment. Cables with sufficient number of cores are
run from these marshalling boxes to protection panels. The neutral of CTs,
CVTs, and EMVTs shall be earthed only at protection panels by means of a
disconnecting link.
All routine tests for CT shall be carried out as per relevant standards. The test
certificates for all the type tests conducted on an identical CT shall be
furnished. In case the tests are not conducted or not in line with the
requirements of IS/IEC, then CONTRACTOR shall conduct these type tests
on the CTs at no additional cost.
Fuses / fast acting MCBs of adequate rating shall be provided in each

secondary output leads of each VT to protect the VT secondary branch
circuit from the abnormal voltage surges that may occur on the VT
primary side. The secondary shall also include suitable number of links
for each secondary as per the requirement of fuse failure detection
relays.
The burden of the CVTs shall be adequate for the loads connected and
shall also consider the requirement of two more future generator
transformer bays.
9.0 LIGHTNING ARRESTERS
9.1 360 kV, 20kA nominal discharge current, discharge Class - IV, pressure
relief class –A, metal oxide gapless lightning arresters shall be provided.
Three lightning arresters shall be used in each of the Generator
transformer, station transformer & line bays.
9.2 Specific Requirements
(a) Surge monitor comprising a digital type counter, leakage

current detector shall be provided for each arrester and the
same shall be mounted at suitable height to facilitate easy
reading of the counter and leakage current detectors.
(b) The arrester shall be mounted on an insulating base. Surge

monitor shall be inserted between the lightning arrester and
earth.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
(c) Insulated copper conductor of adequate size and length shall

be used for connecting discharge counter terminal and
lightning arrester earth terminal. Insulation level of the
conductor shall not be less than 5 kV.
(d) Suitably sized bypass copper shunts shall be provided for

bypassing the discharge counter for removal / maintenance of
the counter.
10.1 INSULATORS & HARDWARE

10.1 Bus post insulators, insulator strings with fittings / hardware as required
for the entire switchyard shall be provided.
(a) The hardware shall be corona free up to a falling power

frequency visible discharge test voltage of 156 kV. All
hardware components shall be smooth and as far as possible
have round exposed surface.
11.0 BUS CONDUCTORS, CLAMPS & CONNECTORS

The clamps and connectors shall be Al alloy casting conforming to IS 617 for
connection to equipment terminals and conductors of aluminium. In case
terminals are of copper, connectors shall be used with 2 mm thick bimetallic
liner.
11.1 Line Traps

The wave traps shall meet the ratings and other requirements as indicated
below:
a) The wave trap shall be mounted on top of a structural support in order

to avoid suspension mounting from the gantry.
b) All ferrous hardware and parts shall be hot-dipped galvanized or
stainless steel.
c) Wave trap shall consist of a main coil designed to carry continuously
the rated current without exceeding the limit of temperature rise. The
wave trap shall be suitable for a short time rating of 40 kA for 1
second. It shall be equipped with protective device, tuning device,
bird barrier, corona ring, etc.
d) Wave trap shall be broad band tuned for the entire carrier frequency
range. Resistive component of impedance of the wave trap within its
carrier frequency blocking range shall be suitable for the specified
EHV system.
e) Wave trap shall be provided with a protective device in the form of
surge arrestor. The protective device shall be shunt connected to the
main coil and tuning device. The surge arrester shall be station class ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
current limiting active gap type and its rated discharge current shall be
20 kA. The surge arrester provided with the wave trap shall fully
comply with the requirements of IS: 3070-Part I / IEC-99-1, Part I.
f) Line trap shall be spray painted with RAL 7032 shade of paint.
g) Line trap shall conform to IEC-353 fulfilling all the technical
requirements.
12.0 400 KV SWITCHYARD PROTECTION PANEL

12.1 Control panels housing various controls, metering, indication,
annunciation, synchronising, remote control functions, mimic diagram,
etc., shall be provided for 400 kV switchyard, along side Generator Back
up panel in unit control room. Switchyard protection relay panels, PLCC
panels, switchyard battery, DCDBs & ACDBs and if necessary, remote
I/O units for interfacing with plant DCS system, SCADA panels shall be
housed in a switchyard control room / building.
12.2 The protection (control & relay) panels shall consist of :
(a) One complete set of control & relay panels for 400 kV
switchyard equipment
(b) One complete set of fault locating panels.
(b) One complete set of fault recording panels (standalone
disturbance recorders)
(c) One complete set of metering panels.
(d) One complete set of follower / auxiliary relay panels (if
required)
(e) One set of bay marshalling boxes.
12.3 The switchyard control and interlocking scheme shall be hard wired and
shall be suitable for one and half breaker switching scheme.
12.4 The Contractor shall furnish block interlock diagrams for the switchyard
for Owner’s approval. The scheme as approved by OWNER shall be
provided. All the auxiliary relays, timers, switches, hardware, etc.,
required for the scheme are deemed to be included in the
CONTRACTOR scope.
12.5 Line bays shall be provided with single phase and three phase auto
reclosing feature. All the necessary relays, trip relays, auxiliary relays
shall be provided.
12.6 Live line – dead bus closing and dead line-live bus closing facilities shall
be provided using dedicated relays for this purpose. Indicating lamps for
fulfilment of the permissive condition shall be provided.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
12.7 Synchronising facility shall be provided for all lines on control panels to
be located in unit control room along side generator back-up panels. In
auto mode, synchronising shall be done with a permissive from check
synchronising relay and in manual mode the same shall be done by
manually ensuring synchronism with the aid of the synchroscope, double
voltmeter, double frequency meter, synchronising lamps.
12.8 Control and indication shall be provided for each of the breaker and
isolator. Discrepancy type control switch shall be used for the control.
The measurement requirements for each of the bays shall be as per the
BID drawing.
12.9 Each of the abnormal conditions of each circuit breaker, each protective
relay alarm & trip condition, DC supply failures, each abnormal condition
of the isolator like drive overload, AC & DC supply failure for a group of
two isolators shall be annunciated as indicated in Clause 15 and also
display on CRT provided in unit control room.
12.10 All relay panels except bay marshalling boxes shall be located in
switchyard relay room under air-conditioning. Bay marshalling boxes
shall be located in switchyard.
12.11 Transducers shall be provided for the 400 kV indications of electrical

parameters related to 400 kV switchyard bays. The transducers shall be
either located in the respective control panels or in a separate transducer
panel. Stuck Protection, Trip coil supervision, pole discrepancy, alarm
semaphore indication and isolator shall be provided in Switchyard Control
room.
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System
12.13 SCADA system comprising of various controls, metering, indication,

annunciation, synchronising, remote control functions, mimic diagram,
sequence of events recording, etc., shall be provided for the switchyard.
a) The controller shall be configured with redundant CPUs. The

redundant CPU shall be configured to operate as hot standby. All the
SCADA switches and servers shall be located in switchyard control room.
All SCADA servers & Front End Processor servers (if any) shall be rack
mounted.
b) The switchyard equipment shall be remote controlled from main

Control Room of the Power Plant through the SCADA HMI in order to
enable the Switchyard Control Room totally un-attended.
c) The SCADA system shall be based on a de-centralised concept with

bay oriented distributed intelligence devices, for safety and availability
reasons. The offered SCADA system shall be of latest state of art design
with capability to interface with bay control units (separate for each bay).
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
The offered SCADA system shall be based on internationally accepted

Open Protocol IEC 61850, Scalability and Open Architecture.
d) The communication between the numerical relays and SCADA system

shall be with fibre optic cable.
e) SCADA system shall be fail safe design. The Contractor shall furnish
documents to establish and prove that the system is highly reliable with
very high MTBF (Mean Time between Failures).
f) One (1) no. Operator Station for SCADA (for control and monitoring of
complete 400 kV switchyard equipment) shall be located in main / unit
Control Room (CR) of power plant and one (1) no. in Switchyard Control
Room. One (1) no. Engineering Station shall be provided in the main CR
to make the SCADA configuration changes and system settings. The
Engineering Station located in shall also be configured as Operator
Station to act as standby in case of failure of the Operator Station in main
CR.
g) The OS and ES display/monitors shall be dual headed, 24 inches size,

LCD type and the make shall be finalised during detailed engineering so
as to match with those provided for Main Plant DCS. In the main CR,
necessary printers shall also be provided for SCADA system. All printers
shall be equipped with USB port and enough USB cables (minimum 5m
length) to enable the printers to be placed in a convenient location. It
shall be possible to configure the printers to print on demand/online or at
specified intervals. The console on which the operator station is mounted
shall be properly ventilated (forced cooled if required).
h) The control location for the switchyard control shall be main control
room by default. But provision shall be made in the SCADA to control the
switchyard from switchyard control room also. It shall not be possible to
control the switchyard from two locations simultaneously. The required
selection shall be provided in the operator station of main CR.
i) Information exchange shall be provided from SCADA to plant DCS

through suitable, fast, reliable and redundant serial communication
interface.
j) Synchronising facility shall be provided for all lines in SCADA. In

check synchronising position, the synchronising criteria shall be fulfilled
as indicated by the closing permissive provided by check synchronising
relays in-built in Bay Control Units (separate sync check relays are not
envisaged). In dead bus/line mode, closure is possible only if either the
line or the bus is dead. (For GCB scheme, the synchronising of the line
shall be possible through main breaker and the middle breaker).
Display of voltages and frequencies of incoming and running supplies,

synchroscope and the sync. permissive signal shall be simulated in the
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
SCADA operator station. The synchronism and energizing check

functions shall be bay oriented and distributed to the bay control units
and/or protection devices. All features shall be available viz. a) Setting
voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference b) Energizing for dead
line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead line – dead bus with no
synchro-check function c) Synchronising between live line and live bus
with synchro-check function. The correct voltage for synchronizing and
energizing is derived from the auxiliary switches of the circuit breakers
and the isolators and shall be selected automatically by the bay control
and protection IED (Intelligent Electronic Device/s).
The closing operation of line breaker shall involve the following steps, viz.
a) selection of the breaker to be closed, b) mode of closing operation i.e.
whether both the line and the bus are live or only one of them is dead as
sensed by voltage relays connected to the respective CVTs. In live-
bus/live-line case, synchronisation between the two voltages is checked
by the check synchronisation relay which generates permissive only if the
synchronisation criterion is met. If either the line or the bus is dead, the
logic develops using the contacts of bus voltage and line voltage relays
which generates permissive for closing of the breaker, c) issuing the
closing command after obtaining the synchro permissive or live-
bus/dead-line or live-line/dead-bus permissive as the case may be. This
permissive shall be displayed on the SCADA HMI.
k) The generator transformer main breaker will be controlled from main

plant DCS. (For GCB scheme, It shall be possible to control the middle
breaker from both DCS (through auto/manual synchronisation) and
SCADA with the help of a selection available in the SCADA software).
The selection shall have two positions i.e. “SCADA” and “DCS”. If
“SCADA” is selected, all the required signals including PT signals for
synchronising shall be transferred to SCADA system. If “DCS” is
selected, all the required signals shall be transferred to DCS/GRP
(Generator Relay Panel). (For GCB scheme, the control of middle
breaker from SCADA shall be suitably interlocked such that its closure is
not possible when it is used as generator synchronising breaker).
l) Transducers shall be provided, wherever necessary, for the indication

of electrical parameters related to switchyard bays as required.
Transducers shall be used only for monitoring of non electrical quantities
such as shunt reactor oil and winding temperature and for electrical
quantities such as battery charger voltage, battery charger current, and
400 kV bus voltages. For monitoring of all other bay wise electrical
quantities, IED (such as BCU) shall be used.
m) All the auxiliary contacts of main equipment such as circuit breakers,

isolators, earth switches shall be brought to the protection panels for
indications, interlocks, SER function, etc. In case of shortage of auxiliary
contacts, contact multiplying relays shall be used. The same shall be two
coil, latching type with electrical reset and shall be mounted in switchyard
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
protection panels. At least 2NO + 2NC spare contacts shall be wired to

terminal block after fully utilising for control, protection, annunciation, etc.
n) It shall be possible to control and monitor (including synchronising) all

the 400 kV switchyard breakers & isolators from SCADA except main
circuit breakers of generators. Main circuit breakers of generators are
controlled from main Control Room through Plant DCS and monitored
both in DCS and SCADA. Earth switches shall be operated only from
local but is monitored in SCADA. Isolators and earth switches pertaining
to generator transformer bay shall be monitored both in DCS and
SCADA.
12.14 Monitoring – SCADA
a) Indication – status of all breakers, isolators and earth switches of all

400 kV bays, local/remote selector switch positions, auto re-closing
selection, selection of control from SCADA/DCS, etc. shall be
available in SCADA. (For GCB scheme, the selection of control of
middle breaker of generator bay from DCS/SCADA shall be displayed
both in DCS and SCADA.)
b) Abnormal conditions to be considered for alarm inputs in SCADA are

400kV system operation of each line protection, bus bar protection,
trip circuit unhealthy of each equipment, protection unhealthy of each
equipment, trip relay unhealthy of each equipment, VT circuit
unhealthy of each VT, LBB operation of each breaker, DC supply
failure of each protection/control scheme as appropriate, abnormal
conditions of breakers, successful/unsuccessful auto re-closure,
reactor alarms, DC & UPS system alarms, etc. The alarm states are
not exhaustive. The Contractor shall include all alarm states deemed
necessary for the safe operation of the system.
c) Event register with time stamping – Opening or closing of all breakers,

isolators and earth switches, opening and closing commands, change
of positions of switches such as Local/Remote selection,
synchronising selection, voltage selection, auto re-closing selection,
selection of control from SCADA/DCS, operation of all protection and
trip relays, VT fuse fail relay operation, auto re-closing operation,
direct trip send and receive, pole discrepancy relay operation, trip
circuit faulty, trip relay faulty, DC supply fail, SF6 pressure Low, LBB
operated, etc. shall be available in SCADA. As stated at b) above,
this list shall include all events and operation of switchyard equipment
that are considered essential for analysis of faults.
Mimic
A mimic diagram depicting the entire electrical system being controlled

from the system with different colours for different voltage levels shall
be provided in SCADA operator stations. The colours of different
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
voltage levels shall be as per relevant IS applicable for mimic on

panels.
Measurement
The measurement requirements for each of the bays shall be as per the
drawing and as given below:
Feeder Description Plant DCS / SCADA

(a) GT bays V, A (All phases)
MW, MVAR
Tap position, Winding & Oil temperature
TVM
(b) Line bays V(All phases)
A(All phases)
MW, MVAR
TVM
(c) Line / bus reactor A(All phases), MVAR, Winding & Oil
temperature
(d) 400 kV Buses V, F
12.15 Event logging and trending facilities shall be provided in SCADA system.
It shall be possible to trend different parameters on the same trend. It
shall be possible to store historical data for a minimum of two years.
SCADA system shall have provision for expansion and shall be capable
of communicating with other systems through open protocol.
The Contractor shall make provision for terminating 4-20 mA analog

signals and potential free digital signals for the following data on a
terminal block in a suitable interface panel located in switchyard control
building for transmission to SLDC (State Load Despatch Centre) and
RLDC (Regional Load Despatch Centre) through RTU (Remote
Transmission Unit).
The specification of RTU provided for this purpose by the Contractor shall
be subject to approval by the SLDC/RLDC authorities. The actual data to
be transmitted to SLDC/RLDC shall be finalised during detailed
engineering and the following is the minimum data to be transmitted
through RTU. ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
o MW and MVAR of all lines

o MW and MVAR of HV side of all generator transformers
o Voltage and frequency of 400 kV buses
o ON/OFF positions of all breakers and isolators of all line bays,
generator transformer bays, Bus PT bays.
12.16 Bay Control Unit (BCU)
a) The BCU shall be an intelligent unit and shall be state of the art
technology. It shall perform control functions in accordance with
control commands from SCADA and shall also do monitoring of the
respective bays. The BCU shall be installed in the respective
protection panels of each circuit breaker in the switchyard relay room.
The control voltage for the BCU shall be 220V DC. The degree of
protection of the panel shall be IP-52 and the BCU shall comply with
relevant IEC/BIS standards.
b) The BCU shall have adequate number of ports for communication and
interface with switchyard control system for bay control and
monitoring. The BCU shall provide direct connection to the switchyard
equipment for control (with or without interposing relays) and shall
perform control and monitoring functions, including live-line/dead-bus,
dead-line/live-bus and live-line/live-bus breaker closing. The
communication link between BCU and SCADA shall be redundant.
The BCU shall be independent of each other and functioning shall not
be affected by any fault occurring in any of the other BCU.
c) Protection relays shall be separate and shall not be part of BCU.

Direct hard wiring shall be employed for critical tripping. Numerical
protection relays shall also be connected to the SCADA bus for
retrieval of data.
d) At least one BCU shall be provided for each breaker. The analog and
digital signals pertaining to a circuit shall be taken through the BCU
provided for that circuit.
e) One no. licensed software for configuration and parameterization of

SCADA shall be delivered on CD along with BCU. The configuration
shall be carried out from local or from laptop computer but operation
shall be from SCADA operator station. Configuration of BCU shall
also be possible from remote through engineering work station. The
lap top computer provided for the switchyard shall be loaded with this
software.
f) The BCU shall have at least the following features:

ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
i) Monitoring
The following monitoring functions shall be provided as a

minimum:
• Status monitoring and failure monitoring (in SCADA HMI)
of bay equipment like breakers, isolators, earth switches,
instrument transformers, protection relays and ancillary
equipment metering (measured-value acquisition)
• Signal and command indications
• Switching statistics in BCU (breaker ON/OFF, breaker
auto-reclose, pole discrepancies) and data stored in
SCADA server
• Energy metering values
ii) Control
The following control functions shall be provided as a

minimum:
• Control of circuit breakers and isolators
• Interlocking for isolators and circuit breakers, isolators and
earth switches (The interlocks for earth switches shall be
hard wired)
iii) Recording
The event recording function shall be provided and processed

in the BCU and the record stored in SCADA.
iv) Human Machine Interface (HMI)
Following local human machine interface inbuilt in BCU shall

be provided as a minimum:
• The local HMI is a monitoring and maintenance tool for bay
control unit and data communication unit during
commissioning and/or maintenance.
• Position of switching elements (Feeder control diagram)
shall be shown on the graphic display.
v) Time Synchronizing Feature
• BCU shall be time synchronized with GPS based Master

Clock of the Facility
vi) Self diagnostic and Supervision Features

ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
• BCU shall have self diagnostic and supervision features.

Failure of IED connected to the SCADA System such as
BCU, Numerical Relays and Tariff Meters shall be
indicated in the SCADA HMI
vii) Operating Mode Selection

• Operation mode selection (local or remote) shall be
provided in BCU.
13.0 400 KV SWITCHYARD PROTECTION

400 kV switchyard system shall comprise the following:
(a) Generator bays

(b) Station transformers (ST-1) & ST-2 bays.
(c) Lines bays.
(d) Line/bus reactor bays (reactor and its protection shall be
provided by the owner)
13.1 All the protective relays, auxiliary relays, timers, etc., for protection
system of each bay shall be housed in simplex type of relay panels
meant for each switchyard bay.
13.2 Relay setting calculations shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR to

prove suitability of the offered relays and to the owner for approval
13.3 Protection Philosophy
The protection philosophy shall be followed for 400kV switchyard

protection as indicated in single line diagram. Numerical relays shall be
provided for main-1 and main-2 protection of lines, buses, shunt reactors,
generator transformers etc. The static relays are selected for local
breaker backup protection, PT supervision etc
13.4 The protections envisaged for each 400 kV switchyard bay are listed
below
(a) Line Bay protection

(i) Main-1, 4 zone Non-switched carrier aided distance
protection (21-1) with one reverse zone
(ii) Main-2, 4 zone switch carrier distance protection (21-

2) with one reverse zone
(iii) Fuse fail relay (FFR) for each secondary of CVT

(iv) Directional inverse time phase o/c and earth fault
protection (67N) ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
(v) Under voltage relays for Live – line/dead bus and dead
line/live bus closing and safe grid establishment (27-1,
27-2, 27S).
(vi) Two stage over voltage relay (59G) with Instantaneous
and time delayed
(vii) Fault locator (FL)
(viii) Negative sequence current indications and alarm
(ix) Fault disturbance recorder (FR)
(x) Auto reclosing scheme relays with single phase & three
phase reclosing, dead line charging and live line
reclosing.
(b) Station Transformer protection
(i) Station Transformer differential protection (87 ST)

(ii) Station Transformer Neutral over current protection
(51NST)
(iii) Station transformer thermal protections i.e. Protective

devices of station transformer 63X/49X for multiplying
the contacts for following protections.
(iv) Over flux Protection (99 ST) and Directional O/C , E/F
Protection shall be provided as back Up
For trip functions (63TX/49TX)

• ST Buchholz II stage
• ST winding temperature very high
• ST oil temperature very high
• ST pressure relief device operated
• ST OLTC oil surge relay operated
• ST fire protection trip
For annunciation functions (63AX/49AX)
• ST Buchholz I stage
• ST winding temperature high
• ST oil temperature high
• ST oil level low
(v) Station transformer restricted earth fault protection
(64ST)
(vi) Station Transformer phase over current protection
(50/51ST) ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
(vii) Stuck breaker protection
(viii) Over voltage and over frequency protection on LV side
(c) Busbar Protection

Suitable bus bar protection scheme shall be provided for
selected bus arrangement. Each breaker shall be provided
with its own trip relay.
Numerical bus bar Protection scheme shall provide the

complete protection for Busbar configuration. The overview of
protection functions shall be as follows…
• Phase segregated biased current differential high

Speed busbar protection(87BB/P)
• Sensitive earth fault bias current controlled busbar
Protection (87BB /N)
• Check Zone element(87CZ)
• Dead Zone Protection (Short zone between CTs and
CBs)(50 ST)
• Breaker failure Protection (LBB)
• Phase over current Protection (50/51/P)
• Earth over current Protection (50/51/N)
(d) Common Items/protections to be included in all relay

Panels
(i) Local breaker back up protection with its own trip relay
protection (50 LBB for each breaker)
(ii) Trip coil supervision relay for each trip coil (98L)
(iii) High speed trip relays (86L).
(iv) Supervision relays for tripping relay (98 LT1 to LTX) to
supervise the coil of each trip relay.
(v) Auxiliary relays and timers in adequate numbers to
make the protection scheme and discrepancy switch
scheme complete.
(vi) Auxiliary CTs and auxiliary VTs with suitable
characteristics and accuracy as required.
(vii) Shunt Reactor (Line and Bus) Protection
(viii) Anti pumping relay
(ix) Pole discrepancy (62) &Auxiliary relay to pole
discrepancy
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
(e) Shunt reactor protection
A separate relay panel shall be provided for each shunt reactor

(Line and Bus) protection. The following protections are
envisaged.
i) Differential protection (87R)
ii) Restricted earth fault protection (64R)
iii) Backup over current and earth fault protection (51 &
51N)
iv) Under impedance protection (21R)
v) Over fluxing protection. Over current element of

differential protection relay shall be made use of for
over fluxing protection.
vi) Auxiliary relays for the following:
For trip function

• Magnetic reed type gas and oil relay II stage (63TX)
• Winding temperature very high (49 WTX)
• Oil temperature very high (490TX)
• Pressure relief device operated (63 PTX)
• Fire protection trip (63 FRTX)
For alarm function

• Magnetic reed type gas and oil relay I Stage (63AX)
• Winding temperature high (49WAX)
• Oil temperature high (490AX)
• Oil level low (OLAX)
13.5 The Characteristics and relay setting ranges included in this specification
are typical and for the guidance of the CONTRACTOR only. The
functional requirements and characteristics of the relays specified are the
minimum required. Any additional protection considered necessary by
the CONTRACTOR shall also be provided by him. The responsibility of
establishing the equivalence or superiority of relays offered vis-a-vis the
stipulation of the specification rests with the CONTRACTOR.
13.6 All hardware, auxiliary relays, timers etc. required for tripping/interlock
schemes shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.
13.7 Bay Marshalling Box (s)
Adequate number of Outdoor mounted, free standing type powder coated

bay marshalling boxes shall be provided in switchyard. Bay marshalling
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
box shall be provided with two subsections namely: Terminal box and
auxiliary supply distribution box.
(a) Terminal box: Providing intermediate termination of all auxiliary

contacts of breaker, isolator and earthing switches (whether
used or not) and preparing interlocking. (CT & PT marshalling
boxes shall be provided with respective CTs & PTs.)
(b) Auxiliary supply distribution box from where both AC auxiliary

supply, heating/lighting supplies and DC auxiliary control supply
shall be distributed to various motors of all CBs, isolators,
earthing switch local / marshalling box/equipment marshalling
box and heating and lighting supply to various bay marshalling
boxes. The marshalling boxes shall be provided with doors on
both sides with key lockable handle for each door. The key shall
be removable only in door locked position.
13.8 All auxiliary contacts of the CBs isolators and earthing switches shall be
terminated terminal box section of bay marshalling boxes. All hardwired
interlocking shall be wired in the above box.
All auxiliary contacts and interlocked scheme contacts shall be wired to

respective panels in the control room.
Provision for terminating two numbers 415V, 3 phase, 4 wire AC 50 Hz

power supply called supply I & II, shall be provided in each auxiliary
supply box. The AC distribution scheme shall be wired to manually select
any one of the supply by manually operated selector switch. After the
manual selector switch, MCB controlled AC distribution shall be provided
in such a way that those individual and radial feeders supply to driving
mechanism/motor of every equipment is arranged. Contacts for remote
alarm for supply fail shall be provided.
Similarly provision for terminating 2 Nos. DC supplies and selection

feature to select any one of the two supplies as supply-I and other as
supply II shall be provided. Either of them shall be used after distributing
it via suitably rated HRC fuses to feed, control supply of all isolators and
earthing switches. Remote independent alarm for failure of all AC and
DC outgoing feeders shall be provided by supply supervision relays
having delayed dropout NC contact.
Single phase 240V heating and lighting supply shall be provided in a loop
in / loop out mode at bay marshalling box. The heating and lighting
supply shall be sub-distributed in radial way to provide heating and
lighting supplies for all HV equipment marshalling boxes and each bay
marshalling box.
The scheme for all protections, controls, indications, interlocking,

metering, AC and DC distribution and all other schemes shall be ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
prepared in such a way that cables shall be laid in radial pattern. Loop
formulation of cables shall be completely avoided.
Neutral of all cores of CTs, CVTs and EMVTs shall be formed in

marshalling boxes of the respective equipment. Cables with sufficient
number of cores are run from these marshalling boxes to control and
relay panels as appropriate. The neutral of CT, CVT and EMVT shall be
earthed at control / relay panel by a disconnecting link.
13.9 DC Distribution Philosophy for Controls, protection, Indication,

Annunciation, Fault-Recording and Event Recording Systems
The DC distribution scheme in various panels shall be prepared based on

following DC distribution philosophy for various functions.
(a) Protective Functions
Each 400 kV circuit protection panel shall be provided with two (2)
numbers of 220V DC feeders in loop in / loop out fashion. Each of
above feeder shall be fed from separate section of DC board.
Manually operated 8 pole, 3 position, selector switch with
positions called source-I, independent, source II, shall be provided
to select any one for Main I protection supply for that panel and
other as main II supply. Each incoming supply before the selector
switch and outgoing supply after the selector switch shall be
separately fused and supervised by supply supervision relays
having NC contacts with time delayed drop-off. Loss of supply
shall be wired for annunciation & DCS. The selector switch and
the fuses shall be mounted inside the panel.
(b) Similarly, Bus bar protection scheme and indications shall be

provided with two (2) no. of 220V DC supplier through three (3)
position selector switch fused and supervised by supply
supervision relays having time delayed drop off type NC contact.
Loss of supply shall be wired for annunciation and DCS indication
and annunciation supplies shall be separately fused.
The selector switch and fuses, etc. shall also be mounted

internally inside the panel.
(c) Control Functions
Control circuit of each circuit, i.e. two generators, two GT

breakers, two ST breakers, six line breakers and two reactor
breakers will be provided with 2 independent 220V DC control
supplies in loop in / loop out fashion. Each of the above feeder
shall be fed from separate section of DC board. Manually
operated 8 pole, 3 position selector switch for positions called
source I, independent and source II shall be used to selector
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
anyone as closing/synchronizing and trip coil I supplies and other

as trip coil II and auxiliary supply for contact multiplication/follower
relay supplies, etc. Each incoming supply before selector switch
and outgoing supply after selector switch shall be separately
fused and supervised by supply supervision relay having time
delayed type “NC” contact. Loss of supply shall be wired for
annunciation and DCS.
One separate 220V DC indication supply in loop in and loop out manner
shall be arranged. Contractor shall provide fuses and supervision relays,
etc. And use it for all indications in respective control panels. The
indication supply supervision relay shall have time delayed drop off type
NC contractors for annunciation and event recording.
One separate 220V DC annunciation supply for loop in and loop out
manner up to half number of the control panel shall be provided.
Remaining half shall be supplied by separate but similar 220V DC supply.
The CONTRACTOR shall tap annunciation supply through fuses and
after supervision relays use it for all annunciations in respective panels.
The supervision relay shall have time delayed drop off type NC contact
for annunciation, failure of annunciation supply shall also be combined
and annunciated on 2540V AC operated annunciation system. In turn the
failure of AC annunciation supply shall be annunciated in normal DC
operated annunciate. It shall all be provided with additional contacts for
event recording and remote annunciation.

The specific requirements are listed for switch yard protection system
(a) The panels shall have a degree of protection not less than IP-
52 and shall be fabricated with 3 mm thick cold rolled sheet
steel for front and rear equipment bearing surfaces and 2.5 mm
for sides top and bottom portions. The doors and removable
covers shall be gasketted. The panels shall be provided with
anti vibration pads.
(b) The pre-treatment of the sheet steel shall involve degreasing

rust / scale removal, phosphating and oven drying. The
phosphate coating shall be sealed by the application of two
coats of ready mixed, stoving type zinc chromate primer
followed by two coats of synthetic enamel paint by powder
coating process
(c) All the equipment on the front of panel shall be flush mounted.
(d) The centre line of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps
shall be not less than 750 mm and centre lines of relays,
meters and recorders shall not be less than 450 mm from the
bottom of the panel. Control switches / push buttons / ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
selectors and relay resetting knobs shall be located at a height

between 1m and 1.2 m from the bottom of the panel.
(e) No auxiliary relay shall be mounted on front of the control

panel. They shall be mounted either internally or on the
respective relay panel.
(f) Mimic diagrams of size not less than 7 mm in width shall be

provided on the control panel. The colour of the mimic shall be
finalised during the detailed engineering stage and the same is
subject to owner’s approval.
(g) Visual and audible type annunciators shall be provided on the

unit control panel.
(h) All the wiring shall be carried out with 1100V grade, stranded
copper conductor wires with PVC insulation. For CT / PT
circuits the wire size shall be 4 mm2 / lead and other circuits it
shall be 2.5 mm2 / lead. All wiring meant for power supply to
transducers, recorders shall be suitably fused or designed to
limit short circuit currents. Means for detection of blown or
open circuited fuses shall be provided.
(i) Terminal blocks shall be 650V grade, 10 amps rated, stud type
terminals with terminal marking. The insulation between any two
terminals and terminal to frame work shall withstand 2 kV rms for
one minute. Terminal blocks for CT & VT secondary leads shall
be disconnectable, stud type. CT secondary leads shall also be
provided with short circulating and earthing facility. A clearance
of 250 mm shall be maintained between terminal blocks and
gland plate and 150 mm between two rows of terminal blocks.
At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided.
(j) The metering instruments for indication shall have accuracy

class 0.5. KWH and KVARH meters shall be static with an
accuracy class of 0.2 Watt hour and var hour meters shall be
provided with test terminal blocks and shall be suitable for the
measurement of unbalanced loads. The kWHr & kVarHr meters
shall be provided with suitable communication ports for
interfacing the same with plant DCS system. kWHr / kVarHr
meters must be provided with a pair of suitably rated potential
free contacts to generate signal for annunciation and DCS, if
voltage supply to the meters is interrupted.
(k) Check metering shall be provided at all tariff metering points and
These meters shall be mounted in Separate check metering
panels. These panels shall have locking and sealing facility. All
check energy meters too shall have class 0.2 accuracy and shall
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
be provided both on LV& HV side of the GT,HV side of ST and

for line feeders.
(l) The control switches shall be of discrepancy type.
(m) Instrument selector switches shall be of the stay put type.

Ammeter selector switch shall have make before-break type
contacts.
(n) Synchronising switches shall be of the maintained (stay put) type

and lockable having a common key removable in off position for
a group of switches.
(o) All indicating lamps shall be of clustered LED type.
(p) All the push buttons shall be momentary contact type the colour
of PBs for various functions will be decided later. Push buttons
shall be suitably shrouded to prevent inadvertent operation. All
PBs shall have 2 NO + 2 NC contacts.
(q) Each of the control & relay panels shall be provided with
thermostat controlled space heaters, cubicle illuminating lamps
and a 5A, 3 pin receptacle.
(r) Each control and relay panel shall be provided with necessary
arrangement for receiving, distributing, isolating and fusing of
d.c. and a.c. supplies for various control, signalling, lighting and
space heater circuits.
(s) If miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) are used in VT secondary

circuits, they shall have adequate auxiliary contacts for blocking
trip circuits of voltage dependent protection and annunciation.
Where high speed protection is involved, the speed of operation
of MCB shall be less than 5 milli seconds.
(t) All the panels shall be equipped with a continuous earth bus with
connectors and clamps between panels for interpanel
connection of the earth bus. All the metallic cases of relays,
instruments and other panel mounted equipments shall be
connected to the earth bus by 2.5 sq. mm copper wires. CT and
PT secondary neutral or common lead shall be earthed at one
point only at the terminal block and such earthing shall be made
through links. Separate copper earthing flat shall be provided in
the panel for cable screens of static equipment.
(u) All PT circuits shall be provided with HRC fuses having special
holders such that they cannot be interchanged with other types
of fuse holders and other fuse holders cannot be introduced
within them. ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
(v) Unit control panel shall house various controls, metering,

indication and annunciation, synchronising and mimic diagram.
Mimic diagram on the control panel shall be true replica of
complete electrical system viz. Generators, UTs, STs, unit and
station switchgear, unit and station service transformer and
switchgear DG set. Panels shall be either flush mounted type or
mosaic tile type. All energy meters shall be mounted on
separate common energy meter panel(s) which shall be of flush
mounted type. MW, MVAR meter & required no. of window
annunciators shall also be provided on generator bay control
panel. The OLTC controls unit for generator and station
transformer shall be located in respective control panels.
(w) Tests
(i) Control and relay panels shall be subject to the

following tests:
• Mechanical operation test

• High voltage test (2000V for 1 minute)
• Megger test
• Verification of wiring as per approved
drawings
• Electrical control. Interlock and sequential
Operation tests
(ii) Type tests and routine tests:
Type tests and routine tests shall be carried out on all

associated components / equipment as per relevant
standards and test certificates shall be furnished.
(iii) Acceptance Tests
• The equipment shall be demonstrated for proper

operation, including operation of meters, alarms and
indications.
• Certified copies of all type and routine test certificate

shall be submitted for the owner’s approval before
despatching the control / relay panel.
13.12 Fault Disturbance Recorder
13.12.1 1(one) number micro processor based fault disturbance recorder which is
designed to analyse the disturbance due to faults in the switchyard, shall
be provided for the plant. The equipment shall be complete with ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
disturbance recorder, printer unit, control / display unit, junction box and
accessories like auxiliary CTs and shunts. As an option Contractor shall
offer fault recorder for each bay and all recorders shall be interlocked in
such a manner that each one will be started simultaneously with one
common VDU & plotter / printer unit, No. of fault recorder selected shall
be such that at least 20% channels are available as spare. All fault
recorders shall be mounted on one panel.
Provision shall be made to synchronise the electronic clock of each

disturbance recorder with external master clock. Also, a number of
disturbance recorders in the particular location shall be capable of being
synchronised with any one of the recorders as master
13.12.2 Specific Requirements
(a) The micro processor based fault recorder shall be designed to

continuously monitor analogue, digital signals and contacts of all
protective / lockout relays. Recording shall be self started or
triggered by di / dt, dv / dt, or change of state of any of the digital
input signals. The data acquisition unit of the fault recorder shall
be provided with self test diagnostic feature which annunciates
and alters the operator to rectify the defect or fault, if any.
(b) The number of channels / recorders offered shall cover the

following :
(i) Analog channels: (a) Currents in 3 phases and neutral of

all bays (b) Voltages of 3 phases and their vector sum of
all bays wherever VTs are provided.
(i) Digital channels: Protective relay contacts lock out relay

contacts. The total number of channels offered shall be
such that 20% spare channels are available.
(ii) The fault recorder and all its peripherals shall be designed
for operation on 220 DC. Recorders shall be provided
with pre-history recording feature with pre-history
recording time not less than 0.5 or 1 sec.
(iii) Auxiliary CTs while catering for the required VA burdens

hall not saturate under maximum fault current conditions.
Auxiliary multi ratio PTs shall be provided to facilitate tap
selection in voltage signal recording. The accuracy of
analog channel recording shall be less than +3% for
current channels and +1% for voltage channels.
13.13 Sequence of events recording System (SER)
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
400 KV SWITCHYARD
13.13.1 The SER system shall be an independent microprocessor based system

and shall be a part of DCS system provided for TG and SG or part of
SCADA system
13.13.2 SER shall be designed for digital inputs from each phase of 4 line
breakers, each of generator and station transformer breakers, isolators,
earth switches, each protection and alarm relay (for each phase
wherever applicable) position of stay put control switch position, close
and open commands from each breaker and isolator control switch etc.
The chronological print-out facility shall be provided for any of the first
100 occurrences. Further occurrences shall be printed chronologically.
This list is only indicative and not exhaustive.
13.13.3 The event recorder shall be suitable for operation on 220V DC supply.
13.14 Test and Test Reports
13.14.1 The CONTRACTOR shall conduct all the routing, type and acceptance
tests as per the relevant standards and as specified in this specification in
the presence of the OWNER/ REPRESENTATIVES. The test certificates
shall be furnished for Owner’s / Engineer’s review / approval.
If, in case of circuit breaker, isolators, current transformers, voltage

transformers, lighting arresters insulators strings, bus post insulators,
control & relay panels and other components of all the main equipment
are already conducted on identical equipment to the one offered and
found to be acceptable, such tests will normally be waived. However if
due to any reason OWNER requires the same to be conducted again,
conducting the tests are included in the scope. In case of hardware such
as clamps the temperature rise test material composition test and
mechanical test shall be conducted on one sample of each type even if
test reports are already available.
ISSUE
R0
.
SPEC NO. ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY SECTION : D3.01
LIMITED SHEET 1 of 24
TCE.5103A-H-500- 2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM VOLUME- V
001 400kV SWITCHYARD
DATA SHEET-A3.01
400 kV SWITCHYARD
The 400 kV Switchyard shall comply with the particulars indicated below and the contractor
shall furnish the details in respective columns given below:
VALUES /
Sl. No. DESCRIPTION UNITS BIDDER’S DATA
REQUIREMENTS
1.0 400KV SWITCHYARD
1.1 Nominal voltage kV 400
1.2 Highest System voltage kV 420

40 kA for 1 sec.
1.3 Short circuit current kA
kV
1.4 Impulse withstand voltage 1425
(Peak)
One minute power
1.5 kV (rms) 630
frequency withstand voltage
Reference ambient o
1.6 C 50
temperature
1.7 Creepage distance mm/ kV 31
1.8 Minimum Clearances
i) Phase to phase (min) mm 4000
ii) Phase to earth (min) mm 3500
iii) Sectional clearance mm 6500
iv) Ground clearance mm 8000
1.9 Bay width m
i) Phase to phase spacing m
ii) Switchyard size LxB
iii) Switchyard building LxBxH
1.10 Design tensions
i) Main bus Kg/ph
ii) Bay bus Kg/ph

Overhead conductors for
iii) Kg/ph
GT and ST connection
Factor of safety for the
1.11
structural design
i) Normal *
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
ii) Short circuit 1
iii) Seismic condition 1

Type of design for main and
1.12
bay buses
i) Strung or tubular bus Tubular
ii) Material *
Radio interference voltage Micro Not exceeding 1000
1.13
at 266kV (rms) volts micro-volts
2.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.1 Type SF6
2.2 Execution of poles 3 nos., single pole
2.3 Rated current A 2500

O-0.3sec-CO-3min-
2.4 Operating duty
CO
2.5 Auto Reclosing - Required
kA / sec 40
2.6 Breaking current
(peak)
kA /sec 100
Making current
(peak)
2.7 First pole clear factor 1.3
2.8 Breaker opening time m. sec. *
2.9 Breaker closing time m. sec. *

Line charging breaking and
2.10 A **
making current
Small inductive current
2.11 From 0.5A to 10A
breaking
Type of operating Spring charged /
2.12
mechanism Pneumatic / Hydraulic
i) Fixed trip or trip free Trip free
ii) Normal method of tripping Spring operated

Emergency method of Manual
iii)
tripping
Operating mechanism to be 240V.1- Phase AC
2.13
suitable for supply
2.14 Control voltage 220V DC
2.15 No. of trip coils per pole Nos. Two (2)
2.16 Phase to phase spacing mm 4000
2.17 No. of auxiliary contacts 10 NO + 10 NC (min)

.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
Gas evacuation and filling

2.18 Required
plant
2.19 Cantilever strength Kgs *
2.20 Out of phase switching Required
2.21 Anti pumping Required

No of operations CB can
2.22 perform without inspection,
replacement of contacts
i) At rated breaking current *
ii) At rated continuous current *

Whether pressure switches
for SF6 pressure low alarm,
2.23 Yes/No Yes
trip, lockout closing, lockout
opening are provided
3.0 ISOLATORS
Horizontal centre
3.1 Type of break
break
i) Type of mounting Horizontal upright
3.2 Rated current 2500A

Insulation Test values
3.3
One minute P.F wet
3.3.1
withstand voltage
(a) Between poles and
kV(rms) 520
earth
(b) Across isolating
kV(rms) 610
distance
Lightning Impulse withstand
3.3.2
voltage
(a)Between poles and earth kV p 1425
(b) Across open disconnect
voltage applied to
i) One terminal, lightning

impulse kV p 425
ii) Opposite terminal, power
frequency kV p 240
Switching Impulse
3.3.3
withstand voltage
(a) Between poles and
kV p 1050
earth
(b) Across open disconnect
voltage applied to
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
i) One terminal, lightning kV p 900

impulse
ii) Opposite terminal, power kV p 345
frequency
Cu
3.4 Material of main contact
Whether contacts are to be
3.5 Yes
silver faced
Operating mechanism
3.6
(motor driven / manual)
Motor driven &
3.6.1 Main blade
Manual
Motor driven &
3.6.2 Earth blade
Manual
3.7 Insulation Data
Minimum cantilever
3.7.1 Kgs *
strength
Miscellaneous
3.8
Auxiliary supply
220V DC for control
and interlock; 415V
3.8.1 Electrical
AC, 3 phase for motor
drive
Bolt interlock
3.8.2 Type of interlock
electrically operated.
CURRENT
4.0
TRANSFORMER
Outdoor, oil filled
hermetically sealed/
4.1 Type
SF6 filled
4.2 No. of cores As per SLD
4.3 Primary current ratio As per SLD
4.4 Accuracy class As per SLD
4.5 Secondary current A 1

Oil immersed Class A
4.6 Class of insulation
/ SF6 filled Class-E
Max. temp. rise of winding 0
4.7 C 50
above ambient of 50°C
Cantilever strength of CT at
4.8 Kgs *
the terminal
4.9
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
5.0
TRANSFORMERS
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
Outdoor, oil filled,

5.1 Type
hermetically sealed
5.2 System neutral earthing Solidly earthed

No. of primary / secondary
5.3 As per SLD
windings
Primary / secondary
5.4 As per SLD
winding voltage
5.5 Class of insulation Oil immersed Class A
Maximum temp. rise of
5.6 winding above ambient of °C 50
50°C
5.7 Accuracy class 0.2
Cantilever strength of CVT
5.8 Kgs *
at the terminal
1.2 continuous and
5.9 Rated voltage factor
1.5 for 30 seconds
Bidder to furnish
depending upon
5.10 Rated capacitance pF
frequency selected for
PLCC
5.11 Tolerance + 10% to – 5%
5.12 High frequency range kHz 40 – 500
5.13 High frequency capacitance

- For entire carrier Within 80% to 150%
frequency range of rated capacitance
- Equivalent series
resistance over the entire Less than 40 ohm
carrier frequency range
Stray capacitance and
5.14 conductance of low voltage
terminal
- Stray capacitance of low 300 + 0.05 Cn, Where
voltage terminal over entire pF Cn is rated
carrier frequency range capacitance
- Stray conductance of the
low voltage terminal over Micro
50
entire carrier frequency siemens
range
5.15
ELECTRO MAGNETIC
VOLTAGE
6.0
TRANSFORMERS
(EMVTs)
6.1 Type Outdoor, oil filled,
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
hermetically sealed /
SF6 gas filled
6.2 System neutral earthing solidly earthed
No. of primary / secondary
6.3 As per SLD
windings
Primary / secondary
6.4 As per SLD
winding voltage
Oil immersed Class A
6.5 Class of insulation
/ SF6 filled Class-E
Maximum temp. rise of
6.6 winding above ambient of °C 50
50°C
6.7 Accuracy class 0.2S
Cantilever strength of CVT
6.8 Kgs *
at the terminal
1.2 continuous and
6.9 Rated voltage factor
1.5 for 30 seconds
6.10 Corona extinction voltage kV *
7.0 LIGHTNING ARRESTORS
7.1 Installation outdoor
i) Rated voltage kV 360 /396

*
ii) Min discharge capability kJ/kV
Solidly earthed
7.2 System Earthing
Gapless
7.3 Type of arrester
7.4 Discharge class 20 kA, Class-IV

Minimum cantilever
strength of arrestor *
7.5 Kgs
assembly
Residual voltage
corresponding to steep 2.6 * rated voltage
7.6 kV
current impulse
Residual voltage
corresponding to switching 2.0 * rated voltage
7.7 kV
impulse
8.0 INSULATOR
Solid core / post type /
8.1 Type
string
i) Insulating material *
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
ii) No of units / string *
8.2 Cantilever strength Kgs *

1.3 times
8.3 Puncture voltage corresponding to flash
over voltage.
8.4 Insulator hardware
All ferrous parts are hot dip Yes/no
i) Yes
galvanised
Bus conductor, clamps and
ii)
connectors
Flexible conductor ( AAA
a) / ACSR/Cu) or Tubular
conductor (Al/Cu)
Conductor size for main
i) *
buses
Conductor size for other
ii) *
bay buses
Temperature rise of
iii) conductor while carrying °C *
rated current
iv) Purity of Al/Cu *
b) Shield wire
i) Material *
ii) size *
c) Clamps and connectors
i) Material *
ii) Temperature rise °C *
iii) Minimum thickness *

POWER LINE CARRIER
9.0
COMMUNICATION (PLCC)
9.1 LINE TRAPS
9.1.1 Installation Outdoor
9.1.2 Type of earthing Solidly earthed
9.1.3 Rated current A 2500

Line trap arrester discharge
9.1.4 kA 20
current
9.1.5 Band width kHz 40-500
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
9.1.6 Tuning device required Required
9.1.7 Maximum tapping loss dB 2.6
9.1.8 Type of tuning Wide band
9.1.9 Winding material Al. Alloy

9.1.10
9.2 COUPLING DEVICES
Composite loss within pass
9.2.1 dB ≤2.0dB
band
Return loss within pass
9.2.2 dB ≥ 12
band
Nominal Peak power
9.2.3 W ≤ 400 / ≤ 1000
P.E.P. at 50/100 Hz.
Inductance of the drain coil .2mH to .7mH

9.2.4
at 50Hz
Continuous / Short time ≤ 1.5 A rms / ≤ 50A

9.2.5
current of Drain coil 0.2s
Rated / Short time current 300A rms continuous
9.2.6
of Earth switch / 16kA, 1 sec
Rated voltage of surge
9.2.7 V 660
arrestor
Max. 100% impulse spark
9.2.8 voltage (1.2/50 micro sec) V 3300 peak
of surge arrestor
Rated discharge current
9.2.9 (8/20 micro sec) of surge kA 5 peak
arrestor
Type of construction of Non-linear resistor
9.2.10
surge arrestor type with spark gap.
No. of H.F. terminals
9.2.11 provided for carrier
equipment connection 2
Type of mounting / Degree Weather proof box /

9.2.12
of protection IP 65
HIGH FREQUENCY
9.3
CABLE
Armoured co-axial
9.3.1 Type of cable
cable
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
Withstand test voltage

9.3.2
(RMS) between conductor
and sheath 4 kV (rms) for 1 Min.
Tinned copper
Earthing details of H.F.
9.3.3 braided screen to be
cable
earthed
POWER LINE CARRIER
9.4
TERMINAL
Single side band
9.4.1 Operating Mode mode with
suppressed carrier
9.4.2 Type of modulation Amplitude Modulation
40 to 500,
9.4.3 Carrier frequency range kHz
Programmable
9.4.4 Band width per channel kHz 4
Frequency separation
9.4.5 between transmission(Tx) kHz 4
and reception (Rx)
Frequency separation
9.4.6 kHz 8
between adjacent channels
9.4.7 HF power output Watts 80
Mode of transmission of
9.4.8 Hz Pilot frequency- 3780
guard signal
Maximum number of noise
impulses pps in presence
200ms Noise burst /
9.4.9 of which the equipment
1 sec pause
shall satisfactorily perform
its duty
10.0 SCADA System
Distributed
10.1 Architecture
Processing
10.2 Overall system availability 99.7%
CPU, Power supply
10.3 Redundancy requirements
and communication
Sequence of events Yes, with 1ms
10.4
recorder required resolution
10.5 System response time
Updating of dynamic data
10.5.1 Every 2 sec
on display
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
Key board command to

10.5.2 field equipment execution Less than 1 sec
time
Key board command for
10.5.3 display presentation Less than 2 sec
execution
Key board command to
10.5.4 display presentation 3 sec
completion
11.0 Switchyard relay Panel
Degree of protection for
11.1 *
enclosure
11.2 Mounting of relays *
11.3 Relay particulars
i) Control voltage *
ii) Current, voltage ratings *

Aux. supply operating
iii) *
range
On line auto testing facility
iv) *
provided
On line manual testing
v) *
facility provided
vi) Relay types offered *
All relays offered are type
vii) Yes/no Yes
tested
Fault Disturbance
12.0
Recorder
12.1 Rated voltage V *
12.2 Voltage variation *
12.3 Analog inputs
i) AC voltage range V *
ii) AC current range A *
iii) Frequency Hz *
iv) DC voltage range V *
v) DC current A *
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
12.4 Memory capacity
i) Before *
ii) After *
Self diagnostic facility
12.5 Yes/No Yes
provided
12.6 Date and time
Note:
1. As per CEA guidelines the BIL for line shall be 1550kVp

2. ‘*’ Information shall be furnished by contractor along with offer.
3. ‘**’ Contractor shall furnish these details after award of contract.
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS – SHUNT REACTORS
The reactors shall comply with the particulars indicated below and bidder shall furnish the
details in respective columns given below:
SL. SPECIFICATION BIDDER’s
UNIT
NO DESCRIPTION REQUIREMENTS DATA
1.0 Type & make 3 ph / *
2.0 Quantity Nos. As per SLD
Installation Outdoor
3.0 Reactor Rating MVAR *
4.0 Nominal system voltage kV 400
5.0 Type of cooling ONAN

6.0 Impedance value % By bidder
7.0 Rated frequency Hz 50
Star with neutral
8.0 Winding connection
brought
Continuous current rating /

9.0 */ 40kA, 1sec
Rated short time current rating
10.0 Insulation Graded

11.0 Insulation Levels
11.1 Reactor Windings
a) Lightning Impulse withstand kV
1300
Voltage peak
b) Switching Impulse withstand kV
1050
Voltage peak
c) Power Frequency withstand
kV rms 630
Voltage
11.2 Reactor Neutral
a) Lightning Impulse withstand kV
550
Voltage peak
b) Power Frequency withstand
kV rms 270
Voltage
c) Neutral Bushing Voltage
kV rms 145
Class
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
11.3 Reactor Bushings

11.3.1 Line Side
a) Rated Voltage kV 420
b) Creepage Distance mm/kV 25
c) Lightning Impulse withstand kV
1425
Voltage peak
d) Switching Impulse withstand kV
1050
Voltage peak
e) Power Frequency withstand
kV rms 630
Voltage
11.3.2 Neutral Side
650
Voltage peak
d) Power Frequency withstand
kV rms 270
Voltage
Upto 1.6 p.u. voltage
(Bidder to furnish
complete saturation
11.3.3 Range of constant impedance
characteristics of
reactors upto 2.5 p.u.
voltage
Harmonic content when the
reactor is operating at 110% of
11.3.4 rated nominal voltage and
rated frequency; 3rd and 5th
*
harmonic
12.0 Neutral Grounding Reactor
12.1 Installation Outdoor
12.2 Max continuous current A rms *
Rated short time current for 10
12.3 A rms *
seconds
Rated impedance at rated
12.4 Ohms *
short time current
12.5 Type of cooling ONAN
12.6 Bushing CTs As specified
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
12.7 Insulation Graded

12.7.1 NGR Insulation Ground Side
b) Lightning Impulse withstand kV
95
Voltage peak
c) Power Frequency withstand
kV rms 38
Voltage
12.7.2 NGR Bushing Ground Side
125
Voltage peak
d) Power Frequency withstand
kV rms 50
Voltage
Bushing CTs for main
reactor and NGR shall
13.0 Bushing Current Transformers
be provided as shown in
SLD
14.0 Surge arresters for NGR
a) Rated system voltage kV 145
b) Rated arrester voltage kV 120
c) Nominal discharge current kA 10
Auxiliary supply
15.0 Rated voltage AC *
V
Rated voltage DC 220
Approximate shipping
16.0 *
dimension / weight
17.0 Guaranteed losses
a) No load loss *
b) Load loss *
18.0 Loss evaluation formula
Evaluated price + (A x
guaranteed no-load
loss in kW) + (B x
18.1 Formula for evaluation of Bids
guaranteed load loss
in KW)
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
Rates of liquidated damages

19.0 for exceeding the guaranteed
losses
a) No load loss Rs/kW A to be defined later
b) Load loss Rs/kW B to be defined later
‘*’ Information shall be furnished by contractor along with offer.
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS – DC SYSTEM
The DC system shall comply with the particulars indicated below and bidder shall furnish the
details in respective columns given below :
Sl. SPECIFICATION BIDDER’s

DESCRIPTION UNITS
No. REQUIREMENTS DATA
1.0 DC SYSTEM
DC system voltage
1.01 220 V /48V
(Nominal)
1.02 DC system earthing Unearthed
Ambient design 0
1.03 C 50
temperature
2.0 BATTERY DETAILS
2.01 Manufacturer’s Name *
Maximum time for boost
2.02 Hrs 8
charging of battery
2.03 Battery type Tubular / Pasted Plate
2.04 Minimum end cell voltage 1.85V per cell
2.05 Battery capacity *
Expected life of battery in
2.06 *
years
No. of cells required to
2.07 *
give rated DC voltage
BATTERY CHARGER
3.0 DETAILS
3.01 Manufacturer’s Name *
3.02 Type of charger Float-cum-boost
3.03 Rated output in kW *
DC voltage setting
3.04 adjustment of AVR for +10% of nominal voltage
float charging
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
Sl. SPECIFICATION BIDDER’s

DESCRIPTION UNITS
No. REQUIREMENTS DATA
a) +1% of set DC voltage
Voltage stabilisation for for + 10% voltage and
3.05
constant voltage regulator +5% frequency variation
in power supply
b) + 5% during transients
DC current adjustment for 30% to 100% of maximum
3.06
boost charging boost charging current
Current stabilisation for
3.07 constant current regulator + 2%
for boost charger
Minimum permissible p.f.
3.08 0.8
at rated continuous load
Permissible ripple content
3.09 at rated continuous load 1% maximum
without battery
Guaranteed efficiency @
3.10 *
rated load
Maximum permissible
temperature rise over
ambient
3.11 (i) Rectifier transformer 0

C *
0
C *
(ii) Rectifier cells 0
C *
(iii) Smoothing reactor
Class of insulation
3.12 (i) Rectifier transformer

*
(ii) Smoothing reactor
*
Method of cooling
3.13
(i) Rectifier cells *
(ii)Transformer *
Degree of protection /
3.14 IP 42 /shade RAL 7032
paint shade
4.0 DC Distribution Board
4.01 Degree of protection IP-52
‘*’ Information shall be furnished by contractor along with offer.

.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS-ACDB
The ACDB shall comply with the particulars indicated below and bidder shall furnish the
details in respective columns given below :
S.NO. PARTICULARS UNITS SPECIFICATION BIDDER’S

REQUIREMENTS DETAIL
1.0 Switchgear and busbar rating
1.1 Rated voltage, phases & 415V, 3 Phase,
frequency
50 HZ.
1.2 System neutral earthing Effectively earthed
1.3 Maximum system voltage V 440
1.4 One minute power freq. Voltage
(a) Power circuits 2500V
(b) Control circuits 1500V
(c) Aux. Circuits connected to 2000V
sec of CTs
1.5 Continuous current rating of bus *
bars under site reference ambient
temp.
1.6 Reference ambient temperature 50°C
1.7 Maximum temperature of bus 90°C for non-silver
bars, droppers and contacts at plated joints
continuous current rating under
site ambient temperature 105°C for silver
plated joints
1.8 Short circuit current withstand for
bus bars and droppers
(a) Short time (1 Sec.) kA (rms) 50
(b) Dynamic rating kA (peak) 105
1.9 Whether bus bars have been Yes/No *
insulated
1.10 Type of insulation *

1.11 Material of busbar supports *
1.12 Standard applicable *
2.0 Switchgear & busbar particulars:

2.1 Switch gear designation *
2.2 Bus bar details
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
a. AMPS *
b. CU/AL AL
c. TP/TPN TP
2.3 Single front or double front DF
(SF/DF)
2.4 Fully draw out (FD), Semi Draw *

out (SD), FIXED (F)
2.5 Entry –TOP (T)/BOTTOM (B)

a). Power B
b). Control B
Switchgear constructional
requirements
3.0
3.1 Thickness of sheet steel for 2.0mm & 3.0mm
panels & gland plates(in mm)
3.2 Degree of protection IP -52
3.3 Colour finish shade Interior Glossy White
Exterior RAL 7032
3.4 Earthing bus Material GS
Size *
3.5 Minimum clearances in air of live
parts
a) Phase to Phase mm 25.4
b) Phase to Earth mm 18.4
4.0 Starters
4.1 Type DOL /
REV /
DOL
Star-Delta
4.2 Contactor rated duty AC3 for DOL
4.3 Single phasing preventor reqd. YES / NO YES
4.4 Thermal overload relay reset HAND / AUTO
AUTO
5.0 Circuit breakers
5.1 Make *
5.2 Voltage, Frequency & No.of 415 V, 50 HZ, 3
Phases PH
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
5.3 Rated operating duty B-3 MIN-MB-3 MIN-

MB
5.4 Applicable standards *
5.5 Circuit breakers type ACB
5.6 Rated breaking capacity KA (rms) 50
5.7 Short circuit withstand current for kA 50
1 Sec. duration
5.8 Rated making current kA (Peak) 105
5.9 Rated current at site reference A *
ambient temp
Deg C 50
5.10 Type of operating mechanism SPRING
manual, spring assisted manual, CHARGED
spring charged motor, wound MOTOR WOUND
spring charged.
5.11 Key interlocking required YES/NO YES
5.12 Shunt trip required YES/NO YES
5.13 Minimum no. of auxiliary 6 NO, 6 NC
Contacts
5.14 Control voltage
a) For spring charging motor V AC/DC 230 V, AC
b) For closing/tripping V AC/DC 220V,DC
5.15 Emergency manual operation

required in addition to electrical
operating devices
(a) For spring charging &

closing
YES /NO YES
(b) For tripping YES /NO YES
5.16 Derating factor for operation *

under site conditions
5.17 Limits of voltage for satisfactory
operation of the following devices
as A % of normal voltage
I) Operating mechanism % *
II) Closing at normal voltage % *
III) Trip coil % *
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
5.18 Power required for closing at W *

normal voltage
5.19 Power required for tripping at W *

normal voltage
5.20 Spring charging motor details:
I) Rating kW *
II) Rated voltage V, AC/DC *
III) Spring charging Sec. *
5.21 Have electrical and mechanical YES/NO Required

anti-pumping features been
provided
6.0 MCCBs
6.1 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
to be provided
(a) For motor control circuits YES/NO YES
(b) For other circuits YES/NO YES

6.2 Voltage, frequency & no. Of 415 V, 50 Hz &
phases 3 PH
6.3 Rated operating duty As per IS
6.4 Rated breaking capacity at kA (rms) 50
415V, 0.25 PF
6.5 Rated making current kA (rms) 105
6.6 ON/OFF operation
(a) Manual YES/NO YES - OUTGOING
(b) Remote power operated YES/NO YES - INCOMER
6.7 Releases required

Over-load inverse time YES/NO YES
7.0 Instrument Transformers
7.1 Measuring C.T.s. 10VA MIN. CL-1.0
ISF 5.0
7.2 Protection C.Ts. 15VA MIN. CL 5 P
10
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
7.3 Measuring VTs 50 VA

(MIN)/PHASE CL
1.0
7.4 Protection VTs 50VA
(MIN)/PHASE CL
3.0
8.0 Fuses
8.1 Make *
8.2 Type HRC
8.4 Rated voltage V 415
8.5 Rated current for individual
circuits to be provided as per
YES/NO *
requirements of protection
coordination
9.0 Contactors
9.1 Make *
9.2 Rated duty AC3/AC4 AC3 for DOL
AC4 for RDOL
9.3 Rated utilisation category *
9.5 Rated voltage of auxiliary V *
contacts
9.6 Rated voltage of coil V *
9.7 Rated breaking capacity Factor of *
rated
current
9.8 Rated making capacity Factor of *
rated
current
9.9 Limits of operation
I) Supply voltage variation +% AS PER IS/IEC
II) Supply frequency variation +% *

for closing
III) Drop out voltage % *
.
DATA SHEET-A3.01
9.10 No of auxiliary contacts: *

I) NO
II) NC
10.0 Control Transformers

10.1 Make *
10.2 Type CAST RESIN
10.4 Ratio *
10.5 Class of insulation Class-B or Better
10.6 Rated output VA *
11.0 Wiring and terminal blocks
11.1 Voltage grade 1.1 KV
11.2 Insulation *
11.3 Minimum size of conductor for:
i) Power wiring Sq.mm 2.5 for CT & PT

1.5 for Others
ii) Control wiring Sq.mm 1.5 for Others
11.4 Type of terminal blocks: *
11.5 Minimum current rating of A 10A

terminal blocks
11.6 Whether terminals for CT’S have YES/NO *
been provided with short
circuiting facilities
NOTE:
1.0 ‘*’ Information shall be furnished by Contractor along with offer.
.
SPEC NO. ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY SECTION : D
LIMITED
2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 23 OF 24
TCE-5103A-H-SW- VOLUME- V
DATA SHEET-A3.01
BS: 9IEC:
High Voltage alternating current IEEE
1. 9 IS:13118 62271-
Circuit Breakers . Std.
100
Alternating current Dis- BS:
connectors (Isolators) and
2. 9IS:9921 IEC:
earthing switches for Voltages
above 1000 V
3. Insulators 9IS:2544 BS: IEC:
9IS: 2705 BS: 9IEC:
4. Current Transformers
60044
5. Insulating oil 9IS: 335 BS: IEC:
6. Bushings 9IS: 2099 BS: IEC
7. Large hollow porcelains 9IS: 5621 BS: IEC
9IS: 2633 BS:
8. Hot dip galvanising IEC
9IS: 2629
BS: 9IEC:
9. Voltage transformers 9IS: 3156
60044
BS: 9IEC:
10. Lightning arrestors 9IS: 3070
60099
11. Suspension insulators 9IS: 731 BS: IEC:
12. Insulator fittings 9IS: 2486 BS: IEC:
Bus Conductors, Clamps & BS:
13. 9IS: 5561 IEC:
Connectors
14. AAC, ACSR conductors 9IS: 398 BS: IEC:
15. Copper conductors 9IS: 282 BS: IEC:
16. Galvanization of steel wires 9IS: 4826 BS: IEC:
BS :
17. Copper tubes IS: IEC:
159
Aluminium / Aluminium Alloys, BS:
18. Bars, Rods, Tubes, Sections for 9IS : 5082 IEC:
Electrical Purposes
Fittings for Aluminium and steel BS:
19. cored aluminium conductors for 9IS : 2121 IEC:
overhead lines
20. Electric power connectors 9IS:5561 BS: IEC:
9IS 8792 BS:
9IEC
21. Line Traps 9IS 8793
:60353
9IS 9859
BS: 9IEC:
22. Tests for Line Traps 9IS : 8793
60353
BS:
23. High Frequency Cable 9IS :11967 IEC:
.
LIMITED
2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 23 OF 24
TCE-5103A-H-SW- VOLUME- V
DATA SHEET-A3.01
9IEC:
24. Planning of PLC system 9IS 9528 BS:
60663
PLC terminals 9IS:9482 9IEC:
25. BS:
9IS:10706 60495
9IS: 8997 9IEC:

26.
Coupling devices 9IS :8998 60481
Performance and testing of tele-

9IEC:6083
27. protection equipment of power IS: BS:
4
systems
9IEC:
28. Shunt reactors 9IS:5553 BS:
60289
29. Air break switches 9IS:4064 BS: IEC:
30. HRC cartridge fuses 9IS:2208 BS: IEC:
31. Contactors 9IS:2859 BS: IEC:
32. Control switches/ push buttons 9IS:6875 BS: IEC:
33. Indicating Instruments 9IS:1248 BS: IEC:
34. Degree of protection 9IS: 2147 BS: IEC:
Climatic proofing of electrical
35. 9IS:3202 BS: IEC:
equipment
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
1.0 Generator Transformer (GT) shall be a two winding, generator voltage (*) of
27kV/ 420kV, three nos. single phase units for each unit with one single
phase unit as common spare, 50 Hz, OFAF cooled with on load tap changer
in steps of 1.25 % on HV side. The HV side terminals shall be connected to
400 kV grid through overhead conductor and LV side terminals to generator
through bus duct. HV side shall be solidly earthed.
Each unit shall be provided with 2 x 50% rated unit transformers (UT) sized
as described under clause 1.1 below. Unit Transformer shall be a two
winding, * / 11 kV (*generation voltage), three phases, 50 Hz, ONAN cooled
transformer; with off circuit tap changer of +5% in steps of 2.5% on HV side.
The Station Transformer (ST) shall be suitably rated (minimum 100/50/50
MVA), three winding, 400/11.5/11.5 KV, ONAN / ONAF/OFAF cooled outdoor
type, provided with on load tap changer of +10% in steps of 1.25 % on HV
side. The HV side shall be connected to 400KV grid through overhead
conductor and LV side to station buses through bus duct. Microprocessor
based Tri vector meter of accuracy of 0.2 with optical port and MRI shall be
provided for each station.
Unit Auxiliary Transformers shall be three phase, two winding, 11/3.3 kV, *
MVA, Dyn11, 50 Hz, ONAN/ONAF cooled with ±5% off circuit taps in steps of
2.5% on HV side. 3.3 kV system shall be suitable for medium resistance
earthing with earth fault current limited to 300A.
Station Auxiliary Transformers shall be three phase, two winding, 11/3.3 kV, *
MVA, Dyn11, 50 Hz, ONAN/ONAF cooled with ±5% off circuit taps in steps of
2.5% on HV side. 3.3 kV systems shall be suitable for medium resistance
earthing with earth fault current limited to 300A.
1.1 SIZING
It will be the responsibility of the contractor to adequately size the
transformers to cater for all the auxiliaries of the main equipment, mechanical
systems and loads due to lighting, A/C & ventilation system, battery charger,
cranes, plug points and all other loads and based on the ambient
temperature. The basis given below is the minimum requirement. In case
during the operation of plant it is found that the rating selected is not
adequate due to incorrect load assumptions or due to any other reason, it will
be Contractor’s responsibility to replace the transformer and associated
switchgear and breakers.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
The MVA rating of the station transformer shall be chosen so as to meet the
following operating conditions with one ST outage, One unit start load plus
one unit tripped and on bypass plus complete station loads.
1.2 Each station transformer shall have capacity to cater seawater intake pump
house loads, ash water recovery pump house loads and colony loads in
addition to other loads.
1.3 The MVA rating of each unit transformer shall be selected to cater to unit
loads connected to 11 kV unit switchgear at full load of the unit.
1.4 For the purpose of calculating the actual load, following factors with
different conditions shall be taken.
a) Full load - 0.9 (or expected load factor at

MCR of boiler)
b) Unit tripping - Bidder to indicate the factor

and the loads to be run
(Minimum shall be considered
as 0.7)
c) Unit starting - 0.4 (if the no. of auxiliaries is

same as that at full load
operation)
Additionally a margin of 10% over the MVA arrived shall be provided for
variations of the loads. Due consideration shall be given for the reduction in
nameplate MVA capacity due to regulations.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
1.6 In case GCB is provided the sizing criteria for UTs shall be as follows:
a) Two unit transformers of 100% capacity for each unit shall be

provided.
(b) Each UT shall meet the load requirement of associated generator

running at full load together with 50% of maximum common station
load and other loads as specified in clause 1.2 above.
2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:-
2.1 Transformers shall operate without injurious heating at the rated MVA, at any
voltage within +10 percent of the rated voltage of that particular tap.
2.2 The transformer shall be capable of remaining in full load operation without
injurious heating when forced cooling has failed at full load for at least 10
minutes.
2.3 Transformers shall be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal

effects of short circuit resulting from different forms of system faults, including
transfer surges, which could be reflected through capacitor coupling between
windings. The ability to withstand dynamic short circuit shall be demonstrated
by the CONTRACTOR by calculations/Tests.
2.4 The transformer shall be rated to deliver rated MVA continuously even at the
lowest tap without exceeding specified temperature rise.
2.5.1 Transformer shall be able to withstand 1.4 times the rated voltage for 5
seconds, 1.25 times for 1 minute and 1.1 times continuous at the transformer
terminals to which the generator is to be connected. Transformer shall be
capability to overload as per IS 6600-1972.
2.5.2 The generator transformer impedance to be as mentioned in Table1.0. The

impedance of the Station & Unit transformers shall be selected keeping in
view the short circuit level of the 11 kV and 400 V switchgear and the voltage
dip at motor terminals not exceeding the limits specified
2.7 OTHER REQUIREMENTS:-
Transformers shall be capable of delivering the rated current at voltage

equals to 110 % of rated voltage without exceeding rated temperature rise.
Transformer shall operate below the knee of the saturation curve at 110%
voltage to preclude Ferro-resonance and non-linear oscillations.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
Noise level shall be restricted as per NEMA TR-1Std.,
The transformers shall be designed with particular attention to suppression of

harmonic voltage, especially third and fifth, so as to eliminate wave form
distortion
Transformer shall be provided with all monitoring devices like PRD, Bucholtz
relay, OTI/WTI, Oil Level Indicator etc. Wiring from all devices mounted on
transformer such as PRD, OTI, and WTI etc. shall be provided up to one
terminal box with cables for connection to plant protection and controls. The
cables should not touch transformer body to avoid heating. Stuck Protection,
Trip coil supervision, pole discrepancy, alarm semaphore indication and
isolator shall be provided in Switchyard Control room.
Necessary lifting lugs, jacking pads, and pulling eyes shall be provided
capable of lifting and skidding of transformers, without removing oil.
Transformer shall be capable of being used with any make of transformer oil
complying IS 335.
Transformers shall be provided with oil conservator of sufficient volume to

maintain the oil seal from the minimum ambient temperature of –5 deg up to
an oil temperature of 105 deg. With oil level varying within minimum and
maximum oil levels. The conservator shall be provided with filing plug, drain
valve, bolted cover at one end for cleaning, valves for shutting off oil to
transformer, breather and Bucholtz relay.
3.0 COOLING EQUIPMENT

The generator transformer shall be provided with 2x 100% capacity
separately mounted radiator banks Each radiator bank shall be provided
with one spare pump and one spare fan and also with uni-directional bypass
valve to permit oil to bypass the pump in the event of pump failure.
It shall be possible to completely isolate any one of the radiator banks for
maintenance, while the transformer is in service.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
Flexible expansion joints, one each, on top and bottom pipe connections for
each radiator bank shall be provided.
Each radiator bank shall have at least two (2) extra radiators to facilitate
usage of the same in case of leakage in the other radiators. If radiators are
arranged in-groups, each group of radiator shall have upper and lower shut
off valves with blanking at either ends.
The unit transformer shall be provided with 2 x 50% capacity cooler banks
mounted on transformer.
The station transformer shall be provided with 2 X 50% detachable built on

radiator banks and if it is not possible to have built on radiator banks, the
same can be separately mounted.
Starting from hot condition, transformers shall be capable of remaining in

operation for following conditions without injurious heating.
(a) At full load for not less than 10 minutes, after outage of all forced
cooling.
(b) Transformers fitted with two coolers each capable of dissipating 50

percent of the losses shall be capable of remaining in operation at full
load for not less than 20 minutes in the event of failure of all forced
cooling associated with one cooler.
© The cooler control cabinet shall be provided with necessary

contactors, relays, fuses, selector switches, etc. This panel shall have
provision for terminating two independent power sources from
purchaser’s panel with auto-change over facilities.
(d) Auto changeover facilities shall be such that in event of failure of

mains supply for more than 05 seconds, standby source comes in line
automatically with remote annunciation at DCS for GT and SCADA for
the other transformers. Auto changeover shall be blocked if short
circuit protective device is operated on internal fault.
(e) Each cooler bank shall be provided with service / stand by selector
switches. The standby cooler comes automatically in to service, when
the other cooler bank either fails to start or trips when in service. This
shall be annunciated at remote DCS for GT and SCADA for the other
transformers.65
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
(f) Each motor for fans / pumps shall be provided with individual contactor,
relays and fuses. Means shall be provided for isolating any fan/pump
motor power supply.
4.0 On-Load Tap Changer (OLTC)
4.1 The OLTC gear shall be designed to complete successfully tap changes at
150% of rated current. Devices shall be incorporated to prevent tap change
when the through current is in excess of the safe current that the tap changer
can handle. The OLTC gear shall withstand through fault current without
injury.
4.2 The tap range shall be decided based on the voltage profile of the grid and
also power flow direction considering ST and following shall be complied with /
provided.
Complete its operation once commenced, independent of power supply, relays
etc.
(a) Be such that the oil in the compartment containing making and breaking
contacts does not mix with oil in other compartment of OLTC or transformer
tank.
(b) Separate conservator for OLTC oil temperature and oil surge relay with
contacts.
(c) Cut off of power supply when manual handle is inserted.
(d) Remote and local electrical operation.
(e) Automatic and manual operation facility including hardware relays as required.
(f) Master follower scheme for tap change operations.
Be provided with necessary initiating contacts for annunciation of any abnormal

condition in CRT and grouped alarm in control desk.
The unit transformers shall be provided with off-circuit tap changer. This shall be
operable from ground level through a lockable operating handle. Suitable
mechanical tap position indicator shall also be provided.
5.0 TESTS
5.1 In addition to all type tests and special test (excluding SC test) as per IS 2026,
following tests shall be conducted on one transformer.
a) Impulse test on all three legs of HV & LV windings including chopped
wave tests.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
b) Heat run test with dissolved gas analysis before and after temperature
rise test
c) Vacuum withstand and deflection measurement on tank
d) Pressure test on tank with deflection measurement
e) Determination of cooler losses
f) Partial discharge test
g) Radio influence voltage with 400 kV bushings (as per latest IS 2099,
this test is not applicable for bushings. However, this test shall be
carried out).
5.2 All routine tests as per IS: 2026 and the tests listed below on each of the
transformers shall be conducted.
(a) No load loss and exciting current on LV side and at 90% &
110% of rated voltage.
(b) Oil leakage test – 12 hours
(c) Magnetic balance test
(d) Measurement of tan delta and capacitance of each winding
(e) Measurement of zero sequence impedance
The tests at d) and e) are special tests as per IS 2026 & IEC 60076 and hence
shall be carried out as routine tests
All tests specified in Clause 5.1 & 5.2, except following test shall be conducted
on UT & ST.
a) Partial discharge test
6.0 OPERATION/ALARMS IN CONTROL ROOM
6.1 The transformers shall be provided with top oil and winding temperature
indicator in local marshalling kiosk & UCP in main plant control room.
6.2 All the alarms and trip conditions of the transformers shall be individually
indicated in the DCS/UCP located in main plant control room and common
alarms/trips of transformer shall be suitably grouped and annunciated in
control desk.
6.3 Further for monitoring, following shall be available on DCS -

a) Status of each pump of both the cooler banks
b) Status of selection of each cooler bank
c) Fault status of cooler banks
d) OLTC
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
- A. C. supply failure
- Drive motor auto tripped
- Other protective purpose considered essential by the VENDOR
- Out of step operation when paralleled transformers supposed to
operate on the same tap are operating at different taps.
- Tap change delayed
e) Status of each cooler fan/pump shall be available in DCS.
6.4.1 The OLTC remote control equipment shall be housed in an indoor sheet steel
cubicle to be located in a remote control room. It shall conform to degree of
enclosure protection IP 54 or better and shall comprise the following:
(a) Control switch: Raise / off / Lower (spring return to normal type) or
independent push buttons.
(b) If parallel operation is specified, master / independent / follower selector
switch (maintained contact type) with ‘out of step’ annunciation.
(c) Tap position indicator.
(d) Facia type alarm annunciators with “accept”, “lamp test” facilities and
hooters / buzzer for alarms
(e) Necessary auxiliary relays.
(f) Lamp indications for:
i) Tap change in progress
ii) Lower limit reached
iii) Upper limit reached
iv) Transformer cooler control apparatus ( if specified)
(g) Cable glands for power and control cables.
(h) 240 V rated panel space heater with thermostat.
(i) Fluorescent type interior lighting fixture with lamp and door switch.
(j) HRC fuses / MCBs.
(k) Terminal blocks.
(l) Internal wiring.
(m) Earthing terminal.
7.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

7.1 A small ladder shall also be provided attached with conservation tank.
7.2 Supply of oil separately in non-returnable drums (along with 10% extra oil).
7.3 Anti earthquake clamping arrangement for transformer shall be included.
7.4. The conservator of the Generator Transformer shall be equipped with

C.O.P.S balloon type bag made up of High-grade rubber. This bag is required
to avoid direct contact of air with the transformer oil.
7.5 Glass oil level indicator to be provided on the sidewall of the Generator
transformer main tank.
7.6 Minimum clearance from HV bushing terminal to LV bus duct or any objects
shall be 2200mm.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
7.7 Bushing CTs of adequate rating, size shall be provided for protections,
metering and winding temperature measurements. The details of CTs shall be
as per enclosed Main One Line Diagram - TCE.5103A-737-AU-3001.
7.8 In case transformer is supplied without oil, Transformer shall be supplied

nitrogen gas filled with necessary gas, fittings and arrangements to maintain
the gas pressure inside the transformer.
7.9 Transformer shall be provided with bi-directional flanged rollers with locking
and fitting device suitable railroad.
7.10 Each group of radiator bank shall be mounted independently of other to

enable any group to be removed, replaced or attended while transformer in
service.
7.11 The rating and nameplate (corrodible plate, indelibly marked) shall contain all
details as per IS 2026. In addition, following details shall also be included.
(a) Connection diagram showing internal connections.
(b) Temperature rise
(c) Insulation level of windings
(d) Transportation weight.
(e) Untanking weight.
(f) Core and winding weight.
(g) Table showing tapping voltage, tapping current, Taping power for
each winding.
(h) Values of short circuit impedance on extreme tapping and on
principle tapping and an indication of the winding to which impedance is
related.
(i) The location and function of valves and plugs and indication of
maintenance reference for applying vacuums for drying and oil filling.
7.12.1 The design of tap changing gear shall be such that the lock cannot be
inserted unless contacts are properly engaged. Warning plate shall be
provided indicating.
7.13 On-line dissolved gas analyser (incipient fault monitoring system) for monitoring key
fault gases like hydrogen, carbon monoxide, hydro carbon, etc. in the transformer
shall be provided for GTs, UTs and STs. The system shall be of reputed make
(Hydran of GE make or equivalent) and shall be complete with all accessories,
software, etc. including necessary spares and with serial communication link for
hooking up to the plant DCS.
8.0 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION AND DESIGN :-
8.1 CORE
Core shall be constructed with high-grade cold rolled non-ageing grain

oriented silicon steel. Each lamination shall have insulated coating. The
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
insulated structure for core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall withstand
2.00 kV for 01 minute. The core clamping structure shall be designed to
minimise eddy current losses. The core shall be provided with lugs for lifting
of core with coils. The core and coil assembly shall be rigidly fixed to avoid
their shifting during transport or short circuit. The magnetic circuit shall be
connected to clamping structure at one point only and this shall be brought
out of the top cover of the transformer tank through a suitably rated bushing.
A disconnecting link shall be provided on transformer tank to facilitate
disconnection from ground for IR measurement purpose.
8.2 WINDING
a) Winding shall be subjected to shrinking and seasoning process so that no

further shrinkage occurs during service. Adjustable device shall be provided
for taking of possible shrinkage in service.
b) Winding shall be of copper unless and otherwise specified. Permanent

current carrying connection in the winding shall be brazed or welded. The
coils shall be properly supported and shall be subjected to seasoning process
so that further shrinkage should not occur during service.
8.3 BUSHING
1) All porcelain used in bushing shall be homogeneous, non porous, uniformly

glazed to brown colour and free from blisters, burns and other defects.
2) Bushing rated 72.5KV and above shall be of oil filled condenser type with
central tube and draw in conductor which shall be connected, to the
connector housed in helmet of bushing. The pull through lead shall be fitted
with a gas bubble deflector. The condenser type bushing shall be equipped
with following:-
(a) Provision for power factor testing without disconnecting main leads.
(b) Bushing of 125KV and above shall have taps brought out for used with
potential devices.
(c) Stress rings and lower end shields.
(d) Bushing turret shall be provided with vent pipes, which shall be connected to
route any gas collection through Buchholtz relay.
(e) Magnetic type oil level indicators and means for sampling and draining the oil.
(f) The angle of inclination to the vertical shall not exceed 30 deg.
(g) Bushing shall be so located on the transformers that flash over strength will
be utilised and minimum clearance as required for BIL shall be realised
between live parts and live parts to earth structure.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
8.4 TANK
a) The tank shall be made from good commercial grade low carbon steel and
shall be of welded constructions with suitable lugs and bosses for lifting and
shifting.
b) Tank together with accessories shall be designed to withstand full vacuum of

760mm of HG and Internal gas pressure of 0.35 KG/CM2 with oil at working
level.
c) The tank (bell shaped) shall be of oil tight bolted flanged gasketed joint near
the base of the transformer, so that the tank can be lifted off to have a access
to core and coils. Suitable projecting guides shall be provided to facilitate
removal and lowering of the tank over the assembly of core and coils.
d) Man holes with bolted covers shall be provided in the top / side of transformer
for access to lower end of bushings, tap changers and to permit replacement
of auxiliaries without removal of top covers.
e) Adequate space shall be provided at bottom for collection of sediments.
f) At the bottom, undercarriage with wheels shall be provided with detachable

steel flanged wheels. Wheels shall be provided with suitable bearings, which
will resist rust and corrosion and shall be equipped with fittings for lubrication
for skidding with pulling eyes.
g) All the gasket shall be of cork neoprene or better type and all gasketed joints
shall be so arranged that gaskets will not be exposed to weather
h) Only gate valves shall be provided to facilitate complete isolation of any one
of the radiator banks as well as oil pumps for maintenance while transformer
is in service. Valves of forged carbon steel up to 50mm and of gun metal or
cast iron bodies with gun metal fittings above 50mm shall be provided. Valves
for drain, filtration oil sampling, vacuum pulling and radiator isolation shall be
provided with adequate size.
i) One drain valve, which can be operated safely even when transformer is on
fire, located away from main transformer, shall be provided.
9.0 LOSSES
Bidder should offer the guaranteed loss vales. For the evaluation purpose
following formula will be followed.
Evaluation of Bids=Evaluation price+( A x guaranteed No load loss in kW+ B

x guaranteed load loss in kW+ C x guaranteed cooler loss in kW)
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.
001
POWER TRANSORMER
Where A, B, C are computed constants (Rs. /kW) based on the various

parameters
10.0 REJECTION
The PURCHASER may reject any transformer if during tests or service any of
the following conditions arise :
• No load loss exceeds the guaranteed value of 20% of more.
• Load loss exceeds the guaranteed value by 20% or more.
• Impedance value exceeds the guaranteed value of ± 10% or more.
The difference in impedance values of any two phases during single-phase
short circuit impedance test exceeds 2 percent of the average value
guaranteed by the VENDOR.
•
Oil or winding temperature rise exceeds the specified value by 5oC.
• Transformer fails on impulse test.
• Transformer fails on power frequency voltage withstand test.
• Transformer is proved to have been manufactured not in accordance with
the agreed specification.
The PURCHASER reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and
take it into service until the VENDOR replaces, at no extra cost to the
PURCHASER, the defective transformer by a new transformer.
Alternatively, the VENDOR shall repair or replace the transformer within a

reasonable period to the PURCHASER’s satisfaction at no extra cost to the
PURCHASER.
ISSUE
R0
.
LIMITED
TCE-5103A-H-SW- 2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET1 of 8
207 400kV SWITCHYARD VOLUME- V
DATA SHEET-A3.02
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
The generator transformer shall comply with the particulars indicated below and
CONTRACTOR shall furnish the details in respective column given below:
SL.NO. UNIT SPECIFICATION CONTRACTOR’s

DESCRIPTION REQUIREMENTS DATA
1.0 Transformer GT
applications
2.0 Type & make Outdoor, two
winding, 3 nos. 1
phase units for each
unit with 1 phase as
spare.
3.0 Applicable standard IS : 2026
4.0 Quantity 2 Nos.
5.0 Full load rating MVA Ref.Cl.1.0
6.0 Rating of each MVA *
windings
7.0 Rating no load voltage kV *
HV/LV
8.0 Rating of different
cooling methods
ONAN /ONAF/OFAF 60%/80%/100%
9.0 Impedance value % 14.5 (Tentative)
11.0 Winding connection of YNd1
different windings and
vector group
12.0 System Earthing
(a) HVLV Effectively
-
13.0 Type of tap changer off ON LOAD
circuit/on load
14.0 Full power tapping Yes/No Required
provided
15.0 Type of voltage CFVV
variation
(CFVV/VFVV/CBVV)
ISSUE
R0
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.02
16.0 Over fluxing capability 110% continuous

125% for 1 minute
140% for 5 second
17.0 Winding insulation type
uniformly or non-
uniformly insulated
17.1 HV Non-Uniform
17.2 LV Uniform
18.0 Impulse withstand kV p 1300/170
voltage of winding
HV/LV
Switching withstand 1050
Voltage(HV)
19.0 Power frequency kV/rms 630/70
withstand voltage of
winding HV/LV/HV
neutral
20.0 Maximum temperature
rise at full load with
100% coolers : o
C 50
(a) Oil o
C 55
(b) Winding
21.0 Bushing particulars.
21.1 Applicable standard for IS-2099
bushing
21.2 Clearance in air mm HV–4000 (P-P), 3400
HV/LV/Neutral (P-E), LV(P-
(between phases and P)350,(P-E)320
phase to earth) ,HVN-320
21.3 Quantity of oil in oil litre *
filled bushing
21.4 Creepage distance mm/kV Minimum 31
22.0 No load loss at 100% kW *
rated voltage &
frequency
23.0 Load loss at rated kW *
current with 75 deg C
ISSUE
R0
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.02
24.0 Cooler loss at full load kW *

25.0 Efficiency (0.85 Pf)
a) full load *
b) 75% load *
26.0 No load current A *
27.0 Total estimated weight Kgs *
28.0 OLTC
28.1 Make *
28.2 Rated Voltage Volts *
28.3 Rated Current Amps *
28.4 No. of steps Ref. Cl. 1.0
28.5 Step Voltage Volts **
28.6 Time of operation from Sec. **
one step to other for
Auto / manual mode
29.0 Type of axial and radial **
coil supports for HV/LV
30.0 No. of cooler banks Ref. Cl. 3.0
and capacity of each
cooler bank
31.0 Guaranteed No load **
current
When excited from LV Amps **
side at 100% and
110% rated voltage
32.0 Max. Flux density Wb/m2 **
when rated and 110%
rated voltage
33.0 Vacuum withstand mm of *
capability main tank, Hg
radiators and
accessories
34.0 Weight
34.1 Core kg **
34.2 Net copper wt. HV/LV kg **
ISSUE
R0
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.02
34.3 Oil kg **
34.4 Tank, coolers & fittings kg **
34.5 Total kg **
34.6 Untanking weight kg **
35.0 Cooling fans, oil pumps kW **
rating
35.0 Capability of minutes Ref. Cl. 2.2
transformer to remain
in operation from hot
conditions after failure
of forced cooling with
full load
36 On-line dissolved Gas Yes/No Yes
Analyser Provided?
37 Fibre optic based direct Yes/No Yes
hot spot temperature
measurement System
Provided?
NOTE :
1.0 ‘*’ Information shall be filled furnished by CONTRACTOR along with offer.
‘**’ CONTRACTOR shall furnish these details after award of contract.
ISSUE
R0
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.02
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (For UT and ST separately):
The UTs & STs shall comply with the particulars indicated below and CONTRACTOR
shall furnish the details in respective column given below :
SL. UNIT SPECIFICATION CONTRACTOR’s

NO. DESCRIPTION REQUIREMENTS DATA
UT ST UT ST
1.0 Type & make 2 winding 3 3 winding 3 ph,
ph, outdoor / * outdoor / *
2.0 Applicable standard IS 2026 IS 2026
3.0 Quantity Ref. Clause
1.0
4.0 Full load rating MVA * *
5.0 Rating no load kV Ref. Clause
voltage HV/LV 1.0
6.0 Rating of different
cooling methods
ONAN / ONAF
100 / 100% 80 /100%
7.0 Impedance value % 10%(Tentative) 18/32/32%(Tenta
tive)
8.0 Rated frequency Hz 50 50
9.0 Winding connection Dyn11 Ynyn0yn0
of different windings
and vector group
10.0 System earthing - Effectively
(b) HV Medium Medium
(c) LV Resistance Resistance
11.0 Type of tap changer Off Circuit On load

off circuit/on load
12.0 Tapping range and Ref. Clause 1.0
number of steps
13.0 Full power tapping Yes/No Required Required
provided
14.0 Type of voltage CFVV CFVV
variation
ISSUE
R0
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.02
(CFVV/VFVV/CBVV)
15.0 Over fluxing 110% cont. 110% cont.
capability 125% for 1
minute 140%
for 5 second
16.0 Winding insulation
type uniformly or
non-uniformly
insulated
16.1 HV Uniform Non-Uniform
16.2 LV Uniform Uniform
17.0 Impulse withstand kV p 170/75 1300 / 75
voltage of winding
HV/LV
Switching withstand - 1050
Voltage (HV)
18.0 Power frequency kV/rms 70/ 28 630/28/28
withstand voltage of HVN-38
winding
HV/LV1/LV2/ HV
neutral
19.0 Maximum
temperature rise at
full load with 100% o
C 50 50
coolers : o
C 55 55
(c) Oil
(d) Winding
20.1 Applicable standard IS 2099 IS 2099
for bushing
20.2 Clearance in air mm HV 350(P- HV-4000(P-
HV/LV/Neutral P),320(P- P),3400(P-E)
(between phases E),LV280 (P- LV1,2-280(P-
and phase to earth) P),140(P-E) P),140(P-E)
20.3 Quantity of oil in oil litre * *
filled bushing
20.4 Creepage distance mm/kV 31 31
21.0 No load loss kW * *
ISSUE
R0
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.02
22.0 Load loss kW * *

23.0 Cooler loss kW * *
24.0 Efficiency
(a) At full load % * *
(b) At 75% load % * *
25.0 No load current A * *
26.0 Total estimated Kg * *
weight
27.0 OLTC NA
27.1 Make - *
27.2 Rated Voltage V - *
27.3 Rated Current A - *
27.4 No. of steps Refer Cl. 1.0 Refer Cl. 1.0
27.5 Step Voltage Volts - **
27.6 Time of operation Sec. - **
from one step to
other for Auto /
manual mode
27.7 Local / remote - **
operation
27.8 Auto / manual - **
control
28.0 Type of axial and ** **
radial coil supports
for HV/LV
29.0 No. of cooler banks Ref. Clause 3
and capacity of each
cooler bank
30.0 Guaranteed No load
current
When excited from Amps ** **
LV side at 100%
and 110% rated
voltage
ISSUE
R0
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.02
31.0 Max. Flux density Wb/m2 ** **

when rated and
110% rated voltage
32.0 Vacuum withstand mm of * *
capability main tank, Hg
radiators and
accessories
33.0 Weight
33.1 Core kg ** **
33.2 Net copper wt. kg ** **
HV/LV
33.3 Oil kg ** **
33.4 Tank, coolers & kg ** **
fittings
33.5 Total kg ** **
33.6 Untanking weight kg ** **
34.0 Cooling fans rating kW ** **
35.0 Capability of minute * *
transformer to s
remain in operation
from hot conditions
after failure of forced
cooling with full load
35.0 On-line dissolved Yes/No Yes *
Gas Analyser
Provided?
NOTE :
‘*’ Information shall be filled furnished by CONTRACTOR along with offer.
ISSUE
R0
TCE.5103A –H-500-
01 ANDHRA POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LIMITED VOLUME – V
SECTION: D3-.3
SHEET 1 OF 7
Package: SERVICE TRANSFORMERS

Balance Of Plant
1.0 GENERAL
The number and rating of service transformers shall be decided based on the
geographical location of loads without sacrificing the unit and common load
concept. The transformers shall generally comply with specific requirements
as follows:
1.1 The service transformers shall be dry type and rated for 100% load and shall
be three-phase, two winding,11000/433 volt, ONAN cooled with off-circuit
taps of +/- 5% in steps of 2.5% on HV side. The transformers shall be suitable
for outdoor applications having Dyn11 Vector group. The star point shall be
solidly earthed.
1.2 The impedance of the transformers shall be chosen such that the fault level
does not exceed the short circuit capability (50 kA / sec) on 415 V switchgear
including the motor contributions and also voltage dip while starting any
auxiliary does not exceed the limit acceptable for the equipment concerned
but not exceeding 15%.
1.3 In case of single core cable termination, gland plate shall be of aluminium.
1.4 Transformer shall operate without injurious heating, at rated MVA at any
voltage within 110% of rated voltage of that particular tap.
1.5 Transformers shall be capable of delivering the rated current, at a voltage

equals to 115% of rated voltage without exceeding rated temperature rise.
1.6 Transformer shall operate below the knee of the saturation curve at 110%
voltage to preclude ferro resonance and non-linear oscillations.
1.7 Transformers and accessories shall be designed for fault levels indicated in
11kV and 415V switchgear specification. Dynamic ability and thermal ability to
withstand the short circuit force shall be demonstrated by tests / calculations.
1.8 Noise level shall not be more than 5db above the NEMA TR-1.
1.9 The transformers shall be designed with particular attention to suppress

harmonic voltage, especially third and fifth, so as to eliminate wave form
distortion
ISSUE
R0
TCE.5103A –H-500-
SECTION: D3-.3
SHEET 2 OF 7

Balance Of Plant
2.0 MVA RATING

2.1 The three-phase 415 V power supply to the unit and station auxiliaries shall
be derived from 11kV / 433 V auxiliary service transformers.
2.2 11000/ 433 V service transformers as listed below are proposed for supplying
the 415 V loads. Quantity and rating of the Transformer shall be based on the
actual load figures and the redundancy. The maximum rating of the
transformer shall be limited to 2 MVA. In case the transformer rating cannot
be limited to 2 MVA then 3 X 50 % rated Transformers shall be provided.
2.3 Each transformer shall be rated to take care of the entire load on the
respective switchgear considering the outage of the other transformer. An
appropriate diversity factor with a minimum of 0.9 for continuously running
loads and 0.4 for intermittent loads like cranes, plug points, sump pumps,
elevator etc., shall be considered.
2.4 The rating established shall be taken into account, load variations during the
design engineering stage. Spare capacity of at least 10% shall be available in
each transformer at the time of handing over the plant.
Sl. Service ( For Qty. Label

No. supplying loads of )
1. Each unit auxiliaries 2 x 100% Unit Service Transformer (UST)
2. Electrostatic 2 x 100% ESP Transformer (ESPT)

precipitator loads
3. Station auxiliaries 2 x 100% Station Service Transformer (SST)
4. Coal handling loads 100 Coal Handling Transformer

%redunda (CHPST).The quantity to be decided
ncy to be based on layout.
given
6. Ash Handling loads 2 x 100% Ash handling transformer (AHPST)
7. Ash water pump 2 x 100% Ash water pump house transformer

house (AWPHT)
ISSUE
R0
TCE.5103A –H-500-
SECTION: D3-.3
SHEET 3 OF 7

Balance Of Plant
8. Ash extraction plant 2 x 100% Ash extraction plant transformer

(AET)
9. Ash silo service plant 2 x 100% Ash silo service Transformer

(AEST)
10. Water Treatment 2 x 100% Water Treatment Plant Transformer

Plant (WTPT)
The transformer shall generally comply with all following specific requirements
(a) The tank cover shall be conventional one with bolted joint at the top
(b) The transformers shall be provided with detachable built on radiators
of adequate number.
(c) Off-circuit tap changers with lockable operating handle and
mechanical tap position indicator shall be provided.
(d) Pressure relief device shall be provided.
(e) Conservator need not be sealed expansion type.
(f) The wheels shall be flat roller type
(g) The transformer shall be suitable for cable/bus duct connection for HV
and LV side.
(h) If bus ducts are used a flanged bushing connection shall be provided
to suit the bus-duct. The winding terminations shall be brought out on
outdoor type of bushings.
(i) If cables are used the neutral of the LV side of the transformer shall be
brought out in a separate cable box or if the same cable box is used
for neutral also, then metallic partition between phases and neutral
shall be provided.
(j) Transformer mounted protective devices (OTI, WTI, PRD, etc…) shall
be provided and wiring from all devices mounted on transformer such
as PRD, OTI, WTI etc. shall be brought to one terminal box with
cables for connection to plant protection and controls. The cables
should not touch transformer body to avoid heating.
ISSUE
R0
TCE.5103A –H-500-
SECTION: D3-.3
SHEET 4 OF 7

Balance Of Plant
(k) The HV and LV winding of all transformers shall be brought out

through suitably related bushing mounted on non magnetic material in
separate air insulated cable box with disconnecting chambers. The
cable box shall also be provided with facility for supporting from
ground.
(l) Necessary lifting lugs, jacking pads, and pulling eyes shall be provided
capable of lifting and skidding of transformers without removing oil.
(m) Each radiator bank shall be provided independently mounted with inlet
and out let valves to enable replacement of radiator with transformer
in service.
(n) Transformer shall be capable of being used with any make of
transformer oil complying IS 335.
(o) The rating and nameplate shall contain all details as per IS 2026. In
addition, following details shall also be included.
(a) Connection diagram showing internal connections.
(b) Temperature rise
(c) Insulation level of windings
(d) Transportation weight.
(e) Untanking weight.
(f) Core and winding weight.
(g) Table showing tapping voltage, tapping current, Taping power for
each winding.
(h) Values of short circuit impedance on extreme tapping and on
principle tapping and an indication of the winding to which
impedance is related.
(p) Transformers shall be provided with oil conservator of sufficient
volume to maintain the oil seal from the minimum ambient
temperature of –5 deg up to an oil temperature of 105 deg. With oil
level varying within minimum and maximum oil levels. The conservator
shall be provided with filing plug, drain valve, bolted cover at one end
for cleaning, valves for shutting off oil to transformer, breather and
Buchholtz relay.
ISSUE
R0
TCE.5103A –H-500-
SECTION: D3-.3
SHEET 5 OF 7

Balance Of Plant
4.0 CAST RESIN TRANSFORMERS
4.1 Instead of outdoor oil filled service transformers, CONTRACTOR shall offer
cast resin dry type transformers for auxiliaries of each unit and station
services with AN cooled and indoor type.
4.2 The cast resin transformer shall be housed in naturally ventilated floor
mounted cubicle with louvers backed by fine brass wire mech. Degree of
protection for enclosure shall be at least IP 32.
4.3 The transformer cubicle can be located next to respective 415V switchgear
and LV side shall be connected with solid bar connections, or through bus
ducts. The HV connections shall be through cables.
4.4 The dry type transformers shall be provided with core/winding temperature
indicators, core, winding temperature high alarms and trip contacts.
4.5 The insulation class for cast resin transformer shall be class F. The noise
level shall not exceed the values specified in NEMA TR-1.
4.6 The core and windings shall be provided with adequate no. of embedded
temperature detectors for remote indication in CRTs.
4.7 The off circuit tap changer with lockable operating handle, mechanical tap
position indicator with +- 5% range in steps of 2.5% shall be provided.
5.0 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION AND DESIGN :-
5.1 CORE :-
Core shall be constructed with high-grade cold rolled non-ageing grain
oriented silicon steel. Each lamination shall have insulated coating. The
insulated structure for core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall withstand
2.0 KV for 01 minute. The core clamping structure shall be designed to
minimise eddy current losses. The core shall be provided with lugs for lifting of
core with coils. The core and coil assembly shall be rigidly fixed to avoid their
shifting during transport or short circuit.
5.2 WINDING:-
Winding shall be of copper unless and otherwise specified. Permanent current
carrying connection in the winding shall be brazed or welded. The coils shall be
properly supported and shall be subjected to seasoning process so that further
shrinkage should not occur during service.
ISSUE
R0
TCE.5103A –H-500-
SECTION: D3-.3
SHEET 6 OF 7

Balance Of Plant
5.3 TANK:
The tank shall be made from good commercial grade low carbon steel and
shall be of welded constructions with suitable lugs and bosses for lifting and
shifting. Tank together with accessories shall be designed to withstand full
vacuum of 760mm of HG and Internal gas pressure of 0.35 KG/CM2 with oil at
working level. Top cover shall be bolted type to remove the core and winding at
site. Man holes with bolted covers shall be provided in the top / side of
transformer for access to lower end of bushings, tap changers and to permit
replacement of auxiliaries without removal of top covers.
Adequate space shall be provided at bottom for collection of sediments. At the

bottom, wheels shall be provided for skidding with pulling eyes. All the gasket
shall be of cork neoprene or better type and all gasketted joints shall be so
arranged that gaskets shall not be exposed to whether. Valves of forged
carbon steel up to 50mm and of gunmetal or of cast iron bodies with gun metal
fittings above 50mm shall be provided. Valves for drain, filtration oil sampling,
vacuum pulling and radiator isolation shall be provided with adequate size.
5.4 BUSHINGS :-
All the bushing shall be of porcelain type. Bushing rated for 400A and above
shall have non-ferrous flange and hardware.
6.0 TESTS
Valid type test certificate shall be submitted. If valid type test certificate is not
available than type test shall be carried out on each type of transformer.
Routine tests as per IS 2026 on all transformers. In addition to all routine test as
per IS 2026, the following tests shall be conducted on one transformer of each
type and size.
a. Heat run test with dissolved gas analysis before and after
b. Vacuum withstand and deflection measurement on tank / radiator
c. Pressure test on tank / radiator with deflection measurement
d. Measurement of losses and efficiency.
e Dielectric tests shall include :-
ISSUE
R0
TCE.5103A –H-500-
SECTION: D3-.3
SHEET 7 OF 7

Balance Of Plant
11 kV windings: - Induced over voltage test, Separate source power frequency

test on neutral.
415 V windings: - Separate source power frequency test on all Line terminals.
ISSUE
R0
.
SPEC NO. ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY SECTION : D 3.03
LIMITED SHEET1 of 2
001 SERVICE TRANSFORMERS
DATA SHEET-A3.03
The service transformers shall comply with the particulars indicated below and
CONTRACTOR shall furnish the details in respective column given below (To be
separately submitted for transformers of different ratings and type) :
SL. UNIT SPECIFICATION CONTRACT

NO. DESCRIPTION REQUIREMENTS OR’s DATA
1.0 Transformer applications Service

Transformer
2.0 Type & make Outdoor, two
winding, 3 phase.
3.0 Applicable standard IS : 2026
4.0 Quantity *
5.0 Full load rating MVA *
6.0 Rating no load voltage HV/LV kV 11 / 0.433
7.0 Impedance value % *
9.0 Winding connection of different Dyn11(Typical)
windings and vector group
10.0 System earthing

(a) HV Non-Effectively
(b) LV Effectively
11.0 Type of tap changer off Off circuit
circuit/on load
12.0 Tapping range and number of Refer Clause 1.1
steps
13.0 Type of voltage variation CFVV
(CFVV/VFVV/CBVV)
14.0 Over fluxing capability 110% continuous
15.0 Winding insulation type
15.1 HV Uniform
15.2 LV Uniform
15.3 Impulse withstand voltage of kVp As per IS

.
LIMITED SHEET2 of 2
001 SERVICE TRANSFORMERS
DATA SHEET-A3.03
winding HV/LV
16.0 Power frequency withstand kV/rms As per IS
voltage of winding HV/LV
17.0 Maximum temperature rise at
full load with 100% coolers :
(a) Oil o
C 50
(b) Winding o
C 55
18.1 Applicable standard for bushing IS-2099
18.2 Clearance in air between mm HV – 120 (P-P)(P-
phases E) LV – 25 (P-P)
18.3 Creepage distance mm/kV 25
19.0 No load loss kW *
20.0 Load loss kW *
21.0 Guarantied efficiency at full load % *
22.0 Total estimated weight Kgs *
23.0 Guaranteed No load current
When excited from LV side at Amps **
100% and 110% rated voltage
24.0 Max. Flux density when rated Wb/m2 **
and 110% rated voltage
25.0 Vacuum withstand capability mm of *

main tank, radiators and Hg
accessories
27.0 Weight
27.1 Core kg **
27.2 Net copper wt. HV/LV kg **
27.3 Oil kg **
27.4 Tank, coolers & fittings kg **
27.5 Total kg **
37.6 Untanking weight kg **
NOTE: ‘*’ Information shall be filled in by CONTRACTOR along with offer.

SPEC. NO.
TCE.5103A-H-500-
001
2 X 800MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM
Package: TITLE SECTION: D

NEUTRAL EARTHING EQUIPMENT 3.04
Balance of Plant
SHEET 1 OF 2
1.0 METHODS OF EARTHING
1.1 The neutral earthing equipment shall conform to the latest editions of
relevant national and international standards. These shall comply with the
specific requirements indicated below.
400 kV systems are solidly earthed. The neutral of GTs are independently
connected to earth.
1.2 11 kV and 3.3 kV systems shall be resistance earthed to limit the earth
fault current to 300A for duration of 60 sec. The neutral of all unit
transformers, station transformers and all 11/3.3 kV auxiliary transformers
shall be connected to a suitably rated neutral earthing resistor.
1.3 415V AC systems shall be a solidly earthed system. The neutral of the
service transformers shall be independently connected to the earth.
1.4 240V AC systems for lighting and the space heating shall be a solidly
earthed system. The neutral of the transformers shall be connected to the
earth bus through a link in the respective board, which is in turn connected
to the power plant earth grid.
1.5 230V AC control supply shall be a solidly earthed system. The earth side
of the transformers shall be connected solidly through a link to the earth
bus in the respective modules of switchgear / control panels.
1.6 220V DC systems shall be unearthed.
2.0 SIZING OF NEUTRAL EARTHING EQUIPMENT
2.1 The neutral earthing resistor ohmic value for unit and station transformer
neutral earthing shall be such that earth fault current is lower than the full
load current of the respective transformers.
2.2 Each neutral earthing resistor unit shall be air cooled and self supporting
type. The enclosure shall have a degree of protection of min IP54 for
indoor and IP55 for outdoor.
2.3 The resistor elements shall be made of non aging stainless or equivalent
corrosion resistant material and all element connections shall be bolted
type.
3.1 The neutral grounding transformer shall be cast epoxy resin type
natural air cooled single phase connected between generator neutral and
ground. Duty rating of the earthing resistor for UTs & STs shall be 60 sec.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC. NO.
TCE.5103A-H-500-
001

NEUTRAL EARTHING EQUIPMENT 3.04
Balance of Plant
SHEET 2 OF 2
3.2 Cable boxes shall be provided for receiving the cables from the
transformers.
3.3 The resistors shall be provided with taps at 25%, 50% & 75%.
3.4 The resistor cubicle shall be mounted on suitably rated insulators.
3.5 The resistor cubicle shall be located in transformer yard at a height of

2.5m. If located at ground level the resistor area shall be fenced
separately, even though located within the fenced transformer yard.
4.0 DATA TO BE FURNISHED WITH THE BID
4.1 Technical particulars for the neutral earthing resistors as per table below.
4.2 Experience list for the make of the resistor offered.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM VOLUME- V
TCE.5103A-H-500- NEUTRAL EARTHING EQUIPMENT
TITLE
001
DATA SHEET-A3.04
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS TABLE
Technical particulars for the neutral earthing resistors as per table below and the
Experience list for the make of the resistor offered.
NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTORS (NGR)
Sr. Unit For UT For ST/ Contractor

No. Description service ’s Data
transforme
rs
1.0 Type and quantity * *
a) Cast grid
b) Wire wound
2 Installation Outdoor/Indoor * *
3 Enclosure: Tank type,

weather
proof with
aluminium
covers
4 Ratings kW * *
Ohmic value Ohm * *
Change in resistance with
temperature
Taps % * *
Rated Current A * *
Duration of rating Continuous Continuous
Line to neutral voltage V * *
Insulation class V * *
Maximum current carrying A
capacity for 60 Sec.
5 Termination
Neutral side Cables Cables
Earth side Cables Cables
Tapping Cables Cables
.
TITLE
001
DATA SHEET-A3.04
6 Details of stand in insulators * *
7 General outline dimensions * *
NEUTRAL GROUNDING TRANSFORMERS
Sr. No. Description Unit For UT/ST Contractor’s

Data
1.00 Application
2.00 Quantity *
3.00 Installation ( indoor/outdoor) *
4.00 Degree of protection as per IS:2147 IP.55
5.00 Rating
a) KVA rating KVA *
b) Number of phase Nos.
c) Frequency Hz
d) Type of cooling
e) No load voltage HV/LV V
f) Percentage Impedance %
6.00 System details
a) Nominal system voltage V *

b) Highest system voltage V
c) System neutral connection Non effectively
earthed
7.00 Impulse (1.2/50 us wave) kV 60

peak
Power freq. ( dry & wet)(HV/LV) kV(rm 28/2.5
s)
8.00 TAPS
Required Yes
Tapping on Winding HV
Total tapping range % +/- 5 %
Steps % 2.5 %
9.00 Bushing
.
TITLE
001
DATA SHEET-A3.04
Minimum clearance in air mm

a) HV ph - ph 180
b) LV ph - ph 25.4
c) HV ph – earth 120
d) LV ph – earth 19
Minimum Creepage Distance mm

a) HV line end 132
b) LV line end -
c) HV neutral -
d) LV neutral -
NOTE ‘*’ indicated above shall be filled by CONTRACTOR.

‘**’ The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the data after placement of order.
TCE.5103A –H-500- ANDHRA POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LIMITED VOLUME – V
01
2 x 800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SECTION: D3-5
SHEET 1 OF 20
Package : TITLE
Balance of Plant HT SWITCHGEAR
1.0 For feeding the plant auxiliaries rated for 11000V, 3300V and service
transformers, following minimum switchgear shall be provided. Additional
switchgear may be provided as and when required to suit plant requirements.
Sl. 11kV Switchgears Loads Connected

No.
1.0 Unit switchgear (Bus – 1A) Stream A auxiliaries of Unit 1

2.0 Unit switchgear (Bus-1B) Stream B auxiliaries of Unit 1
3.0 Unit switchgear (Bus – 2A) Stream A auxiliaries of Unit 2
4.0 Unit switchgear (Bus-2B) Stream B auxiliaries of Unit 2
5.0 Station switchgear (Bus – 1A) Standby CW pump of Unit 1
6.0 Station switchgear (Bus – 1B) MDBFP of Unit 1
5.0 Station switchgear (Bus – 2A) Standby CW pump of Unit 2
6.0 Station switchgear (Bus – 2B) MDBFP of Unit 2
7.0 Coal Handling Switchgear, 3.3 kV Coal Handling Loads
8.0 Ash Handling Switchgear, 3.3 kV Ash Handling Loads
9.0 Any other switchgear As required
1.1 11 kV system will be 3 phase, 3 wire with low impedance (current limited to
300 to 400A) neutral earthing.
2.0 POWER SOURCES FOR SWITCHGEAR
2.1 Unit switchgear of each unit shall be fed from the respective unit transformer
(UT).
2.2 Station switchgear of each unit shall be fed from the respective station
transformer (ST). Tie feeders of adequate capacity shall be provided between
unit and station switchgear such that 11 kV supply is available for unit
auxiliaries during start-up and shutdown of the unit. The commissioning of
these ties along with the necessary allied works including cabling,
interlocking, metering, control & protections shall be in contractor’s scope.
Coal Handling Switchgear and ash handling switchgear shall be fed from
station switchgear as indicated in key one line diagram.
2.3 All tie feeders between Station Service switchgear, between station and unit
switchgear shall be provided with breakers at both ends.
2.4 To cater for outage of any one of the station transformers, tie breakers
between station switchgears shall be provided.
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 2 OF 20
Package : TITLE
3.0 MANUAL & AUTOMATIC TRANSFER OF LOADS.
3.1 The unit switchgear shall be provided with manual live changeover scheme
for planned changeover of supply from unit incomer to station bus supply for
startup power requirements and for taking the transformer for maintenance
and vice versa. Similarly, station switchgear shall be provided with manual
live changeover scheme between their incoming breakers and tiebreakers.
3.2 Micro processed based numerical automatic fast changeover scheme for
changeover of supply from unit source to station source in case of unit trip out
shall be provided in the manner explained below. The fast change over shall
be blocked if
a) Incomer has tripped due to bus fault
b) Circuit breaker is in test position
c) Tripping of tie breaker if the breaker does not trip
d) Auto changeover fails, all motor feeders shall be tripped before slow
changeover takes place.
Operation of unit lock-out relay shall simultaneously initiate the following

actions:
• Tripping of the turbo-generator unit.

• Tripping of the unit incomer breakers.
• Closure of the corresponding station supply breakers.
The closure of the station supply breaker shall be supervised by a synchro-

check relay permanently connected to and energised by the secondary
voltages of the station and unit bus PTs. The high-speed transfer shall be
completed within 40 milliseconds.
If the phase angle difference between the two sources exceeds the pre-
determined setting of the synchro-check relay, which shall not exceed 20
deg., an automatic “slow dead” transfer shall be made.
Provision shall be made for trip selection and if selected breaker does not trip,
last closed breaker shall trip along with remote annunciation. To felicitate fast
bus transfer operation, closing and opening operation time difference shall be
limited to 02 cycles (40 ms)
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 3 OF 20
Package : TITLE
3.3 Auto-change over between 11kV Station switchgear shall be provided when
any one of the incomer of the 11kV Station Supply has failed.
3.4 For Coal Handling Switchgear & Ash Handling Switchgear, Interlocks shall be
provided among the two incomers and bus coupler such that under normal
operation only two breakers can be closed at any given time. However for
planned live changeover between two sources, synchronising facility shall be
provided locally on the switchgear.
For this purpose, synchronising facility complete with synchro check relay,
synchronising switch, double voltmeter, double frequency meter,
synchroscope shall be provided.
During planned outage, the breaker to be brought in shall be closed after

checking synchronism of the incomer and running bus and the breaker to be
taken out shall be tripped automatically through a trip selector switch. In the
event of selected breaker failing to trip, the incoming breaker shall be tripped
after a time delay.
No automatic change-over is recommended for coal-handling and ash-

handling switchgear.
3.3kV coal handling & ash handling motors require frequent on/off operations.
As such vacuum contactors backed by HRC fuses are recommended for
controlling these drives instead of drawout vacuum type breakers.
4.0 SPARE FEEDERS
In each of the 11kV, 3.3 kV switchgear, spares feeders (one motor type, one
service transformer type) shall be provided.
5.0 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATINGS
The switchgear shall be supplied as follows:-
(a) Minimum symmetrical short-circuit current breaking capacity of 40 kA

for one sec. for 11kV, 3.3 kV Systems
(b) Minimum momentary current rating of 100 kA peak for 11kV, 3.3 kV
systems. Short circuit current withstand duration for switchgear and all
components shall be considered as 1 sec.
(c) Asymmetrical S.C current breaking capacity of the breaker shall

consider the higher time constant for decay of current in the vicinity of
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 4 OF 20
Package : TITLE
power generating stations and the breaker offered shall be suitable for
the same.
(d) The calculations for arriving at the time constant at this plant shall be
furnished to justify breaker rating and selection in accordance with
IEC-62271.
6.0 CONTINUOUS CURRENT RATINGS
(a) The continuous current rating of the 11kV unit, station switchgear
buses, and their incomer breakers, tie breakers shall be the maximum
load on the bus due to all the running auxiliaries under boiler MCR
conditions plus 20% margin rounded to next higher standard rating.
Further, the full load of all ties/service transformers/standby BFP, etc.
shall be considered on one bus for continuous current rating.
(b) The continuous current rating of the feeders shall be based on the
name plate current rating of the connected equipment with 20%
margin.
(c) To have interchangeability of breakers, breaker rating shall be

standard and limited to two types / current ratings.
7.1 The 11kV, 3.3 kV circuit breakers shall be vacuum type. Rated operating
duty of the same shall be 0-3 min-co-3 min-co. on/off control / fault /
discrepancy indications for each breaker shall be given. In case of vacuum
breakers, adequate over voltage & surge protections shall be provided for all
equipment. In case of ties, the contractor shall check the suitability of vacuum
breakers for ties and shall provide adequate protections accordingly for ties.
Vacuum Circuit Breaker shall have 3 Nos. Single Break Type completely
sealed vacuum interrupters. Vacuum Interrupters shall be latest state of the
art, with axial magnetic field principle without pinch off tube.
7.2 Motor feeders shall have local / remote selector switches on Switchgear.
Local operation shall be enabled only in test position.
7.3 Space heating arrangement for HT motor shall be provided with interlocking
scheme to switch off when motor is on. All HT panels shall be mounted on
ISMC 100 channels embedded in concrete.
7.4 Terminal arrangements shall be such that all terminals at switchgear ends
which are to be connected to remote alarms and indication at DCS shall be
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 5 OF 20
Package : TITLE
separated out and shall be kept isolated from other Terminals. 240V AC,
110V AC, 24V DC, 220V DC & other voltages shall be segregated to avoid
mix up of voltages. This is specifically required to avoid mixing of switchgear
high voltage to C & I low voltage system.
7.5 All the 11KV equipments/devices like bus support insulators, CBs, CTs, PTs
etc mounted inside the switchgear shall be suitable for continuous operation
and satisfactory performance under the following supply conditions :-
(a) Variation in supply voltage - +-10%

(b) Variation in supply frequency - +-5%
(c) Combined voltage and frequency variations: 10% absolute.
7.6 Switchgear shall be suitable for easy extension on both the sides. It shall be
possible at a later stage to add cubicles on both sides of the switchgear by
extending the bus bars
.
7.7 Secondary of CTs & VTs shall be made through disconnecting type terminals
with necessary shorting and earthing facilities. All the control wiring shall be
through stud type terminal.
.
7.8 The breaker ratings indicated in the data sheets referred to the nominal rating
of the breaker. However, breakers shall be capable of carrying continuously
at least 120% of circuit breaker current at an ambient temperature of 50 deg.
and with breaker mounted inside the panel. If a higher rated breaker is
necessary to meet this, the same shall be used.
7.9 Dummy cubicles with horizontal bus bars, power control and annunciation
cable running through the panel, if necessary, to avoid beam interfering with
cable openings and to felicitate easy maintenance shall be provided.
7.10 All the bolted joints in body of the switchgear shall be earthed through flexible
jumpers.
7.11 The cable entry shall be bottom only with separate gland plate for power and
control cables. In case of single core cables, gland plate shall be of non-
magnetic material.
7.12 All the circuit breakers/vacuum contactors shall be of fully draw out execution
with “Test”, “Service “ &” Fully withdrawn “ positions.
7.13 All indicating and integrating instruments, protection and alarm relays,
operating and indicating devices shall be visible/accessible without opening
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 6 OF 20
Package : TITLE
the instrument compartment door. All the hand reset relays shall be mounted
on the panel at a conventional height for operation.
7.14 The switchgear shall be suitable for bottom cable entry. The height of cable
termination shall be such that termination & glanding shall be carried out
easily, minimum shall be 700mm
7.15 All the internal wiring shall be carried out using 1100V grade, stranded copper
conductor with PVC insulation and shall be flame, vermin and rodent proof.
The minimum size of the copper conductor used for panel wiring shall be as
follows:
(a) All circuit except CT &PTs : 1.5 sq. mm per lead.

(b) CTs/PTs : 2.5 sq. mm per lead.
The minimum number of strands per conductor shall be 07. Extra flexible
wires shall be used for internal wiring of the devices mounted on moving
parts. The control wiring shall be with min 2.5 sq mm.
7.16 Following colour coding shall be used for internal wiring:-
(a) Red, Yellow & Blue : For respective phase /PT wires
(b) Black : For neutral wires
(c) Green : For Earth wires
(d) Red ferruled wires for trip circuit.
(e) All other with grey coloured wires
7.17 The inter panel wiring shall be brought out to a separate set of terminal blocks
located near the slots meant for inter panel connecting wires.
7.18 At least 20% spare terminal shall be provided on each panel and these spare
terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all rows of terminal blocks. A
clearance of 250 mm shall be maintained between terminal blocks and gland
plate and 150 mm between two rows of terminal blocks.
7.19 The magnitude of switching surges produced under any and all operating
conditions shall not exceed 2.2 P.U. rated peak line to earth voltage with time
to crest up to 01 micro seconds for the following conditions :-
(a) Switching off motor running at full load.

(b) Switching on decelerating motor.
(c) Switching on/off motor with locked rotor.
(d) Switching off unloaded transformer.
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 7 OF 20
Package : TITLE
If the magnitude of the voltage surge produced exceeds this value, the vendor
shall provide surge arrestors to restrict the voltage peaks to above mentioned
value. The bidder shall furnish along with his bid, proof of his breakers /
vacuum contactors having been tested at internationally recognised test lab
for motor switching duty in addition to all other tests.
7.20 Breakers shall be with motor wound spring operating mechanism. Closing
action of the CB shall compress the opening spring ready for tripping.
7.21 In case of SF6 breakers, density monitor and two-stage pressure switch for
alarm and interlocking shall be provided. Breaker shall be capable to break
rated current at rated voltage at zero gauge pressure of SF6.
7.22 Switchgear design shall comprise fully compartment execution having

separate vertical sections for each circuit. All the doors, panels, removable
covers shall be gasketted all around with neoprene gaskets. All louvers shall
have screens with filters. Each switchgear shall be fitted with a label on front
and rear of cubicle.
7.23 Switchgear shall have separate compartments for the following components
(a) Set of 3 phase bus bars.

(b) Each of main switching devices.
(c) Instrument transformers.
(d) Cable termination.
(e) Metering and relaying devices.
The partitions of fore listed compartments shall have the following degrees of
protection
• Complete protection against approach to live parts or contact with internal

moving parts i.e. IP6X class for all the above compartments excepts for
item (a) i. e set of bus bars.
• Compartments of each set of bus bars shall be provided with protection

against approach to live parts or contact with internal parts, by tools, wires
or similar objects of thickness greater than 1.00 mm i.e. Class IP4X
7.24 CONSTRUCTION
• The switchboard shall be sheet steel fabricated, bolted true metal clad.
• Bellivelli washers shall be used for all the bolted connections for positive
bonding and earthing of complete structures.
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 8 OF 20
Package : TITLE
• Observation window shall be provided on rear cable compartment door

for viewing cable terminations.
• The connection between the bus bars and the terminals of the circuit
breakers shall be suitable shrouded. Similarly all busbar joints shall be
shrouded.
• Automatic operated, metallic and earthed safety shutters shall be
provided to shroud bus side and cable side main disconnecting contacts
of the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker is taken to test position.
The shutters shall have CAUTION LABEL.
• Current transformer shall be provided on the cable side of circuit
breaker.
• Doors of all switchgears shall be gasketed with neoprene gasket to
prevent entry of vermin and dust. No opening should be left. Steel
screws, bolts and washers shall be plated.
• Pressure release flaps / plates / valves shall be provided for different
compartments to vent the internal arcing faults.
• 01 number panel illumination lamp with door limit switch shall be
provided in LT chamber of all panels.
• Bus bars shall be of Copper with proper tin / silver plating at joints.
Joints in bus bars shall be provided with FRP detachable shrouds. For
long bus bars, suitable expansion joints shall be provided.
• It shall be possible to extend the bus bars at either end of the
switchboard for addition of future units. Both ends of bus bars must be
suitably drilled for this purpose.
• Continuous running Earth Busbar shall be provided in cable chamber for
ease of cable armour earthing.
• Surge arrestors, wherever provided shall be connected to earth bus
positively through Flexible cable / copper braid.
8.0 CUBICLE COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
Each circuit breaker and contactor cubicle shall be complete with following
minimum accessories:-
(a) One spring return TNC switch.

(b) Large size cluster LED’s for following condition of breaker/contactor:-
(i) “ON”(Red)
(ii) “OFF” (green)
(iii) Trip relay supervision (White).
(iv) Spring charged (Blue)
(v) DC supply supervision (Violet)
(c) Limit switched for test and service position interlocking.
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 9 OF 20
Package : TITLE
(d) Double pole switch for DC control supply and spring charging motor
with HRC fuses
(e) Anti pumping relay.
(f) Sufficient terminal blocks
(g) Auxiliary relays as required for contact multiplication
(h) Breaker operation counters.
(i) Protective relays along with trip circuit supervision relay and master
trip relay.
(j) Meters as indicated elsewhere
(k) Required CTs/ PTs/ CBCTs.
(l) Surge arrestors/ suppressor, if required.
(m) Space heaters.
(n) One Local/Remote Switch.
(o) AC Supply On/Off switches with Short Circuit protection.
(p) Local remote switch for motor feeders.
FUSES FOR VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE FEEDER:
• Fuses shall have a striker, which operates without use of explosives. In

case any fuse operates the striker shall open the contactor thus shutting
down the motor. This opening shall preferably be achieved through
direct acting link system or alternatively limit switch can be operated by
striker pin of fuse and the contactor tripped through interposing relay.
• Metal Oxide type surge arrestors shall be provided for contactors motor
feeders.
9.0 BUS AND LINE PTs.
Bus PT over voltage factor shall be 1.9 for 08 hours.
Each BUS and LINE PTs shall be complete with following minimum
accessories.
(a) PTs shall be fully draw out type with required no of cores and ratios, as
specified elsewhere.
(b) 11kV link type HRC fuses on HV side and cartridge type 110V grade on
LV side.
(c) Voltmeter with selector switch.
(d) Under voltage and No voltage relays with timers and fuse fail relays.
(e) Tripping relays for tripping of motor feeder on prolonged loss of voltage.
(f) Required auxiliary relays.
(g) LED’s for voltage indication.
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 10 OF 20
Package : TITLE
(h) Auxiliary PTs, as required.

(i) DC and AC control supply and changeover switches with Short Circuit
protection.
(j) AC/DC supply supervision LED’s and Relays.
(k) Earth fault relay.
(l) Transducers as required.
10.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER / BUS BAR EARTHING FACILITIES.
(a) It shall be possible to connect each circuit or set of three phase bus bars of
the switchgears to earth, either through earthing switch or through earthing
truck mounted earthing device.
(b) Earthing switches/ Earthing devices shall be mechanically/ electrically

interlocked with the associated breakers/Isolator to prevent earthing of Live
circuits / Bus bars.
(c) In case the earthing facilities comprises earthing trucks to be inserted in place
of circuit breakers, separate earthing truck shall be supplied for each type &
size of breakers.
(d) External earthing truck shall be completed with PT and indicating lamps to
indicate, just prior to insertion in place, if the bus is live.
(e) Positive mechanism interlock shall be provided to prevent insertion of

earthing truck in case busbars are in live condition.
(f) In case breaker design is with integral earth switches, it shall be completed
with requirements above. In such case quantity of earthing truck, if indicated
shall be redundant.
11.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATING MECHANISM.
Circuit breaker shall be power operated by motor charged spring operating

mechanism. It shall be strong, rigid, positive and fast in operation to ensure
that: -
(a) Main poles of the breaker shall be such that unless otherwise specified,
the maximum difference between the instant of contact touching during
closing shall not exceed half cycle of rated frequency.
(b) Operating mechanism shall be non-pumping electrically and

mechanically under every method of closing.
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 11 OF 20
Package : TITLE
(c) The closing release shall operate correctly at all values of voltage
between 85 and 110% of rated voltage. A shunt trip shall operate
correctly under all operating conditions of the circuit breakers up to the
rated breaking capacity of the circuit breaker and all value of supply
voltage between 70 & 110% of rated voltage
.
(d) After failure of power supply to spring charging motor, at least one open-
close-open operation of the circuit breaker shall be possible.
(e) Closing action of the circuit breaker shall compress the opening spring
ready for tripping.
(f) When closing spring discharged, after closing a beaker, closing spring
shall automatically be charged for the next operation.
(g) Alternative means must be provided to charge the closing spring

manually when power supply to motor is not available.
(h) All Breakers shall be mounted on an integral breaker handling truck /

carriage with wheels for easy withdrawal on floor.
(i) Mechanical / Electrical interlocks shall be provided to prevent mal-

operation and in particular to ensure that :
• The breaker can be operated only if it is in service or in test position.

• Movement of the circuit breaker truck from service to test or test to
isolated position OR in reverse order shall be possible only when
circuit breaker is off.
• In the operating positions of the breaker, the circuit breaker shall be
securely locked. It can be withdrawn or inserted only with appropriate
operations of the interlocking levers.
• The operating lever facilities to overcome the contact pressure at the
main disconnecting contacts while pushing in or drawing out.
• Test to isolated position of circuit breaker can be achieved only when
the control plug is removed.
• Isolated to test position of circuit breaker can be achieved only after
inserting control plug.
• It shall not be possible to withdraw the breaker when it is in closed
position.
• It shall not be possible to plug in a breaker with earthing isolator
closed.
• It shall not be possible to close the earthing isolator with breaker
plugged in.
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 12 OF 20
Package : TITLE
• Pulling out of auxiliary circuit plug with breaker in service position

shall not be possible.
• Pushing in breaker to service position with auxiliary circuit plug not in
position shall not be possible.
• Opening of compartment door with breaker / isolating switch in
Service & Intermediate and ON position and vice versa shall not be
possible.
(k) All the non-conducting metal parts of the circuit breaker truck shall be
bonded together and shall make perfect electrical connections to earth
through substantial sliding contacts, at service and test positions.
Such sliding contacts shall be arranged to make before power plug-in
and interrupt after power draw out.
(l) Isolator shall have quick make and quick break mechanism. The
moving blade of the isolator shall be dead when isolator is ‘OFF.
12.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
12.1 Separate CTs / CT cores shall be provided for:
• Protection
• Metering
• Differential protection of motors
• Differential protection of UT and ST.
12.2 All CTs at 11kV level shall be dry resin cast only. The burden and the
parameters of the CTs shall be commensurate with the connected loads
including lead burdens changes during engineering stage and 20% spare.
12.3 In case of smaller rated CTs (say 200 Amp and less), at the expected fault
level, the CT saturation may result in the non-operation of the instantaneous
short circuit protection. In such cases, separate protection CT core with
higher ratio, selected to avoid saturation at high fault currents shall be
provided.
12.4 Calculations for sizing and selection of various parameters shall be submitted
for owner’s approval.
12.5 For cable side earthing and bus side earthing separate earth switches / trucks
shall be provided for each 11kV switchgear.
12.6 All breakers of identical ratings shall be interchangeable and suitable

mechanical / electromechanical interlocks to ensure that earth switch is not
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 13 OF 20
Package : TITLE
closed / truck is not inserted when the bus or circuit is live shall be provided.
Safety interlocks to prevent with drawal when breaker in closed position shall
be included.
12.7 Operation of an isolator shall not be possible unless the associated circuit
breaker is in the open position. Both electrical and mechanical interlocks shall
be provided.
12.8 No live parts shall be accessible on opening the circuit breaker compartment
door.
12.9 Circuit breaker / isolator cubicles shall be provided with safety shutters
operated automatically by the movement of the circuit breaker / isolator
carriage, to cover the stationary isolated contacts when the breaker / isolator
is withdrawn. Padlocking facilities shall be provided for locking the shutters
positively in the closed position. It shall, however, be possible to open the
shutters intentionally against spring pressure for testing purposes.
12.10 The breaker / isolator carriage shall be earthed before the circuit breaker /
isolator reaches the test position from fully withdrawn position. In case of
breakers / isolators with automatic disconnecting type of auxiliary
disconnects, the carriage shall be earthed before the auxiliary disconnects
are made and the carriage earthing shall break only after the auxiliary
disconnects break.
12.11 Caution name plate, “Caution Live Terminals” shall be provided at all points
where the terminals are likely to remain live and isolation is possible only at
remote end, i.e., incoming terminals of main isolators.
12.12 Each switchgear shall be provided with 2 nos., 220V DC auxiliary power
supply feeders each with 100% rating. Provision shall be made for
changeover facility such that in case of failure of one power source, other
shall cut in automatically. Local monitoring of DC supply shall also be
provided for DC supply before & after selection through LED.
12.13 All indication lamps shall be LED only.
12.14 An operation counter visible from outside shall be provided for each breaker.
Mechanical locking facility to prevent insertion of breaker if breaker under
permit shall be provided.
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 14 OF 20
Package : TITLE
13 CONTROL ROOM ALARMS / INDICATIONS / SOE POINTS.
Following indications / alarms are the minimum to be provided in the

DCS/UCP in control room. In addition to the same additional indications /
alarms considered necessary during detailed engineering stage shall also be
provided. Out of these some shall be selected for the sequential event
recording. For each feeder grouped alarm for any abnormal condition of that
feeder shall be provided on the control panels. The control / interlock
schemes for various types of feeders shall be commensurate with their
application. Status indication of entire 11kV systems shall be available on the
DCS/UCP.
(a) Breaker panel
(i) Status Indication

• Breaker on
• Breaker off
• Breaker in remote
• Breaker in service
• Breaker in test
• Circuit side earthed
• Bus side earthed (as applicable)
• Breaker ready to close
(ii) Alarms
• L/O Relay operated
• SF6 gas pressure low (in case of
SF6 CB)
• Trip circuit unhealthy
• Breaker spring charged
(iii) Status indication & control for all motors breakers of the Unit and
common auxiliaries located in TG building and in control of main
plant control room including CW pumps
(b) In addition to the above, the following alarms / trip shall be provided on
the DCS with grouped alarm at UCP for the following breakers:
(c) Incomers from unit / station transformer
• Sources paralleled beyond pre-set time

• Selected outgoing breaker trip
(d) VT Panels
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 15 OF 20
Package : TITLE
• Bus under voltage L/O relay operated

• Bus P.T fuse failed
• DC supply – 1 failed.
• DC supply – 2 failed
• Bus PT not in service
• AC supply fails
• Bus earthed
(e) Motor Feeders
• Overload alarm
• Feeder fault / closing permissive not
available
• Breaker trip circuit trouble
• Trip through process interlock.
• Local push button pressed
• Breaker spring not charged and gas
pressure low alarm
(f) Service Transformer Feeders
• Oil temp Hi alarm & trip

• Oil level low alarm
• Winding temperature Hi alarm & trip.
• Buchholtz relay alarm & trip.
• PRD operated
(g) Tie Feeders
• Sources paralleled beyond pre-set time.
(h) Analog Parameters
All the parameters, for which the transducers applicable, shall be

displayed in the DCS/UCP in control room. Provision for these
transducers shall be made.
(i) Control
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 16 OF 20
Package : TITLE
Incomers /tie and bus coupler controls

All switchgear located in TG building shall be controlled from DCS/UCP
in unit control room, independently from UCP and DCS.
All other services

All the motors and other equipment shall be controlled from
respective control rooms/Control Panels/ DCS.
Emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided for all drives near

equipment except emergency drives and shall be wired directly to MCC.
In case of emergency drives, emergency start PB shall be provided.
IPR’s shall be provided for breaker control from DCS.
The design calculations for MV switchgear shall be furnished for

approval. The synchronising facility shall be available on UCP for control
of both 11 kV and 3.3 kV breakers.
14 METERING AND PROTECTION
CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate protection/metering for the switchgear

panels. Accuracy of all CT s/ PT s, transducers, & meters on 11kV switchgear
shall be 0.5 class. All indicating instruments shall be 96 sq. mm with 240 deg
scale, taut band, and semi flush mounting. Separate meters shall be provided
for each of the feeders mentioned below if the same is not part of numerical
relay.
RELAYS (NUMERICAL PROTECTION RELAYS)
All protective relay shall be numerical only and shall comply with the following
requirements.
• All relays specified shall be flush mounted in dust proof cases and shall
match the appearance of the instruments mounted on the same panel.
• Protective relays shall be withdrawal type. Trip circuits shall be automatically
broken and current transformer secondary circuits shorted, when a relay is
withdrawn from its case. A marking strip shall be provided in front of each
terminal block and a diagram plate at the back of each case to identify
connections.
• Provision shall be made for insertion of test plug at the front for testing and
calibration using external source of power without disconnecting permanent
wiring. Test plugs shall permit the shorting of any current transformer circuits.
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 17 OF 20
Package : TITLE
• All the protective Relays shall be latest Numerical Type, having

communication protocol – IEC60870-5-103.
• Relay shall have the following communication ports
(a) Front emergency port-RS232 for direct access of data through Laptop.
(b) Rear service port-RS485.
• Relay shall have resolution of 1 msec with real time stamping.
• Relay shall be type tested for EMC TEST for interference immunity. Type
test certificate shall be submitted for the offered relay.
• Relay shall have functional keys, available on the front keypad, for ease of
operations.
• Relay shall have freely programmable LEDs, BIs & BOs.
• Relay shall have fault recording facility and shall have facility and shall have
facility to record last 8 faults with real time stamping. Fault down loading
and analysis of fault with graphical representation shall be possible. Relay
shall have minimum 4x setting groups.
• Vendor shall include the hardware and software for communication of relays
for parameterisation and down load / analysis of fault data from relays. One
complete set of cables, accessories, Laptop PC with licenses software and
A4 LaserJet printer shall be included in the scope of supply.
The minimum protections / metering required for various typical feeders shall
include, but not limited to the following:
(a) Incomers from UT and ST
Protections Metering
• Over current protection • Ammeter & voltmeter with

selector switch
• Earth fault protection • kWh meter
• Wattmeter
• Fuse failure relay • Transducers as required
(b) Tie breakers.
• Over current protection • Ammeter & voltmeter
with selector switch
• Earth fault protection • kWh meter
• Watt meter
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 18 OF 20
Package : TITLE
• Transducers as required
(c) Bus PT Feeders
• Under voltage protection • Voltmeter with selector
switch
• Fuse failure protection • Transducers as required
(d) Motor feeders
Relays selected for motor protection shall be numerical type
• Composite motor protection relay • Ammeter with selector
(99) which should have atleast switch
following protections:-
(a) Thermal Overload trip and
alarm
(b) Locked rotor protection.
(c) Earth fault protection, through
CBCT.
(d) Over current protection.
(e) Blocking of motor starting after
allowed hot/cold starts with
remote alarms.
(f) Starting current measurement
and storage facility.
(g) Negative phase sequence
protection.
(h) Over load alarm
• Differential protection for motor • Transducers shall be

feeders (rated 1000kW or above) included in the
switchgear.
• Under voltage protection with fuse
fail relay interlocking
• Short circuit protection (with high
ratio CTs to avoid saturation
during sort circuit)
Additional Timer if motor starting
time > motor locked rotor
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 19 OF 20
Package : TITLE
withstand time.
@ Composite motor protection relay shall be programmable numerical with

self-diagnostic features. All motor protection relays shall be identical for
interchange ability, parameters adjustable & programmable at site based on
motor size.
(e) Service Transformer Feeders
• Over current protection • Ammeter with selector
switch
• Earth fault protection • Wattmeter
• Short circuit protection • kWh meter
• Transducers as required
The transducers shall have the following specifications.

• 4-20mA output.
• Minimum two galavanicaly isolated outputs
• Accuracy class better than 0.5%.
15 TESTS AND TEST REPORTS
15.1 The VENDOR shall completely assemble, with all the associated equipment
including bought out items mounted and wired and test each cubicle as per
relevant standards. Oscillographic test records for closing and tripping timings
of the breakers shall also be carried out.
15.2 Routine tests shall be carried out on completely assembled equipment as per
relevant standards. Valid type test certificate shall be submitted. If valid type
test certificate is not available, type test shall be carried out on one of the
switchgear.
15.3 Functional tests shall be carried out to demonstrate the specified control and
interlocks.
15.4 Copies of the test certificates for all bought out items shall be submitted for
the Purchaser’s approval before despatch of the switchgear.
ISSUE
R0
01
SHEET 20 OF 20
Package : TITLE
15.5 Same design / model of panel, breaker and interrupters as offered shall be
complete type tested for following tests and detailed type test reports shall be
submitted along with the bid.
• Short circuit test and short time current withstand test for 3 sec. for panel
and breaker.
• Duty cycle test.
• Mechanical Endurance test.
• P.F. and Impulse withstand test.
• Internal Arc test as per IEC for all compartments.
• Temperature rise test.
ISSUE
R0
.
LIMITED SHEET1 of 4
001 HT SWITCHGEAR
DATA SHEET-A3.05
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS TABLE
The switchgears shall comply with the particulars indicated below and the
CONTRACTOR shall furnish the details in respective column given below :
Sr. Description unit Client Bidders

No. specification specifications
1.0 Manufacturer’s name *
2.0 Applicable standard. *
3.0 Nominal system voltage, phase & kV 11, 3 phase,
frequency 50 Hz
4.0 System neutral earthing Non effectively
considered earthed
5.0 Maximum system voltage kV 12
6.0 One minute power frequency kV rms *
withstand voltage
1.2/50 uS impulse withstand kV *
voltage peak
7.0 Switching Over voltage generated KV p/ *
:_ Micro
(a) Switching off motor with sec.
locked rotor
(b) Switching off unloaded
transformer.
8.0 Short circuit withstand capability
a) Short time for 1 sec KA rms 40 (Minimum)

b) Dynamic rating KA 100 (Minimum)
peak
9.0 Reference ambient temperature Deg. C 50
10.0 Continuous current rating under A *
site reference ambient condition
11.0 Maximum temperature of Bus Deg C 90 deg. C for non

Bars, dropper, connectors & silver plated joints
contacts at continuous current 105 deg. C for
rating under site reference ambient silver plated joints
temperature
12.0 Material of bus bars considered Al. Alloy / Copper
13.0 Cable entry Bottom only
14.0 Thickness of sheet steel
enclosures/ doors.
Cold Rolled mm 2
Hot rolled mm 2.5
15.0 Degree of protection Bus bar – IP4X
For other –IP6X
For complete
switchgear -IP 52
.
LIMITED SHEET2 of 4
001 HT SWITCHGEAR
DATA SHEET-A3.05
16.0 Shade of paints Powder coated

paint of shade 631
of IS – 5.
17.0 Earthing bus bar size & material 50 x10 mm (min)
considered GS
18.0 Clearance in air of live parts
a) phase to phase *
b) phase to earth *
19.0 Circuit breaker
a) Type Vacuum /SF6
b) Rated operating duty O-3min-CO-3min-
CO
c) Rated current at site reference
ambient temp. A *
d) Rated breaking current KA rms 40 Min.
e) Rated making current KA 100 Min.

peak
f) Short time current withstand KA rms 40 Min.
capacity for 1 sec duration
g) Asymmetrical breaking current
(1) AC component KA rms 40 Min.
(2) DC component as per IEC – 62271
h) operating time
(1) opening time Cycles 3
(2) closing time Cycles 4 (2 for fast change
over scheme
breakers for tie and
incomers of unit
buses)
g) Closing and opening coil *
particulars.
j) Switching over voltage factor 2.2
20.0 Trip free operating mechanism Motor charged
type spring (manual trip
& close facility to
be provided)
21.0 Auxiliary control voltage for trip, 220 V DC ( +/- 15
close, annunciation and spring %)
charging.
22.0 Auxiliary control voltage for space 240V AC, 1-Ph, 2
heater, DC failure annunciation, wire, 50 Hz
motor winding / space heaters,
lighting etc
23.0 Breakers application
a) transformer control Yes

b) Motor control Yes
.
LIMITED SHEET3 of 4
001 HT SWITCHGEAR
DATA SHEET-A3.05
24.0 Details of Vacuum contactor *
• Type
• Rated operating duty
• Rated current at site reference
ambient temp.
• Rated breaking current
• Rated making current
• Short time current withstand
• Asymmetrical breaking current
1. AC component
2. DC component
• Operating time
1. Opening time
2. Closing time
• Closing and opening coil
particulars.
25.0 Details of Isolators *

1. Type
2. Rated operating duty
3. Rated current at site reference
ambient temp.
4. Rated breaking current
5. Rated making current
6. Short time current withstand
7. Asymmetrical breaking current
a. AC component
b. DC component
8. Operating time
a. Opening time
b. Closing time
26.0 Details of LA/SA *
27.0 Details of CTs (CTs shall be cast
1. Type resin, bar primary,
2. Ratio Class E or Better.)
3. Burden
4. Accuracy class
5. Knee point voltage
6. Magnetizing current at Vk/2
7. Secondary resistance
8. Class of insulation
9. Short time & dynamic
current rating
10. Applicable standard
11. No. of cores
28.0 Details of CBCT *
.
LIMITED SHEET4 of 4
001 HT SWITCHGEAR
DATA SHEET-A3.05
29.0 Details of VTs (Over voltage

1. Type, Ratio, Burden factor shall be 1.3
2. Accuracy class continuous, 1.9 for
3. Magnetizing characteristic 08 hours.)
4. Method of connection
5. Class of insulation
6. Rated voltage factor (
continuous & 8 hours)
7. Applicable standard
8. No. of cores
30.0 Particular of earthing truck & earth *
switches
Particular of breaker handling tools *
31.0 Particulars of HV current limiting
fuses
1. Rated current A By bidder
2. Voltage class KV 12
3. Symmetrical interrupting rating KA rms 40 kA at 11kV
4. Applicable standard *
32.0 Particulars of meters *
33.0 Particulars of relays *
34.0 Particular of spring charging *
motors
35.0 Panels construction details *
1) ‘*’ Information shall be filled furnished by CONTRACTOR along with offer.

2) ‘**’ The CONTRACTOR shall furnish these details after award of contract.
TCE.5103A – VOLUME – V
ANDHRA POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LIMITED
H-500-01
SHEET 1 OF 15
Package : TITLE 415 V SWITCHGEAR

Balance of Plant
1.0 POWER SOURCES FOR 400V SWITCHGEAR
1.1 415V system shall be 3 phases, 3-wire system with solid neutral earthing,
single phase feeders shall be provided with 415/240 V control transformers
In each bus section. The switchgear shall derive power from the
designated service transformers or from 415V switchgear based on
geographical location and unit/common loads. These switchgears shall be
provided as and where required for different systems at different locations
based on plant requirements.
1.2 The CONTRACTOR shall propose the configuration/sources best suited

for the system without sacrificing the standby philosophy, reliability,
flexibility of operations and the unit and station load demarcations.
1.3 One common maintenance distribution board shall be provided in main

plant area with two 100 % rated mechanically interlocked incomers (from
different buses):
• Elevators
• Welding work
• Hoists
• Power receptacles
• Ventilation distribution board
• Input supply to 240 V / 24 V ACDB
• Auxiliary control supply for panels
• Any other miscellaneous requirements
2.0 FEEDER DETAILS
2.1 Each of the switchgear / MCC shall be provided with two bus sections, two
incomers and a bus coupler each rated for 100% of the loads connected to
the switchgear.
2.2 The switch gear / MCC shall be provided with suitable number and type of
outgoing feeders for the respective auxiliary loads of the system/area,
power supply feeders to various panels, lighting, space heating panels,
control cabinets and all other loads encountered in the plant.
2.3 In addition, following feeders shall be provided in each bus section of all
switchgear.
(a) Spare feeders: Minimum of one number feeder of each rating and type
in each switchgear /MCC
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 2 OF 15

Balance of Plant
(The above quantity is the minimum requirement, at the time of

handing over the plant. Any additional quantity required for any
increase/change during detailed engineering stage also shall be duly
considered.)
(b) Bus VT module
(c) 240V, 1 phase space heating.
(d) Switchgear test supply module.
(e) Alarm module for common alarm for out going feeder fault.
(f) DC supply alarm module for incomer, bus coupler fault
(g) Supply to changeover switch for common maintenance distribution
board
2.4 To feed 3-phase, 4-wire, power/welding receptacles, one separate 400V

welding distribution board along with transformer of adequate capacity to
be provided in each unit/ area. Each circuit of this welding distribution
board shall feed maximum of 3 nos. welding/power receptacles.
2.5 POWER RECEPTACLES
2.5.1 3-phase, 4 wire, 5 pin, 63A power receptacle / welding receptacles with
switch shall be provided with, two in each floor of TG building, 3 (three) in
each boiler platforms and two (2) in each pump house & switchgear rooms.
Welding receptacles of the TG building and boiler shall be fed from welding
distribution board referred at Cl. No.1.2. Also the feasibility of feeding the
welding receptacles of other areas shall be preferably from the nearest
welding distribution board.
2.5.2 The receptacle shall be industrial heavy-duty type and shall have suitable
interlock facility for safety. The receptacle shall conform to IS 1293 and the
switch to IS 4064.
2.5.3 One receptacle in all battery rooms for cell charging shall be provided.
2.5.4 One power/welding receptacle in each ESP, each in transformer yard,

each in cooling tower and conveying systems.
2.5.5 One, 400 A, 3 phase, heavy duty, receptacle shall be provided at boiler,
cooling tower basin and TG 0.0 m in each unit.
2.5.6 2 nos. welding receptacles (3 phase, 4 wire, 5 pin) shall be provided on

each floor of junction towers, transfer towers, screen house, bunker floor,
hopper area and switchgear room of CH. The power receptacle shall be
flame proof and weather proof. The receptacle shall be provided along the
conveyor including trunk conveyer at a distance of every 50 m, at least one
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 3 OF 15

Balance of Plant
if the length is less than 50m. The receptacles in FOPH and CH shall
be flame proof only.
3.0 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS
3.1 The fault level on the 415V buses shall be calculated based on transformer
contribution and motor contribution and shall be limited to 40kA. However
switchgear and all components shall be designed for 50kA.
3.2 A margin of 10% over the S.C current thus calculated shall be applied and
rounded off to next higher standard ratings and this value shall be adopted for
the switchgear. The momentary current rating shall be 2.1 times this value.
3.3 The short time current withstands duration for switchgear and all components
shall be considered as one second.
4.0 CONTINUOUS CURRENTS
4.1 The continuous current rating of the bus bars, the incomers, bus couplers of
the switchgear, which are fed by the transformers, shall be rated at the LV
side full load current of the corresponding transformers with 20% margin
rounded off to the next higher standard rating.
5.1 All the 415V equipments/devices like bus support insulators, CBs, CTs, PTs
etc mounted inside the switchgear shall be suitable for continuous operation
and satisfactory performance under the following supply conditions.
(a) Variation in supply voltage - +/-10%

(b) Variation in supply frequency - +/-5%
(c) Combined voltage and frequency variations- 10% absolute.
5.2 All bus bar, bus-taps shall be insulated with close fitting sleeve of PVC
insulation with high dielectric strength.
5.3 The switchgear shall be totally enclosed, metal clad, sheet steel fabricated,
indoor, floor mounted, fully drawout, modular type construction, dust and
vermin proof of uniform height of not more than 2450 mm, easily extendable
on both sides having switchgear designation indicating label’s on front and
rear, in single/ double front execution in totally draw out. Proper gasketting
shall be provided all around the perimeter of the adjacent panels, panel and
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 4 OF 15

Balance of Plant
base frame, removable cover and doors. The switchboard shall be fully
compartmentalized conforming to requirements of IS 8623.
5.4 Operating devices shall be incorporated only in front of the switchgear. The
control wiring shall be with min 2.5 sq mm.
5.5 Switchgear shall be divided in to distinct vertical section of :-

(a) Completely Enclosed busbar compartment running horizontally.
(b) Individual feeder modules in multi tier arrangements.
(c) Enclosed vertical bus bars serving all modules in vertical section.
(d) Vertical cable alley covering entire height and minimum 300 mm wide and
shall have hinged doors.
(e) A horizontal separate enclosure for all-auxiliary power and control bus as
required.
5.6 All modules of identical size & type shall be fully interchangeable without any
modifications. (The ratings of CB/MCCB/LBS for incomer/ bus coupler of each
415 V switchgear/ MCC/ACDB shall be identical)
5.7 The sheet steel to be used for the metal enclosed switchgear shall be
minimum 2.5 mm thick hot rolled or 2.0 mm cold rolled.
5.8 The cable entry shall be bottom only with separate gland plate for power and
control cable. In case of single core cables, gland plate shall be of non
magnetic material.
5.9 All air circuit breakers (ACBs) for incomer/ bus coupler/ tie/ motor feeders,
and moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) for all outgoing circuits which will
not be closed from remote, shall be of short circuit performance category P2
as per IS:2516 Parts I & II.
5.10 The MCCBs shall be of current limiting type. When MCCBs are used as short
circuit protection devices for motor modules they shall provide type C co-
ordination with associated contactor and thermal overload relay as per IS:
8544 under all operating conditions for the all currents upto the design fault
current. The MCCBs on upstream and downstream shall be co-ordinated.
Test reports to prove the requirements of Type-C Co-ordination shall be
furnished.
5.11 For each switchgear two number 220V DC control supply shall be provided
with a manual selection for changing over to either supply. Necessary
voltage monitoring contactors (for remote alarm) and indication lamps shall be
provided.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 5 OF 15

Balance of Plant
5.12 Minimum of two NO and two NC spare contacts of all contactors, relay
devices shall be wired to terminal block.
5.13 For CT & VT circuits disconnecting type of terminals shall be provided
5.14 Power cable terminal arrangement and size shall be suitable to accommodate
two or more number of cables based on requirements and shall facilitate easy
maintenance.
5.15 Terminal arrangements shall be such that all terminals at switchgear ends,
which are to be connected to remote alarms and indication at DCS, shall be
separated out and shall be kept isolated from other Terminals. 240 V AC, 110
V AC, 24 V DC, 220 V DC & other voltages shall be segregated to avoid mix
up of voltages. This is specifically required to avoid mixing of switchgear high
voltage to C & I low voltage system.
5.16 All CT s/ PT s, transducers and meters on 415 V system shall be class 1.0.
All meter shall be taut band, 270 deg. Reflection. Metres for motor feeders
shall be with suppressed scale. For MCC verticals, CT pertaining to a
particular module should be mounted in the respective withdrawable module it
self. CT should not be mounted in cable alley.
5.17 Switchgear shall be suitable for easy extension on both the sides. It shall be
possible at a later stage to add cubicles on both sides of the switchgear by
extending the bus bars
5.18 Secondary of CTs & VTs shall be made through disconnecting type terminals
(Elmex make CATD M4) with necessary shorting and earthing facilities. All
the control wiring shall be through stud type terminal (CAT M4, Elmex type)
5.20 Dummy cubicles with horizontal bus bars, power control and annunciation
cable running through the panel, if necessary, to avoid beam interfering with
cable openings and to felicitate easy maintenance shall be provided.
5.21 All the bolted joints in body of the switchgear shall be earthed through flexible
jumpers.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 6 OF 15

Balance of Plant
5.22 All indicating and integrating instruments, protection and alarm relays,
operating and indicating devices shall be visible/ accessible without opening
the instrument compartment door. All the hand reset relays shall be mounted
on the panel at a conventional height for operation.
5.23 All the internal wiring shall be carried out using 1100V grade, stranded copper
conductor with PVC insulation and shall be flame, vermin and rodent proof.
The minimum size of the copper conductor used for panel wiring shall be as
follows:
(a) All circuit except CT &PTs: 1.5 sq mm per lead.

(b) CTs/PTs : 2.5 sq mm/per lead.
The minimum number of strands per conductor shall be 07. Extra flexible
wires shall be used for internal wiring of the Devices mounted on moving
parts.
5.24 Following colour coding shall be used for internal wiring:-
(a) Red, Yellow & Blue: For respective phase /PT wires.
(b) Black : For neutral wires.
(c) Green : For Earth wires
(d) Red ferruled wires for trip circuit.
(e) All other with grey coloured wires.
5.25 The inter panel wiring shall be brought out to a separate set of terminal blocks
located near the slots meant for inter panel connecting wires.
5.26 At least 20% spare terminal shall be provided on each panel and this spare
terminal shall be uniformly distributed on all rows of terminal blocks. A
clearance of 250 mm shall be maintained between terminal blocks and gland
plate and 150 mm between two rows of terminal blocks.
5.27 All the electrical equipment shall be fed from main MCC only and if any
specific arrangement is needed, separate panel for that shall be provided in
switchgear room. Local panels shall be avoided as far as possible except
emergency drives like DC EOP / JOP.
5.28 All LT panels shall be mounted at least on ISMC 100 channels to prevent
ingress of water.
5.29 All hardware required for meeting the functional requirements stated above,
whether specifically listed out in the specification or not, shall be included in
the scope of supply.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 7 OF 15

Balance of Plant
5.30 Current transducers, power transducers and Voltage transducers shall be

provided for remote metering.
5.31 The following minimum protections shall be provided for incomers and
bus couplers.
• 3 phase inverse time over current relays

• Earth fault relay ( for incomer only)
5.32 Separate CTs / cores shall be provided for protection and metering circuits.
5.33 Synchronising gear shall include a check synchronising relay, double

voltmeters, double frequency meters, synchroscope. It shall include guard
relay, voltage transformer, lamp indications of different colours (Red, Green)
for check synchronising relay to indicate “In-Synchronism” and “Out of
Synchronism” limits, a pair of lamps to indicate “In-Synchronism” limit by dark
lamp / bright lamp method.
5.34 The cable terminations inside the cable alley shall be completely shrouded so
that it shall be possible to work on any one of the terminations by switching
OFF the corresponding feeder switch only.
5.35 All bezels, handles, screws, bolts, washers, hinges, etc. shall be of the best
quality electro galvanized or passivated to withstand attach from corrosive
atmosphere.
5.36 Horizontal busbar chambers shall be at the top of the board for bottom cable
entry. Bus bars shall be completely shrouded to prevent metal pieces falling
on the busbar during maintenance.
5.37 In case of copper to aluminium connections, proper treatment shall be given

to minimise the bimetallic effect. That is, all joint surfaces at aluminium to
copper joints shall be silver/tin plates, alternatively Cu-Al washers (bimetallic
washers) can be used
5.38 All AHS, CHS, WTP, clarifier and miscellaneous MCC shall be controlled from
PLCC.
5.39 Motors rated 110 kW and above shall be connected to ACB and below shall
be with SFU.
5.40 Status indication in CRT motor/ bkr on, motor/ bkr off, bkr fault / service, bkr
selected from remote etc shall be provided.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 8 OF 15

Balance of Plant
5.41 Synchronising facility shall be available on UCP for control of ACB of 415 V
breakers located in TG building.
6.0 NORMAL / EMERGENCY SWITCHGEAR
Normal/emergency switchgear (N/E) shall be normally fed by 400V unit

service switchgear and incomer from DG set will remain open. A bus coupler
shall be provided in the N/E bus so that either DG set can feed the
emergency loads.
On loss of normal supply, No volt relay connected to N/E bus will trip the
incomer to N/E switchgear from USS and at the same time give starting
impulse for DG set of each unit to start automatically. In case DG set of first
unit is not able to start the standby DG set connected to bus will start. When
DG set reaches the rated speed and voltage, incomer to N/E switchgear from
DG set closes automatically provided incomer from USS has opened.
All service like lighting, essential motors for safe shutdown of the unit, UPS
incomers, battery charger AC supply, etc. shall be connected to this bus. DG
supply shall be extended to N/E bus in less than 15 sec from loss of power at
N/E.
On restoration of normal supply at USS, the changeover of supply at N/E

from DG shall be done with synchronising facility at UCP to avoid interruption
of supply at N/E switchgear.
All the breakers for Supply changeover of N/E from DG to USS shall be
controlled from respective Control Panels.
Continuous paralleling of DG set with Normal supply is not envisaged and

hence an annunciation shall also be provided in control room for “DG set in
parallel with normal supply”.
7.0 Changeover scheme
All the switchgear with sectionalised buses and circuit breaker controlled will
be normally operated with the bus coupler breakers open. Auto changeover
facility shall be provided for all switchgear such that if there is a prolonged
under voltage on any one of the bus sections, the respective incoming
breaker shall trip and the bus coupler breaker shall close, provided voltage is
available on the other bus section and protection is not operated on other
bus. Total change over time shall not exceed 1.5 seconds. The bus coupler
panel shall be provided with auto-manual-off selector switch and in manual
position an alarm shall be generated at DCS.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 9 OF 15

Balance of Plant
This auto changeover shall be blocked if the other incoming breaker had
tripped either on a bus fault or manually. Changeover back to the normal
source of supply shall be effected manually. Manual live changeover facility
shall be provided for all the switchgear/MCC. When planned outage of one of
the normal incoming supplies is required, the respective incomers shall be
tripped automatically after the bus section breaker is closed manually.
For this purpose, a selection shall be provided on the control desk /DCS in
plant control room for selecting the incomer to be tripped. Thus, depending
on the selection made, incomer to bus section – A or to bus section – B will
be tripped once bus section breaker is closed manually, thus maintaining
continuity of supply.
Timers with a time delay on pick up of 0.5. - 5 sec. for annunciation of the
running breaker failing to trip within a pre-set time, (i.e. if the two sources
remain paralleled for more than a pre-set time) shall be provided along with
tripping of last closed breaker if selected breaker does not trip.
When the normal supply is to be brought back into operation, the incomer
breaker shall be closed whereupon the bus coupler shall trip automatically.
8.0 Incomers, Bus Couplers & breaker control motor and tie feeders
8.1 The incomer modules and bus coupler modules of all the switchgear shall be
fully draw out air circuit breaker controlled from local/DCS. The miscellaneous
distribution boards rated less than 400 A shall be provided with MCCBs or
isolators.
8.3 The incomer modules shall be interlocked with their upstream breaker such
that they can be closed only when upstream breaker is closed and trip
automatically when upstream breaker is tripped.
8.4 All the Tie feeders shall be provided with breakers / Isolators at both ends
with necessary metering and protection at both ends.
8.5 Each circuit breaker cubicle shall be complete with following minimum
accessories:-
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 10 OF 15

Balance of Plant
(a) One spring return TNC switch.

(b) Large size cluster LEDs for following condition of breaker/contactor:-
(i) “ON”(Red)
(ii) “OFF” (green)
(iii) Trip relay supervision (White).
(iv) Spring charged (Blue)
(v) DC supply supervision (Violet)
(c) Limit switched for test and service position interlocking.
(d) Double pole switch for DC control supply and spring charging motor
with HRC fuses.
(e) Anti pumping relay.
(f) Sufficient terminal blocks.
(g) Auxiliary relays as required for contact multiplication.
(h) Breaker operation counters.
(i) Protective relays along with trip circuit supervision relay and master
trip relay.
(j) Meters as indicated elsewhere.
(k) Required CTs/PTs/CBCTs.
(l) Space heaters.
(m) Other associated equipment.
8.6 All the circuit breakers shall be of fully draw out execution with “Test”,
“Service “ &” Fully withdrawn “ positions.
8.7 Double tier arrangement shall not be provided for incomers, tie and bus
coupler. In case of motor feeders, double tier arrangement may be provided
but two beakers of same application motor shall not be provided in one
vertical.
8.8 Breakers shall be with motor wound spring operating mechanism.
8.9 Closing action of the CB shall compress the opening spring ready for tripping.
8.10 Proper mechanical indication shall be provided to locate these three positions
without opening of the compartment door.
8.11 It shall be possible to bring the circuit breaker to isolated position with the
help of external lever without opening the compartment door.
8.12 A stop block shall be provided on the slide rails to prevent the movement of
the circuit breaker out of the compartment when it reaches the isolated
position so that any accidental fall can be avoided.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 11 OF 15

Balance of Plant
8.13 No control & metering equipments should be mounted on breaker

compartment door (i.e. access to control & metering equipments should be
available at all time without opening Breaker Compartment door).
8.14 It shall not be possible to close the Breaker if stored energy mechanism is not
charged.
8.15 It shall not be possible to close the Breaker if under-voltage release is not
energised (if present).
8.16 It shall not be possible to close the Breaker if closing coil is energized.
8.17 It shall not be possible to close the Breaker if OFF – Push Button is locked in
off position.
8.18 It shall not be possible to close the Breaker if crank hole is open.
8.19 The Circuit Breaker shall be provided with mechanical ON/OFF, TRIP and
SPRING CHARGED, DISCHARGED READY TO CLOSE AND BREAKER
POSITION indication, mechanical trip push button.
8.20 The circuit breaker shall be provided with automatic safety shutters, so that
before the breaker reaches ‘isolated’ position the main isolating contacts are
completely shrouded. In the draw-out condition, it shall be possible to inspect
the Breaker fixed contacts condition by lifting the shutters.
8.21 The protective relays and instruments shall be mounted in separate

compartment. This compartment shall be along side and immediately next to
the controlled breaker
8.22 Contact erosion indicator shall be provided on Moving contacts of Breaker for
visual indication of contact life.
8.23 All the non conducting metal parts of the circuit breaker trolley shall be
bonded together and shall make perfect electrical connection to earth through
substantial sliding contacts, at service and test positions. Such sliding
contacts shall be arranged to make before power plug in and interrupt after
power draw out.
9.0 BUS AND LINE PTs
Bus PT over voltage factor shall be 1.9 for 08 hours.
Each PT cubicle shall be complete with following minimum accessories
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 12 OF 15

Balance of Plant
(a) PTs shall be fully draw out type with required no of cores and ratios
as specified elsewhere.
(b) Voltmeter with selector switch.
(c) Under voltage and No voltage relays with timers and fuse fail relays.
(d) Required auxiliary relays.
(e) LEDs for voltage indication.
(f) Auxiliary PTs, as required.
(g) DC and AC control supply and changeover switches with Short
Circuit protection.
10.0 Motor Modules
10.1 All LT motors shall be controlled by Contactors. The motor feeders shall be
complete with following minimum accessories.
(a) Contactors and interlocking schemes for space heating arrangements

based on size of motors. Test & services position switches and
associated contactors for interlocking.
(b) Power contactors and SFU or breaker.
(c) CTs as specified elsewhere.
(d) 415/110V control transformer, for arranging control supply for the module.
(e) Local indication lamp for ON, OFF & TRIP/Fault indication.
(f) Relays as required.
(h) ON & OFF PBs, for testing in Test Position
10.2 All the motors rated 50 kW and above shall be provided with a CT, ammeter
and a current transducer with remote metering in DCS.
10.4 Protections.
(a) 90 kW and below: - The thermal overload relay in all three phases with
built in protection against single phasing and short circuit protection by
HRC fuses or MCCBs.
(b) 90 kW above:- Numerical, comprehensive motor protection relay
10.5 Fire hydrant and HVWS pump motors shall be breaker controlled with
protection as per TAC requirements.
10.6 ACTUATORS
All actuators shall have starters in MCCs separately for actuators of TG &
Boiler. In other areas it shall be fed from common MCC in that area. The motor
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 13 OF 15

Balance of Plant
starter module shall comply with type-2 coordination conforming to IS13947/

IEC 9474-1 and shall be installed within MCCs.
11.0 Essential Service Modules
11.1 During auto changeover of the supply the contactors in the affected bus would
have dropped off. The services, which, shall be restarted immediately without
time lapse to keep the unit running, are considered essential services. Such
auxiliaries shall restart automatically without any action by the operator after
an auto changeover. These modules shall have additional hardware like timer
(or time delayed closing from DCS), aux. contactors and associated circuitry
in the module. Such essential services shall be identified during the detailed
engineering stage and suitable module/scheme shall be provided.
11.2 The modules of some of the critical application motors like barring gear motor,
air heater motor, lube oil pump, jacking oil pump etc. irrespective of their kW
rating shall be provided with a CT, ammeter and a current transducer with
remote metering in DCS.
12 CONTROL / ALARMS/INDICATION/SOE POINTS
12.1 INCOMERS /TIE AND BUSCOUPLER CONTROL.
All switchgear located in TG building will be controlled from DCS /UCP in unit
control room. Other MCCs viz. Fuel oil pump house MCC, water treatment
plant MCC, ESP MCC, etc…shall be locally controlled with synchronisation
equipment facility mounted on the switchgear.
12.2 ALL OTHER SERVICES
All the motors/Valves and other equipment shall be controlled from respective
control rooms/Control Panels/ DCS.
Emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided for all drives/actuators near

equipment except for emergency drives. These shall be wired directly to MCC.
In case of emergency drives, emergency start PB shall be provided.
12.3 The control room DCS, shall provide indication & alarms for the 415V auxiliary
supply as given below. Any additional indications/alarms considered
necessary during detailed engineering also shall be provided. Some of these
shall be selected for sequential event recording. For each breaker and bus,
grouped alarm for any abnormal conditions shall be provided in the control
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 14 OF 15

Balance of Plant
desk. For all breaker fed switchgear, status indications shall be available on
CRT in form of SLD.
(a) Alarms in CRT
• Breaker auto tripped/L/O Relay operated

• Bus under voltage
• Sources paralleled beyond pre-set time
• Common outgoing feeder fault
• Incoming 220 V DC control supply failed
• Bus PT fuse failed
• Bus PT not in service.
(b) Status indication in CRT
• Motor ON
• Motor OFF
• Motor Auto trip.
• Motor LPB pressed
• Feeder fault
12.4 The current, voltage and power measurements for each bus shall be available
both on DCS/UCP as indicated in this section and specified elsewhere in the
specification. The necessary transducers shall be included by vendor. Also for
specific motors where the current transducers are indicated, the
measurement shall be available at the DCS/UCP.
12.5 The operation, indications and fault alarms for the motors of the auxiliaries
shall be displayed as covered in the specification as part of C& I
requirements.
13.0 TESTS
13.1 Switchgear shall be subjected to all routine tests as per relevant standards
along with following tests:
(a) Temperature rise test on power circuits

(b) Short time current tests on power circuits.
(c) Mechanical operation test
(d) Insulation resistance and 500V DC Megger before/ after 1 minute HV
test
(e) Electrical control, interlock and sequential operation tests
(f) Verification of wiring as per approved schematic
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

H-500-01
SHEET 15 OF 15

Balance of Plant
13.2 CONTRACTOR shall submit valid type test reports including temperature rise
and short circuit tests of similar switchgear and all ratings of breakers
included in the offer. Also, calculations for temperature rise shall be submitted
for approval.
13.3 Routine tests shall be carried out on all associated equipment supplied with
switchgear as per relevant standards. Type test certificates of all associated
equipment shall be furnished.
13.4 Valid type and routine test certificates shall be submitted by the VENDOR
before despatch of the switchgear.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
LIMITED SHEET1 of 4
001 LT SWITCHGEAR
DATA SHEET-A3.06
415V switchgear shall comply with the particulars indicated in the following table:
Sr. Description unit Client Bidders

No. specification specifications
1.00 Manufacturer’s name *
2.00 Applicable standard. *
3.00 Nominal system voltage, phase & V 415 V, 3 phase, 50

frequency Hz
4.00 System neutral earthing considered solidly earthed
5.00 Maximum system voltage V 440
6.00 One minute power frequency KV *

withstand voltage rms
1.2/50 uS impulse withstand voltage *

KV
peak
7.00 Short circuit withstand capability
a) Short time for 1 sec kA Min.50

rms
b) Dynamic rating kA Min.105
peak
8.00 Reference ambient temperature Deg. 50

C
9.00 Continuous current rating under site A *

reference ambient condition
10.00 Maximum temperature of Bus Bars, Deg C 90 deg. C for non

dropper, connectors & contacts at silver plated joints
continuous current rating under site 105 deg. C for silver
reference ambient temperature plated joints
11.00 Material of bus bars considered Copper / Aluminium

Alloy
12.00 Cable entry Bottom only

.
LIMITED SHEET2 of 4
001 LT SWITCHGEAR
DATA SHEET-A3.06
13.00 Degree of protection IP- 52, IP42 for

breaker panels of
1600A and above
14.00 Thickness of sheet steel enclosures

/ doors.
Cold Rolled 2.0mm
Hot rolled 2.5mm
15.00 Shade of paints Powder coated paint

of shade 631 of IS –
5.
16.00 Earthing bus bar size & material 50 x10 mm (min) ,

considered GS
17.00 Clearance in air of live parts
a) phase to phase 25 mm
b) phase to earth 19 mm
18.00 Circuit breaker

a) Type
b) Rated operating duty O-3min-CO-3min-
c) Rated current at site reference A CO
ambient temp. *
d) Rated breaking current KA
e) Rated making current rms *
KA *
f) Short time current withstand peak
capacity for 1 sec duration KA *
g) Asymmetrical breaking current rms
(1) AC component
(2) DC component *
h) operating time KA as per IEC –60056
(1) opening time rms *
(2) closing time *
g) Closing and opening coil Cycle *

particulars. s
j) Switching over voltage factor 2.2

.
LIMITED SHEET3 of 4
001 LT SWITCHGEAR
DATA SHEET-A3.06
19.00 Trip free operating mechanism type Motor charged

spring (manual trip
& close facility to be
provided)
20.00 Auxiliary control voltage for trip, 220 V DC

close, annunciation and spring ( +/- 10% )
charging.
21.00 Auxiliary control voltage for space 240V AC, 1-Ph, 2

heater, DC failure annunciation, wire, 50 Hz
motor winding / space heaters,
lighting etc
22.00 Breakers application
a) Incomer s & Ties Yes
23.00 Details of contactors/ **

Switches/Fuses.
• Type
• Rated operating duty
• Rated current at site reference
ambient temp.
• Rated breaking current
• Rated making current
• Short time current withstand
o Asymmetrical breaking
current
AC component
DC component
o Operating time
opening time
closing time
24.00 Details of CTs (Cast resin, Class E

• Type or Better)
• Ratio **
• Burden
• Accuracy class
• Knee point voltage
• Magnetizing current at Vk/2
.
LIMITED SHEET4 of 4
001 LT SWITCHGEAR
DATA SHEET-A3.06
• Secondary resistance
• Class of insulation
• Short time & dynamic current
rating
• Applicable standard
• No. of cores
25.00 Details of VTs (Cast resin Class E

or Better, Over
• Type voltage factor 1.5
• Ratio continious,1.9 for 08
• Burden hours)
• Accuracy class **
• Magnetizing characteristic
• Method of connection
• Class of insulation
• Rated voltage factor ( continuous
& 8 hours)
• Applicable standard
• No. of cores
26.00 Particular of meters
27.00 Particular of relays
28.00 Panels construction details

TCE.5103A –
H-500-01
LIMITED SECTION: D3-7
SHEET OF 3
Package: TITLE SEGREGATED / NON-SEGREGATED PHASE
Balance of Plant
BUS DUCTS
1.0 SEGREGATED PHASE BUS DUCTS
1.1 12 kV class segregated phase bus ducts (SPBD) and accessories shall be
used for connection between UT and 11 kV unit switchgear, for connection
between ST and 11 kV station switchgear, for ties between station
switchgear, for ties between unit and station switchgear.
3.6 kV class segregated phase bus ducts and accessories shall be used for
connection between UT and 3.3 kV unit switchgear
1.2 The continuous current rating of the bus duct from UT and tie between Unit
and station switchgear shall be same as the rated current of 11 kV unit
switchgear bus.
The continuous current rating of the bus duct from ST and tie between station
switchgears shall be same as the rated current of 11 kV station switchgear
bus.
The short time and momentary current rating of the above bus ducts shall be
same as those of 11 kV switchgear bus.
2.0 NON-SEGREGATED PHASE BUS DUCTS
2.1 1.1 kV class non-segregated phase bus duct (NSPBD) and accessories shall
be provided for 415V switchgear for indoor applications only. NSPBD shall
also be considered for connections between other switchgear and MCC to
suit the layout.
2.2 The continuous current rating of the bus duct shall be same as the rated
current of respective switchgear bus
The short time and momentary current rating of the bus duct shall be same as
that of associated 415V switchgear.
3.1 Bus Enclosure:
The enclosure shall be rectangular and shall be made of aluminium alloy

sheets for SPBD and for NSPBD, the same shall be of mild steel. Joints
consisting of metallic expansion bellows shall be provided on the bus
enclosure at terminations to transformers and switchgear. Three-phase
terminal enclosures shall be provided with flanged ends with drilling
dimensions to suit the flange at equipment terminals. ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A –
H-500-01
SHEET OF 3
Balance of Plant
BUS DUCTS
3.2 Bus Conductor:
The bus conductor shall be of Aluminium alloy grade 63401 as per IS: 5082
and shall be given a coat of matt black paint to facilitate heat dissipation.
However the sizing of the bus conductor shall consider the conductor as bare.
The adjacent sections of the bus conductor shall be welded or bolted. Bus
bars in bus duct shall be sleeved with FRLS heat shrinkable colour coded
XLPE.
3.3 The joints along the conductors shall be of highest quality and the
temperature rise test shall be conducted including the joints.
3.4 The silica gel breathers shall be provided both in indoor and outdoor portions
of bus duct for absorption of moisture. Suitable rain hood shall be provided for
outdoor run and also at enclosure joint for additional protection against water
ingress.
3.5 Phase Barriers:
In case of segregated phase bus duct, the phase segregation shall be of

aluminium or non-hygroscopic insulating material like fibreglass.
3.6 Flexible expansion joints shall be provided for the conductor and enclosure
along the run of the bus duct length to take care of expansion. Also flexible
joints shall be provided at the termination points.
3.7 Bus Support Insulators:
The bus support insulators shall be of 12 kV or 3.6 kV class for segregated

phase bus ducts and 1.1 kV class for non-segregated phase bus ducts and
shall be mounted on resilient pads in bus enclosure.
3.8 The material of insulator shall be porcelain or epoxy resin cast.
3.9 The spacing of the bus support insulators shall be considered by giving due
factor of safety to withstand the forces due to the momentary short circuit
current assigned for the bus duct.
3.10 Inspection covers for periodic inspection of the insulators shall be provided.
There shall be no joints or fixing bolts on top of the enclosure through which
water can seep.
3.11 The outdoor portion of the bus duct shall be provided with a continuous rain
hood of non magnetic material suitably supported from the bus duct support
structure. ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A –
H-500-01
SHEET OF 3
Balance of Plant
BUS DUCTS
3.12 The bus duct supports shall be fabricated from standard steel sections. The
support structures shall be hot dip galvanised.
3.13 Thermostatically controlled space heaters shall be provided along the run of
bus duct.
3.14 Wall frame assembly:
The wall frame assemblies with seal off bushings shall be provided where bus
duct passes through the station-building wall from outside to inside.
3.15 Wall frame assembly and seal off bushings shall be provided where the bus
duct passes through walls (indoor to indoor). These shall be fabricated out of
aluminium angles and sheets.
3.16 Provision shall be made for the bus duct space heaters. Copper flexible
connector shall be provided at both ends with silver plated contact area.
3.17 At the routine and special tests shall be conducted on SPBD/NSPBD.
(a) Air tightness test

(b) Water tightness test
(c) Temperature rise test
(d) Short circuit current withstand test
(e) Impulse withstand test
3.18 Routine tests shall be conducted on all the components of SPBD & NSPBD
as applicable. Also, test certificates shall be furnished for bought out items.
Valid type test certificate shall be submitted. In case valid certificate is not
available than type test shall be conducted on SPDB/NSPBD. HV voltage test
shall be conducted on fully assembled bus duct.
The segregated phase bus ducts for all 11 kV and 3.3 kV switchgear like
station bus, unit bus etc shall also be included.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
LIMITED
TCE.5103A-H-500- 2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET1 of 2
001 SEGREGATED / NON-SEGREGATED PHASE VOLUME- V
BUS DUCTS
DATA SHEET-A3.07
Segregated/non-segregated phase bus ducts shall comply with the particulars indicated in
the following table:
Sl Description Unit Spec Contractor’s

No SPBD/NSPBD data
1.0 BUS DUCT
1.1 Manufacturer/ Country *
1.2 Bus Conductor
(a) Busbar grade *
(b) Shape of busbar *
(c) Size of busbar mm2 *
1.3 Barriers
(a) Thickness of phase mm *

barrier
1.4 Phase to phase spacing mm *
1.5 Size of enclosure W x H or mm x mm/ *

Diameter if circular mm
1.6 Resistance/meter/Phase at Ohm *

20°C of conductor
1.7 Inductive Ohm *
reactance/meter/phase at
20°C
1.8 Capacitive Ohm *
reactance/meter/phase at
20°C
1.9 Heat loss in the bus duct at Watts/ ph/ m *
full rated current
1.10 Weight of 3-phase duct Kg/meter *
1.11 Standard section length m *
1.12 Minimum required clearances

from the periphery of the bus
duct
i) To structural steel work mm *
parallel to the duct
.
LIMITED
TCE.5103A-H-500- 2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET2 of 2
001 SEGREGATED / NON-SEGREGATED PHASE VOLUME- V
BUS DUCTS
DATA SHEET-A3.07
ii) To structural steel work mm *

perpendicular to the duct
1.13 Type of cooling Natural air/ *
Natural air
1.14 Max temperature rise of bus Deg C 55 /40 *
conductor
1.15 Max temperature rise of bus Deg C 30/20 *
enclosure
1.16 Continuous current rating at kA *
ambient
1.17 Momentary short circuit kA As per *
withstand current rating peak switchgear
rating
1.18 One sec short circuit kA As per *
withstand current rating rms switchgear
rating
2.0 INSULATORS
2.2 Type *
2.3 Cantilever strength
i) Upright Kg. *
ii) Under hung Kg. *
2.4 Weight of each insulator Kg *
3.0 SEAL OFF BUSHINGS

3.2 Type *
3.3 Mechanical Strength
i) Compression Kg. *
ii) Tension Kg. *
3.4 Weight of each bushing Kg. *

SPEC. NO.
TCE.5103A-H-
500-001
UNINTERUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM 3..08
Balance of
SHEET 1 OF 4
Plant
1.0 The uninterruptible power supply system (UPS System) shall cater to
the requirement of critical AC loads like instrumentation and control,
computers, communication system, critical motors and other
applications. Each generating unit shall be provided with one UPS
system. It shall be rated to meet requirements of all these systems and
with a loading factor of 1.25. The output shall confirm to stringent
requirements in respect of voltage & frequency regulation, harmonic
content & transient recovery.
1.1 It shall be of “parallel redundant with static bypass to regulated supply”

type with 2 x 100% batteries, 2 x 100% battery chargers, inverters,
static bypass switch, and regulated Ac supply. It shall include AC
distribution board with air break switch, fuses, current transformers,
meters, alarm and indications.
1.2 It shall incorporate complete circuit protection against all types of

abnormal conditions, the system is likely to encounter while in service.
All accessories & cabling is included in Contractor’s scope.
1.3 All components, sub assemblies & complete system including the
UPS, regulator and transformer, ACDB, batteries and battery charger
shall be subjected to routine tests as per relevant standards.
1.4 Contractor shall also submit type test reports for all components used
in UPS system
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC. NO.
TCE.5103A-H-
500- 001
Balance of DATA SHEET A-3.08 SHEET 1 OF 3
Plant
The UPS system details shall be filled in by the contractor in the following
table:
Sl. No. Item Requirements Data by

Contractor
1.1 Type Static
1.2 Power Rating at load PF *

0.8 lagging
1.3 Application For supply to critical loads

of instrumentation and
control
1.4 Quantity (Nos.) 2 Nos. (2 x 100%)
1.6 Designation Parallel redundant UPS

with static by pass to
regulated supply
1.7 Whether transfer switch Required

required for secondary
back up
1.8 Installation Indoor, natural ventilated
1.9 Temperature
1.9.1 Ambient
- For Operation ( o C) -10 to +50

- For Storage ( o C)
1.9.2 Ref. Design Temp.(o C) 50
2.0 ENCLOSURE `
2.1 Material Cold rolled sheet steel
2.2 Sheet thickness (mm) 2.0

ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC. NO.
TCE.5103A-H-
500- 001
Plant
2.3 Degree of Protection as IP-32 for UPS module &

per IS-247 IP-52 for ACDB
2.4 Painting
- Exterior Opaline green, shade 275
of IS-5
- Interior Glossy white
2.5 Cable entry Bottom / top
2.6 Acoustic noise level 60-65 dBA up to 49 KVA

60-70 dBA above 40 KVA
3.0 UPS SYSTEM
3.1 Input
3.1.1 Supply voltage By Bidder
3.1.2 Allowable variation
a) Voltage *
b) Frequency
c) Combined voltage +
Frequency
3.2 Output
3.2.1 Output voltage *
3.2.2 AC voltage accuracy +1%

(Steady state) over entire
load, load PF & DC
voltage range
3.2.3 Transient voltage +8% at 100% load step

regulation
3.2.4 Transient Recovery Return to steady state

condition within 50 ms after
disturbance
3.2.5 Voltage wave form Sinusoidal

ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC. NO.
TCE.5103A-H-
500- 001
Plant
3.2.6 Range of adjustment of +5% at rated load

AC output voltage
3.2.7 AC harmonic content 5% total , 3% for any single

harmonic
3.2.8 Nominal frequency 50 Hz
3.2.9 Frequency regulation +0.5%
7.0 STATIC SWITCH
7.1 Type Static
7.2 No. of switches 2 for each UPS system
7.3 Rating Equal to UPS output kVA

rating at 0.8 PF
7.4 Nominal Frequency 50 Hz
7.5 Maximum transfer time Maximum of ¼ cycle
7.6 Short time rating 750% for 1.0 sec.
7.7 Whether make before Yes

break
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVEOPMENT COMPANY VOLUME – V
SECTION: D3 – 9
LIMITED
SHEET 1 OF 5
TITLE
Package :
Balance of Plant CONTROL PANELS / JB / PB
1.0 CONTROL PANELS & CABINETS AND MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL

EQUIPMENT
1.1 Indoor control panels provided for control of miscellaneous systems in the
plant viz., CO2 system, generator fire fighting, cooling control system, lube oil
system, EOT crane and Hoist electrics, Electrics for ventilation, air-
conditioning, DG AMF Panel, Fire Protection Panel etc. as applicable shall
comply with the requirements outlined under clause 1.6 below.
1.2 All the meters provided on the panel shall be digital type meters in 96 W x
48H with accuracy class better than 1.5.
1.3 For motor circuits, ammeters shall have a suppressed extended scale to
indicate the motor starting current.
1.4 The facia annunciation windows if provided on the panel shall conform to
requirements outlined under instrumentation and control section.
1.5 The required 240 V, 1 phase AC supply required for panel illumination and
receptacle shall be derived in the control panel itself. However 240V, 1 Phase
AC supply for space heating of panel shall be fed from a separate 1-Phase
ACDB.
1.6 Technical Requirements
SL. DESCRIPTION REQUIREMENTS

NO.
1 Location Indoor/Outdoor depending
on location
2 Type of mounting Wall/Floor

3 Cable entry Top/bottom depending on
layout
4 Paint Finish: Outside/Inside To be decided later as per
IS-5/Glossy white.
5 Supply voltage 415V, 3 phase, 3 wire
ISSUE
R0
CONSULTANTS: TCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED TCE FORM 329 R3

SECTION: D3 – 9
LIMITED
SHEET 2 OF 5
TITLE
Package :

NO.
6 Control transformer Required to derive 110V
control supply
7 Space heater, lighting supply voltage 240V, 1 phase AC
8 Degree of protection of Enclosure for IP 54 class for Indoor & IP

Electrical panels/cabinet enclosure 55 class with canopy for
outdoor
2.0 Following miscellaneous equipment shall be included in CONTRACTOR's

scope.
2.1 Local push button stations.
2.2 Junction boxes (JBs)
2.3 Danger boards
2.4 Rubber mats
2.5 Welding Sockets
3.0 LOCAL PUSH BUTTON STATIONS (LPB)
3.1 Local push button station shall be provided for all the drive motors of the
plant (415V motors and 11/3.3kV motors) (start / stop push buttons for
unidirectional motors, start/stop/reverse push buttons for bi-directional motors
& only start push button for emergency motors) as per scheme requirement.
3.2 LPBs for outdoor use shall be weather proof type with a canopy and for use
in hazardous area shall be flame proof type. The degree of protection of
LPBs shall be IP55 for outdoor and IP54 for indoor applications.
3.3 All PBs shall be push to actuate type and the stop PB shall be lockable in off
position as per the scheme requirement.
3.4 Emergency local stop push button should not be lockable. For critical loads,
two stop push buttons connected in series shall be provided as per the
scheme requirement.
3.5 All push buttons shall be provided with 2 nos. NO and 2 nos. NC contacts for
various interlocking purposes. One contact of stop PB shall be directly wired
ISSUE
R0

SECTION: D3 – 9
LIMITED
SHEET 3 OF 5
TITLE
Package :
to the switchgear module for direct tripping and another contact to control
system.
3.6 Terminals to be suitable for 2 cores of 2.5 sq mm conductors with 20% spare
terminals.
3.7 All LPBs shall be of Poly Carbonate/ FRP/Di-cast aluminium.
4.0 JUNCTION BOXES (JBs)
4.1 Junction boxes as required for the power plant shall be supplied :
4.2 The JBs used in outdoor areas shall be weatherproof type. The sheet steel
thickness of the JBs shall be minimum 2 mm and shall be hot dip galvanised.
The cable entry shall be bottom/ side entry for indoor and outdoor mounted
JBs and the junction boxes shall be installed at 1m accessible height.
4.3 Junction boxes/marshalling boxes (JBs/MB) shall be provided to enable

running a large core cables from (JB/MB) to control panels, terminal cabinets,
etc.
4.4 All JBs shall be of polycarbonate /FRP/Di-cast aluminium.
4.5 Junction Boxes shall be used for marshalling each CT/CVT core from Swyd
CT/CVT to use cables from JB to the relay panels / control panels
5.0 Danger boards and rubber mats shall be provided in line with the statutory
requirements. The thickness and length of the rubber mats shall be as per
the guidelines of IE rules / local electrical inspectorate.
6.0 WELDING SOCKETS
7.1 Industrial type 63A and 100A (welding purpose) sockets shall be provided in
sufficient number to facilitate extension of power supply to various machine
tools, welding sets etc, in all the shops including telephone exchange area
etc.
7.2 Welding switch socket outlets shall be provided at every 60m distance. The
number of welding socket outlets for main technological plant units shall be
decided based on requirement, approach etc. Generally the socket outlets
shall be provided in such a manner so that using 30m flexible cable with
welding set, total plant area can be covered. Upto three switch socket outlets
shall be looped per feeder circuit. Sheet metal clad switch fuse units shall be
provided for feeding power to telphers.
ISSUE
R0

SECTION: D3 – 9
LIMITED
SHEET 4 OF 5
TITLE
Package :
7.3 The welding switch socket outlets and switch units shall be fed from separate
distribution board.
8.0 TESTING
The following testing shall be conducted on all equipments at works.

a. IR Test before and after HV Test
b. HV Test with 2.5 KV Megger.

NO.
Applicable standards
1 Switchgear general requirements IS 4237
2 Factory built assemblies of switchgear and IS 8623
control gear for voltages upto and including
1000 V AC & 1200 V DC
3 Air break switches IS 13947 pt 1 & 2

4 Miniature circuit breakers IS 8828
5 HRC cartridge fuses IS 9224
6 Contactors IS 2959
7 Control switches/push buttons IS 6875
8 Current transformers IS 2705
9 Voltage transformers IS 3156
10 Relays IS 3231
11 Indicating instruments IS 1248
12 Arrangement for bus bars, main connections IS 375
and accessories
13 Degree of Protection IS 2147
14 Climate proofing of electrical equipment IS 3202
15 Code of practice for phosphating iron & steel IS 6005
16 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for IS 5082
electrical purposes
17 Bus duct IS 8084
ISSUE
R0

SECTION: D3 – 9
LIMITED
SHEET 5 OF 5
TITLE
Package :
ISSUE
R0

.
001 CONTROL PANELS / JB / PB
DATA SHEET-A3.09
Control panels/JB/ PB shall comply with the particulars indicated in the following table:
SL. DESCRIPTION REQUIREMENTS DATA BY

NO. CONTRAC
TOR
1 Location Indoor/Outdoor depending
on location
2 Type of mounting Wall/Floor

3 Cable entry Top/bottom depending on
layout
4 Paint Finish: Outside/Inside To be decided later as per
IS-5/Glossy white.
5 Supply voltage 415V, 3 phase, 3 wire
6 Control transformer Required to derive 110V

control supply
7 Space heater, lighting supply voltage 240V, 1 phase AC
8 Degree of protection of Enclosure for IP 54 class for Indoor & IP

Electrical panels/cabinet enclosure 55 class with canopy for
outdoor
.
SPEC NO. VOLUME – V
ANDHRA POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LIMITED SECTION: D3 – 10

TCE-5103A-H-500-01
SHEET 1 OF 7
2 x 800 MW NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM
Package : TITLE
Balance of Plant MOTORS & ACTUATORS
1.0 AC & DC MOTORS
1.1 All motors above 160kW upto and including1500 kW shall be suitable for
3.3kV, 3 phase, 50Hz. Motors rated up to and including 160kW shall be
suitable for 415V, 3 phase, and 50 Hz power supply. Motors rated 1500kW
above shall be suitable for 11kV, 3 phase, and 50 Hz power supply.
1.2 All LT motors shall be energy efficient class – I in line with IEEMA – EFF-1.
1.3 The motor rating shall be arrived at considering 15% margin over the duty
point input or 10% over the maximum demand of the driven equipment,
whichever is higher, considering highest system frequency.
Motors shall be capable of starting and accelerating the load with the
applicable method of starting without exceeding acceptable winding
temperatures when supply voltage is 80% of the rated voltage for HT motors
and 85% for LV motors. HT motors shall also be capable of satisfactory
operation at full load at a supply voltage of 80% of the rated voltage for 5 min.
commencing from hot condition.
DC motors shall be suitable for the DC system voltage of 220V. Motor shall
be capable of starting and accelerating the load with the applicable method of
starting, without exceeding acceptable winding temperatures, when the
supply voltage is in the range of 85% to 110% of rated motor voltage.
1.4 Motors shall be capable of developing the rated full load torque even if the
supply voltage drops to 70% of the rated voltage. If such operation is
envisaged for a period of one second, the pull out torque of the motor shall be
atleast 205% of full load torque.
1.5 Motors shall withstand for 1 second the voltage and torque stresses
developed due to the vector difference between the motor residual voltage
and the incoming supply voltage equal to 150% of the rated voltage during
fast change over of buses.
1.6 Locked rotor current of the HT motors rated 1500 kW and below shall be
limited to 600% (subject to IS tolerance) of the full load current of the motors
and motor rated above 1500 kW shall be limited to 450% (inclusive of IS
tolerance) of full load current of the motor. Locked rotor current of the LV
motor shall not exceed 600% of full load current inclusive of IS tolerance
1.7 The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% rated voltage
shall be more than the starting time at minimum permissible voltage specified
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

TCE-5103A-H-500-01
SHEET 2 OF 7
Package : TITLE
above by atleast three seconds or 15% of the accelerating time whichever is

greater. Provision of speed switch shall be avoided to the extent possible.
These motors shall be designed to withstand at least 5% harmonics in the

supply voltage.
1.8 The degree of protection for the motor enclosure (including terminal box) shall
be IP-55 for outdoor. For single core cable termination, gland plates shall be
of non-magnetic material. All motors located in hazardous area shall have
flame proof enclosure.
1.9 All HT motors shall be provided with vibration pads for mounting vibration
detectors. Vibration monitoring devices shall be provided on DE and NDE
side in X &Y direction with remote DCS monitoring, alarms and tripping
1.10 Motors rated 1000 kW and above shall be provided with differential
protection. These motors shall be provided with star connected stator
windings. The 3 nos. current transformers, one for each phase shall be
mounted in a separate compartment in the neutral side terminal box. The
three phases shall be connected to form the star point after they pass through
the CTs. The CTs shall be of relay accuracy and the CT characteristics shall
be compatible with the differential relay. The additional 3 nos. CTs of
identical characteristics shall be provided in the 11/3.3kV switchgear panels.
KWh meters shall be provided on switchgear panels for all motor feeders
rated 160 kW and above.
1.11 The terminal box of motor shall be of suitable size, suitable to terminate and
maintain the cables easily. Terminal box shall be suitable to rotate at 90
degrees.
1.12 The ring oiling system shall be adequate for starting and continuous operation
of the motor for at least one half hour without pressure oiling system in
operation.
1.13 For 11/3.3kV motors, 6-nos. duplex RTD s for winding shall be provided for
remote monitoring, alarm and tripping at DCS. Each bearing shall be provided
with thermocouples for temperature remote monitoring, alarm and tripping at
DCS. In addition Local temperature indication shall be provided for motor
bearings.
1.14 The maximum double amplitude vibrations for motors up to 1500 rpm shall be
25 microns and 15 microns up to 3000 rpm. For 415V motors, maximum
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

TCE-5103A-H-500-01
SHEET 3 OF 7
Package : TITLE
double amplitude vibrations up to 1500 rpm shall be 40 microns and 15

microns up to 3000 rpm.
1.15 Maximum noise level measured at a distance of 1.5 meter from the outer
surface of the motor shall not exceed 85 db (A).
1.16 Cable boxes of all 11/3.3 kV motors shall be Phase segregated & shall be
provided with quick disconnecting type terminal connectors to facilitate easy
disconnection and removal of the motors without requiring unsealing or
otherwise disturbing the external cable connections and leaving the phase
segregated terminal box intact.
1.17 The insulation system for 11/3.3kV AC motors shall withstand the negative or
positive 0.3 / 3.0 microsecond wave (2.7 p u rated peak line to earth operating
voltage) switching surges originating from non-effectively earthed power
system.
1.18 Motor bearing shall be insulated wherever required
1.19 All HT motors shall be with VPI insulation or better
1.20 All HT motors / LT motors 15 kW and above shall be provided with external
greasing arrangement
1.21 CACW motor shall be provided with water leakage detector with remote
alarms and tripping.
1.22 All HT motors / LT motors 30 kW and above shall be provided with space
heaters using 240 V AC supply
.
1.23 All motors below 15 kW shall be provided with sealed ZZ bearings
1.24 Provision shall be made at DCS to monitor, integrate running hours, nos. of
starts and stop recording for all motors.
2.0 ACTUATOR
2.1 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
Actuator shall be weatherproof type with enclosure conforming to IP-67

degree of protection. It should be suitable for out-door use without the need
for canopy. If the IP-68 degree of protection is required due to occasional
submergence, the purchaser will specify the depth and duration of such
submergence.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

TCE-5103A-H-500-01
SHEET 4 OF 7
Package : TITLE
The actuator shall be suitable for installation in any position without lubrication
leakage or other operational difficulty.
The hand wheel shall automatically disengage when the power to the motor is
restored i.e. power drive shall have a preference over manual drive.
The manual effort should not exceed 400 N (push / pull). A top bevel gear set
(side mounted hand wheel) shall be employed to reduce the manual effort.
Each actuator shall have a local mechanical position indicator. It should be

suitable to indicate 0 - 100% position of the valve (continuous type).
In order to minimise the amount of spare parts required, parts and sub-
assemblies limit / torque switches, limit switch counter gear assembly, torque
switch drive assembly, mechanical position indicator assembly etc.
individually interchangeable / replaceable throughout the models selected.
The actuator shall be painted with corrosion resistant epoxy resin paint. Paint
shade shall be Grey as per IS-631 grade 5.
In order to prevent condensation, a space heater shall be provided in the

switch compartment, suitable for continuous operation.
Actuator mounting dimensions shall be according to ISO-5210.
For rising stem applications, the design must allow the removal of actuator
from the output drive without disturbing the function of valve.
2.2 LIMIT AND TORQUE SWITCHES
Independent torque and limit switches shall be provided in the actuator. A

minimum of two position limit switches and two torque switches, one each for
each direction of travel, having 2 NO + 2 NC potential free contacts, shall be
supplied. If called for in the data sheet, two additional limit switches shall be
provided for intermediate positions.
Torque switch dial shall be graduated directly in “kg-m” for easy setting to
desired value within the range specified. Separate dials shall be provided for
CLOSE and OPEN torque switches.
The rating of both torque and limit switches shall be 250V, 5A. AC/250 V,
0.46 A, DC.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

TCE-5103A-H-500-01
SHEET 5 OF 7
Package : TITLE
The switches shall individually be enclosed to a minimum of IP-66 protection

class.
Torque and limit switches shall have only stainless steel flaps for better
protection against environmental condition.
Limit switches shall be operated by gear driven cams, which are mechanically
linked to the driving devices. The counter gear used for counting and tripping
the limit switches shall be of metallic construction like brass etc. No plastic
gearing shall be allowed.
To guarantee proper function under high ambient temperatures, torque and

limit switch sensing shall be of mechanical type.
If specified in data sheet, two additional limit switches of 2NO + 2NC contact,
each adjustable at any intermediate position, shall be provided in the
actuator.
2.3 ELECTRIC DRIVE FOR ACTUATOR (MOTOR)
All motors shall be specifically designed for valve actuator operation, which is
characterised by high starting torque, low stall torque & low inertia. All motors
shall be high starting torque type to facilitate ‘unseating’ of valve.
Motor shall be suitable for power supply of 415 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz, AC.
Motor shall be squirrel cage induction type and shall generally conform to IS-
325.
Motor shall have minimum class '

F'insulation with temperature rise restricted
to class '
B'.
Motor shall be of totally enclosed surface cooled (TESC) type with IP-67
protection class after mounting on actuator.
Motor shall have three thermostats connected in series, one in each phase of
stator winding, for protection against overheating.
Motor shall be suitable for operation under voltage variation of + 10%,

frequency variation of + 5% and combined voltage & frequency variation of
10% absolute.
Motor shall be suitable for direct on-line (DOL) starting and starter shall be
non-integral type.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

TCE-5103A-H-500-01
SHEET 6 OF 7
Package : TITLE
It should be possible to separate the motor from the lubricant filled gearing of
the actuator allowing easy replacement of motor without loosing any lubricant
regardless of mounting position.
Fins shall be provided on the motor body to ensure better heat dissipation.
It shall be possible to change the output rpm of the actuator, if required, at the
site at a later date, without hampering the mounting arrangement and loss of
any lubricant.
2.4 CODES & STANDARDS

All the equipment specified herein shall comply with the requirements of the
latest issue of the relevant National & International standards.
The design and materials used for the components shall also comply with the
relevant National & International standards.
As a minimum requirement, the following standards shall be complied with:
• Electric motor operated actuators: IS 9334

• Degrees of protection provided by enclosures at low: IS 2147
• Voltage switch gear and control gear
• Flame Proof enclosure at electrical apparatus: IS 2148
• Specification for three phase induction motors: IS 325
• AC contactor for voltages not exceeding 1000 V: IS 2959
• Degree of protection provided by enclosures for: IS 4691
• Rotating electrical machinery
• Specification for rotating electrical machines :IS 4722
2.5 OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF ACTUATOR.
Common potential free contact shall be available to annunciate the following

faults to the remote control station:-
- Thermo switch tripped.
- Thermal overload relay tripped.
- Torque and limit switch contacts.
The following individual relay / potential free contacts shall be provided for the
remote annunciation:-
- Actuator running in OPEN direction.
- Actuator running in CLOSE direction.
- Torque switch OPEN tripped.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

TCE-5103A-H-500-01
SHEET 7 OF 7
Package : TITLE
- Torque switch CLOSE tripped.

Thermal overload relay shall be provided to trip the actuator in case of
overload.
2.6 The DC and AC actuator shall be provided with accessories viz., Torque limit
switch, end of travel switch, adjustable limit switch, hand wheel motor,
thermostat, etc. Complete actuator shall be tested at factory as per IS 9334.
All actuators should have minimum 2 limit switches for each position, and
should have position transmitters wherever required.
3.0 TESTS
3.1 All routine & acceptance tests as per relevant IS shall be conducted on 11/3.3
kV motors and the Type test certificates available for the same rating of the
motors shall be submitted, else the tests shall be conducted on one motor of
each make, rating & type.
For 415V motors and DC motors, if type test certificates are available for the
same rating of the motors offered, the same shall be furnished, else they shall
be conducted on one no. each type & rating of the motor. However, all
routine and acceptance tests shall be conducted on all 415V motors as per
relevant standards. Efficiency and loss measurements shall be done for all LT
motors as per relevant standard (being energy efficient motors.)
3.2 For 11/3.3kV AC motors, in addition to all the tests specified above,
polarisation index test shall be carried out as a routine test on each motor (the
minimum value of polarisation index for all motors shall be 2 when determined
according to IS: 7816).
3.3 Noise level measurement test shall be conducted on one motor of each type.
3.4 Dielectric tests to establish the insulation withstand level of motors as

indicated above shall be performed on a sample coil (identical to those to be
used in the motor quoted for) for each type of motor. These tested sample
coils shall not be used in the motors to be supplied.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
001 MOTORS & ACTUATORS
DATA SHEET-A3.10
The motors shall comply with the particulars indicated below and CONTRACTOR shall
furnish the details in respective column given below (to be separately submitted for each
type & rating of the motor).
Sr. No. Descriptions Unit Client Bidders

specification specifications
1.00 Applications *
1.10 Type of motor *
1.11 Supply Conditions *
(a) Allowable variation in *
(i) Voltage AC/DC % + 10/ 15 %
(ii) Frequency % +5
(iii) Combined % 10
(b) Permissible unbalance in supply *
voltage
1.12 Speed rpm *
1.13 Rated voltage *
HT motors
LT motors
UPS supplied
Single phase
DC motors
1.14 Number of phase *
1.15 Rated frequency for AC motor Hz 50
1.16 Normal winding connection Star /*
Delta
1.17 Method of starting
AC motors DOL (preferably)

DC motors
*
.
DATA SHEET-A3.10
1.18 Temperature rise above ambient of Deg. C 700C for LV motors

50 deg. by Resistance method and 900C for HV
motors (But limited
to 700C).
Type of rotor (Slip ring/ squirrel Squirrel cage
cage) except for cranes,
hoist & elevators
1.19 Type of duty *
1.20 Duty designation *
1.21 Synchronous speed *
a) Constant speed
b) Variable speed (for VFD)
1.22 Starting time at specified minimum Sec *
starting voltage
1.23 Starting torque % of *
FLT
1.24 Pull out torque % of *
FLT
1.25 Class of insulation F or better – HT
B – LT
1.26 Ref. Ambient temperature deg. C 50
1.27 Temperature rise of winding by deg. C Shall be limited to
thermometer above ambient class B insulation
1.28 Location considered – Hazardous *
area division
1.29 Atmosphere considered- *
Chemical/Dusty/Salt laden
1.30 Type of cooling (IS: 6362)
LT motors TEFC
HT motors TEFC / TETV
CACW for 2 MW
and above.
1.31 Degree of protection IP.55 – Outdoor
IP 54 - Indoor
1.32 Terminal box
Short time rating
a) HT for 0.25 sec KA 40 (minimum)
b) LT for 1 sec KA 50 (minimum)
Dynamic rating
a) HT KA 100 (minimum)
peak
b) LT KA peal 105 (minimum)
1.33 Terminal box degree of rotation Degree 90

1.34 Details of bearing *
1.35 Frame size *
1.36 Color shade of paint Shade 631 of IS-5
.
DATA SHEET-A3.10
1.37 Manufacturer *
1.38 Whether CT for differential *
protection required
1.39 Whether vibration detectors required *
1.40 Details of winding / space heaters *
1.41 Guaranteed Efficiency of motor *
a) At full load
b) At duty point
c) At no load
1.42 Guaranteed Power factor of motor *
a) At full load
b) At duty point
c) At no load
1.43 Current at *
a) Starting
b) Full load
c) Duty point
d) Full load & 70 % of rated supply
voltage.
1.44 Quantity & type of temperature
detectors for all HT motors
a) Winding hot spot Minimum 6 Duplex
RTD
b) Bearing Minimum two
thermocouples per
bearing.
1.45 Details of accessories *
a) Fans
b) Temperature gauge
c) Bearing
d) Cooling motors
e) Cooling water parameters
f) Heaters
g) Lube oil system details
1.46 Maximum size & number of cables *
that can be accommodated in motor
terminal box.
1.47 Thermal capability curve to be *

attached
1.48 Relay co-ordination guide to be *
attached.
1.49 Min. voltage required under starting Volts *
conditions to accelerate driven
equipment to rated speed.
1.50 Locked rotor current withstand time *

(safe stall time) at 110 % rated
voltage sec
a) At rated temp. (hot) sec
.
DATA SHEET-A3.10
b) When cold
1.51 Stator thermal time constant sec *
1.52 Permissible no. of equally spread *
starts per hour
a) Normal service conditions
b) In quick succession with cold
M/C at room temp.
c) Hot restarts
1.53 Method of Starting and maximum
starting current inclusive of
tolerances
AC HT Motors 450 % above 1500
a) DOL KW & 600 % all
other.
b) Soft starters 200 %
AC LT Motors
c) DOL 600 %
d) Star Delta 200 %
e) Star Delta with series 200%
resistance 200%
f) Star Delta with rotor 200%
resistance
g) Soft Starters
DC Motors
a) Soft starters 200%
b) Any other 200%
NOTE: ‘*’Information shall be filled furnished by CONTRACTOR along with offer.

.
SPEC NO. ANDHRA POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LIMITED VOLUME –V
TCE-5103A-H-500-01 SECTION: D3 – 11
SHEET 1 OF 11
Package : TITLE
Balance of Plant CABLES AND CABLE CARRIER SYSTEM
1.0 CABLES
1.1 H T CABLES
11/3.3 kV system cables shall be unearthed grade, single or multi core,
stranded copper / aluminium conductor, screened by extruded semi-
conducting compound, extruded XLPE insulated, cores screened with
extruded semi-conducting compound in combination with copper tape, inner
sheathed, extruded PVC compound type ST – 2, armoured with galvanised
wire or strips for multi core cables and aluminium wire armoured for single
core cables and overall sheathed with extruded FRLS PVC type ST-2 cable
conforming to IS 7098, Part II, IEC-502 for constructional details and tests.
1.2 L T POWER CABLES

XLPE Power Cables shall be 1100 V grade, single or multi core, heavy duty,
with stranded copper / aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated, inner sheathed
with extruded PVC compound type ST-2, and extruded FRLS PVC compound
type ST-2 overall sheathed complying with IS:7098, Part-I
HR PVC Power Cables shall be 1100 V grade, single or multi core, heavy
duty with stranded copper / aluminium conductor, PVC insulated, inner
sheathed with extruded PVC compound type ST-2, and extruded FRLS PVC
compound type ST-2 overall sheathed complying with IS:1554, Part-I
In case cables are used between LV side of transformer and 415V switchgear
incomer and tie between two switchgear / MCC, the cables may be 1100 V
grade XLPE insulated.
The cables used for DC system shall be of single core type.
Minimum conductor cross section of power cables shall be 4-sq. mm for

aluminium or 2.5 sq mm for copper and of control cables shall be min 2.5 sq
mm.
Required cable layout for SG& TG area shall be given by respective Bidder,
BOP vendor scope to provide cables, cable trays& cable Trenches for the
same.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE-5103A-H-500-01 SECTION: D3 – 11
SHEET 2 OF 11
Package : TITLE
1.2 CONTROL CABLES
Control cables shall be 1100 V grade, heavy duty, multi core, stranded copper
conductor having minimum 7 strands, PVC insulated, PVC inner sheathed /
galvanised steel wire armoured, extruded FRLS PVC outer sheathed
generally conforming to IS 1554 Part-I.
The size of conductor shall be minimum1.5 sq. mm. In situations where

accuracy of measurement or voltage drop in control circuit warrants, higher
cross sections as required shall be used.
1.3 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES

Instrumentation cables shall be with stranded tinned, annealed, high
conductivity copper conductor, twisted pair (with min. 20 twists for meter)
inner sheathed with extruded PVC compound type ST-1, armoured with steel
strips / wires and outer sheathed with extruded FRLS PVC compound type
ST-1 complying with IEC 60189-Part-1 & 2
The instrumentation cables shall be Annealed, tinned stranded copper
conductor, 0.5 sq mm , twisted into pairs, overall screened (I1 type) for
digital signals, individual and overall screened (for I2 type) for low level
analog signals, individual triplet and overall screened (type I3), PVC
insulated , inner PVC sheathed, GS wire armoured and overall sheathed with
FRLS PVC.
The conductor size shall be minimum 0.5 sq. mm and Triplex cables similar to
instrumentation cables can be used for RTDs. The insulation shall be
strippable manually as well as by mechanical stripping devices without
damage to the conductor.
1.4 LIGHTING WIRES
1100 V grade, single core, stranded, copper conductor, PVC insulated wires
conforming to IS-694-1990 / IEC-60227 Part 1 (1978) / IEEE-719 (1981).
Minimum cross section of copper wires shall be 2.5 sq. mm for lighting circuits
and 4 sq. mm for receptacle circuits.
1.5 TRAILING POWER AND CONTROL CABLES FOR MOBILE EQUIPMENT.
11/3.3kV (UE) and 1100V-(E) grade power & control flexible trailing, annealed
tinned copper conductor, EPR insulated, EPR inner sheathed, CSP outer
sheathed and shall have conductor screen of rubber. Cables shall conform to
IS requirements and any other applicable standards.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE-5103A-H-500-01 SECTION: D3 – 11
SHEET 3 OF 11
Package : TITLE
1.6 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Type of cables for intercom system shall be selected to suit the EPABX
system. However, the cables shall be generally of 500 volts grade, annealed,
tinned copper conductor of size 23 SWG. (0.61 mm dia.) colour coded,
twisted pairs, pairs laid up, inner sheathed with extruded PVC, single steel
wire armoured and extruded PVC outer sheathed as per ITD specs and IS
5608. The multi pair cables (5 pairs and above) shall be helically wound
throughout.
Type of cable shall be selected to suit the PA system. However, the cables
shall be generally of 1100V grade, annealed tinned stranded copper
conductor twin core (twisted pair) having conductor size of 23/0.193 mm for
loud speaker connections, eight core (four twisted pair) with conductor size
14/0.193 mm for signal cable, two core 2.5 mm2 conductor for power supply,
inner PVC sheathed, galvanised round steel wire/strip armoured and overall
PVC sheathed.
2.0 CABLE PROPERTIES
2.1 All single core power cables shall have wire / strip armouring of aluminium,
whereas multi core power cable shall have galvanised steel wire / strip
armouring.
2.2 The sheath shall be resistant to water, UV radiation, fungus, termite and
rodent attack.
2.3 The outer sheath of FRLS PVC compound for all cables shall meet the
following performance requirements:
(a) The critical oxygen index value shall be minimum 29 when tested at
27+ 20C as per ASTM-D-2863-77 and the temperature index shall be
minimum 2500C at oxygen index value of 21 when tested as per NES-
715-1
(b) The maximum acid gas generation as determined by titration method

shall be less than 20% by weight when tested as per IEC-60754-1
(1994).
(c) The smoke generation under fire shall have maximum smoke density
rating of 60% when tested as per ASTM-D-2843-77.
(d) The cables shall pass the hydraulic stability and ultraviolet tests as per
DIN 53377.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE-5103A-H-500-01 SECTION: D3 – 11
SHEET 4 OF 11
Package : TITLE
2.4 The finished cable shall pass the flammability test as per IEC-60322-1 (2004)
and IEEE-3733. In addition, it shall also pass flammability test as per Class
F3 of Swedish Standard SS-424-1475 (1977).
2.5 In addition, cables for devices mounted on or near hot surfaces of steam
generators, steam turbine generators, main steam etc shall have heat
resistance type outer sheath.
3.0 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR CABLE SIZING
3.1 POWER CABLES

Power cable sizes shall be selected on the basis of current carrying capacity,
short circuit rating, permissible voltage drop and standardisation of cable
sizes.
3.1.1 Power cables shall carry the full load current of the circuit continuously under
site conditions considering the various derating factors like thermal resistivity
of soil, ambient air/ground temperature, grouping, method of laying, etc. The
design ambient air temperature and ground temperature shall be considered
at 50 deg C and 30 deg C respectively.
3.1.2 Power cables shall withstand the fault current of the circuit for the duration not
less than the maximum time taken by the primary protective system to isolate
the fault. Fault clearing times for 11000V motor feeders and transformer
feeders having high-set instantaneous protection shall be 0.16 sec., whereas
tie between two 415V switchgear and any two 11000 V switchgear shall be
0.5 sec, and for incomers and tie feeders 1.0 sec.
3.1.3 For 415V motors controlled by vacuum contactors with back-up HRC fuses,
the minimum cross-section of cables shall be based on the cut-off current of
the fuses and its fusing time.
3.1.4 For the cables to 415V motors and feeders protected by fuses, the cross
section shall be chosen according to the cut-off current of the fuse and its
fusing time.
3.1.5 Voltage drop from transformer secondary to motor terminals during starting
of motors will be limited to the following values :
(i) For coal mill motors-10% of the rated voltage
(ii) For all motors except BFP – 15% of the rated voltage.
(iii) For BFP motors – 20% of the rated voltage.
(iv) For LV motors – 15% of the rated voltage.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE-5103A-H-500-01 SECTION: D3 – 11
SHEET 5 OF 11
Package : TITLE
The minimum conductor cross section for power cables shall be 4 sq mm

aluminium or 2.5 sq mm for copper.
3.1.6 The voltage drop in feeder cables between PCC/MCC to motor terminals shall
be limited to 3% during full load running condition. However, the voltage drop
from transformer secondary to motor terminals during full load running of
motors shall be limited to 5 % of rated voltage.
3.1.7 For power supply to valve actuator motors, actuators of various isolating and
regulating dampers and exhaust fans, 3 core 2.5 sq. mm stranded copper
conductor cable may be used in view of ease of termination.
3.1.8 The design calculations for arriving at cable size shall be submitted for
purchaser’s approval.
3.1.9 DC System Cables:-
1100 V grade, single cores cables as specified in LT power cables shall be

used from batteries/battery chargers to main DCDB, between main
Distribution Board, from main Distribution Board to sub distribution board,
main DC supply to various system cabinets/panels, Switchgears etc and for
critical auxiliaries such as Emergency Lube & Lifting oil pump, seal oil &
control oil pumps, etc.
3.2 CONTROL CABLES
3.2.1 Current transformers leads shall be checked for the lead burden vis-a-vis the
current transformer VA capacity and knee point voltage. Minimum 2.5 sq mm
conductor cables shall be used for connection of CT to load.
In case 2.5 sq. mm conductor (cu) impose unacceptably high burden on CTs,
4.0-sq. mm conductor shall be used. The conductor material shall be copper.
3.2.2 Voltage transformer leads shall be checked for voltage drop which shall be
limited to within 1% for all cases other than tariff metering. For tariff metering
the voltage drop shall be limited to 0.2%.
In case the voltage drop with 2.5 sq. mm conductors exceeds this value,
higher conductor sizes shall be used. For control cables, the min size shall be
min 4 sq mm. for CT circuits
3.2 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE-5103A-H-500-01 SECTION: D3 – 11
SHEET 6 OF 11
Package : TITLE
3.2.1 Element identification : As per IEC-60189-2
3.2.2 Core wrapping : By non hygroscopic material by taping or

by extrusion
3.2.3 Element screening : By copper tape of minimum 0.04 mm thickness
or by copper laminated plastic tape.
3.2.4 Rip cord : Non metallic rip cord under the core wrapping
3.2.5 Drain wire : A tinned copper drain wire of minimum 0.5 mm2
cross section in contact with each screen of
cabling element.
Cabling elements shall be any one of the following:
A'pair'of two insulated conductors twisted together designated by alphabet
'
p'printed on a binding tape at 200 mm intervals.
A 'triple' of three insulated conductors twisted together designated by

alphabet’t’, printed on a binding tape at 200 mm intervals.
Maximum length of lay in the finished cable shall be 120 mm.

Units
Cables shall be bunched together in units of twenty cabling elements or sub

units of five or ten elements, stranded in concentric layers. The units or sub
units shall be designated by p1, p2, p3,. t1, t2, t3..,q1, q2, q3, .., or Q1, Q2,
Q3 ..., etc. depending on the combination.
Overall screening and armouring
Cables shall have an overall screen made up of copper/aluminium tape of

0.04 mm thickness or copper/aluminium of 0.008 mm thickness laminated
with plastic tape with a minimum overlap of 15%. A drain wire of tinned
copper with minimum 0.5 mm2 cross section shall be provided in continuous
contact with the screen.
Inner and Outer Sheath
The inner and outer sheaths shall consist of black PVC compound.
Insulation Resistance
Minimum insulation resistance per km shall be 500 mega Ohm.
Mutual Capacitance
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE-5103A-H-500-01 SECTION: D3 – 11
SHEET 7 OF 11
Package : TITLE
Mutual capacitance of any pair of conductors shall not exceed 120 nF/km.
Capacitance Unbalance
The capacitance unbalance between any two pairs shall not exceed 400 pF
for 500 metre length of cable.
The construction, performance and testing of cables except as mentioned

above shall generally comply with the following standards :
IEC-60189 - Part-1: Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation
and sheath. General test and measuring methods
IEC-60189 - Part-2: (-do- Cables in pairs and triples).
4.0 CABLE TERMINATIONS
4.1 Cables shall be laid in trays /trenches/ conduits by the contractor. Also joint
markers shall be provided at each joint.
4.2 All 11/3.3kV termination kits shall be of heat shrinkable type and suitable for
XLPE insulation and the same shall have been tested for a short circuit of 40
kA for 1 sec. Weather proof Double compression type cable glands and
heavy duty, tinned, long barrel copper lugs shall be used for termination.
4.3 All 1100V termination for XLPE/PVC power cables and control cables shall be
by Double compression weather proof type cable glands and heavy duty,
tinned, long barrel copper lugs
5.0 CABLE JOINTS
Cable joints shall be avoided to the extent possible. If joints are unavoidable
due to circuit length, in excess of permissible maximum drum length, they
shall be heat shrinkable types having a short circuit with stand capacity value
as specified above. Lugs shall be heavy duty, tinned copper, long barrel. All
cable glands shall be double compression, weather proof.
6.0 CABLE CARRIER SYSTEM
6.1 The cable carrier system shall be designed considering the following:
(a) Facility for easy laying of cables.
(b) Access to maintenance.
(c) Neat and aesthetic appearance.
(d) Safety of equipment & personnel.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE-5103A-H-500-01 SECTION: D3 – 11
SHEET 8 OF 11
Package : TITLE
(e) Ground water seepage.

(f) Drainage system for oil and water
6.1.1 Cables shall be laid in prefabricated ladder / perforated type trays and in
conduits. Also joint markers shall be provided at each joint. The cable trays
shall be laid vertical only in boiler, ESP, Coal handling area and ash handling
area.
6.1.2 Cable trays and supporting structures in chemically corrosive area like battery
room and water treatment plant shall be mild steel painted trays finished with
chlorinated rubber based paint/epoxy paint.
6.1.3 Cable trenches will be avoided to the extent possible inside Fuel oil pump
house, water treatment plants, Boiler & ESP areas where possibility of oil and
water collection exists.
6.2 No direct underground burial cables shall be laid except lighting tower, street
lighting. For some exceptional case like isolated individual equipments it shall
be allowed after approval by the owner /consultant.
6.3 cable carrier system such as cable trays, supporting structures ,cable trenches
of steam generator and steam turbine generator areas shall be provided by
the bidder.
7.0 CABLE INSTALLATION AND ACCESSORIES
7.1 All material and accessories required for cable installation like cable trays,
tray covers, support steel, etc., shall be hot dip galvanized and conduits/pipes
shall also be hot dip galvanized. The racks/trays, conduits/pipes, trenches
required to route the cables to individual equipment shall be supplied and
installed by the CONTRACTOR.
7.2 Separate trays shall be provided for HV Power/LV Power (AC&DC)/Control &
Instrumentation cables.
7.3 After laying all the cables, CONTRACTOR shall dress all cables by clamping
at every metre, so that the cables are securely held and aesthetically good.
7.4 Cable trays shall be avoided very close to the pipes carrying high temperature
steam. When they are inevitable, it shall be laid after OWNER approval and
suitable insulation material shall be provided between the cable trays and
pipes.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE-5103A-H-500-01 SECTION: D3 – 11
SHEET 9 OF 11
Package : TITLE
7.5 Wherever cables have to be laid to top of cooling tower and different
elevations of chimney, the cables shall be laid in conduits embedded in
concrete. The number of conduits shall be subject to Purchaser’s approval
considering different conduits for different phases / application.
7.6 11/3.3 kV cables shall be laid only in one layer. 1100 V cables up to 120-sq.
mm. can be laid in two layers. Control and Instrumentation cables can be laid
in three layers.
7.7 One spare conduit shall be provided for cable of center / outer drive in
clarifier.
7.8 No cable trenches shall be allowed in Boiler, ESP and coal handling system.
7.9 Power and control cables for critical / emergency drives / equipment like DC
EOP / JOP shall be kept away and routed in separate cable trays
7.10 In case of coal screen house and crusher house, cable shall be laid outside
the building through out the height and necessary platforms shall be provided
outside for maintenance and approach.
7.11 Cable routing on stacker reclaimer machine should be such that the trays
should be laid above the walkways and cable race should not be erected
below boom. Wherever any cable has to cross conveyor, the crossing should
take place above the conveyor either above the cross over ladder or by
providing separate plate form.
7.12 Contractor shall make all effort to provide one nos. ACDB in stacker reclaimer
machine at Slewing plate form to feed all the drives installed at Slewing
structure and above that. The incoming supply can be derived from LT MCC
at machine. This is required to reduce number of cables through
undercarriage and subsequent failure of cables.
8.0 CABLE TRAYS AND COVERS
8. 1 Cable trays of ladder and perforated types and the associated accessories
such as coupler plates, tees, elbows, etc., shall be fabricated from 14 gauge
(2.0 mm thick) mild steel sheets. Cable tray covers shall be provided for all
cable trays and raceways. The cable tray accessories like trays, elbows,
bends, etc., shall be fabricated and galvanized before bringing to site. Cable
tray covers shall be fabricated from 16 gauge (1.7 mm thick) MS sheets. All
the mild steel sheets shall be hot dip galvanized.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE-5103A-H-500-01 SECTION: D3 – 11
SHEET 10 OF 11
Package : TITLE
8.2 1100 V rated cables of sizes 120-sq. mm and above shall be laid in single
layer. Single core cables used for 3-phase AC power circuits shall be laid in
trefoil form with suitable PVC aluminum clamps to hold the cables.
8.3. The sizing of cable trays from TG building to other areas shall consider para
8.2 above an additionally to avoid crowding and criss crossing of cables,
especially in boiler area where vertical risers are to be provided for various
power, control and instrumentation cables to higher elevations of boiler.
8.4. Separate cable trays shall be provided for fire alarm/fighting DC system
cables communication system cables to avoid damage to these cables during
a fire in other cables.
8.5. Slotted angles shall not be used for cabling. In all locations smaller size cable
trays of 50 mm / 100 mm wide shall be used for one or two cables.
9.0 FIRE-PROOF SEALING OF CABLE PENETRATION
Cables / cable tray openings in walls and floors or through pipe sleeves from
one area to another or one elevation to another, between the units and within
the same unit, shall be sealed by a fire-proof sealing system. The fireproof
sealing system (FPSS) shall effectively prevent the spread of fire from the
flaming to the non-flaming side, in the event of a fire. The FPSS shall
conform to the following requirements:
(a) FPSS shall have a fire rating of two hours.
(b) The FPSS shall be subjected to fire endurance test, hose stream test,
temperature measurement of non-flaming side as per ASTM-E119.
'Standard method of fire tests of building construction and materials'
.
(c) The FPSS will also conform to the in-combustibility test carried out in
accordance with IS: 3144-1992.
(d) Under fire condition, the FPSS material shall not emit excessive
smoke or any corrosive or toxic fumes.
10.0 FIRE BREAK
10.1 Fire break shall be provided by applying a suitable fire-resistant coating on

cables for the required length to meet the fire rating specified above.
10.3 Fire break shall be provided at an interval of 15 metres in the straight portion
of each of the cable tray above ground, at intervals of 30 metres in cable
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE-5103A-H-500-01 SECTION: D3 – 11
SHEET 11 OF 11
Package : TITLE
trenches and at 5m for all vertical trays. All cable inter section and tee offs
shall be provided with firebreaks. Fire coating shall be provided on entire
length of cables in coal handling system.
10.4 When pipe sleeves are provided for cables from outdoor areas to indoor
areas, the pipe opening at the outdoor side shall be sealed by fire proof
sealing material, which is also continuously waterproof. The indoor side of
the pipe opening shall also be sealed by continuous fire proof sealing
materials. The duct banks in outdoor areas also need to be sealed by water
poof seals. It is necessary to explore possibility of applying waterproof
coating on fireproof sealing.
11.0 TESTS
11.1 The contractor shall conduct the routine tests and FRLS tests on each size of
cables as per applicable standards. Tests certificates of all type tests as per
applicable standards conducted on similar cables shall be submitted for
review.
If same size is supplied in different lots, inspection shall be done for each
lot. If same cable is supplied by different agencies, test shall be carried out
on cables supplied by each agency. These tests shall be carried out as per
relevant standards as applicable.
Also special tests for critical oxygen index, temperature index values, and
acid gas generation, smoke generation, and flammability test, effects of light
and water test as specified shall be conducted on specimen, from different
batches.
11.2 The contractor shall carry out all routine tests as per IEC 60189-1 for
instrumentation cables including
o Test for dielectric strength for one minute

o Insulation resistance test
Routine and acceptance tests shall be carried out on FPSS.
ISSUE
R0
.
LIMITED
TCE.5103A-H-500- 2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 1 OF 2
001 VOLUME- V
CABLES AND CABLE CARRIER SYSTEM
DATA SHEET-A3.11
The cables shall comply with the particulars indicated in the following table.
Sr. Description unit specification Bidders

No. specification
1.00 Name of manufacturer *
1.1 Conductor
No. core x Size *
Form- circular/segmented
Effective cross sectional area sq.
mm
1.2 Whether cores identification Yes

numbers for cables with 5 cores and
above to be provided
1.3 Whether incremental running lengths Yes

are marked on cable
1.4 Finished cable *

a) Diameter under armour in mm
b) Diameter over armour in mm
c) Overall diameter in mm
1.5 Cable drums *

a) Whether cable drums confirm to
IS : 10417
b) Length of cables in drum &
tolerance
c) Weight of cable drum without
cables
d) Weight of cable drum with cables
e) Type of end sealing
1.6 FRLS cables Ref. Clause 2.3

a) Critical oxygen index value at
250 deg C when tested for
temperature index test as per
ASTM-D-2863
b) Total acid gas generation by
weight when tested as per IEC –
754-1 in %
c) Percentage of light transmission
under fire for assessment of
smoke generation when tested
as per ASTM – D – 2843
.
LIMITED
TCE.5103A-H-500- 2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 1 OF 2
001 VOLUME- V
CABLES AND CABLE CARRIER SYSTEM
DATA SHEET-A3.11
Sr. Description unit specification Bidders

No. specification
d) Will the cables offered against
this specification pass the
flammability tests as per
1) Class – F3 – Swedish standard
S5-424- 1475
2) IEC 332 – 1
3) IEC 331 - 1
1.7 maximum dielectric loss of cable per Watt/ *

km at normal voltage and frequency km
1.8 Short circuit capability for 1 Sec kA In line with swgr.

rms rating
1.9 Maximum dielectric stress at core kV/ *

screen cm
1.10 Max. overall diameter of cables mm *
‘**’ The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the data after placement of order.
ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LTD. VOLUME – V
SPEC.NO.
TCE.5103A-H- SECTION: D3 – 12
500- 001 2 X 800MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM
SHEET 1 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Balance of DC SYSTEM
Plant
1.0 220V DC SYSTEM
1.1 220V DC power supply is the most reliable source of power supply for
control, protection, interlock and annunciation requirements of the power
station including c & I system during the normal running of the plant as well as
for a safe shut down at the time of the total power supply failure. For arranging
the DC supply for the above, the following shall be provided.
(a) 3 x 50% rated battery with associated float and boost charger and
Separate DC switchboard for each unit and station
(b) 2 x 100% rated battery with 2 sets of 100% rated float and boost
chargers and common DC switchboard for catering to 400 kV
switchyard load.
(c) 2 x 100% rated battery with 2 sets of 100% rated float and boost
chargers and common DC switchboard for catering to sea water intake
pump house.
(d) 2 x 100% rated battery with 2 sets of 100% rated float and boost
chargers and common DC switchboard for catering to the DC loads of
coal / ash handling system.
(e) 2 x 100% rated 48V battery with 2 sets of 100% rated float and boost
chargers and common DC switchboard for catering to the DC loads of
PLCC and SCADA systems located in 400 kV switchyard.
1.1 The following DC Distribution Boards shall be provided:
• DC distribution board shall be provided separately for each unit.

• Separate DC Boards shall be provided for each unit loads and station
load.
Tie shall be provided between each unit DC Boards and station DC
Boards. One set for switchyard DC load.
• One set for coal handling DC load - One bus section with two incomers
shall be provided.
1.2 The DCDB shall be floor mounted, modular, totally drawout, double front
Construction and shall have bottom cable entry. The other constructional
details of each DC switchboard shall confirm to the requirement indicated in
section on 415V switchgear.
1.3 All DC equipments like chargers, DCDB, JB etc shall be painted with power
Coating method of painting.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
SHEET 2 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Plant
1.4 DC system shall be unearthed system.
For each unit, 2 nos. 50% 220 V DC systems will operate in normal running
condition. Each of the systems will be fed from one bus section of respective
415V unit service / emergency switchgear. The third 50% 220 V DC system will
act as standby and will be fed from respective 415 V station service switchgear
and feed power to either of bus sections of respective 220 V DCDB through
selection facility.
1.2 Sizing
1.2.1 Each unit and station batteries shall be sized for unit and station loads. Coal
Handling batteries, PLCC, SCADA and Switchyard batteries shall be sized for
their respective loads.
1.2.2 The battery shall be sized for a discharge rate with end cell voltage per cell as
1.85V.
1.2.3 The 220 DC battery shall be sized to cater the following loads with minimum
duration as indicated.
a) Momentary load (For duration of up to 1 min.)

• Tripping and closing load of breakers
• Starting Currents of automatically started DC motors
• DC motor operated emergency steam stop valves
• Solenoid values
• Inrush current of supervisory safety system for fuel, turbine and
generator controls.
b) Emergency load (For a duration of one hour)

• Emergency Oil Pump
• Jacking Oil Pump
c) Emergency load (For a duration of two hours)

• Seal Oil Pump
• Scanner Air fan.
• Emergency lighting
• PA system
• Annunciation (20 %)
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
SHEET 3 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Plant
d) Continuous load (for 10 hours)

• Indicating lamps on switchgear and control panels
• Control room emergency lighting
• Auxiliary relays
• Numerical relays
1.2.4 Battery shall be sized in accordance with the IEEE 485-1983 considering
temperature correction factor (10 deg C above the ambient temperature),
contingency (10% margin) and ageing factor (25% margin). Minimum battery
back up duration shall be 10 hours and shall be in line with battery duty cycles
applicable for power plant emergency supplies. In addition, 20% margin shall
be provided.
1.2.5 Float charger will be rated to cater the following:
(a) Trickle charging current of the battery

(b) Continuous load on the DC bus
(c) Full load current of the largest DC motor
(d) 25% margin on Total.
1.2.6 The boost charger unit shall be rated such that the battery can be charged
from fully discharged condition within 10 hours.
1.2.7 The sizing calculation for battery, battery charger shall be given by the Vendor
for approval by Owner/Engineer.
1.2.8 Under normal conditions, the charger shall be in float mode and connected to
the DC switchboard and battery shall cater to the continuous load of DC
system plus trickle charging current of battery. In case of AC supply failure in
the plant, battery shall meet the DC load. After restoration of AC supply, the
fully / partly discharged battery shall be charged by charger in boost mode and
float charger shall continue to feed DC load. During this period, if AC fails,
battery shall feed the load.
2 24V DC SYSTEM
2.1 For the 24V DC power supply required for the complete control and
Instrumentation systems, 2 Nos. 100% rated batteries each with 100%
rated float and boost charger shall be provided for each unit.
2.2 The sizing of 24V battery and charger shall meet the requirements
outlined in clause 1.2.4 above.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
SHEET 4 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Plant
3. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
3.1 220V & 24V Batteries
3.1.1 The batteries shall be lead acid type capable of high discharge performance as
per Table – 2 of IS: 1652 for Plante cells.
3.1.2 The battery shall be closed top or sealed in type. Open type cells are not
acceptable.
3.1.3 All the accessories required for testing and maintenance shall be supplied with
the batteries along with electrolyte for first filling and 10% extra. These shall
also include + 3 volts DC voltmeter with suitable leads for measuring cell
voltage and hydrometer for measuring specific gravity of electrolyte in steps of
0.005.
3.1.4 The following tools and tackles shall be included:
• Single / two cell discharge resistance with selector switch and tapping
• Complete set discharge resistance with AH integrator for discharge
measurement
• Lifting device for removal and re erection of battery cells
3.1.5 The batteries shall be located on FRP stand. Battery isolation switches shall
be provided in Battery Rooms.
3.2 220V & 24V Battery Chargers
3.2.1 The float cum boost charger offered shall be static type with silicon controlled
rectifiers and diodes complete with resistor/capacitor network for surge
protection, connected in three phase full wave bridge circuit. All set points shall
be programmable and the charger shall be provided with double redundant
control channels.
3.2.2 Charger shall have provision for manual control if the auto mode fails. Load
limiting features shall be provided with the charger. The charger shall be
designed for adequate short time over load to take care of the starting of the
largest DC motor/testing of lamps, etc. with other DC loads connected to bus.
3.2.3 The chargers shall be provided with automatic voltage regulation in float mode
and automatic constant current regulation in boost mode. The necessary
shunts for local and remote metering of chargers shall be provided.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
SHEET 5 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Plant
3.2.4 The charger shall essentially comprise the following items :
• One (1) moving coil DC voltmeter and ammeter of size 96x96 mm of

suitable range for float cum boost charger. Necessary shunts for local
and remote metering shall be provided.
• One (1) moving coil centre zero ammeter, with shunt, of size 96 x 96 mm
to read discharge / charge current of the battery with suitable range
• One (1) AC input volt meter with selector switch for AC supply
monitoring.
• One (1) cubicle space heater suitable for 230V AC 50 HZ single phase
supply
• One (1) 230V AC lamp for cubicle internal lighting
3.2.5 Fault indicating lamps shall be provided on the charger cubicle and following
initiating contacts shall be provided for remote alarm for each of the float and
boost chargers. The alarms shall be provided on the CRT in the common
control room.
• Main AC failure
• Charger AC input fuse blown
• Charger DC output fuse blown
• Charger U/V and current limit protection
• Charger Over voltage protection
• Charger Over current protection
• Charger Filter condenser fuse blown
• Charger Rectifier fuse blown
• Tap Contactor off
In addition to the above, any additional indication/alarms considered necessary

during the detailed engineering shall also be provided.
3.2.6 For all the above alarms, a group alarm for each charger shall be provided on
the back up panel.
3.2.7 The charger shall be natural air cooled and no external fans shall be provided
to dissipate the heat developed within the panel. The main transformer of the
charger can be mounted in a separate enclosure to reduce heating inside the
charger.
3.3 The offered batteries and chargers shall comply with the technical requirement
table given below :
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
SHEET 6 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Plant

(Applicable for 220 V DC systems)
(a) General
(i) DC system voltage (Nominal): 220V & 24V

(ii) DC System earthing: Unearthed for 220V, earthed for 24V
(iii) Ambient design temperature for DC system: 50 deg C
(b) Battery Details
(i) Max time for boosting charging of : 1 hr

battery
(ii) Battery type : Lead acid, Plante type
(iii) Battery voltage :
Not less 1.85 V per cell
(b) Battery Charger Details
(i) DC voltage setting adjustment for : + 10% of nominal voltage

float charging
(ii) Voltage stabilisation for constant : (i) + 1% of set DC voltage with +
voltage regulator 10% variation in supply voltage.
(ii) + 5% during transients
(iii) DC current adjustment for boost : 100% of max. Boost charger current.
charger
(iv) Current stabilisation for constant : + 2%

current regulator for boost charger
(v) Min. Permissible p.f. at rated : 0.8
continuous load
(vi) Permissible ripple content at rated : < 1% max.
continuous load without battery
(vii) Degree of protection : IP42
(viii) Cable entry : Bottom preferable
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
SHEET 7 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Plant
4.0 TESTS FOR BATTERIES
4.1 All type, routine and acceptance tests shall be conducted as per the relevant
standards.
4.2 Capacity test and test for voltage during discharge shall be carried out at site
on completion of installation and commissioning and immediately prior to
putting the battery in service.
5.0 TESTS FOR BATTERY CHARGERS
5.1 The following routine tests shall be conducted at Vendor’s works :
(a) Visual checks for dimensions and general arrangement.

(b) Wiring checks
(c) Functional checks
(d) Voltage regulation for rated input supply for loads from 0-100%.
(e) Load test to show the charger can deliver the rated duty without the
current limiter device operating.
(f) Ripple measurement by oscilloscope at different loads.
(g) Demonstration of guaranteed efficiency and power factor
(h) Insulation test (with 500 V Megger).
(i) High voltage test, excluding electronic controller, at 2 kV AC for one
min.
(j) Test to demonstrate Voltage stabilization for constant voltage regulator
(With I/P voltage variation and starting) as specified in datasheet.
5.2 Heat run test shall be conducted as a type test at the factory.
5.3 Test certificates shall be submitted for bought out items.
6.0 DATA/DOCUMENTS TO BE FURNISHED ALONG WITH THE BID
6.1 Battery sizing calculations indicating relevant assumptions, characteristic

curves for both 220V and 24V DC systems.
6.2 Schematic drawings of charger showing main components and basic schemes
6.3 Data as per Technical particulars table given at the end of this section :
6.4 Experience list of battery and battery charges offered :

ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
SHEET 8 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Plant
7.0 DC SWITCHBOARDS
7.1 For feeding the 24 V DC loads, each unit shall be provided with a 24 V DC
switchboard with one incomer from each charger and a bus coupler.
7.2 The switchboards shall be provided with suitably rated incomers, required
quantity and type of outgoing feeders for the auxiliaries, control supplies to
various panels/systems. For each load and auxiliary, one separate feeder
shall be provided. In addition, the following feeders shall be provided in each
switchboard.
(a) Minimum of two nos. feeders of each type and rating as spare and the
same is the minimum quantity at the time of handing over the plant.
Any additional quantity required for increase/adjustment during detailed
engineering stage shall also be duly considered.
(b) 1 No. switchboard for 230V 1 phase space heating modules.
(c) 1 No. alarm module for common alarm of outgoing feeder fault.
7.4 Current Ratings
7.4.1 The short circuit current rating of the switchboard shall be arrived considering
the contribution from charger and battery with 5% margin, with minimum 25 kA
7.4.2 The continuous current rating of the bus bars, incomers, ties for 220V DC
switchboards shall be the maximum DC load (excluding the momentary load)
on the bus due to any operating condition, when unit system additionally feeds
station system or vice-versa plus 20% margin rounded off to the next higher
standard rating.
7.4.3 The incomer and bus couplers and bus bars of 24V DC system shall be rated
for the total load of one unit under any operating condition.
7.5.1 The constructional features of all DC switchboards shall comply with the
requirements of 415V AC switchgear as applicable. DCDB shall be
sectionalized and loads are to be distributed for easy maintenance and
isolation during earth leakages.
7.5.2 Positive and negative bus bars in the DC switchgear shall be completely
segregated from each other by sheet steel partitions.
7.5.3 In the 24V DC switchboard, shield bus as required for shield earthing may be
provided. DC DB incomer and bus coupler shall be suitable for operation from ISSUE
remote. R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
SHEET 9 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Plant
7.5.4 All the DCDB compartments shall have bottom cable entry through individual
cable gland for each power, control and instrumentation cables. Metallic
enclosure shall be provided between cable tray & cable entry.
7.5.5 Module details
(a) Incomer
The incomer modules shall be breaker controlled. Each incomer shall

be provided with:
• Ammeter & voltmeter
• Earth fault relay with contact for remote indication (only for
220V DC switchboards)
• Under voltage relay with timer
• Indicating lamps for ON, OFF, earth fault, under voltage
conditions
• One no each of current and voltage transducers for remote
indication
• Necessary hardware and circuitry for fault alarm, lamp test and
reset.
(b) Outgoing feeders and tie feeders/bus coupler
(i) These feeders shall be provided with suitably rated DC MCBs with
feeder on and fault indicating lamps.
(ii) The feeders rated 200 Amps and above shall be provided with a shunt
and ammeter
(c) Motor modules
(i) The motor starters shall be housed within DC switch boards. Separate
DC starter panels are to be provided near the Motors. The starting
current of the motor shall be limited to 200 % of full load current.
(ii) The motor modules shall be provided with :
• Switch, fuses, air break contactors

• Thermal overload relays
• Starting resistors with associated timers
• ON, OFF, FAULT indicating lamps
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
SHEET 10 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Plant
• Necessary auxiliary contactors for fault alarm circuit

• 230V space heating circuit
• ON, OFF PBs for testing purposes
• One shunt with ammeter and one shunt for remote indication ( if
required)
• Appropriate circuitry for receiving the ON, OFF commands from
remote panels/systems, interlocks, etc.
• MCB for space heating circuit
(d) Space Heating Module
230V, 1 space heating module shall be provided with incoming side

switch fuse, suitably rated 415/230V cast resin type transformer
(expected heating loads of the switchgear and the connected motors +
30% margin), secondary fuse, supply indicating lamp and connection to
space heating buses. The 415V power supply for these modules shall
be obtained from the unit service switchgear.
(a) DCDB Details
(i) Ref ambient temperature : 50 deg C

(ii) Degree of protection for : IP54
enclosure
(iii) Type of construction : Indoor, single/ double front,
non draw out type
(e) Alarm module
(i) Alarm module for outgoing feeder faults shall be provided with switch
fuse, alarm accept, reset PBs, ‘supply ON’ lamp, ‘fault detected’ lamp,
hooter, necessary auxiliary contactors, control circuit for detecting,
annunciating, accepting, resetting the fault in any module of the
particular bus section. Contacts from this module for common feeder
fault and its own module supply failure shall be provided and used for
annunciation in control desk.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
SHEET 11 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Plant
(ii) Alarm module for incomers/bus coupler faults shall be similar to the
above except that it shall work on 230V AC supply.
7.6 Control room alarms/indications/SER points
(a) Following indications/alarms shall be available in the control room

CRTs.
• Incomer, bus coupler, ties – ON & OFF

• Incomer current
• Alarm module supply failed
• Outgoing feeder fault
• Incomer alarm supply fail
• Bus under voltage
• Bus earth fault
• Bus voltage
(b) For the annunciation in control desk, alarms of a particular bus shall be
grouped as one window. The requirement of contacts to SER shall be
duly considered and provided.
7.7 Tests
7.7.1 All routine tests as per applicable standards shall be conducted on the DC
board.
7.7.2 Copy of all type test certificates on identical boards issued by authorised test
agency shall be furnished.
7.8 Data to be furnished with BID
7.8.1 Technical particulars for the switchboard as indicated below shall be furnished.
7.8.2 Descriptive literature/pamphlets on switchboard.
7.8.3 Write up on switchboard construction
7.8.4 Single line diagram showing ratings of all the buses, incomers, ties etc.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
SHEET 12 OF 12
Package : TITLE
Plant
7.9 METERING
7.9.1 All meters / shunts / transducers in DC system shall be class 1.00 only
7.9.2 Ammeters shall be provided on all incomer to DCDB with remote indication at
UCP / DCS
7.9.3 Center Zero Voltmeters with Earth fault detection relay shall be provided in Bus
PT of DCDB with remote indication at UCP / DCS.
7.9.4 Center zero ammeters shall be provided on bus coupler and ties
7.9.5 Charger DC output ammeter and voltmeter shall be provided with remote
indication at UCP /DCS.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
LIMITED
TCE.5103A-H-500- 2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 1 of 4
001 DC SYSTEM
VOLUME- V
DATA SHEET-A3.12
220 V DC battery & battery charger shall comply with the particulars indicated in the
following table.
Sr. Description unit Spec requirements Contractors

No. data
1.00 STATIONARY STORAGE

BATTERY
1.10 Application Unit/CHS/SY/SWPH/PLCC
1.2 No. of battery Bank required Nos. *
1.3 Reference ambient deg. 50

temperature for design of C
electrical devices
1.4 DC system voltage V 220V
1.5 Ampere hour capacity of AH min. 1200AH

battery at 27 deg. C
temperature for 10 hours rate
to give final cell voltage of 1.85
volts/cell
1.6 Discharge duty considered for *

battery sizing
1.7 a) Required area of battery *

and charger room
b) Battery orientation/ Single tier for batteries
mounting arrangement above 400AH capacity
1.8 Charging method proposed *
1.9 Battery charger rating required *

to charge the battery in 10 hrs
from fully discharged conditions
(both Voltage and current
range to be specified).
.
LIMITED
001 DC SYSTEM
VOLUME- V
DATA SHEET-A3.12
1.10 No. of cells per set
1.11 Open circuit voltage of each cell As per IS 1651 &

1652
1.12 Capacity factor considered for *

battery sizing
1.13 The details of derating factor *

considered for temperature
correction, ageing, future margin
considered ( min. 10 %) and any
other required as per relevant
standard
1.14 Type of enclosure Transparent
1.15 Type of battery cell Lead acid, Plante
1.16 Life of the battery hour *
1.17 No. of full charge – discharge Nos. *

cycles in a life
1.18 Recommended charging and *

discharging rate.
a) Normal operation
b) Quick charging
c) First charging
2.00 BATTERY CHARGER
2.10 Number of charger required Nos. *
2.2 Type Float & boost

separate
2.3 DC system voltage (nominal) Volts 220 V DC

.
LIMITED
001 DC SYSTEM
VOLUME- V
DATA SHEET-A3.12
2.4 DC system earthing Isolated
2.5 Ambient design temperature deg. 50

C
2.6 DC bus load considered with Amp *

break up for
sec
a) Short time load
b) Continuous load
c) Starting current of largest
connected DC motor
2.7 Battery charger current and *

voltage rating
a) Float
b) Boost
2.8 Float/Trickle charging current of *

battery
2.9 Max. Boost charging current of Amp *

battery Volt
Max. Boost charging voltage of
battery
2.10 Max. time for Boost charging of hours 10

battery
2.11 AC system date

a) Supply V, Hz 415V, 3 ph, 50 Hz
b) Variation in supply % +/- 10 % in voltage

+/-5 % in Frequency
c) Short circuit level 50 kA for 1 sec
d) Type of earthing solidly earthed
kA
3.12 Voltage stabilization for % ± 1 of D.C.

constant voltage regulator voltage, with (a)
AC input variation
as specified
± 5% during
transient. (b)
During switching
ON.
.
LIMITED
001 DC SYSTEM
VOLUME- V
DATA SHEET-A3.12
3.13 Performance
a) DC voltage setting % +/- 10 % of nominal
adjustment for float charger voltage
b) Maximum permissible % +/- 1 %

variation in DC voltage ( No sec
load to full load)
c) DC voltage setting % 70 % to 100 % of
adjustment for boost charging max. boost charging
voltage
d) DC current adjustment for 30 % to 100 % of

boost charging. % maximum boost
charging current
recommended by
battery
manufacturer.
e) Current stabilisation for %
constant current regulator for sec +/- 2 %
boost charger and time
f) Minimum permissible power

factor at rated continuous 0.80
load
3.14 Cable entry Bottom preferable
3.15 Permissible ripple content at %

rated continuous load
Without battery 3 (maximum)
With battery 1 (maximum)

‘**’ CONTRACTOR shall furnish the data after placement of order.
24 V DC battery & battery charger shall also comply with the particulars
indicated in the above table.
TCE FORM 329 R4

TCE.5103A-H-500-
001 SECTION: D3 – 13
SHEET 1 of 8
TITLE
Package: EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Balance of Plant
1.0 EARTHING SYSTEM
1.1 The Contractor shall provide all required material and carry out main earth grid,
treated earth pits, raisers and inter connections, equipment earthing etc for the
following areas and all areas/buildings/structures covered with in the battery limit
of this package.
a) 400 kV Switchyard
b) Main Station Building
c) Boiler area , ESP, Chimney ,IDCT & other electricals
d) CWPH, DM Plant, SWPH
e) FOPH
f) Coal / Ash Handling plant etc.
g) Miscellaneous buildings
h) Colony
1.2 For Transformer yard, separate earth grid shall be suitably formed and treated
earth pits including raisers shall be provided for transformer neutral & body
earthing, bus duct support structures and LAs. Earthing of purchaser’s
equipment shall be carried out by the Contractor.
1.3 Earthing system shall consist of earth grids and electrodes buried in soil in the
plant area, embedded in concrete inside the buildings to which all the electrical
equipment, metallic structures are connected to have earth continuity for safety
reasons. The earthing system shall conform to IS 3043.
2.0 DESIGN CRITERIA
2.1 Fault Current & Duration

For earth mat design, the size of earthing conductor shall be calculated
considering maximum fault current (50 kA) for duration of 1 second and
corrosion factor
2.2 Conductor Material

The earthing system conductors and accessories as proposed are to be as
follows:
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A-H-500-
SHEET 2 of 8
TITLE
Balance of Plant
(a) Conductors above ground level and in : Galvanised steel

trenches
(b) Conductors buried in ground or : Mild Steel
embedded in concrete
(c) Electrodes : GS Pipe / Rod
(d) Lightning protection air termination and : GS Flat

down conductors for buildings
(e) Exposed lightning protection air : Lead coated copper
termination on chimney top
The contractor shall undertake the soil resistivity measurements at site and
shall select suitable type of
conductors.
2.3 Size of Conductors
(i) Main Earthing Conductors

The earthing conductor sizes shall be calculated as per the following
formulae.
I 1
= K ------ IS 3043 Cl.12.2.2.1
S t
S= Cross-section area in sq. mm
I = Maximum A.C. rms ground fault current amperes.
t = Operating times of the protective device to disconnect the faulty

circuit, in sec.
K= Factor depending on the earthing conductor, the insulation and

other parts, and the initial and final temperature.
The factor “K” is determined by the formula
( B + 20) ( B + θf )
K = Qc ln e -------- IS 3043 Cl.12.2.2.1
δ 20 ( B + θi )
δ20 = Electrical resistivity of conductor material at 20 deg. C (ohm-mm).
Qc = Volumetric heat capacity of conductor material (J/deg. C. cu. m).
B = Reciprocal of temperature co-efficient of resistivity at 0 deg. C for

the conductor.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A-H-500-
SHEET 3 of 8
TITLE
Balance of Plant
θi = Initial temperature of conductor, (deg. C)

θf = Final temperature of conductor, (deg. C)
The calculated size shall be suitably (depending on the resistivity of soil)

increased as per table below to account for the loss of material (steel)
due to corrosion in soil.
RESISTIVITY OF SOIL OHM– Reduction in thickness/diameter, mm,

METRIC due to corrosion
<10 8.0
>10 <25 7.0
>25 <50 5.5
>50 <75 4.5
>75 <100 3.0
>100 1.5
(ii) Rod Electrodes

Galvanised steel rod electrodes of suitable diameter and length
shall be used as per the recommendation of IS-3043. For test pits
electrodes shall be heavy duty type (Class – C) GI pipe of suitable diameter
with perforations. . For treated earth pits, GI pipe shall be provided as per IS
3043 including charcoal, salt etc. Necessary number of treated earth pits
shall be provided for LAs, GTs, UTs, STs, SSTs in the transformer yard and
for all LT transformer Neutral & body earthing. Electrodes installed in the
test pits will have disconnecting facilities.
(iii) Earthing of Electrical equipment on cranes and travelling

machines:
Every electrical equipment shall have double earthing.
A ring earthing system shall be provided within the crane/machine to which

electrical equipment shall be connected at least at two places. The earth
ring on the crane/machine shall be connected to the plant earthing system
through gantry rails. Two sets of earth collector brushes shall be provided
on each side of crane/machine to connect its earth ring to the gantry rails.
Each end of each gantry rail shall be bonded to the plant earthing system.
In addition, intermediate earthing bond shall also be provided on the rails at
every 60m in case of longer tracks. Flexible copper bonds shall be provided
across any gap in the running gantry rails.
For mobile equipment with flexible cables, one separate copper conductor
of adequate size shall be provided for earthing.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A-H-500-
SHEET 4 of 8
TITLE
Balance of Plant
(iii) Equipment Earthing Leads

The size of the earthing leads shall be decided based on the type
of equipment and structure to be earthed and shall be provided
generally as per IS-3043.
(iv) Conductors for lightning protection system

The size of conductors for lightning protection system shall be
decided based on mechanical strength.
3.0 EARTHING SYSTEM LAYOUT

3.1 The earthing system design and installation shall generally comply with the
following standards.
(a) IS-3043 : Code of practice for Safety Earthing

(b) IEEE-80 : Guide for safety in Alternating current sub-station
grounding
(c) Indian Electricity Rules
3.2 The contractor shall submit the earthing drawing/layouts to electrical

Inspector/CEA for his approval. Necessary modification wherever required
shall be carried out by the contractor and got approved by the Inspector at no
extra cost to the Purchaser. After installation the resistance of the ground
grid shall be tested in presence of Purchaser/Consultant as per the IE rules.
After the test, report shall be submitted to Electrical Inspector/CEA for
approval. The submission of Earthing layout, drawings and obtaining
Electrical Inspectorates final clearances & approval shall be within the
responsibility of the Contractor. If the resistance is observed to be not less
than 0.5 ohm, the Contractor shall derive additional earth pits such that
resistance is less than 0.5 ohm.
3.3 General
Metallic frames of all current carrying equipment, supporting structures
adjacent to current carrying conductors, structures in contact with
switchyard earth, lightning protection system conductors and neutral points
of various systems shall be connected to a single earthing system.
Two earthing leads shall be used if rated voltage of equipment is above

250V. If the rated voltage is 250V or below, one earth lead shall be
provided. Metallic structures adjacent to electrical equipment shall be
earthed by one earthing lead.
Earthing system below and above grade for steam generator and steam
turbine generator shall be provided by the bidder. ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A-H-500-
SHEET 5 of 8
TITLE
Balance of Plant
3.3.1 Earthing conductors in outdoor areas shall be installed at a minimum depth

of 600 mm.
3.3.2 All cable trays in the plant buildings as well as inside the trenches shall be
connected to earth grid at an interval of about 10 m.
3.4. Earthing Conductor Layout in Switchyard
3.4.1 Main earthing conductors shall be laid in the form of a grid. Spacing
between conductors, number of parallel conductors, etc., shall be decided
such that step and touch potential are within safe limits.
3.4.2 The maximum permissible step and touch potentials shall be calculated in
accordance with the formula, given in IEEE-80.
3.4.3 Earthing conductors shall be provided around the outside edge of fence at a
distance of approximately 6000 mm. This shall be connected to the
switchyard earthing grid.
3.4.4 An earthing mat comprising closely spaced (about 150 mm) conductors shall
be provided below the operating handles of disconnecting switches and
breaker operating kiosk for the additional safety of the operating personnel.
3.4.5 Each earth leads of transformer neutral, lightning arrester earth leads, CVTs
earth leads shall be directly connected to two separate electrodes. Lightning
protection down conductor shall be directly connected to a separate earth
electrode.
3.4.6 All earth electrodes in turn shall be connected to station earthing system.
The earth grids of different areas of the plant shall be interconnected
through, test pits to enable measurement of earth resistance for each area
separately.
3.4.7 Earthing grid design shall be done in such a manner that the grid
resistance is less than one ohm.
3.5 Earthing Conductors Inside Building

3.5.1 Main earthing conductors shall be buried in earth around the building.
Minimum two taps-off from this earthing loop shall be taken inside the
building and connected to the earthing grid embedded in the floor slab with
approximately 50 mm concrete cover. The requirement of electrodes around
the building shall be specified.
3.5.2 In case the building has more than one floor, each floor shall be provided
with earth grid. Floor earthing grids shall be interconnected. ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A-H-500-
SHEET 6 of 8
TITLE
Balance of Plant
3.5.3 Each RCC / Steel column of the building shall be interconnected to the floor
earthing grid in the ground floor.
3.5.4 Cable trays, steel pipes / conduits, steel columns, etc., shall not be used as
earth continuity conductors.
3.5.5 Instrumentation system and computer system shall be provided with a

dedicated earthing system suitable for the equipment.
3.5.6 Earthing grids of all the buildings, outdoor yards shall be interconnected to
form a single grid for the plant.
3.5.7 Earthing grid design shall be done in such a manner that the grid resistance
is less than one ohm.
4.0 EARTHING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
4.1 The spacing between two electrodes shall be at least equivalent to twice
the length of the electrode.
4.2 Earthing conductor running exposed on column, walls, etc., shall be

Supported by suitable cleating, at intervals of 750 mm.
4.3 The earthing conductor crossing the road / track shall be laid in hume pipe
or laid at a greater depth to avoid damage.
4.4 When earth conductor passes through floors, walls, etc., suitable pipe
sleeves shall be provided and the same shall sealed after installation.
4.5 The connection between earthing pads / terminal to the earth grid shall be
made short and direct and shall be free from kinks & splices.
4.6 Metallic conduits and pipes shall not be used as earth continuity conductor.
4.7 Street lightning poles, flood light poles & towers, their junction boxes shall
be connected to the earthing conductor to be run along with supply cable.
This earth conductor shall be in turn connected to earth grid at two extreme
points.
4.8 Flexible earth conductors shall be provided at expansion joints for earthing
the gates, operating handles, etc.
4.9 Equipment bolted connection after being checked and tested shall be
painted with anti-corrosive paint / compound.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A-H-500-
SHEET 7 of 8
TITLE
Balance of Plant
4.10 Connection between the equipment earth lead and the grid conductor shall
be welded. For rust protection, the welds shall be treated with zinc
chromate primer and coated with zinc rich paint.
4.11 The cable sheaths, screens armour shall be earthed at both ends for multi-
core cables. For single core cables the same shall be done at one end
(switchgear end) only.
4.12 All bimetallic connections shall be treated with suitable compound to

prevent moisture ingression.
4.13 The contractor shall demonstrate the effectiveness of earthing system by

measurement of earth resistance, step and touch potential at different
locations.
5.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Lightning protection system shall consist of vertical air termination rods,

horizontal roof conductors, down comers, and pipe electrodes.
5.1 Need for Protection
The need for providing the lightning protection system shall be established
by calculating risk index for each building structure, etc., as per procedure
given in IS-2309 and any building whose risk index is more than 40 shall be
provided with lightning protection.
5.21 Lightning Protection System Layout
5.2.1 The lightning systems design and installation shall generally comply with IS:
2309 code of practice for the protection of building and allied structure
against lightning.
5.2.2 For chimney air termination, rods interconnected by circumferential

conductors will be provided at the apex of flue and also upon outer shell of
the stack. The air termination system will be formed by lead coated copper
conductors to prevent corrosion of conductors due to flue gas.
5.2.3 For cooling towers, air termination system will comprise of horizontal
circumferential conductors at the top.
5.2.4 For switchyard down conductors from the shield wires shall be run along the
tower connected to rod / electrode. The bidder shall submit optional price for
providing lightning masts for lightning protection in switchyard. Lighting
protection masts shall be provided in the switchyard. The calculations for
sizing and Number of lighting masts shall be furnished for approval. The
shield wires shall be provided wherever required.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A-H-500-
SHEET 8 of 8
TITLE
Balance of Plant
5.2.5 Each down conductor shall be connected to a rod electrode which in turn
shall be connected to the station earthing system through test links.
5.3 Lightning Protection System Installation
5.3.1 Conductors of lightning protection system shall not be connected with

conductors of safety earthing system above ground level.
5.3.2 The down conductors shall be welded to steel structures at 1000 mm

interval or cleated to wall at 750 mm interval. Wherever welded, the weld
locations shall be treated to provide rust protection.
5.3.3 Each down conductor shall be provided with a test link at a height of about
1000 mm above ground level.
5.3.3 All the metallic structures within a vicinity of 2000 mm shall be connected to
the lightning protection conductors.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
LIMITED
001 VOLUME- V
EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
DATA SHEET-A3.13
The minimum size and material of main earthing conductors given below are typical * and
shall be given per IS 3043
SR.NO / SIZE IN MM2 MIN SIZE

SYSTEMS
Above ground or
Buried in earth
Embedded in
concrete
1 MAIN EARTHING CONDUCTOR
a. 400KV system 500 32mm dia 50x10 mm flat
b. MV system 500 -Do- -Do-
c. LV system 500 -Do- -Do-
2 EARTH ELECTRODES
a. Rod Electrodes 20mm dia , 3000mm long galvanised steel
b. Pipe Electrodes. 40mm dia, 3000mm long galvanized steel class C pipe
3 MATERIAL
a. Above ground
Galvanised Steel- Galvanizing as per IS 2629- 1985
b. Below ground & Mild Steel.

Embedded in
concrete.
The minimum sizes of equipment earthing leads given are typical * and shall be as per
IS 3043
Sr No Equipment/ Structure Earth Lead Size
1 Equipment of HV/MV/LV system 50 x 10 mm flat
2 LT switch gears and Motor Control Centres 50 x10 mm flat
3 LT Motors
a. Fractional HP 8 SWG GI wire.
b. Up to 40 KW 25 x 3 mm flat
c. 41 to 71 KW 25 x 6 mm flat
.
LIMITED
001 VOLUME- V
DATA SHEET-A3.13
d. 71 KW and above 50 x 10mm flat
4 Isolated Phase Bus Duct and accessories 50 x 10mm flat
5 Generator and accessories 50 x 10mm flat
6 Transformer and accessories 50 x 10mm flat
7 Control Desks, Control/ relay panels, LDBs, PDBs, 25 x 6 mm flat.

Lighting Panels, Power receptacles, Lighting Masts,
Lighting Poles.
8 LPB stations, Limit/Pressure switches, Starters, 08 SWG GI wires.

CT/PT terminal Boxes.
9 Columns, Switchyard structures, Fence, Gates, 25 x 6mm flat

Cable trays etc,,
10 LT bus Ducts 50 x 10 flat
11 Switchyard Structure 50 x 10 mm flat.
MATERIALS
a. Above ground
Galvanised Steel-
Galvanizing as per IS
2629- 1985.
b. Below ground & below ground Mild Steel.
The minimum size and materials size and materials of lightning system conductors are
given typical * and shall be as per IS 3043
Sr. No. Description Min Sizes
1 Roof Conductors and down 25 x 6 mm GI flats

conductors for building and boiler
areas
2 Horizontal Air termination for 70 mm2 tinned copper conductor

Chimney coated with Lead
3 Vertical Air termination for chimney 20mm dia copper road coated
with lead, approx. 2000mm long.
4 Down Conductor for Chimney / 25 x 6 mm galvanised steel

.
LIMITED
001 VOLUME- V
DATA SHEET-A3.13
Cooling Towers conductor OR mild steel

embedded in concrete.
5 Pipe Electrodes 40mm dia 3000mm long

Galvanised steel
6 Rod electrodes 20-mm dia 3000mm long

galvanised steel.
Galvanizing as per IS 2629-1985.
NOTE: : ‘*’ indicated above shall be filled by CONTRACTOR. The min sizes given
above are typical only and for information
‘**’ CONTRACTOR shall furnish the data after placement of order.
DATA SHEET
The following shall be filled in the Contractor
Lightning Protection
1 Whether lightning conductors have been

envisaged for the lightning protection.
2 Angle of protection.
3 Whether building is also protected.
4 Number of electrodes provided.
5 Earthing resistance value
6 Size of down conductors
7 Standard followed
8 Deviations if any on technical specification
.
LIMITED
001 VOLUME- V
DATA SHEET-A3.13
Earthing
1 Material and size of earth strip for various
places
2 Gap between earth mat conductors-
lengthwise, breadth wise
3 Size of main outer strip
4 Galvanizing content on GI strips
5 Value of earthing resistance (proposed to be
achieved)
6 Standard to be followed for galvanizing
7 a)Type of electrodes
b)Size of material
8 Construction of earthing pit as per IS
9 Riser Connections
Material
2) Size
ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT VOLUME – V
SPEC. NO. COMPANY LTD.
TCE.5103A-H-500- SECTION: D3–14
001 2 X 800MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM
SHEET 1 of 15
TITLE
Package :
Balance of Plant LIGHTING SYSTEM
1.0 The light system shall be provided for complete power plant but not limited to
the following:
• Switchyard
• Power plant buildings (all bays & floors)
• Service building all floors
• Boiler including all platforms, Boiler area, Boiler bunker feeding
conveyor area and entire boiler bunker bays.
• ESP Control room, ESP area
• FOPH, Fuel oil storage area
• Coal handling plant area
• Transformer yard
• IDCT, Chimney etc
• Ash handling system
• CW Pump house
• Warehouse and other Administrative buildings
• DM plant.
• High mast (telescopic type) lighting of 30M height for outdoor
lighting and coal handling marshalling yard.
• Colony
The plant shall be provided with necessary indoor and outdoor lighting.
2.0 CATEGORIES OF LIGHTING

2.1 The plant lighting system shall comprise the following four (4)
categories.
(a) Normal 240V AC Lighting System

(b) Normal-cum-Emergency 240V AC Lighting System
(c) Emergency 220V DC Lighting System
(d) Maintenance 24V AC Lighting System
2.1.1 Normal 240V AC Lighting System
In this system, the lighting circuits shall be fed by the 3 phase, 4 wire
normal AC supply available from the normal lighting distribution boards.
All the lighting fixtures connected to this system shall be available as long
as supply is available from normal source viz., unit auxiliary transformer
or station transformer.
2.1.2 Normal cum emergency 240V AC Lighting System
Certain lighting fixtures considered essential shall be connected to this

system. In this system the lighting circuits shall be fed from lighting
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 2 of 15
TITLE
Package :
distribution board connected to 415V Normal / Emergency Switchgear.

The lighting fixtures connected to this system will be available whenever
normal supply is available in the plant and also whenever DG set
supplies the power to 415V Normal / emergency switchgear.
2.1.3 Emergency DC Lighting System
2.1.3.1 During station emergency involving total AC failure, incandescent lamp DC

lighting fixtures shall be provided for movement of personnel in important
areas/buildings at strategic locations viz., near entrance, staircase,
landings etc. and for lighting the control room and DG set area.
2.1.3.2 These fixtures shall be connected to lighting panels supplied from 220V
DC battery in the plant viz., TG building, switchyard, boiler, ESP,
transformer yard. These lighting fixtures shall be normally ‘OFF’ and shall
automatically get switched “ON” the moment AC power supply fails. When
power supply is restored they shall be switched “OFF” manually. In other
distant areas like coal handling, Ash handling plants, WT plants, Water
system plants etc., the fixtures shall be ‘Instalite’ type which is permanently
connected to normal supply charging a battery. These will switch “ON”
automatically when AC power supply goes “OFF”.
Lighted Exit signs shall be provided and installed in the control room,
switchgear room, relay room, maintenance areas.
2.1.4 Maintenance 24V AC Lighting System
For lighting facilities comprising portable hand lamps and/or connection of

portable hand tools etc., required during the routine maintenance work, 24V
single phase 3 pin sockets with switches shall be provided at selected points
in the areas listed below. Such sockets for routine maintenance shall be
clearly identified by colour coding in order to distinguish them from the normal
240V power outlets. Necessary outlets shall be made on the inside walls of
the building near equipments.
(a) Boiler area: Near inspection manholes on the boiler platforms and near
boiler drum at different levels on all four sides.
(b) TG building: Near HP & LP heaters, turbine flash tank, blow down tank,
near condenser water box and near bus duct termination of generator
end.
(c) ESP columns : Near inspection manholes
(d) Near deaerator
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 3 of 15
TITLE
Package :
(e) Cable galleries.
(f) Any other areas considered necessary by CONTRACTOR.
3.0 The area wise distribution of lighting fixtures connected to the above
systems is indicated below:
Area wise Distribution of Lighting System in the Plant
Area/building Percentage Distribution of Lighting

Normal Normal & 220V DC
Emergency
Turbine Generator Building 80% 20% 5%
Control room 80% 20% 10%
Boiler Area (Grade level & 80% 20% 5%
Platforms)
Switchyard relay room 100% - 5%
Switchyard 100% - 5%
Service building 100 - At selected
points
DG set control room 60% 40% 10%
Electrical switchgear rooms 80% 20% One instalite
such as Coal Handling
Control room, etc.
Power house outlying areas 100% - -

and all roads
4.0 LIGHTING SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM:

Separate lighting transformers shall be provided for the main lighting along
with Sub-lighting distribution boards located at required location. Lighting
distribution system shall be distinct and separate from the LT main
distribution. Separate lighting transformers shall be used to supply lighting
load. AC lighting panels shall have single-phase, 2 wire incomer controlled by
earth leakage circuit breaker and number of single phase outgoing circuits
controlled by MCBs. Lighting panels feeding the boiler area shall be provided
with contactors for control from a remote point. Lighting fixtures of Boiler area
Platforms shall be fed from different circuits such that all the lights in the area
are not ‘ON’ all the time. The lights connected to a circuit or few circuits shall
be ‘ON’ automatically through photocell. Provision shall be made for switching
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 4 of 15
TITLE
Package :
‘ON’ the rest of the lights. Lighting fixtures in indoor areas shall be controlled
from the respective lighting panels.
4.1 Normal 240 V AC Lighting System

240 V Supply shall be derived from lighting Transformers instead of 415 V
(3Ph, 3 wire) panels. Different circuits shall be used from different source.
The whole lighting network shall be balanced as far as possible.
In unmanned premises, normally the intermittently installed lights shall be
‘ON’ with separate control. All other lights shall be made ‘ON’ or ‘OFF’,
whenever required.
4.2 Normal/Emergency AC System

For this system, the distribution shall be by 415V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz
supply with effectively earthed neutral. This supply shall be derived from 415
V, 3-phase, 3-wire, 50 Hz normal emergency switchgear for NE & lighting
through delta/star lighting transformer. The secondary of lighting transformer
shall be connected to respective 415 V, 3-phase, 4-wire AC lighting
distribution board (LDB). The LDBs shall be provided with number of
outgoing circuits controlled by MCBs to feed the lighting panels distributed in
and around the plant
4.3.1 220 V DC Lighting System

Emergency DC lighting supply distribution shall be on 220 V DC, 2-wire
unearthed system. This power supply shall be obtained from the nearest 220
V DC switchboard. DC lighting panel shall be provided for distribution of
lighting supply. This panel shall have an incoming switch, under voltage
relay and number of outgoing circuits controlled by switch fuses. On failure of
AC supply from N/E distribution connected to the panel, under voltage relay
shall drop out and shall switch ‘ON’ the incomer DC contactor and thus the
DC supply to lighting circuits. Necessary outgoing feeders for purchaser’s use
shall be provided.
4.3.2 Distribution of 24 V AC Maintenance Lighting System

24 V AC supply for maintenance purposes (for hand lamps and/or hand
operated tools) shall be supplied from 24 V AC distribution panel, which
receives 240 V power supply from 415 V/240V transformer modules of N/E
switchgear. 24 V AC distribution panel consists of one incoming double pole
switch with fuses and MCBs, one 240/26.5 V dry type transformer of
adequate rating and HRC fuses on 26.5 V side of the transformer. This shall
be strategically located and suitable circuits shall be formed. This panel shall
be wall / column mounting type.
5.0 Illumination Levels and Choice of Lighting Fixtures
The area-wise distribution of average illumination levels and type of

luminaries shall be as indicated below:
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 5 of 15
TITLE
Package :
Sl. Area/ Structure Averag Type of Fixture Type of

e Lumina ire
No.
Lumin
a tion
Level
in Lux
1.0 TURBINE GENERATOR
BUILDING
1.1 General (auxiliary 150- Industrial well glass 1 x 70 W/
equipment areas) 200 vitreous enamel reflector 1 x 150 W
integral mounted control HPSV lamp
gear/industrial bulk head
with integral mounted
control gear
1.2 Cable vault 100 Industrial type with vitreous Energy
enamel reflector Efficient
FTL
1.3 All switchgear room area 250 Industrial type with vitreous Energy
(including off-site building enamel reflector Efficient
control room) FTL
1.4 TG Building operating floor 200 Industrial high bay with 1 x 400 W
anodised aluminium meal halide
reflector lamp,
1.5 Control room 500 Decorative recessed with Energy
wide angle mirror optic anti efficient
glare type lamp-T5
1.6 Battery rooms 250 Vapour proof Energy
Efficient
FTL.
1.7 Air washer room and A/C 200 Totally enclosed vapour Energy
plant room proof with clear acrylic Efficient
cover FTL
1.8 Unloading and 300 Industrial high bay with 250 W
maintenance bay anodised aluminium HPSV lamp
reflector (for
mounting
height >9m)
1.9 Electrical laboratory, 250 Decorative recessed with Energy
chemical laboratory (air- wide angle mirror optic Efficient
conditioned) anti-glare type FTL
1.10 Chemical laboratory (non- 250 Corrosion proof Energy
air conditioned) Efficient
FTL
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 6 of 15
TITLE
Package :
1.11 TG building ground, 200 Industrial well glass with 1x70 W
mezzanine floor and misc. integral control gear HPSV
floors
1.12 Chimney Qty as As per AAAI Flood light,
per Aviation
AAAI warning
lights and
bulk head
for
staircase.
2.0 BOILER AREA
2.1 Boiler area and platforms, Dust proof / dust tight well 70W HPSV
ESP area and platforms glass fixture lamp
150
indoor
2.2 Feeder floor areas 150 Dust proof / dust tight 70 W
increased safety well glass HPSV lamp
2.3 ESP control room 300 Decorative recessed with Energy
wide angle mirror optic Efficient
anti-glare type FTL
Energy
2.4 ASH handling Control room 300 Decorative recessed with
Efficient
wide angle mirror optic
FTL
anti-glare type
2.4 ASH handling Area 100 Dust proof / dust tight well 1 x 70W
glass with reflector wire HPSV
guard integral mounted
control gear
3.2 Near equipment 30-35 Dust proof / dust tight well 1 x 70W
glass on fire partition walls HPSV
4.0 VARIOUS OFF-SITE BUILDING
Energy
4.1 Switchgear room (pump 200 Industrial type with vitreous
Efficient
house DG house) enamel reflector up to
FTL
mounting height of 8M
Energy
4.2 Equipment room 250 Industrial high / medium
Efficient
bay depending on height
FTL
4.3 Outside working areas 70 Flood light medium beam 1 x 150W

HPSV lamp
4.4 Stores 100 Industrial type with vitreous Energy
enamel reflector Efficient
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 7 of 15
TITLE
Package :
FTL
5.0 COAL HANDLING PLANT
5.1 Conveyors enclosed Dust proof well glass with 1 x 70 W

reflector wire guard HPSV lamp
100
integral mounted control
gear box.
5.2 Underground conveyor 40 Flame proof industrial bulk 70W HPMV
tunnel head with integral control
gear box
5.3 Crusher house, Junction 100 Dust proof / dust tight well 1 x 70W
towers glass with reflector wire HPSV
guard integral mounted
control gear
5.4 Coal yard 15 – Flood light 1 x 400W
25 HPSV
5.5 Coal unloading, track 25-50 Flood light 1 x 400W

hopper stacker reclaimer HPSV
5.6 Control room 300 Same as in Unit control Energy
room. Efficient
FTL
6.0 WATER TREATMENT PLANT
6.1 General 150– Corrosion proof 2 x 70 W
200 HPSV
7.0 FUEL OIL TANK FARM 30 – General purpose flood light 250W
50 HPSV lamp
7.1 Fuel oil decanting pump 100– Flame proof well glass 1 x 70 W
house 150 HPMV lamp
8.0 ROAD & YARD LIGHTING
8.1 Roads 15 Street light with clear 1 x 70W
acrylic cover cut-off type HPSV
control gear
8.2 Perimeter (compound) 10 – - do - - do -
lighting 20
8.3 Yard lighting 15 – General purpose flood 250W
20 light HPSV
8.4 Parking area 70 General purpose flood 1 x 250 W
light, high/medium beam HPSV
flood light
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 8 of 15
TITLE
Package :
9.0 Workshop in the service 300 Industrial type with vitreous 2x36W F.L
building enamel reflectors/industrial x 250 W
high bay HPSV
10.0 ADMINSITRATION BUILDING
Energy
10.1 Main office areas cabins 250 Decorative recessed type
Efficient
(air conditioned areas) with mirror optic reflector
FTL
Energy
10.2 Main office areas, cabins 250 Decorative recessed type
Efficient
with false ceiling but non- with mirror optic reflector
FTL
air-conditioned
Energy
10.3 Main office areas, cabin 250 Decorative with wide
Efficient
non air-conditioned areas angle mirror optic reflector
FTL
without false ceiling
Energy
10.4 Warehouse, canteen, 150 Industrial type with vitreous
Efficient
medical centre enamelled reflector
FTL
11.0 GENERAL
Energy
11.1 Corridors, walk-ways, 150 Industrial type with vitreous
Efficient
staircase, etc. enamel reflectors/channel
FTL
mounted box type compact
FL
11.2 Lockers, toilets, wash 100 Channel mounted box type Energy
rooms, etc. Efficient
FTL
11.3 Building periphery lighting - Industrial well glass with 1 x 70 W
integral mounted control HPSV lamp
gear/industrial bulk head
control gear
Energy
11.4 Elevator lighting 100 Industrial type with vitreous
Efficient
enamel reflectors/channel
FTL
mounted box type compact
FL
12.0 DC LIGHT FITTINGS
12.1 Control room - Decorative recessed type 1 x 100 W
with cylindrical reflector incandesce
nt lamp
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 9 of 15
TITLE
Package :
12.2 Other areas - Industrial bulk head or 1 x 100 W

industrial well glass with incandesce
reflector nt lamp
CONTRACTOR shall measure the Lux levels in the above areas

(measured at the working plane) using suitable devices/meters as per
relevant standards to prove the specified values.
NOTE :
1. Energy efficient FTL – T5 type energy efficient tube light fittings shall be used.
2. N/E AC lighting and DC lighting shall be identified with suitable colour code.
CONTRACTOR may change the type of fixture to be used in different area against
indicated above, provided minimum illumination level as indicated above is
maintained. Lighting shall appear aesthetically good. CONTRACTOR shall
measure the lux levels in the above areas (measured at the working plane) using
suitable devices/meters as per relevant standards to prove the specified values.
Different type of fixtures can be used with owner’s approval.
3. For chimney / IDCT aviation warning lights as per AAAI’s recommendation shall be
provided. Three Nos. aviation beacons shall be provided at each of the following
elevations :
a) At the topmost elevation.

b) At a platform, the height of which does not exceed 105 m from the top
elevation.
c) At another platform within 105 m from the platform at which the beacons at
item 2 above are provided.
6.0 LIGHTING SYSTEM DESIGN
6.1 The lighting system design shall comply with the acceptable norms and
the best engineering practices. The system design shall consider
principles of lighting specified in following paragraphs. The lighting layout
shall be designed to provide uniform illumination with minimum glare. The
layout design shall meet all the statutory requirement, local rules etc.
6.2 Indoor Lighting
The recommended values of illumination level for various areas in the

plant are indicated in the Table above. Following factors shall be
considered while arriving at the utilisation factor to determine the number
of fixtures for each area/buildings in the plant.
6.2.1 Maintenance Factor :
(a)Air conditioned clean interiors like office rooms,
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 10 of 15
TITLE
Package :
Laboratories, Auditorium : 0.8
(b)Industrial areas with normal interiors such

as workshops, stores : 0.7
(c) Industrial areas with dusty interiors : 0.6
(e)Industrial areas with very dusty interiors such as
crusher house and junction towers : 0.5
6.2.1.1 Reflection factor for wall/ceiling

(a)White and very light colours : 0.7
(b)Light colours : 0.5
(c) Middle tints : 0.3
(d)Dark colours : 0.1
6.2.3 Utilisation factor considering the room index at applicable surface

reflection factors. The working plane shall be considered at 0.85 m from
the floor level.
6.2.4 The value of the ratio of spacing (S) to mounting height (H) shall be
commensurate with the type of fittings selected, uniformity of illumination.
The suspension height for suspended fixtures shall not exceed 1 meter.
6.2.5 The lighting shall be designed such that no glare appears on the CRT in
control room.
6.3 Outdoor Lighting
6.3.1 The recommended illumination levels for outdoor areas are indicated in the
above table.
6.3.2 Mounting height, spacing of flood lights shall be based on lamp wattage,
uniformity of illumination and vertical angles. Ratio of minimum to average
illumination shall not be less than 0.3 and for minimum to maximum shall not
be less than 0.05.
6.3.3 Maintenance factor shall be generally 0.6 under average conditions.
6.3.4 Flood lights for area lighting shall be mounted on building structures. For
outdoor lighting i.e. around the power plant building and transformer yard
provision to be made with 400W outdoor type lamps mounted on
wall/structures.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 11 of 15
TITLE
Package :
6.3.5 The mounting height of the luminaries shall be generally 9 m.
6.3.6 Lighting design for roads shall consider a maintenance factor of 0.6 for
average conditions.
6.3.7 Ratio of minimum to average illumination shall not be less than 0.3. The road
lighting layout shall consider the width of the road to decide whether the
lighting poles shall be located on one side or on either side.
6.3.8 Automatic switching ON/OFF shall be through timers/photo cells. For road
illumination inside the battery limit lighting poles shall be provided every 30m.
6.3.9 Aviation obstruction lights:
a) These shall be provided on tall installations as per regulation.

b) The chimney aviation lights shall have neon type with two lamps. Only one
lamp shall be ON at a time. Its failure shall initiate alarm. One Photo controller
shall be provided for automatically change the intensity based on natural light.
The aviation lighting distribution board shall have facility to receive supply
from normal and emergency supply.
7.0 SWITCHES, RECEPTACLES & CEILING FANS
7.1 In the plant areas, the lighting circuits shall be controlled directly from the
MCBs in the lighting panels. Wherever the lighting panel is not in the same
area, separate switches shall be provided. For cabins, rooms, etc., separate
switches shall be provided for each point. Similarly for entrances, building
periphery lighting separate switches shall be provided.
7.2 240V, 50 Hz, 3 pin Power Receptacles (5A and 15A) shall be provided in all
building/areas of the plant. Inside a building, receptacles shall be provided at
interval of 30m or part there of for hand tools, water coolers, exhaust fans etc.
Inside each cabins at least two receptacles shall be provided and the same
shall be indoor/outdoor/flameproof as per the location. Minimum 2 nos of 5A
and 1 no 15A receptacles shall be provided in each room. 20A sockets shall
be used for AC & ventilation and shall be controlled through MCBs.
7.3 Ceiling fans/Exhaust fans
1200mm sweep ceiling fans shall be provided for office rooms, store rooms
and other un manned premises and other social buildings. At least one no of
fan shall be provided for every 10 sq metre area. The ceiling fans shall be
complete with electronic regulator.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 12 of 15
TITLE
Package :
Exhaust fans for toilets, battery rooms etc shall be provided with their control
devices (MCBs) & louvers.
8.0 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (LDB) & LIGHTING PANELS (LP)
8.1 The Main Lighting Distribution board shall be fed through 415V/433V lighting
transformers with off circuit taps ± 5% in steps of 2.5%. The lighting
transformer shall be cast resin dry type and shall be housed in a suitable
enclosure. In general, the transformers shall confirm to the specification
covered under ‘Service transformers (section D 2.9). The main lighting
distribution boards shall consist of two incoming ACB with a bus coupler and
required number of out going triple pole and neutral SFUs. Sub distribution
shall consist of one number triple pole and neutral incoming SFU and
required number of miniature circuit breakers for outgoings. The MLDB shall
be designed for the required short circuit level of 20 kA. All the distribution
boards shall be sheet steel clad, dust and vermin proof, cubicle type with
degree of protection conforming to IP-52. Outdoor panels shall be weather
proof type with IP-54 protection. The thickness of sheet steel enclosures
shall be 2 mm minimum for load bearing and 1.6 mm for other members. In
main lighting, feeders for Purchaser’s use and spare feeders shall be
provided as required during detailed engineering.
Number of outgoing feeders in MLDB’s, SLDB’s shall be provided as per

requirement including the spare feeders and feeders for “PURCHASER’S
USE”. Each outgoing MCB in LDB’s shall be of 15 A, but load to be limited to
2 kW or maximum 10 nos. fittings to be connected to one MCB.
Individual control in office buildings shall be through single pole flush type
switches/MCBs. In those areas where group controls are required, rotary
switches shall be provided.
External area lighting shall be fed from separate boards located at suitable
places. Automatic switching ON/OFF of these circuits shall be done through
timers/photo cell.
In high bays, walkway shall be provided for maintaining light fittings. At other
places suitable ladder / platform / approach shall be provided for maintaining /
replacement of light fittings.
Each of the LDBs shall be provided with voltmeter and ammeter along with
selector switches, ‘SUPPLY ON” indicating lamps, etc. The switch boxes,
receptacle boxes etc. shall be made up of 18 SWG sheet steel.
Two ground pads with bolts and nuts shall be provided on each board for
connection to 50x6/25x3 mm GS flat.
Painting : All sheet steel enclosures of panels, switchboards & receptacles

shall be chemically cleaned rinsed, phosphated & dried. After the treatment
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 13 of 15
TITLE
Package :
steel surfaces shall be given two coats of finished enamel paint of approved
shade.
8.2 The distribution of lighting fixtures/receptacles shall be such that the loading
on each phase of the LDB is approximately equal.
8.3 Bus and Bus bar Connection
Panel bus bar shall be electrolytic grade hard drawn aluminium colour coded
for easy identification of required size.
9.0 CABLES AND WIRING
9.1 Heavy duty AYWY cables with FRLS, PVC inner sheath and outer sheath
shall be provided for the following connections:
a) Incoming feeders to all LDBs, receptacles, lighting panels and emergency

DC lighting panels.
b) Feeders connecting area lighting panels to outdoor lighting panels, etc.

shall be of 3 core x 2.5 sq. mm, 1100 V grade FRLS, PVC stranded cable
of copper.
9.2 Wiring from lighting DBs/panels to individual fixtures, plug points, fans, etc.
shall be of single core, 2.5 sq. mm, 650 V grade PVC stranded copper
conductors through surface mounted or concealed medium duty GI conduits
confirming to IS 1239 with earth wire. The wires shall occupy 60% of the
conduit area.
9.3 650 V / 440 V grade stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated, colour
coded, wires laid in GI conduits shall be used for lighting in non-hazardous
area. In the hazardous area, outdoor areas like transformer yard and road
lighting, cable wiring shall be adopted. The specification of cable shall
conform to the details indicated in “Cabling System” section.
9.4 Minimum size of wires in case of conduit wiring shall be 2.5 sq. mm. copper in
case of lighting and 4 sq. mm. copper in case of receptacle wiring. Minimum
cable size in case of cable wiring shall be 4 sq. mm aluminium for lighting and
6 sq. mm for receptacles
9.5 Wires of different phases shall be run in separate conduits. However, wires
of same phase but having different circuit nos. can be run in same conduit.
Wires of lighting and power receptacles shall be carried out in separate
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 14 of 15
TITLE
Package :
conduits and on separate circuits. Wires of AC and DC lighting system shall
be carried out in separate conduits..
9.6 For outdoor lighting, the cable shall be buried at a minimum depth of 750 mm
from ground level or run in cable trays. The buried cables shall have suitable
bedding, protective covers and markers.
9.7 Material used for saddles, clamps, JBs, etc. shall be galvanised.
9.8 Office buildings, laboratory buildings shall have concealed wiring with 2.5 sq
mm cable using PVC conduits. In heat zones, i.e. in the areas where ambient
temperature is 60oC and above, heat resistant control cables shall be used in
hot dip galvanised rigid steel surface mounted conduits.
10.0 LIGHTING CIRCUIT DESIGN
10.1 In an area, the lighting fixtures shall be arranged in different phase / LPs such
that even in case one lighting panel is faulty complete lighting is not affected.
In case of any location the lighting shall be arranged from two phases.
10.2 The circuit loading on each circuit shall be restricted to 80% of the MCB
rating.
10.3 The voltage drop from LDB and any fixture shall not exceed 3%.
10.4 The contractor shall submit design calculation for sizing of LDBs and shall
demonstrate the lumen contour at the location decided by the owner.
11.0 TESTS
11.1 The type test reports of the following items as per relevant standards shall be
submitted for review and approval.
i) Lighting fixtures of each type

ii) Lamps of each type and rating (life cycle and rating test only)
iii) Lighting panel of each type (degree of protection)
iv) Junction box of each type
v) Receptacles of each rating
vi) MCB of each rating
11.2 Type tests, acceptance tests & routine tests for the lighting fixtures and
accessories covered in this specification shall be carried out as per the
relevant standards.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
SHEET 15 of 15
TITLE
Package :
Test to be carried out for LDB shall be as follows:

IR test before and after HT test.
HV test by HV megger.
Checking for functions of components for each module
Checking for interchange ability of similar components.
Checking of tightness of earth connection.
Testing and calibration of all indicating meters.
Check output of each feeder after energisation
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
.
001 LIGHTING SYSTEM
DATA SHEET-A3.14
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
The details as per Technical Particulars shall be given below:
12.1 Indoor Lighting
12.1.1 Make of light fittings :
12.1.2 Make of main DB :

12.1.3 Make of sub-lighting DB :
12.1.4 Type of fitting for periphery lighting and :

control for same
12.1.5 Cable laying method :
12.1.6 Control operations :
12.1.7 Escape lighting :
12.1.8 Type of cable proposed :
12.1.9 Make of cables :
12.1.10 Type of fittings at various locations :
12.1.11 DC emergency lighting control board :

with necessary contactor
12.1.12 Type of incomer for main and sub-DBs ;
12.1.13 Type of outgoing for main and sub-DBs :
12.1.14 Second source of supply considered for :

all the areas
12.1.15 a) Degree of protection for main and :
sub-DB enclosure
b) Mounting details for DBs :
12.1.16 Phase to phase and phase to earth :

clearances in main and sub-DBs
12.1.17 Busbar arrangement in Sub-DBs :
12.1.18 Make of ballast :
12.1.19 Make of switches :
12.1.20 Erection accessories such as junction :

boxes, clamps, saddles
12.1.21 Make of ceiling fans :
.
001 LIGHTING SYSTEM
DATA SHEET-A3.14
12.1.22 Make of exhaust fans :
12.1.23 Make of flame-proof fittings and :

catalogue numbers
12.1.24 Rating of exhaust fans :
12.1.25 Deviations, if any, on technical design :

data
12.2 OUTDOOR LIGHTING
12.2.1 Type of fittings envisaged :
12.2.2 Make of fittings :
12.2.3 Lux level to be obtained :
12.2.4 Provision of escape lighting :
12.2.5 Location of main and sub-DBs
12.2.6 Control of lighting :
Automatic / Manual :
12.2.7 Cable laying above ground :
12.2.8 Deviations, if any, on technical :

specification
SPEC.NO. SECTION: D3 – 15
TCE.5103A –H- 2 X 800MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM
500-01 SHEET 1 OF 10
TITLE
Package :
Balance of Plant FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The scope of work shall include design, engineering, supply, erection, testing
and commissioning of the complete fire detection and alarm system for the plant
area listed below.
a) Main Plant areas which include TG area, ESP control room and ESP area &
Boiler area.
b) Balance of plant area such as all electrical & switchgear rooms, Switchyard,
transformer yard, cable galleries, coal handling plant, Cooling/Sea Water PH,
Water treatment Plant, Fuel oil pump house, DG Building, Control Room,
Service building, Admin building, Security office, storage area and parking
area shown in Plot Plan.
1.2 An integrated micro-processor based addressable, analog fire detection and

alarm system shall be provided covering the entire plant area.
1.3 The system shall comprise the following
1.3.1 Addressable analogue automatic detectors of various types and manual call
points.
1.3.2 Analogue Linear Heat sensing cable along with necessary heat detector unit and
interfacing modules for connection to Fire alarm panel.
1.3.3 Micro processor based (with redundant processor) fire alarm panel common for
both the units along with necessary software.
1.3.4 Repeater panels at required locations.
1.3.5 Mimic Panel, Isolator, Response Indicator
1.3.6 Battery and Battery charger
1.3.7 Interfacing
1.3.8 Fire warning siren
1.3.9 Cabling (including power & control) required for complete fire detection and
alarm system.
1.3.10 Earthing of complete fire detection and alarm system.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01 SHEET 2 OF 10
TITLE
Package :
1.3.11 Terminal boxes and junction boxes as required for complete fire alarm system.
1.3.12 Accessories for mounting and supporting all equipment covered by this
specification.
1.3.13 Audio hooters distributed over various areas to alert the people in that area
during fire for evacuation. Addressable electronic hooters shall have a sound
output not less than 80db.
1.3.14 Relay modules
1.3.15 Mandatory spares and tools for satisfactory operation & maintenance.
1.3.16 Any other items which are required to make the system complete in all respects
and for satisfactory operation of the system.
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1 All detection and sensing devices forming an integral part of the microprocessor
based, addressable, fire detection and alarm system shall be approved by any of
the following bodies as applicable.
(a) Underwriters Laboratories (UL)-USA
(b) Any other internationally recognised body acceptable to the OWNER/

ENGINEER. Approval certificates shall be furnished with the bid.
2.2 The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for obtaining the required
approval and clearances for the fire detection and alarm system from the
following authorities as applicable:
2.2.1 FDA system approval shall be taken from TAC/accredited professional bodies.
2.2.2 Fire alarm system components shall be CBRI / CMRS / TAC / UL approved.
2.2.3 All documents required by local authorities shall be furnished accordingly.
3.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Fire alarm system shall be designed to provide continuous surveillance against
fire in the areas covered by the system under all conditions.
3.2 The equipment shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the
best engineering practice and shall have proven for the services intended
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01 SHEET 3 OF 10
TITLE
Package :
3.3 The installation practices adopted for fire detection and alarm system shall be as
per relevant standards.
3.4 Analogue, addressable fire detectors
3.4.1 The number of detectors, spacing and their locations shall comply with NFPA
72E/BS 5839, Part 1 / IS 2189. The actual quantity of detectors required, taking
into consideration the obstruction due to floor beams, etc., so as to obtain
complete coverage, shall be worked out by the Contractor based on the final
drawings of the various buildings during detailed engineering.
3.4.2 Analogue addressable type smoke detectors & rate of rise of temperature
detectors, Linear heat sensing cables. Manual call points etc shall generally
comply with standard requirements.
3.4.3 The automatic fire detectors shall be of analogue addressable type having the
following features :
(a) Individual addressing capability at the fire alarm panel to facilitate precise
pointing of fire location / detector activated.
(b) Discrimination between a false fire and real fire condition.
(c) Detection and automatic calibration / setting of over / under sensitive detector
by decreasing or increasing their sensitivity levels.
(d) Pre-alarm in case of detector or a section of detectors requiring

maintenance.
(e) All types of addressable detectors / interface units shall be compatible with
the fire alarm panel.
3.4.4 The type of fire detectors which shall be generally used in different areas of the
plant have been listed below
Areawise Application of Automatic Fire Detectors and Manual Call Points
Sl. No. Area Type of Fire Detector

1. All switchgear & MCC rooms, Addressable multisensor detector and
Thyristor room, UPS room manual call points.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01 SHEET 4 OF 10
TITLE
Package :
2. Cable galleries Addressable multisensor smoke detectors,

Linear heat sensor cables of analogue type
running above all HV and LV power cable
trays and manual call points. Multisensor
detector and LHS detectors along with
necessary number of interface units in the
cable gallery shall be cross zoned to actuate
the water spray system.
3. Control rooms, office rooms, Addressable multisensor detector and
security office and storage manual call points.
rooms, computer room &
control equipment room &
relay rooms.
4. Hazardous plant area
(a) Fuel oil and seal oil areas, Addressable flame proof rate of rise of
Lube oil area, Oil purifier temperature detectors with fixed temperature
area, Oil canals and Main element, flame proof manual call points.
Oil tank where fumes /
vapours exist.
(b) Hydrogen storage area Addressable intrinsically safe rate of rise of

and hydrogen charging temperature detector with fixed temperature
header. element and manual call points.
5. TG building turbine floors, Manual call points.
Boiler area
6. Battery rooms Addressable corrosion proof rate of rise of

temperature detector with fixed temperature
element and manual call points.
7. Transformer Yard Addressable intrinsically safe rate of rise of

element and Pedestal mounted manual call
points.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01 SHEET 5 OF 10
TITLE
Package :
8. Coal Handling Plant
8.1 Coal conveyor Addressable spark / ember detectors &

temperature sensitive insulated wire
analogue linear heat sensor cables and
flame proof manual call points
8.2 Dusty areas in coal handling Flame proof manual call points
plants like crusher house,
junction towers, etc.
3.4.5 The detectors shall be looped together and then connected to the fire alarm
panel. The address of each detector shall be indicated on the respective fire
alarm panel. CONTRACTOR shall furnish in the BID, the number of detectors in
each loop and the number of loops in each panel. CONTRACTOR shall furnish
the areas covered in each loop. Optimization of cable quantities shall be
considered while designing the system. The detectors to be wired to the panel
shall be in accordance with NFPA. The detectors shall be suitably distributed in
each loop and connected to the MFAP. Each close area shall have isolator at
entry points and exit points which shall automatically open the part of the loop on
short circuit.
3.4.6 The detectors shall be suitable for testing from the fire alarm panel without
operating any detector & fire fighting system.
3.4.7 Areas where two types of detectors are provided such as multi-sensor and linear
heat sensor cables in cable galleries both the type of detectors shall be suitably
cross zoned such that fire is detected only when both types of detectors located
in that area operate. Operation of any one of this type of detectors shall give an
alarm.
3.4.8 Void
3.4.9 The intelligent device and the loop card of FACP shall provide increased
reliability and inherent survivability through intelligent stand alone operation. The
device shall automatically change to standalone conventional device operation in
the event of a communications failure with the loop controller.
3.4.10 In the standalone detector mode, the detector shall continue to operate using
sensitivity and environmental compensation information stored in its
microprocessor at the time of communications failure. The loop card shall
monitor the loop and activate a loop alarm if any detector reaches its alarm
sensitivity threshold.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01 SHEET 6 OF 10
TITLE
Package :
3.4.11 Each detector device shall be capable of automatic electronic addressing and/or
custom addressing preferably without the use of DIP or rotary switches.
3.4.12 In case the operating voltage of the system is greater than 24V, all detector
junction boxes, manual call points and cable marshalling boxes shall be earthed
with 8 SWG GI wire. This earthing wire shall be connected to the plant earthing
grid at the nearest point available.
3.4.13 Each detector shall be provided with an indicating lamp glowing steadily to
indicate that it has operated which shall otherwise flash intermittently to indicate
the healthy condition of the detector and sensing circuits.
3.4.14 The smoke detectors shall continually monitor any changes in sensitivity due to
the environmental effects of dirt, smoke, temperature, etc. This information shall
be stored in the processor and transferred to the loop controller. The quantity of
smoke detectors shall be decided based on the detectors Coverage area. The
amber detectors shall be provided one for each conveyor.
3.4.15 The Analog detectors shall be suitable for mounting on any other detector
mounting base.
3.4.16 When the detectors are mounted below the false floor or in inaccessible position,
response indicator for each of the detectors and test switch shall be mounted on
a separate box which shall be suitable for mounting on the wall. If the detectors
are mounted above the false ceiling, response indicators with test switch shall be
mounted directly below the detector (on the false roof).
4.0 Linear Heat Detection System (LHS)
4.1 Linear heat detection system shall be provided for coal conveyors and in cable
galleries.
4.2 Linear heat detection system shall essentially comprise sensor cables, interface
units and necessary hardware required for installation.
4.3 Sensor cable shall be of analogue type and shall consist of four copper
conductors, each covered with a colour coded, negative temperature coefficient
insulating material. The cores shall be twisted and protected by an outer sheath
of FRLS PVC compound.
4.4 Linear heat sensor cables shall be provided in upper most and third cable tray
from top in case where 4 to 5 tiers of cable trays are provided and in the upper
most tray when cable tray tiers are 2 to3.
5.0 MANUAL CALL POINTS
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01 SHEET 7 OF 10
TITLE
Package :
5.1 Manual call points shall be provided as per the guidelines listed in NFPA 72E/IS
2189. Also, they shall generally be located as specified in 3.4.4
5.2 Each area shall be provided with a manual call point and hooter. Required
number of response indicators and isolators shall be provided in each loop.
Necessary relay modules to complete the scope shall be provided.
6.0 MAIN FIRE ALARM PANEL
6.1 Main fire alarm panel shall be complete with annunciator (with windows),
necessary input modules, output modules, external hooter/lamp control, interface
units wherever required for various control functions through relay contacts &
communication modules, etc. for satisfactory operation of the system. The panel
shall be located in the control room.
6.2 The main fire panel shall continuously monitor the status of the detectors and the
connecting lines. The annunciation system shall have visual and audible alarms,
with acknowledge, test, reset, lamp test, etc. push buttons. The panel shall
provide annunciation about the status of the Hydrant system, MVWS system,
HVWS system and deluge valves signals for each area to be protected ( i.e., for
transformers, tanks, cable gallery, etc.,) The panel shall have 'ON / OFF' PBs
for operation of fire siren.
6.3 The microprocessor based fire alarm panel shall incorporate the following
features.
(a) Continuous supervision of detector connecting lines, individual detector

performance / operation and disconnection/ removal of detectors. Individual
detector addressability.
(b) Discrimination between a real fire alarm and false alarm
(c) Pre alarm in case any detector requires maintenance
(d) Automatic re-calibration of sensitivity levels of over/ under sensitive detectors
(e) Programmed activation of various interlocks with fire protection system and
other associated system such as ventilation and air conditioning, dampers
etc. Necessary relay modules shall be suitably wired in the tripping circuit of
the A/C & ventilation drives. Necessary logic shall be made available in the
DCS for the above.
(f) Programmed activation of sequence of events to be carried out in case of fire

in any particular protective area., including activation of hooter, sirens, etc.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01 SHEET 8 OF 10
TITLE
Package :
(g) Ground fault detection
(h) Field programmable and configuration facility.
6.4 Necessary grouping of the detectors/call points to actuate the above shall be
done by the contractor.
6.5 Ni-cd Batteries and battery chargers of adequate capacity shall be provided.
The battery shall supply the normal power requirements for a period of 48 hours
from the instant of charger AC supply failure, after which sufficient capacity
would still be available to provide full load operation for at least 30 minutes. Full
load being defined as the load of all hooters sounding simultaneously along with
operation of all the associated visual signals, interlocks etc. A spare battery
charger shall be provided. The battery shall be located inside the panel.
7.0 REPEATER PANEL
Repeater panels shall be supplied as per requirement (minimum shall be 5 nos.).

Provision for connecting future repeater panel shall be available in MFAP.
8.0 JUNCTION BOXES (JB)
8.1 Junction boxes shall be fabricated out of 2.0mm thick CRCA sheet steel & shall
be hot dip galvanized. For outdoor installation, they shall be of cast iron type
and provided with a canopy at the top.
8.2 Junction boxes for indoor installation shall have degree of protection of IP: 54.
JBs for outdoor installation and those located in coal handling area shall have a
degree of protection of IP-55 & shall be provided with neoprene gasket. All the
junction boxes shall have a weeping hole at the bottom plate and provided with
necessary double compression brass cable glands. Two earthing terminals
suitable for terminating 8 SWG GI wire shall be provided. All structures required
for mounting the JBs shall be included in Contractor’s scope.
9.0 VIDEO DISPLAY UNIT (VDU)
9.1 A VDU with processing unit, keyboard, track ball and printer shall also be
provided in addition to the fire alarm panels to be located in the main control
room.
9.2 The VDU shall have the following features:
(a) Colour monitor with graphic display facility.
(b) Data retrieval.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01 SHEET 9 OF 10
TITLE
Package :
(c) Alarm annunciation, accept and reset facility.
(d) Display of individual detector status sensitivity and setting at detector

sensitivity.
(e) Commands and programming for performing various functions.
(f) The graphic display shall cover all the areas of the plant and shall indicate
the area / zone on fire by flashing. Upon selecting that area / zone, details of
which detector / MFAP has picked up shall be displayed.
9.3 Any other features necessary for proper functioning of the system.
9.4 The VDU screen size shall be minimum 21 inches.
9.5 The software used shall be provided with brief user’s guide menu to enable the
operator for proper use of various menu functions.
9.6 Access to various programs and operation shall be through password to restrict
the use to authorised personnel.
9.7 The VDU shall be suitable for 240 V, single phase AC Power Supply.
9.8 A printer shall be connected to print maintenance reports, alarm activation

details, time of activation, time of attending, details of each location.
10.0 FIRE SIRENS
10.1 The sirens shall be capable of being heard distinctly throughout the plant area
and shall comprise twin sounders having a suitable range.
10.2 The sirens shall be suitable for installation outdoors and shall be complete with
rain shades and all other mounting accessories.
10.3 The sirens shall be motor operated type with AC motors of three phase design.
The starters required for switching the sirens ON / OFF shall be supplied with
them.
10.4 Siren shall be mounted on duct support near chimney (capacity 3 km range) to
operate in case of any alarm other than fault registered in the composite panel.
11.0 CABLING
11.1 Supply, laying, termination, testing and commissioning of the cables required for
complete fire detection and alarm system shall be in the scope of the vendor.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01 SHEET 10 OF 10
TITLE
Package :
11.2 The cable included in the scope shall confirm to specification indicated
elsewhere in the specification.
11.3 Cable Installation And Accessories
Cable for fire detection and alarm system shall be routed in a convenient route
acceptable to PURCHASER and as per approved drawings. Cabling shall be
done in a neat manner with clamps at regular intervals.
12.0 MINOR CIVIL WORKS
All minor civil works associated with the installation of equipment & cables, shall
be done by VENDOR and made good. These minor civil works shall include
chipping, punching of holes, pockets, welding or any such work required for the
neat and aesthetic installation of all equipment covered under this contract.
13.0 TESTS
13.1 Contractor shall furnish test certificates/approval certificates for the equipment/
system offered from the Regulatory bodies indicated in the specification after the
award of contract for Owner / Owner’s Representative’s review/approval.
13.2 Performance tests shall be conducted at site on the system to prove that the
guarantees indicated for the individual components shall completely satisfy all
specific requirements. All tests required by the relevant standards shall be
conducted.
14.0 Any other area not specified, but within the battery limit of this Contractor shall
be included and necessary cabling shall be provided till fire alarm panel.
15.0 DATA TO BE FURNISHED WITH THE BID
15.1 Relevant catalogues, technical literature, installation procedures, etc. for

various types of detectors.
15.2 Make and type of detector and panel offered.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
LIMITED SHEET 1of 2
001 FDA
DATA SHEET-A3.15
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
The Relevant catalogues, technical literature, installation procedures, etc. for various
Types of detectors. The Make and type of detector and panel offered.
Sl. No. Area Type of Fire Detector
1. All switchgear & MCC rooms, Addressable multisensor detector and

Thyristor room, UPS room manual call points.
2. Cable galleries Addressable multisensor smoke detectors,

Linear heat sensor cables of analogue type
running above all HV and LV power cable
trays and manual call points. Multisensor
detector and LHS detectors along with
necessary number of interface units in the
cable gallery shall be cross zoned to actuate
the water spray system.
3. Control rooms, office rooms, Addressable multisensor detector and
security office and storage manual call points.
rooms, computer room &
control equipment room &
relay rooms.
4. Hazardous plant area
(a) Fuel oil and seal oil areas, Addressable flame proof rate of rise of
Lube oil area, Oil purifier temperature detectors with fixed temperature
area, Oil canals and Main element, flame proof manual call points.
Oil tank where fumes /
vapours exist.
(b) Hydrogen storage area Addressable intrinsically safe rate of rise of

and hydrogen charging temperature detector with fixed temperature
header. element and manual call points.
5. TG building turbine floors, Manual call points.
Boiler area
6. Battery rooms Addressable corrosion proof rate of rise of

element and manual call points.
.
LIMITED SHEET 2of 2
001 FDA
DATA SHEET-A3.15
7. Transformer Yard Addressable intrinsically safe rate of rise of

element and Pedestal mounted manual call
points.
8. Coal Handling Plant
8.1 Coal conveyor Addressable spark / ember detectors &

temperature sensitive insulated wire
analogue linear heat sensor cables and
flame proof manual call points
8.2 Dusty areas in coal handling Flame proof manual call points
plants like crusher house,
junction towers, etc.
.
SPEC NO. ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LTD. VOLUME – V
TCE.5103A –H- SECTION: D3 – 16
500-01 2 X 800MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM
SHEET 1 OF 3
Package : TITLE ELEVATORS

Balance of
Plant
1.0 LIFTS
Bidder has to make provision of the following lifts /elevators.
1.1 One (1) passenger-cum-goods lift of capacity 1360 kg and speed of 0.75
m/sec shall be provided in each steam generator area (i.e. 2 nos.).
1.2 One (1) passenger-cum-goods lift of capacity 600 kg and speed of 1 m/sec
shall be provided for the TG building.
1.3 The platforms to be served shall be decided during detailed engineering

stage.
2.1 Design, fabrication and supply of lift complete with all devices as are
necessary to complete the installation in accordance with this specification.
2.2 The capacity of the lift for the boiler shall be 1360 kg and if the heaviest piece
of equipment to be lifted to boiler platform is heavier than this weight, the
rated capacity of the lift shall be suitably increased later.
2.3 Any code, statutory requirements, specific requirements at the place of

installation shall be complied with in all respects.
2.4 Lift shall be weatherproof and the degree of protection shall be IP55.
2.5 The A.C motors and the D.C motors of the lift shall comply with Section D3.10
of this specification.
2.6 Landing, operating and indicating devices in boiler area shall be weatherproof
and rain proof.
2.7 Special care and precaution shall be taken regarding handling of lift cable
loops between the points of suspension as the loops are prone to twist /
distortion.
2.8 An electric contact for the car door shall be provided which shall prevent
elevator movement away from the landing unless the door is in the closed
position. The mechanical interlock with auxiliary door closing device shall be
provided so that the elevator can be operated only after the interlock circuit is
established.
2.9 The car door shall be provided with a non contact type protective device
extending to the full height and shall be so arranged that any obstruction in its
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 2 OF 3

Balance of
Plant
path while the door is closing, it shall automatically cause the car door and
hoist way door to return to open position.
2.10 An emergency switch shall be provided to stop the elevator at a particular

landing, cancelling all the registered calls.
2.11 Power supply mains shall be lockable as per requirements of IS 1860.
2.12 With each lift the Vendor shall supply a maintenance tool kit which shall be
kept in machine room.
2.13 The following operating devices / indications shall be provided in the car / on
the landing / in the machine room as indicated below :
2.13.1 Operating devices.
In the car In the landing In the m/c room On top of the

car
Up push button (PB) Up P.B Up PB Up
Down PB Down PB Down PB Down
Number PB s for each Bell Hand cranking Stop
landing device
Bell PB, Phone Lift PB Stop PB 240 V 1φ
receptacle
Non-stop PB - -
Door open PB - - -
Door close PB - - -
Alarm PB - - -
Emergency stop PB - - -
Key operated selector - - -
for attendant operation
2.12.2 Indicating devices.
In the car On the landing

Up direction of travel Up direction of travel
Down direction of travel Down direction of travel
Floor position indicator Car position indicator with direction
(Illuminated numeral for each landing) (Illuminated numeral for each landing)
Landing car registering unit Call registered ‘Up’ indicator
Call registered ‘Down’ indicator
2.12.3 Additional requirement
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 3 OF 3

Balance of
Plant
• Car ventilation fan with switch

• Fire extinguisher
• Levelling accuracy shall be +/- 5mm
• Energy saving device
• In built hands free telephone in car
• Overload device
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
001 ELEVATOR
DATA SHEET-A3.16
The Elevators (lifts) shall comply with the following technical requirement indicated in the
following Table and CONTRACTOR shall furnish the data in the respective column.
Sr. Description unit Client specification Bidders

No. specifications *
1.00 Lift category Goods cum

Passenger
1.1 Quantity
a) Boiler (SG) Nos 2
b) Turbine Hall Nos 1
c) Chimney Lift Nos 1
1.2 Rated load

a) SG lift Kg 1360
b) TG lift Kg 600
c) Chimney Lift Kg By Bidder
1.3 Rated Speed

a) SG lift m/sec *
b) TG lift m/sec
c) Chimney Lift m/sec
1.4 Total rise M As required
1.5 Number of floor served All floor / platform
1.6 Lift well dimension mm x As per IS

mm
1.7 Levelling zone By bidder
Levelling device Two way automatic

maintaining
1.8 No of door in car One, Centre opening

sliding
1.9 Type of control By Bidder
1.10 Operation Automatic without

attendant
.
001 ELEVATOR
DATA SHEET-A3.16
1.11 Automatic operation type Selective Collective
1.12 Operating devices As listed in write up
1.13 Indicating devices
In the car Yes to be provided

a) Up direction of travel
b) Down direction of travel
c) Floor position indicator
(illuminated numeral for each
landing)
d) Landing call registering unit
(with buzzer & registration
cancelling unit & lamp test push
button) Yes to be provided
In the landing
a) Up direction of travel
b) Down direction of travel
c) Car position indicator Top of landing door
(illuminated numeral for each
landing)
d) Location of the position
indicator
e) Call registered indicator
f) Call registered up indicator
g) Call registered down
indicator
h) Lift out of order
1.14 Miscellaneous devices
a) Car lighting a) Fluorescent

b) Car ventilation fan with tube
manual and automatic switch b) Yes
through selector
c) Decor in side the car c) Yes
d) Enclosure for elect. d) Dust & water
equipment located outside the M/C tight (IP 55)
room
e) Emergency exit e) yes
f) Provision for opening the f) Yes
landing door in case of emergency
g) Emergency device 220 V g) yes
DC operated.
.
001 ELEVATOR
DATA SHEET-A3.16
1.15 Car accessories Following

accessories to be
provided in addition
to those mentioned
in the write up
a) Hand rail
b) PVC flooring
c) Emergency
DC light
1.16 Special requirements and notes

a) Inching control a) yes
b) Stop blocked in floors b) yes
c) Fire extinguisher c) yes
d) Facia plates d) yes
e) Material of the list rope e) Steel
1.17 Landing details
a) SG lift Bidder to decide

b) TG lift
c) Chimney Lift
NOTE: ‘*’ Information shall be filled furnished by CONTRACTOR along with offer.
.
TCE.5103A – SECTION: D3 – 17
H-500-01 2 X 800MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM
SHEET 1 OF 5
Package :
Balance of INTRASITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Plant
1.0 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION
Plant Inter Communication system for the plant shall consist of:
(a) Intercom Telephone System (EPABX System)
(b) Public Address (PA) System

(c) Radio Paging System.
(d) The type of Communication required between plant and sea water pump
house will be informed separately.
2.1 EPABX system
2.1.1 The EPABX shall be micro-processor based, fully integrated, modularly

expandable digital type. EPABX system shall be provided with a capacity of
200 ports expandable to 400 ports. The system shall be based on Pulse Code
Modulation (PCM)/Time Division Multiplexing (TDM), fully non-blocking
principle. The state of the art technology shall be used for designing the
system. The system shall be equipped with necessary electronic cards for
trunk lines and extension lines, housed in a weatherproof enclosure, suitable
for mounting in a non-air-conditioned area. This EPABX shall be hooked to
P&T system by 22 tie lines, which shall include 8 direct lines. These direct
lines shall be for the use of management cadre & control room staff for direct
communication with P&T subscriber without operator intervention.
2.1.2 The quantity of the trunk cards and extension cards shall be selected in such
a way so as to provide 10% spare capacity. Electronic cards with intelligent
processors shall be provided. The system shall have compatibility for
analogue telephone instruments, digital (key) telephone instruments, and
special feature telephones. The system shall be supplied with the operator
console as an in-built feature. One spare port for operator console shall be
provided.
2.1.3 The system shall have 100% non-blocking feature. Redundancy for power
supply modules, control and processor card shall be provided. The system
shall be 100% fault tolerant. It should have computer (PC) compatibility for
data transmission.
2.1.4 The EPABX shall have the following features

a) INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK (ISDN).
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 2 OF 5
Package :
Plant
b) DUAL TONE MULTIFREQUENCY (DTMF).

c) COMPUTERS [Local area network (LAN)
d) VERY SMALL APERTURE TERMINAL (VSAT).
e) VIDEO CONFERENCING.
f) DESK-TOP PC CONFERENCING.
g) Provision of an operator console with a spare port complete with a
PENTIUM PC with all requisite software, colour SVGA monitor, one number
3.5 inch FDD, 2GB HDD, 32 MB RAM, key board etc.
The cards added shall be suitable for the above features.
2.1.5 The EPABX expansion system shall be made compatible for connectivity to
other systems viz. PA system as called for in this specification such that
communication between the two systems is possible without any manual
intervention at the EPABX level. The EPABX cards to be added shall also be
made compatible for connection of FAX machines.
2.1.6 Besides the above, the intercom system shall also be provided with the
following :
a) Telephone instruments as per Table-1.
b) Mounting and foundation accessories and required fitting for all equipment
in the system.
c) Requisite quantity of cables (both telephone and power) along with all
accessories including conduits, capping-casing etc.
d) Junction boxes, besides junction boxes outside each room / floor.
e) Two (2) dial testers for DC pulsing and DTMF telephone instruments.
f) Three (3) line-man hand held telephone sets with DC pulsing and DTMF
switch able with built in ringer unit and crocodile clip.
2.1.7 The cables shall be suitable for ISDN, DTMF, FAX etc. and shall generally
conform to the requirements specified else where in this specification.
2.1.8 The EPABX offered shall have a call billing software with a dedicated
PENTIUM configuration personal computer with colour SVGA monitor,
dedicated printer. Using this software, it is possible to read from screen /
obtain a print-out of calls made, called station, date and duration of each call,
number of metered calls, extension / fax / PA station originating the call, time
at which the call was made. Besides the above, the EPABX is provided with
two CDs with provision and software to store / retrieve all the above
parameters to / from the CD. The call billing software shall have the facility for
printing all / selected parameters listed above at regular (site adjustable) time
intervals as well as facility to call on screen / print any of the above
parameters in any desired format viz. number of calls made from a particular
extension for a given period of time (selectable). Software lock is be provided
to prevent unauthorised personnel gaining entry to above. All above
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 3 OF 5
Package :
Plant
parameters are capable of being stored automatically for a minimum period of

3 months. Erasure of this information shall only be after adequate warning
alerting operator to take back-up. None of the stored data shall be lost for
failure of power supply. The PC has a HDD with UPS for adequate backup
time. The expansion unit shall be suitable for being integrated with this
software and all requisite hardware, software and services for the same are
included under the scope of this specification.
2.1.9 The EPABX shall have full self-diagnostic. All faults besides being
annunciated by high intensity LED on the EPABX and audio alarm shall also
be displayed on the PC indicated in CL.2.1.3 above with component level fault
being displayed in plain English.
2.1.10 Using the Intercom handsets, operator’s handset, it shall be possible to

access any of the other handsets / PA stations selectively without operator
intervention using suitably coded dialling with the calls being routed through
the EPABX. All such calls shall also be recorded.
2.1.11 Voltage stabilizers, spike busters etc as required for protection of the system
shall be provided such that EPABX / its allied systems are in no way affected
by quality of PURCHASER’s power supply.
2.2 Public Address System
2.2.1 System Description

The P.A system shall be of the of the distributed amplifier type. It shall be
possible to collectively or selectively call any other PA system station. The
system shall be of modular type and easily extendable. The PA system shall
be a two channel system comprising paging channel and party channel.
2.2.2 Paging Channel
In this channel of communication, the required party may be called from any
one of the handset stations. This shall be heard through all the loudspeakers
connected to the system. The communication between the parties is
established by called party responding from another handset. The
communication through this channel shall be heard through all the other
loudspeakers as long as paging channel is used. This channel can be used for
making common announcements also.
2.2.3 Party Channel
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 4 OF 5
Package :
Plant
In this channel, the communication shall be through concerned handsets only

and there shall be no relaying of the conversation in any of the loudspeakers.
It is possible to have a group discussion with concerned parties through this
channel.
2.2.4 Number of Systems
The PA systems of the entire station shall comprise the following sub-
systems.
a) Separate PA system for each of the units. The system shall cover the
requirements in the T.G.Building, Boiler and other unit service areas
separately. Communication /announcements within a zone shall not be
heard in loudspeakers of other zones. It shall be possible to
communicate from a station in one zone to another station in other
zone both in party/paging mode through central system.
b) Common PA system linking all unit control rooms, switchyard control

rooms, switchyard, common service areas (coal handling, water
treatment plant, etc.) and senior operation and maintenance personnel
e.g. Superintendents, shift in charge Engineers, etc.
2.3 Radio Paging System
2.3.1 The radio paging system facilitates contacting / alerting a particular person
who is in the premises within the range of the radio transmitter. This is very
useful in contacting key operating / maintenance personnel when their
presence is urgently required at the plant.
2.3.2 The radio paging system shall consists of a VHF transmitter with antenna, a
control console and pocket size receivers. The transmitter and antenna shall
be installed at centrally located place suitable for radio transmission. The
persons shall carry pocket size paging receivers with them within operating
area of the system.
2.3.3 The transmission of address signal shall be done by depressing the keys of
the control console with the code number of a receiver (carried by the required
person). The signal shall be received by the respective receiver and it shall
give an audible beep signal. There shall be a provision to silence the beep
with a push button on the receiver.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 5 OF 5
Package :
Plant
2.4 Telephone
2.4.1 The telephone instruments shall be indoor desk type or indoor wall mounted
type or outdoor wall mounted type as required. The type of handset shall be
selected based on its location.
2.4.2 All desk type instruments for all subscribers shall have keypad with push
buttons.
2.4.3 The instruments mounted outdoor shall be provided with weather proof type
enclosure.
2.4.4 Selected instruments shall be provided with additional features to meet the
special facility requirements as mentioned below.
2.4.5 Telephone instruments located in high ambient noise level area shall be
provided with loud ringing device and soundproof booths.
2.4.6 The following special features shall be provided in the system :
(a) Call interruption / priority – the handsets shall be provided

with a priority push button. After dialling from this handset
station, if engaged tone is received, the caller can cut into the
conversation by pressing the priority service button.
(b) Emergency alert – Dialling a number shall intimate a fire or
emergency alarm. The caller’s number shall be stored to reduce
/ prevent the incidence of mischievous calls.
(c) Automatic call back – This shall enable the selected
subscribers, who receive a busy tone when calling another
extension to come on the busy extension. The call back
equipment shall make the connection as soon as the called
extension is free. While waiting for the call back, calling party
can use his telephone for other calls as usual.
(d) Automatic call diversion - This feature shall re-route a call for
an extension (A) to extension (B). This arrangement shall
function for all calls till it is reset.
(e) Conference call - This shall enable the subscribers to set up
telephonic conference involving atleast 5 parties
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
LIMITED
TCE.5103A-H-500- 2x800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 1OF 7
001 INTRASITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VOLUME- V
DATA SHEET-A3.17
The Bidder shall fill in the following Technical Data Sheet
1.0 Manufacturer’s Name

2.0 Standards
3.0 Environmental Conditions
I. Operating Temperature Range
II. Storage Temperature Range
III. Relative Humidity
4.0 Amplifiers
4.1 Pre-Amplifiers
A. Electrical
I Mains Voltage/Frequency V/Hz
II Max. Power Consumption VA
III Battery Voltage V
IV Max. Battery Current A
B. Performance
I Max Rated Output Power W
II Frequency Response
III Distortion %
IV Bass Control Db@100hz
V Treble Control Db@100hz
VI Channel Separation Db@1khz
VII Priority Mute Db
C. Mike Inputs
I. No. Of Mice Inputs
II. Sensitivity Mv
III. Impedance KΩ
IV. S/N Db
V. Cmrr Db
D. Line Inputs
I. No. Of Line Inputs
II. Sensitivity Mv
III. Impedence KΩ
IV. S/N Db
E. Outputs
I. No. Of Outputs
II. Type Of Outputs
III. Nominal Level V
IV. Impedence Ω
F. Interconnection Emergency Input

Sensitivity Mv
Impedence KΩ
Vox Treshold Mv
G.Emergency Output
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.17
I. Nominal Level V
II. Impedence Ω
H. Relays
I. Priority Contacts
II. Emergency Contacts
III. Dc Supply Output
I. Control
I. Rs232 (Baudrate) Kbps
II. Trigger Inputs Activation Closure/Open
4.2 Mixers
A. Electrical
I. Mains Voltage/Frequency V/Hz
II. Max. Power Consumption Va
III. Battery Voltage
IV. Max. Battery Current A
B. Performance
Max. Rated Output Power W
Frequency Response
Distortion %
Bass Control Db@100hz
Treble Control Db@100hz
Channel Seperation Db@1khz
Priority Mute Db
C. Line Inputs
II. Sensitivity Mv
III. Impedence KΩ
IV. S/N Db
D. Interconnection
I. Nominal Level V
II. Impedence Ω
E. Outputs
I. No. Of Outputs
II. Type Of Outputs
IV. Impedence Ω
F. Interconnection Emergency Input

I. Sensitivity Mv
II. Impedence KΩ
III. Vox Treshold Mv
G. Emergency Output
I. Nominal Level V
II. Impedence Ω
H. Relays
I. Priority Contacts
II. Emergency Contacts
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.17
III. Dc Supply Output

4.3 Booster/Power Amplifiers
A. Electrical
III. Battery Voltage V
B. Performance
I. Max. Rated Output Power W
II. Frequency Response
III. Distortion %
IV S/N Db
C. Line Inputs
II. Sensitivity Mv
III. Impedence KΩ
D. Outputs
I. No. Of Outputs
II. Type Of Outputs
IV. Impedence Ω
5.0 Cd Player &Radio Tuner

A. Electrical
III. Battery Voltage V
B. Performance
I. Max. Rated Output Power W
II. Frequency Response
III. Distortion %
IV. Bass Control Db@100hz
V. Treble Control Db@100hz
C. Inputs
II. Sensitivity Mv
III. Impedence KΩ
IV. S/N Db
D. Auxiliary Inputs
II. Sensitivity Mv
III. Impedence KΩ
IV. S/N Db
E. Tuner
I. Tunning Range
Fm
Am
II. Sensitivity
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.17
Fm
Am
III. Performance
Frequency Response
Distortion %
S/N Db
F. Cd-Player
Audio Cd
Frequency Response
Distortion %
S/N Db
Ii. Mp3 Cd/Cd-R
Supported Bit Rates Kbps
G. General
I. Data Buffer
II. Life Time
III. Memory For Track Selection
H. Outputs
I. No. Of Outputs
II. Type Of Outputs
IV. Impedence Ω
6.0 Microphones
I. Type
II. Impedance Ω
III. Output Voltage Mv
IV. Frequency Response
7.0 Loudspeakers Indoor Type Outdoor Type

I. Type Designation
II. Rms Rating W
III. Sound Pressure Level At Rated Output
IV. Frequency Response
V. Impedance Ω
VI. Overall Dimensions
8.0 Pc For Pa System

I. Manufacturer Name
II. Country Of Manufacture
III. Cpu Processor Speed
IV. Operating System
V. Main Memory
VI. Cache Memory
On Chip
On Board
VII. Hard Disk
Type
Capacity
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.17
VIII. Cd Rom Drive

IX. 3.5 Inch Floppy Disk Drive
X. Archiving System
Type
Scsi Compliant
Capacity
Transfer Rate
XI. Communication Ports
XII. Vdu
Screen Size
Resolution
XIII. Keyboard Type
XIV. Maximum Temperature
XV. Maximum Humidity (Rh)
XVI. Mtbf
XVII. Mttr
XVIII. Availability
10. Central/Network Controller

I. Analog Line Inputs
• Frequency Response
• Signal-To-Noise Ratio Dba
• Cmrr Db
• Max. Input Range Dbv
• Cinch Max. Input Range Dbv
II. Analog Microphone Inputs
• Cmrr Db
• Max. Input Range Dbv
• Input Impedance Ω
• Phantom Supply
• Input Range Dbv
III. Audio Outputs
• Output Impedance Ω
• Output Crosstalk Db
• Output Signal Range Dbv
• Cinch Output Range Dbv
• Distortion %
11. Access Station/Unit
• Audio Characteristics
• Nominal Acoustic Input Level Db
• Peak Acoustic Input Level Db Spl
• Equivalent Acoustic Input
• Noise Level Db Spl
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.17
• Acoustic Input Attenuation Db Spl

12. TYPE OF TELEPHONE EXCHANGE CARDS SUITABLE FOR:
Time Division Multiplexing
Stores Program Control
Multiprocessor
13. TYPES OF TELEPHONES

Programmable keys and programming keys
Push button key-pad
2 ( Two ) line display
All types of telephones as specified
Volume control keys
One touch auto-dialling
PCM / digital transmission
Abbreviated auto dialling ( All facilities to be listed )
Speech key
Mute function
14. OPERATIONAL FEATURES

14.1 Internal Communication
Automatic all diversion / interception
Call pick up
Automatic call back
Queue
No. of simultaneous conferences
No. of subscribers per conference
Group hunting / group call
Priority cut-in / Busy override
Manager / Secretary facility
Don’t Disturb
Emergency alert
Coupling to other systems
Call forward busy
14.2 External Communication ( all other facilities to be listed )

Direct outward Dialling
Direct inward dialling
External call transfer
Abbreviated dialling / auto dialling
Free line selection
14.3 Attendant Console Facility ( Additional facilities to be listed. ) to be subscribed to for

expansion sets / system
Alpha-numeric display
Camp on busy
Serial call
Call waiting display
Repeat dialling
Two-way splitting
Attendant incoming call control
Abbreviated dialling / auto dialling
15. SYSTEM FACILITIES ( All other facilities to be listed )

Flexible numbering
Line lockout
.
LIMITED
DATA SHEET-A3.17
Service Supervision
Gradewise supervision of selected facilities
Distinctive ringing
Software as called for provided
Call Hold
Call waiting service with audible signal for
Operator call wait
Originator call wait
Terminating Call wait
Station message detail recording ( SMDR ) for trunk and intercom lines
Trunk line emergency transfer
Music on hold
Alarm set facility
16. SOUND PROOF BOOTHS

Booths totally sound proof
Booths totally weather proof as called for
Intercom provided as called for
Call attention 15 W lamp and booth illumination fluorescent lamp provided
All other features as called for provided
Locking facility provided for booths
Intercom set pilfer proof type
SPEC. NO. TCE.5103A-
H-500-001 SECTION: D3 – 18
SHEET 1 OF 2
TITLE
Package :
Balance of Plant CONSTRUCTION POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENT and TARIFF
METERING
CONSTRUCTION POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENT
1.0 The construction power from 11 kV, 3 Phase, and 50 Hz power supply shall be made
available in power plant area at a single point from the nearest Substation of
APTRANSCO by the owner.
The CONTRACTOR shall have to make arrangement from this point to power plant
area and further distribution to various plant areas by providing downstream
equipment, i.e., 11kV overhead line, temporary receiving station in power plant area,
adequately rated 11 kV / 0.433 kV transformers including DP structures & connected
equipment, LV switchgear with suitably rated, adequate number of outgoing feeders,
associated cabling, earthing, lighting of the construction power supply equipment
room, etc. Adequate metering and protection shall be provided for transformers and
incomer feeders
To take care of failure in grid, CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable DG sets. The
contractor shall provide metering equipment, comprising of CT, PT units, trivector
meters of suitable accuracy and shall be responsible for periodic payment of bills for
the energy consumed.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide necessary protection for the construction power
supply arrangement to ensure that any fault in his system, 11 kV power supply
arrangement will not be disturbed.
2.0 GA and layout drawings required for getting clearance from local electrical inspector /
Electricity Board shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and it will be the complete
responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to obtain the approval for the installation and any
other work in this regard.
3.0 CONTRACTOR shall supply and install fighting equipment as per the regulations of
the local electrical inspectorate / statutory bodies for the electrical installation.
4.0 Any interaction with APTRANSCO and statutory fees payment shall be the
responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
5.0 On award of contract, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the electrical scheme, for
Owner’s review / approval.
6.0 After the completion of the job, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the entire installation
and make available the area to the OWNER.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC. NO. TCE.5103A-
H-500-001 SECTION: D3 – 18
SHEET 2 OF 2
TITLE
Package :
Balance of Plant CONSTRUCTION POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENT and TARIFF
METERING
TARIFF METERING
1.0 The net power generated by the proposed plant will be exported to APTRANSCO
directly through 400 kV lines. Similarly, commissioning / start up power will be
imported from APTRANSCO through the same 400 kV lines.
For metering export/import of power, one maim meter and one check meter will be
provided for each of 400 kV lines. Each of the main and check meters shall have the
following features:
• Microprocessor based
• Measurement of import / export active energy, reactive energy and apparent
energy. It shall also measure voltage, current, power factor, kW, kVAr, kVA etc
• Accuracy of 0.2S
• Facility for downloading the data
In addition to Tariff metering system, suitable energy meters of 0.2 class shall be
provided at generator terminals to record generated gross energy. This meter shall
also used for calculation of auxiliary power consumption.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A-H-500- ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LTD. VOLUME – V
001 2 X 800MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SECTION: D3-19
SHEET 1 OF 15
Package : Balance of SPARES AND MAINTENANCE TOOLS & TACKLES

Plant
MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND TACKLES
The CONTRACTOR shall include all necessary maintenance tools in addition to

the minimum requirement given below. For some of the equipment/systems,
requirement of maintenance tools and tackles has been specified in Data
Sheets. CONTRACTOR shall necessarily supply these tools in addition to other
tools and tackles as required. Total price of all the maintenance tools and
tackles shall be included in the quoted lump sum price.
The CONTRACTOR shall note that if any other tools are found to be necessary
during the engineering and erection stage of the contract, the same shall be
supplied by the CONTRACTOR without any price implication.
In addition to above following minimum tools shall be provided
a) Complete Jigs/Fixtures with all tools for erection and removal of

generator rotor - 1set.
b) Breaker handling trolleys for all type of breakers - one for each
switchgear room, minimum three (3).
c) Panel keys - 50 nos... each type.
d) Breaker rack in/out, spring charging handle – 10 nos. each type.
e) Earthing rods/trucks (as per IS) – 2 sets.
f) Digital, 3 phase watt meter, with programmable CT/PT ratio and range
up to 2000kW class 0.5(subject to Owner approval) – 1 nos.
g) Megger with selection of voltage from 200V to 5000V, battery operated

(subject to Owner approval) – 1 nos..
h) Programmable power system analyser (subject to approval of Owner) –

1 set.
i) Battery cell lifting and shifting tools – 1 set.
1.0 SPARES
START UP AND COMMISSIONING SPARES
The offer shall include the start up and commissioning spares as required till
handing over of the plant
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 2 OF 15

Plant
ESSENTIAL SPARE
The CONTRACTOR shall include Essential Spares as specified below for

various equipment.
1.5 MV Motors
1.5.1 Bearing temperature indicators 1 No. of each type
1.5.2 Bearing temperature detectors 2 Nos. of each type
1.5.3 Bearings 1 set of each type

& rating
1.5.4 Space heaters 1 No. of each type
1.5.5 Terminal bushing assembly 1 No. of each type
1.5.6 Cooling fan 1 No. of each type
1.5.7 RTD 1 set for each rating

of motor
1.6 Relay Panels
1.6.1 Protective relays of each type 1 No.
1.6.2 Trip relays of each type 1 No.
1.6.3 Auxiliary relays of each type 1 No.
1.6.4 Timers of each range 1 No.
1.6.5 Set of 3 interposing CTs of each ratio 1 No. each
1.6.6 Set of 3 interposing PTs of each ratio 1 No. each
1.6.7 Set of 4 fuse bases & fuse carrier 1set of each rating
1.6.8 Power supply module for each type 1 No.

of relay (where applicable)
1.6.9 Test terminal Blocks 1 nos.
1.6.10 Control & selector switches 1 nos.
1.6.11 Neutral links 1 nos.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 3 OF 15

Plant
1.2.1 Stabilising resistors and variastors 1 nos.
1.7 Generator Control Desk cum Panel
1.7.1 Meters 1No. of each type

(up to 10 Nos.)
&
2 Nos. Of each type
(above 10 Nos.)
1.7.2 Blank scales 10 Nos.
1.7.3 Discrepancy switches of each type 1 no.
1.7.4 Semaphore indicators 2 Nos.
1.7.5 Synchronising switch 2 Nos.
1.8 Auxiliary Indication Panel
1.8.1 Recorders
a) Ink chart and lubrication oil For 3 years

Operation
b) Printed circuit boards 1 No. each
c) Pens 1 set
d) Chart drive motor 1 No. of each type
e) Balancing motor 1 No. of each type
f) Potentiometers, converters 1 No. of each type

supply transformers
1.8.2 Fuses 5 Nos. of each rating
1.8.3 Indicators 1 No. of each type
1.9 Transducer Panels
1.9.1 Current transducers - 5 A 3 Nos.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 4 OF 15

Plant
1.9.2 Current transducers - 1 A 3 Nos.
1.9.3 Voltage transducer 3 Nos.
1.9.4 Other transducers 1 No. of each type

& rating
1.9.5 Fuses 10 Nos. of each rating
1.11 Generator Transformers (GT)

(Spares applicable separately for each of the Generator transformers)
1.11.1 Complete set of gaskets 1 set
1.11.2 Bushings 1 of each type
1.11.3 CTs of each type 1 No.
1.11.4 Cooler fan & fan motor 1 No. each
1.11.5 Pressure relief device 1 No.
1.11.6 Oil pump and pump motor 1 No. each
1.11.7 Limit switch for OLTC 1 set of each type
1.11.8 Buchholz relay 1 No.
1.11.9 Buchholz relay of OLTC chamber 1 No.
1.11.10 Valves of each type 1 No.
1.11.11 Silica gel breather 1 No.
1.11.12 Oil level gauge 1 No.
1.11.13 Winding temp. indicating eqpt. 1 complete set.
1.11.14 Dial type thermometer 1 No.
1.11.15 OLTC Spares 1 complete set.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 5 OF 15

Plant
1.13 Segregated/Non-Segregated Phase Bus ducts
1.13.1 Bus support insulator 5%
1.13.2 Seal-off bushing 1 each
1.13.3 Flexible connector

(for equipment connection) 1 No. for each rating
1.13.4 Gasket 1 set
1.14 Isolators
1.14.1 Complete set of Gaskets 1 set each
1.14.2 Insulator column 1 type each.
1.14.3 Drive motor 1 type each
1.14.4 Motor contactor of each type/rating 1 of each type &
1.14.5 Fuses of each rating 5 Nos.
1.14.6 Relays, power contactors, 2 sets

fuses etc., for electrical
control circuit
1.15 Circuit Breakers
1.15.1 Relays, power contactors 2 sets

indicating lamps, fuses etc.,
for electrical control circuit
1.15.2 SF6 density switch 1 No.
1.15.3 Aux. switch block 1 No.
1.15.4 Pressure switch for compressed air 1 No.

(If applicable)
1.15.5 Operating Mechanism block 1 No.
1.15.6 Main contacts 1 set
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 6 OF 15

Plant
1.15.7 Arcing contacts 1 set
1.15.8 Trip coils and closing coils 2 sets each
1.15.9 Set of gaskets 1 set
1.15.10 SF6 gas evacuation & filling unit 1 No.
1.16 CTs, EMVTs and CVTs

(Separately for CTs, EMVTs and CVTs)
1.16.1 Complete set of gaskets 3 set each
1.16.2 Bushings 1 No.
1.16.4 CT 1 No.
1.16.5 CVT 1 No.
1.16.6 EMVT 1 No.
1.17 Lightning Arrester
1.17.1 Lightning Arrestors 2 nos.
1.17.2 Surge Monitor 1 No.
1.17.3 Flexible conecting strip between LAs 1 nos.

and Surge Counter.
1.18 Line Trap
1.18.1 Main coil 1 No.
1.18.2 Line trap arrester 1 No.
1.18.3 Tuning device 1 No.
1.19 Station Transformers

(Spares applicable separately for each of the station transformers)
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 7 OF 15

Plant
1.19.1 Complete set of gaskets 1 set
1.19.2 Bushing 1 of each type
1.19.3 CTs of each type 1 No.
1.19.4 Cooler fan & fan motor 1 No.
1.19.5 Pressure relief device 1 No.
1.19.6 Limit switch for OLTC 1 set of each type
1.19.7 Buchholz relay 1 No.
1.19.8 Buchholz relay for OLTC chamber 1 No.
1.19.9 Valves of each type 1 No.
1.19.10 Silica gel breather 1 No.
1.19.12 Winding temp. indicating egpt. 1 complete set.
1.19.13 Dial type thermometer 1 No.
1.19.14 Miscellaneous Spares (control

Switches Fuses, Lamps) For
Cabinet and OLTC cabinet. 1 Nos.
1.20 Unit Auxiliary Transformers (UAT) and Service Transformer

(Spares applicable separately for UAT and service transformers of
different ratings/type)
1.20.1 Complete set of Gaskets One set
1.20.2 Bushing of each type One each
1.20.3 Dial Type Thermometer One No.
1.20.4 Oil Level Gauge One No.
1.20.5 Complete winding Temperature One set.

indicating equipment
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 8 OF 15

Plant
1.20.6 Explosion vent Diaphragm/Pressure One No.

relief device
1.20.7 Silica Gel Breather One No.
1.20.8 Valves One Each
1.20.9 Buchholz Relay One No.
1.20.10 Miscellaneous Spares (control

Switches Fuses, Lamps) For
Cooling Cabinet. Three of each
1.21 MV Switchgear
1.21.1 Complete pole of breaker 2 of each rating
1.21.2 Breaker complete with operating 1 of each rating

mechanism and truck mounted
1.21.3 Closing & tripping coils 2 sets of each

rating
1.21.4 Fixed and moving contact 2 sets

assemblies of breaker for each rating
1.21.5 Spring charging motors 2 nos
1.21.6 set of gaskets 5 sets
1.21.7 Bus bar support insulators 10 nos
1.21.8 Aux. switches assembly, limit 5 each

Position switches, Local/Remote
Selector switch, breaker control switches
& other switches
1.21.9 Operating mechanism rods 2 nos
1.21.10 Limit position switches 2 nos
1.21.11 Local/remote selector switch 2 nos

ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 9 OF 15

Plant
1.21.12 Breaker control switches 2 nos
1.21.13 Relays of each type used 1 No
1.21.14 Clustered type LED 10 nos of each

colour
1.21.15 CTs of each ratio & type 2 Nos
1.21.16 VTs.of each ratio & type 2 Nos
1.21.17 Meters of each type & rating 1 No.
1.21.19 Transducers of each type & rating 5 Nos.
1.21.20 Cable box for each size of cable 1 no.

(if included under Vendor's scope)
1.21.21 3 pole vacuum contactor trolley

complete with accessories 1 No.
1.21.22 Closing & tripping coil set 5 Nos.
1.21.23 Surge suppressor units 5 Nos.
1.21.24 Power contactors 2 Nos.
1.21.25 Panel space heaters 5 Nos.
1.21.26 AC/DC switches 1 of each type & rating
1.21.27 CT/VT Fuse blocks 1 of each type & rating
1.22 LT Switchgear
1.22.1 Complete pole of breaker 2 Nos. of each rating
1.22.2 Breaker complete with operating 1 No. of each

Mechanism and truck mounted rating
1.22.3 Closing & tripping coils 2 sets of each

ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 10 OF 15

Plant
rating
1.22.4 Fixed and moving contact 2 sets

assemblies of each breaker
1.22.5 Spring charging motors 2 Nos.
1.22.6 Set of gasket 5 sets
1.22.7 Bus bar support insulators 10 Nos.
1.22.8 Aux switch assembly, limit 5 Nos. each

position switches, Local/
Remote selector switch, breaker
control switches & other switches
1.22.9 Relays of each type used 1 No.
1.22.10 Clustered type LED 10 Nos. of each

colour
1.22.11 CTs. of each ratio & type 2 Nos
1.22.12 VTs. of each ratio & type 2 Nos
1.22.13 Meters. of each type & rating. 1 Nos
1.22.15 Transducers of each type & rating 2 Nos.
1.23 DC System
1.23.1 Battery (Spares applicable separately for each of the 220V and 24V
batteries)
a) Battery Cell of each type One set
b) Positive Plate of each Type One set
c) Negative Plate of each Type One set
d) Insulators One set
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 11 OF 15

Plant
e) Connectors with Nuts & Bolts One set
f) Vent Plugs One set
g) P.V.C. Spill Trays One set
h) Terminal Post One set
1.23.2 Battery Chargers

(Applicable separately for 220V and 24V Chargers)
a) Silicon Diodes One set
b) Control Switch One set
c) Current Regulator One set
d) Off-Load Tap Changing Device One set
e) Fuse of each type 2 nos. of each

rating
f) D.C. Ammeter One set
g) Miniature circuit Breaker One set
h) Neon Lamps Ten sets
i) LC filter 1 set.
1.24 Lighting Fixtures
1.24.1 Lighting fixtures 5% of the total no. of

(along with bulbs) fixtures (upto a total
quantity of fixtures of
200) with a minimum of 2 Nos.
3 % of the total (beyond
200 fixtures).
1.24.2 Lighting Panels 1 No. of each type.
1.24.3 MCBs 5 No. of each rating & type
1.25 Communication System

ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 12 OF 15

Plant
1.25.1 EPABX System
a) Extension PCB 1 No.
b) Trunk line PCB 1 No.
c) Instruments 5% of the total number

supplied, with a min. of 5.
1.25.2 Public Address System
a) Handsets Desk top type : 2 Nos.

Wall mounted type : 3 Nos.
b) Loud speakers Indoor type (6w) - 2 Nos.

Outdoor type(15W) – 3 Nos.
1.26 Fire detection and Alarm System
1.26.1 Automatic fire detectors 3% of the total Nos.

(Ionisation, Optical, Rate supplied for each type.
of rise of temperature with minimum 2 Nos.
detectors with fixed temp-
erature element) and
Manual call points
1.26.2 Spark/Ember Detector 1 No.
1.26.3 Control Card 1 No.of each type
1.27 415V Motors
1.27.1 Bearings 2 sets of each type
1.27.2 Cooling fan 2 Nos. of each type
1.28 Control Panels (for Miscellaneous systems like Air conditioning, fire
protection, evaporative air cooling etc.)
1.28.1 Air break switch 1 No. of each rating.
1.28.2 Aux. relays, contactors Two of each type
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 13 OF 15

Plant
1.28.3 Clustered type LEDs of 20 Nos.

different colours
1.28.4 Push Buttons 6 nos.
1.28.5 Fuses for power and 4 sets of each rating

control circuit
1.28.6 Control switches 1 of each type.
1.29 Uninterruptible Power Supply System
1.29.1 HRC fuses of each rating Three sets
1.29.2 Semi conductor fuses of Six sets

each rating
1.29.3 Control cards Two sets
1.29.4 Driver cards Two sets
1.29.5 Thyristors/Power Transistors One set

of each rating
1.29.6 Power diodes of each rating Two sets
1.29.7 Auxiliary relays of each 2 nos.

rating
1.29.8 Filter capacitors one set
1.29.9 Filter chokes one set
1.29.10 Control Cards (PCB with one of each type

components)
1.30 PLCC & Telemetering
1.30.1 Outstation Spares
a) Analogue input module 1 No.

b) Binary Input (Alarm/Status) Module 1 No.
c) Analogue output module 1 No.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 14 OF 15

Plant
d) Binary Output (Command) Module 1 No.

e) DCE/Modem Module 1 No.
f) Common Equipment / Controller
g) Processor Modules 1 No.
h) Power Supply System 1 No.
i) Card Extender 1 No.
j) Fuses of each rating 8 Nos. each
1.30.2 Master Station Spares
a) Ammeter/Voltmeter interface Module 1 No. each

range
b) Command Interface module 1 No.
c) Alarm Status Interface module 1 No.
d) DCE/Modem module 1 No.
e) Controller/Processor modules 1 No.
f) Power supply unit 1 No.
g) Set point interface module 1 No.
h) Card extender 1 No.
i) Peripheral bit serial interface 1 No.
j) Fuses of each rating 2 Nos. each
1.30.3 PCB cards (PCB with components) One of each type
1.30.4 Filters 2 Nos.
1.30.5 Telephone handset & card & Jack 1 Set
1.31. 400kV SWITCHYARD & TRANSFORMERYARD HARDWARE
1.31.1 Clamps, spacers and connectors 10 % or 1 nos. min.

Including equipment terminal connectors.
1.31.2 Bus Post Insulators 10 % or 1 nos. min
1.31.3 Disc insulators 5%
1.32 Electrically Operated Actuators
(a) Complete set of gaskets/o rings/oil seals 05 sets

(b) Limit & Torque Switches 10 nos
(c) Limit switch counter gear assembly 05 nos
(d) Out put drive bush 02 nos
(e) Motors 01 nos
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SHEET 15 OF 15

Plant
(f) Torque Switch Drive Assembly 01 nos

(g) Clutch fork assembly 01 nos
(h) Limit switch drive assembly 01 nos
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A –H-
500-01 ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT LIMITED VOLUME – V
SECTION: D3-20
SHEET 1 OF 4
DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED AFTER AWARD OF
Package : CONTRACT
Balance of Plant
1.1 Concept note covering the equipment main parameters, design and A
operation philosophies, test certificate, sizing criteria, selection criteria,
schemes proposed, operation, indication and alarm philosophies for unit
transformer, 11/3.3 kV switchboards, 415V main switchboard, motor
control centres, DC system, cabling system (cable carriers, layout,
installation), earthing and lightning protection system, lighting system,
neutral grounding equipment, fire detection and alarm system, electrical
equipment layouts etc. covered under this specification
1.2 Calculations for all CT and PT Parameters. Sizing calculations, faults A
withstand capability for all equipment covered under this specification.
1.3 Fault calculation and voltage dip calculation. Fault calculation and voltage A
dip calculation shall be done considering all ties and for entire station.
Fault withstand capability (dynamic and thermal) calculations for all
power equipments like transformer, switchgear etc.
1.4 Main one line diagram, 11/3.3 kV system and 415V single line diagrams, A
indicating parameters of all electrical equipment, CTs, PT s, location of
meters, relays, etc.
1.5 Technical data sheet for all electrical equipment A
1.6 Block interlock diagrams showing the interlocks, control and indication at I
all the points for generator, accessories and its sub-system, 11/3.3 kV
switchgear incomers, ties, outgoing feeders, etc., 415V switchgear
incomers and bus coupler, MCC incomers and bus coupler and
Excitation system of generator
1.7 415V, 220 V DC system single line diagram. I
1.8 11/3.3 kV, 415V and DC module scheme drawings for various types / I
ratings of drives.
1.9 Standard / typical installation sketches for cabling, earthing, lightning A
protection and lighting
1.10 Cable layout (trench, tray layout), earthing layout, lighting layout, lightning A
protection layout for station building, outlying areas. The exact list of
areas will be finalised later.
1.12 (a) Control wiring diagram I
(b) Control wiring : Showing the complete details of the I

diagrams for each switchgear module, external cable
drive / auxiliary connection to motors, devices, control
panels, system cabinets, etc.,
interconnection between panels related
to the respective drives, cable nos.,
cable core nos.
1.13 Transformer yard and electrical equipment layout drawings and layout of I
equipment as specified.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A –H-
SECTION: D3-20
SHEET 2 OF 4
Package : CONTRACT
Balance of Plant
1.14 Relay setting along with calculation for entire station including phase-1 I
relay and co-ordination curves.
1.15 Cable interconnection schedules / diagrams for all the cables showing I
the cable no., core no., cable size, and terminal nos., on either side.
1.16 Cable schedule showing the cable number, size and type, emanating and I
terminating points, cable lengths, routing, etc., to facilitate cable layout
work and as a reference to monitor the work and later as a maintenance
reference
1.17 Contractor shall furnish the following drawings / data / information :
1.17.1 Switchgear (11/3.3 kV Switchboards, MCC and DCDB)
(a) Switchgear cubicles: Outline dimensions and general arrangement, I

including plan, front elevation, rear elevation, side elevation and
relevant cross-sectional views.
(b) Schematic control circuit diagrams A
(c) Detailed wiring diagrams including terminal block numbers, ferrule I

numbers and cable connections.
(d) Development diagrams of switches I
1.17.2 Motors (AC and DC)
(a) Dimensioned outline and general arrangement drawing of motor I
(b) Internal view of terminal boxes showing connection of motor i.e., star / I
delta terminal markings, clearance between phases, disconnecting
facilities and direction of cable entry and cable glands.
(c) Motor characteristics curves I
1.17.3 Motor Operated Valve Actuators
(a) Drawing indicating overall dimensions and mounting details of valve I

actuator on the valve
(b) Detailed internal wiring diagram of the actuator I
1.17.4 Electrical Control and Relay Panels
(a) Outline dimensions including plan, front elevation including the mimic, I
rear elevation, side elevation and door opening sizes.
(b) Drawings showing foundation details, floor openings for cabling and I
weight of each panel
(c) Schematic control circuit and block logic diagrams. The latter shall I
indicate the location of all devices relays, sensors, transducers,
instruments and their interaction to serve as a basis for developing
elementary diagrams
(d) Layouts and cross section views of front / rear panels and desks I
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A –H-
SECTION: D3-20
SHEET 3 OF 4
Package : CONTRACT
Balance of Plant
complete with identification markings for all mounted devices and
complete material list giving ratings, make and type.
(e) Switch development diagrams I
(f) One line diagrams of power circuits and control power circuits I
arrangement and distribution.
(g) Detailed wiring drawings including identification of devices, terminal I

block numbers, ferrule numbers and cable connections.
(h) Inter panel interconnection diagrams indicating terminals and I
external connections between panel to panel and panel to field
devices. The interconnection diagrams shall indicate maximum
permissible external connection resistance to permit correct
operation of equipment at minimum voltage when such resistance is
less than 4.3 ohms (300 m, 1.5 sq. mm copper control cable). If
special cables are required for external connections (co-axial, twisted
pairs, shielded) they shall be used and identified.
1.17.5 Batteries (220 V and 24 V DC)
(a) Layout drawing. I

(b) Drawing showing constructional details of cell. I
(c) Battery characteristics / curves. I
1.17.6 Battery Charger (220 V and 24 V DC)
(a) Detailed schematic diagram of charger scheme including voltage / A

current regulator electronic controller, under voltage / over voltage /
overload / earth fault relays, annunciation scheme, etc.
(b) General arrangement drawing showing main dimensions, type of I
mounting, location of various devices, etc.
1.17.7 Control Cabinets (For all services)
(a) Schematic diagram indicating terminal numbers for external I

connections and with a Bill of Material for all the equipment
(b) Control cabinet drawing showing outline dimensions, cable entry I
openings, floor / wall / pedestal fixing arrangement, padlocking
arrangement, weights
1.17.8 Lighting System
(a) Distribution boards and panels general arrangement dimensioned I

drawings showing front, side and plan views, outline dimensions, floor
openings, floor / wall / structure fixing arrangements, earthing
terminals and weights.
(b) Schematic wiring diagram of the distribution boards / panels, showing I
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A –H-
SECTION: D3-20
SHEET 4 OF 4
Package : CONTRACT
Balance of Plant
the terminal numbers.
(c) Inside view of distribution boards / panels showing mounting and I
wiring arrangement of various component equipment.
1.17.9 Fire Proof Sealing for Cable Carrier Systems
(a) Detailed drawings including the constructional features, outline I

dimensions, general arrangement and cross-sectional views of the
Fire Proof Sealing System to be provided in the areas specified in
specification for each type of fire stop and fire break supplied.
(b) Type test certificates as per this specification for all types of fire stop / I
fire breaks included in the order.
(c) Layout drawing indicating the location of FPS Systems proposed I
1.17.10 Neutral Grounding Cubicle
(a) General outline drawing with dimensions and weights I
(b) Detailed outline drawing showing plan, front elevation, end elevation, I
inner view, locating dimensions of cable entries, terminal details,
structure / floor fixing details and weights of the cubicles
(c) Schematic diagrams with all the parameters for the cubicles I
1.17.11 Fire Detection And Alarm System
(a) Dimensional drawings, giving overall dimensional details, foundation I

and cable entry particulars, weights, the necessary internal details,
bill of materials, etc., for main fire alarm panel, fire siren, manual call
points.
(b) Detailed literature / catalogues giving full particulars, principle of I
operation, dimensional and mounting details for all types of detectors
offered along with dimensional and mounting details of the detector
junction boxes.
(c) Detailed internal schematic and wiring diagrams for Main fire alarm I
panel, manual call points and all types of detectors offered.
(d) Detailed write-up explaining the principle and operation of the I
complete fire alarm panel.
(e) Lay out drawing indicating the locations of Detectors, MCPs, etc I
1.17.12 Transformers
i General arrangements, bushing, wiring diagram, valve schedule, A
foundation details, rail gauge etc. drawing
ii Short circuit with stand capability calculations A
1.17.13 Cables A
i Constructional details
A- for Approval; I- for Information
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.5103A –H- VOLUME – V
500-01
SHEET 1 OF 13
Package : TITLE CODES AND STANDARDS

Balance of Plant
APPLICABLE STANDARDS IS BS IEC ANSI / IEEE
In the event of conflict between the codes and standards referred below and the specification
included in tender documents, the stringent requirement shall be considered.
A. TRANSFORMERS
1 Power Transformer 2026 171 176
2 Fittings and accessories for Power 3639

Transformer
3 Distribution transformer 1180
4 Loading of oil immersed transformer 6600 CP:1010 354
5 Oil 335 148 296
6 Bushing for > 1000V, AC 2099 223 137
7 Bushing for < 1000V, AC 7421
8 Dry type transformers C-75.12.01
9 Buchholz relay 3637
10 Pulse transformer 6297 2214
11 Reactor 5553 60289 60289
12 Neutral earthing transformer 3151 171 / 60076

BSEN
60076
B. SWITCHGEARS
1. LV Switchgear and control panel 13947 7354
2. Degree of protection for LV 2147 144 /

Switchgear 947
3. Factory built assemblies of low 13947 439

voltage switchgear and control gear
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 2 OF 13

Balance of Plant
4. Specification for metal clad base 5921

materials for printed circuits for use in
electronic and telecommunication
equipment
5. Electrical insulation classified by 1271 2757 85

thermal stability
6. Metal enclosed switchgear 3427 162 298

7. Switchgear 62271-
100,
200
7. Circuit breakers 13118 116 / 60056
3659 /
5311
8. Switches and switch isolators above 60265

1000V and upto 11 kV
9. (Off-Load) isolators 3078 / 129 /

3189 156
10. Arrangement for switchgear busbars, 5578 / 158

main connection and auxiliary wiring 11353
11. Bus bars 5082 159 105
12. Bus bar support insulators 2544 3297 273
13. Current transformers 2705 3938 185
14. Potential transformers 3156 3491 186
15. AC Electricity meters 722 2692

5685
16. Electrical indicating instruments 1248 89 51
17. Electrical relays for power system 3231 142 255

protection
18. High voltage fuses 9385
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 3 OF 13

Balance of Plant
19. HRC Fuses 9224
20. SF-6 Gas 376
21. H.V. Cable Termination 18
22. Environmental requirements of 6553

semiconductor devices and
integrated circuits
23. Factory built assemblies of 8623 60947 439

switchgear and control gear for
voltages upto and including 1000V
AC and 1200V DC
24. Miniature circuit breakers 8828 3871
25. HRC cartridge fuse 13703 88
26. D-Type fuses 8187
27. Control switches / push buttons 6875
28. Static protection relays 8686 142
29. Electric graphic (Recording) 90

instruments
30. Starters 13947 EN- 292

60947-4
31. Interconnecting bus bars for AC 8084

voltage above 1 kV upto and
including 36 kV
32. Code of practice for selection, 10118

installation and maintenance of
switchgear and control gear.
33. Semiconductor converters 146
34. Semiconductor rectifier cells and 3895 / 4417 146

stacks 4540
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 4 OF 13

Balance of Plant
35. Electrical installation and wiring 732

installation
36. Environmental testing procedure for 9000

electronic and electrical items
37. Safety code for semiconductors 6619

rectifier equipment
38. Printed wiring boards 7405
39. Single and double sided PCB with 61000

plain holes – Electromagnetic – 1995
compatibility
40. Semiconductor rectifier assemblies 4417 148

and thyristor converters
C. ROTATING MACHINES
1. Three phase induction motors 325 4999 34
2. Rotating electrical machines 4722
3. Single phase small AC and universal 996

electric motors
4. Three phase induction motors with 9628

type of protection ‘n’
5. Construction and testing of electrical 6381

apparatus with type of protection ‘e’
6. Designations for types of construction 2253 34-7

and mounting arrangement of rotating
electrical machines
7. Terminal marking and direction of 4728 4999 34-8

rotation for rotating electrical
machinery
8. Designation of methods of cooling for 6362 4999 34-6

rotation electrical machines
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 5 OF 13

Balance of Plant
9. Measurement and evaluation of 4999-142 34-9

vibration of rotating electrical
machines
10. Degrees of protection provided by 4691 4999 34-5

enclosure for rotating electrical
machinery
11. Guide for testing three phase 4029 34-34

induction motors
12. Measurement and evaluation of 12075 4999 34-14

Mechanical vibration of rotating
electrical machines
13. Classification of hazardous areas 5572 79
24. Dimensions of slide rails for electric 2968 4999

motors
25. Permissible limits of noise level for 12065 34

rotating electrical machines
26. Guide for testing insulation resistance 7816

of rotating machines
27. Procedure for measurement of loss of 13508

tangent angle for coils & bars
28. Impulse voltage withstand test 34-15
29. Temperature rise measurement of 12802

rotating electrical machines
30 Type of duty and classes of rating 12824

assigned to rotating electrical
machines
D. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
1. Brass glands for PVC cables 12943
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 6 OF 13

Balance of Plant
2. Flame-proof enclosures of electrical 2148 4683

apparatus
3. Compression type tubular terminal 8309 4683

ends for aluminium conductors of
insulated cables
4. Code of practice for earthing 3043 1013
5. Rigid conduits 9537
6. Accessories for rigid steel conduits 3837

for electrical wiring
7. Fittings for rigid steel conduits for 2667

electrical wiring
8. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits 3419
9. Flexible steel conduits for electrical 3480

wiring
10. Flexible non-metallic conduits for 6946

electrical installation
11. Adaptors for flexible steel conduits 4649
12. Plugs and socket outlets 1293
13. Lightning arrester 3070 BSEN- 60099

60099
E. LIGHTING
1. General and Safety Requirements for 1913 4533 60598

luminaires
2. Code of practice for industrial lighting 6665
3. Industrial luminaire with metal 1777 60598

reflectors
4. Decorative lighting outfits 5077
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 7 OF 13

Balance of Plant
5. Dust proof electric lighting fittings 4012 60598
6. Dust tight electric lighting fittings 4013
7. Electric lighting fittings for division 2 8224 4533

areas
8. Luminaries 10322 4533
9. Water proof electric lighting fittings 3528 4533 /

5225
10. Watertight electric lighting fittings 3553 4533 /

5225
11. Bayonet Lamp Holders 1258 BSCN: 60061

61184
12. Edison Screw Lamp Holders 10276 BSCN:

60238
13. Bi-pin Lamp Holders for Tubular 3323
fluorescent lamps
14. Starters for fluorescent lamp 2215 BSCN:

60155
15. Holders for starters for tubular 3324 BSCN:

fluorescent lamps 60400
16. Ballast for Fluorescent lamps 1534 BSCN: 60400

60920
17. Transistorised ballasts for fluorescent 7027

lamps
18. Ballasts for HP Mercury Vapour 6616 60923

Lamps
19. Capacitors for use in tubular 1569 BSCN:

fluorescent, HPMV & LP Sodium 61048
Vapour Discharge Lamp Circuits
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 8 OF 13

Balance of Plant
20. Vitreous enamel reflector for use with 8017

illuminating device.
21. Tubular Fluorescent lamps for 2418 BSCN: 60081

general lighting service 60081
22. High pressure mercury vapour lamps 9900 3677 60188
23. Tungsten filament general service 418 6179 60432

electric lamps
24. Cast acrylic sheets for use in 7569

luminaires
25. High pressure sodium vapour lamps 9974
26. Emergency lighting units 9583
27. Code of practice for interior 3646 8206

illumination
28. Code of practice for selection, 10028

Installation and maintenance of
transformers
29. Code of practice for maintenance and 1866 5730 422

supervision of mineral insulating oil in
equipment
30. Code of practice for Installation and 900

maintenance of induction motors
31. Indian Electricity Act 1910, (As

amended)
32. Electricity Supply Act, 1948, (As

amended)
33. Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 (As

amended)
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 9 OF 13

Balance of Plant
F. FIRE PROTECTION
1. Code of practice for fire safety of 3034

industrial buildings : Electrical
Generating and Distributing Stations
2. Components of automatic fire 5445

detection system : Introduction
3. Specification for manual call points 5839 ANSI

UL38
4. Smoke detectors for use in automatic 11360 5445 UL 268

fire alarm system
5. Smoke detectors for duct application UL268

A
6. Single & multiple station smoke UL 217

detectors
7. Heat sensitive fire detectors for use in 2175 5445

automatic fire alarm system
8. Specification for high temperature 5445

heat detectors
9. Methods of test of sensitivity to fire 5445
10. Auxiliary protective signalling system ANSI –

for fire alarm services NFPA
– 72
11. Automatic fire alarm system in 3116

buildings : Control & indicating
equipment
12. Protection of buildings and allied 2309 6651

structures against lightning
13. Code of practice for fire safety of 1646

buildings
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 10 OF 13

Balance of Plant
14. National Electric Code Article

760
15. National Building Code of India

(1983)
16. Rules for fire alarm system TAC
G. SWITCHYARD
1. Aluminium conductors for overhead 398 209

transmission system
2. Hard drawn Copper conductors for 282 125

overhead power transmission
3. Electric power connectors 5561 159 305 / 383
4. Reels and drums for bare conductors 1778
5. Code of practice for use of structural 802

steel in overhead transmission line
towers
6. Porcelain insulators for overhead 731 EN-60383, 60305 /

power lines 60305 60433
7. Insulator fittings for overhead power 2486 3288
lines
8. Dimensions of indoor and outdoor 5350

porcelain post insulators and post
insulator units
9. Conductors and earth wire 2121 3288

accessories for overhead lines
10. Code of practice for selection, 2189 5839 Part- FOC

installation and maintenance of I Rules
automatic fire alarm and detection ANSI
system NFPA
72
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 11 OF 13

Balance of Plant
11. Cables 10810/ 189

1554 /
7098
12. Line Traps 8792 4996 60353
13. Coupling capacitors and capacitor 9348 7578 60358

dividers
14. Voltage transformers 3156 7625 60186
15. Code of practice for installation and 9859

maintenance of PLC equipment
16. Large hollow porcelain insulators 5621 233
17. Hot dip galvanising 2629
18. Method of testing uniformity of 2633

coating of zinc coated articles
19. Guide for testing of circuit breakers 9135 267

for out-of-phase switching
20. Specification and acceptance of 376

sulphur hexafluoride
21. AC disconnection (Isolation) and 9921 129 / 694

earth switches
H. DC SYSTEM
1. Stationary cells and batteries
Lead acid type
- With tubular positive plate 1651 60896
- With plants and positive plate 1652 6290-2 60896
2. Quality tolerances for water for 1069 4974

storage battery
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 12 OF 13

Balance of Plant
3. Sulphuric acid 266 3031
4. Rubber and plastic containers for 1146

lead acid storage battery
5. Sealing compound for lead acid 3116

batteries
6. Synthetic separators for lead acid 6071

batteries
7. General requirements and methods 8320

of test for lead acid storage batteries
8. Recommended practice for sizing IEEE

large lead acid storage batteries for 485
generating stations and sub-stations
9. Containers and Vent Plugs UL 924
10. Battery enclosures UL

1778
11. IEEE recommended practice for IEEE

sizing Ni-Cd batteries for stationary 115
applications
I. GENERAL
1. Climate proofing CP:1014
2. Code of practice for phosphate 6005 3189

coatings of iron and Steel
3. Classification of maximum surface 8239

temperature of electrical equipment
for explosive atmospheres
4. Method of marking for identifying 8241

electrical equipment for explosive
atmospheres
5. Flame proof cable glands 4821
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

500-01
SHEET 13 OF 13

Balance of Plant
6. Ambient temperature of electrical 9676

equipment
7. Terminals for electronic equipment 4007
8. Guide for colour coding of electrical 11954

mimic diagrams
9. Boxes for enclosure of electrical 5133

accessories
10. Codes for welding 816,

9595
11. Dust-tight Ignition proof enclosures, 11005

for electrical equipment
12. Electromagnetic compatibility 6000 –

1995
13. Code of practice for climate proofing 6751
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC. NO.
TCE.5103A-H-500-001 2 X 800MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 1 OF 7
Package : ELECTRICAL LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

Balance of Plant
1.0 EQUIPMENT TO BE SUPPLIED
For carrying out the electrical maintenance and setting up the electrical
laboratory expected for the specified type and size of the power plant, all the
required laboratory equipment shall be furnished by the OWNER. The
laboratory equipment listed below is the minimum that has to be supplied.
Depending on the plant, any additional equipment required or considered
necessary during detailed engineering stage, shall form a part of the scope.
The OWNER reserves the right to either add or delete any of the Categories /
items subsequent to placement of order. The list of items / equipment to be
supplied indicated here is only indicative. Any other equipment considered
necessary by the CONTRACTOR for the installation, testing and
commissioning of the plant shall be included in the offer.
Category – I – High Voltage Test Instruments

Sl. Instrument Range Quantity Remarks
No.
(a) High potential test set AC 0 – 60 kV, 2 Nos.
250 kVA
Category – II – Miscellaneous Laboratory Instruments

No.
(a) Capacitance & dissipation factor bridge 1 p.f to 1.14µ f 1 No.
(With oil test cell & calibrator) 0 – 12 kV
(b) Automated oil test set 0 – 75 kV 1 No.
(c) Rheostats of following ratings 650 Volts 1 Set
(i) 25 Ohms, 5A 2 nos.

(ii) 50 Ohms, 10A 2 nos.
(iii) 100 Ohms, 5A 2 nos.
(iv) 250 Ohms, 5A 2 nos.
(v) 500 Ohms, 0.5A 2 nos.
(vi) 1000 Ohms, 0.5A 2 nos.
(d) Buchholtz analyser 1 no.
(e) Portable secondary injection test set 500VA, 1A/ 5A 2 nos.

Normal; 20A /
100A for 30 sec
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.

Balance of Plant
(f) Earth resistance tester with resistivity 0.01 Ohms,500 1 No.

test facility Ohms in three
ranges
(g) Insulation resistance tester 0-100, 000 1 No.

(transistorised) Mega Ohms,
5000-2500-
1000-500 Volts
(i) Cable fault locator (11 kV cable) 1 No.
(j) Relay tool kit 2 Nos.
(k) Hot stick Up to 24 kV 4 Nos.

Up to 400 kV 2 Nos.
(l) Temperature controlled soldering iron 50W 2 Nos.
(m) Thermo vision equipment 1 No.
(n) Primary injection kit with suitable 5000A, 7.5 kVA 1 No.
accessories
3000A, 4.5 kVA 1 No.
(o) Tan delta test kit for transformer 1 No.
(p) Moisture content test kit 1 No.
(q) Transformer winding resistance 1 No.

measurement kit
(r) oil test kit -micro processor based with 1 No.

PC
(s) Digital power and energy meter 1 No.

calibrator with phase shifter and phase
angle meter
Category – III – Meters & Accessories

No.
(a) Three Phase sequence testing (100 – 600 V) 1 No.
meter
(b) Clip on Ammeters AC / DC (a) 0-2000-2500- 1 No.
3000A ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.

Balance of Plant
(b) 0-100-150-200A 1 No.

(c) 0-5A 2 Nos.
(d) 0-1A 2 Nos.
(d) Auto-transformers – 3 Phase 0-500 Volts, 5kVA 1 No.
(e) Auto-transformer – 1 Phase 0-270 Volts, 2 kVA 1 No.
(f) DC shunts 50A, 75 mV 2 Nos.
(g) Standard current transformers 3000-2500-2000- 1 No.

class 0.1 along with decade 1500-1000-800-600-
burden box 400-300-200-150-
100-50-5/1
(h) Standard current transformers 10-7.5-5-2.5-1/5-1 1 No.
(i) Phase shifters-3 ph 0-500V 1 No.
(j) Digital low resistance ohm meter 1 No.
(k) Digital micro ohm meter 1 No.
Category – IV – Electronic Instruments

No.
(a) Micro processor based Relay 1 No.
testing kit
Category – IV – Electronic Instruments

No.
(b) Dual-trace portable storage 0 – 250 mega Hz 1 No.
oscilloscope
(c) Regulated DC power supply Voltage 0 - + 300V 2 Nos.
equipment DC, 2 A, 0 - + 30V,
DC, 2 A, 0-+5V 10
A, Current 0 – 2 A
DC, 100 VA
(d) Digital tachometer (non-contact 0,1500,3000,5000, 2 Nos.

type) 10000 rpm
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.

Balance of Plant
(e) 3 ph impedance relay testing kit 110V/1 and 5 A, 1 No.

with phase shifting 2 kVA
(f) Analog multi meter, class 0.2 3 Nos.

accuracy
(g) Digital variable frequency source 1 No.
(oscillators)
All the necessary accessories shall also be supplied with the instruments. These shall
include but not be limited to :
(a) Two meter length power supply cord with plug.

(b) All necessary accessories like jacks, probes, connectors, adapters, clips, rain
jackets, protective covers, shields, carrying / transporting cases, etc.,
wherever applicable.
2 Specific Requirements
2.1 Category – I – High Voltage Test Instruments

(a) The test transformers shall be supplied with :
(i) A control desk incorporating all necessary indication, annunciation,

protection and control equipment.
(ii) All necessary cooling equipment if required.

(iii) Mobile base with adequate no. of rollers for easy transport of the
testing unit.
(iv) All necessary accessories for erection, commissioning, normal

operational / testing of all types of equipment, whether specified or
not.
(v) Shall incorporate built-in safety features to ensure complete safety of

operating personnel.
(b) The insulating material used for bushings and top covers shall be as per BS
for Class F/A installation.
2.2 Category – II
(a) Automated Oil Test Sets
(i) This equipment shall have an output voltage of 0 – 75 kV variable AC,

continuously rated 1 kVA with class of insulation being ‘A’.
(ii) The test set shall be so designed that the short circuit current drawn
from the system exceeds 8 times the rated current. The transformer
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.

Balance of Plant
test set impedance shall be such that the input MCCB trips within a
suitable time (0.02 sec.) for a secondary short circuit.
(c) Rheostats and Phantom Loads
The rheostats shall be 650V grade wire wound type of copper nickel alloy
having a low temperature co-efficient, totally enclosed type with louvers.
Solid copper / graphite brushes with pressure springs shall be provided to
ensure low contact resistance.
(e) Portable Secondary Injection Test Set
This equipment shall be designed to deliver a normal continuously adjustable

current with multirange selector switch for 1, 5, 10, 50 A etc. The instrument
shall have built in ammeter and voltmeter having adequate range.
(f) Earth Resistance tester with resistivity test facility
This equipment shall be suitable for measuring the ground resistance,

specific soil resistance and ohmic resistances. The equipment shall be
supplied with all necessary accessories and in-built batteries.
(g) Insulation Resistance Tester (Transistorised)
The insulation resistance shall be measurable to a value of 1,00,000 mΩ in

five ranges. The test voltage shall be adjustable at 500V, 1000V, 2500V and
5000V. The tester shall be suitable for an input supply of 240 V, 50 Hz,
single phase AC as well as in-built rechargeable batteries. A guard terminal
shall be provided to eliminate error due to surface leakage. Accuracy shall
be 5%, maximum short circuit terminal current 2.5 mA, nominal S.C current 2
mA. This tester shall also provide Polarization Index Measurement.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.

Balance of Plant
(i) Cable Fault Locator
Portable hand held cable fault locator which shall identify the fault in a LT
cable distinctly. This kit shall work on in-built batteries. This kit shall also
Include with Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR), cable identifying kit and all
necessary accessories & transport cases.
(j) Hot Stick
The hot sticks shall be supplied in two different ratings viz., up to 11 kV, 400
kV. The insulating handle of stick shall be with Class F / H insulation as per
IEC / BS specifications with scaled detector having high quality viewing
windows. The hot stick should be light weight and portable.
(l) Temperature Controlled Soldering Iron
The soldering iron rated at 50 W having thermostatic temperature control

shall be supplied complete with set of soldering bits of different sizes and
shapes, three spare heating elements & separate stand to rest the soldering
iron while in use.
(m) Thermo vision Equipment
The system shall be very light weight, user friendly and single hand-operated
instrument. This instrument shall have user-friendly, broadly compatible
software which is image processing software to perform past-imaging
analysis.
2.3 Category – III
(a) Three Phase sequence Testing Meter
This shall be suitable for testing 3 phase 415V supply and shall be suitably
marked for clockwise and anti-clockwise directions. Any conducting part of
the meter/ shall withstand 2 kV for 1 minute. The operative range of the
meter shall be 100V to 600V.
(b) Clip on Ammeter
The meter shall have a large digital display unit and the jaws shall open
adequately to facilitate introduction of the conductor having a size
corresponding to the maximum current range.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.

Balance of Plant
(d) Digital low resistance ohm-meter
The instrument shall be suitable for measuring the contact resistance of

switch and circuit breaker contacts, winding resistance of transformer &
motor, bus bars, etc.. They shall also be suitable to be used in finding ground
faults in electrical equipment, determining temperature co-efficient and
temperature rise by resistance methods, etc.
2.4 Category – IV
(a) Relay Test Kit
Relay test set shall be suitable for input voltage 240 V, 1 Phase, 50 Hz and
accuracy 1% full scale. Output current range shall be 1, 5, 50, 100 A.
Overload and short circuit protection shall be provided. Phase angle
adjustment shall be 0-360 deg. The kit shall be computerised, portable unit
and used to test various types of protective relays quickly and more
accurately. The software for testing, measurement and analysis of the
different types of the relays shall be included.
(b) Dual trace portable storage oscilloscope
The oscilloscope shall consist of a CRT, power supply, electron beam

deflection system and the switching circuitry necessary to integrate a versatile
and complete measurement plug-in system. The oscilloscope shall be
provided with communication port to connect to PC (or) memory storage
devices.
(c) Regulated DC Power Supply
Voltage range
(continuously controlled) - 0 to + 300 V DC
Current range
(continuously variable) - 0 to 2A DC
Indication - Digital voltage/current meters
integral with the unit
Load regulation - 0.1% variation in voltage
- 0.2% variation in current.
(g) Digital Tachometer
Tachometer shall be of the photoelectric type with a digital display which does
not necessitate mechanical contact with the machine shaft. A “push to read”
push button shall be provided and also an LED to indicate when the light
beam is on the target. Adequate memory shall be built – in to hold the last
reading for at least 1 minute.
ISSUE
R0
SPEC. NO.

Balance of Plant
(h) Digital Multimeter
These meters shall have built in overload protection and protection against
HV transients. They shall have an audio alarm for continuity testing, a peak
hold feature on current and voltage ranges, automatic polarity and over range
indications.
The instrument shall be complete with rechargeable batteries and charging

equipment, adapters, probes, leads, padded carrying case, etc. It shall have
safety features to prevent damage to instrument if voltage is applicable
inadvertently current or resistance measuring range.
ISSUE
R0
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
VOLUME – V B
SPEC.NO. ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LTD. VOLUME V B
TCE-M4-203-01 TITLE 2X 800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM

SHEET 1 OF 5
INDUCTION MOTORS
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The specification covers the design, material, constructional features,

manufacture, inspection and testing at the VENDOR'S/his SUB-VENDOR'S works,
delivery to site and performance testing of induction motors.
1.2 For motors of rated above 500 V, a separate specification (TCE.M4-203-02 -

Additional requirements for HV motors) covers the additional requirements, any or
all of which shall be complied with for motors rated 415V if specified in Data
Sheet-A.
2.1 The design, material, construction, manufacture, inspection, testing and

performance of induction motors shall comply with all currently applicable
statutes, regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be
installed. The equipment shall also conform to the applicable standards specified
in data sheet A1 latest revision as on the date of offer Nothing in this specification
shall be construed to relieve the VENDOR of this responsibility. In case of conflict
between the standards and this specification, this specification shall govern.
3.0 DRIVEN EQUIPMENT
3.1 When this specification forms part of the driven equipment specification,
information not given in the Data Sheet-A will be governed by the driven
equipment specification.
3.2 Motors shall be capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as
specified in the motor Data Sheet-A and as specified for the driven equipment.
4.0 PERFORMANCE AND CHARACTERISTICS
4.1 Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in the expected
life span when operated continuously under either of the following supply
conditions as
ISSUE
R8
CONSULTANTS: TCE Consulting Engineers TCE FORM NO. 329 R4


SHEET 2 OF 5
INDUCTION MOTORS
specified in Data Sheet-A.

Supply Condition
I II
(a) Variation in supply voltage

from rated voltage +6% +10%
(b) Variation in supply frequency

from rated frequency +3% +5%
(c) Combined voltage and

frequency variation 9% 10%
4.2 Motors shall be suitable for the method of starting specified in the Data Sheet-A.
4.3 The minimum permissible voltage shall be 85% of the rated voltage during motor
starting
4.3.1 Motors shall be capable of starting and accelerating the load with the applicable
method of starting, without winding temperatures reaching injurious levels, when
the supply voltage is in the range of 85% of the rated motor voltage to maximum
permissible voltage specified in Data Sheet-A.
4.4 The locked rotor current of the motor shall not exceed 600% of full load current
(subject to tolerances as per the applicable standard) unless otherwise specified.
4.5 Motors shall be capable of developing the rated full load torque even if the
supply voltage drops to 70% of the rated voltage. If such operation is envisaged
for a period of one second, the pull out torque of the motor shall be atleast 205%
of full load torque.
4.6 Motors when started with the driven equipment coupled shall be capable of
withstanding atleast two successive starts from cold conditions & one start
from hot condition without injurious heating of windings. The motors shall also
be suitable for three equally spread starts per hour under the above referred
supply conditions.
5.0 INSULATION
5.1 The insulation shall be given tropical and fungicidal treatment for successful
operation of the motor in hot, humid and tropical climate.
ISSUE
R8


SHEET 3 OF 5
INDUCTION MOTORS
6.0 TEMPERATURE RISE
6.1 The temperature rises shall not exceed the values given in IS 12802. Under
extremes of supply condition (clause 4.1 above), the temperature rise shall not
exceed the value indicated in IS by 10oC.
6.2 For motors specified for outdoor installation heating due to direct exposure to
solar radiation shall be considered.
7.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
7.1 Motors weighing more than 25 kg. shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or other
means to facilitate safe lifting.
8.0 BEARINGS
8.1 Unless otherwise specified in data sheet-A, motor bearings shall not be subjected to
any external thrust load.
8.2 Unless otherwise specified, motor bearings shall have an estimated life of atleast
40,000 hrs.
8.3 The bearings shall permit running of the motor in either direction of rotation.
8.4 When forced oil lubrication or water cooling is required, prior approval from
the purchaser shall be obtained.
8.5 When forced oil lubrication or water cooling is required, the machine shall be
suitable for starting & continuous operation for atleast 10 minutes, without the
availability of lubrication or cooling system
8.6 If the bearings are oil lubricated, a drain plug shall be provided for draining
residual oil & an oil level sight gauge shall be provided to show the precise oil
level required for stand still and running conditions.
8.7 It shall be possible to lubricate the bearings without dismantling any part of the
motor.
9.0 TERMINAL BOX
9.1 Terminal boxes shall have a degree of protection of at least IP 55 for out door
applicable
9.2 Unless otherwise approved, the terminal box shall be capable of being turned
through 360o in steps of 90o.
ISSUE
R8


SHEET 4 OF 5
INDUCTION MOTORS
9.3 Terminals shall be of stud type & the terminal box shall be complete with necessary
lugs, nuts, washers.
9.4 When single core cables are to be used the gland plates shall be of non magnetic
material.
9.5 Sizes of terminal boxes and lugs shall be as given in Table-I, unless specified
otherwise in data sheet A or Section C.
TABLE-I
415 V MOTORS - SIZES OF CABLES, STUDS, TERMINAL LUGS & TERMINAL BOXES
(TO BE PROVIDED ON MOTORS BY VENDOR)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SL. MOTOR RATING 1100V Al Conductor Stud Terminal lug size Minimum
Terminal
NO. kW armoured PVC Cable Size of DOWELL MAKE Box Size
Cores x mm2 equivalent to HxWxD
DOWELL'S CAT NO. mm x mm x
mm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Upto 3 3Cx4 M6 CUS/06 100 x 100 x 60

2. 3.1 - 7.5 3Cx6 M6 CUS/07 100 x 100 x 60
3. 7.6 - 15 3Cx16 M6 CUS/09 100 x 100 x 60
4. 16 - 25 3Cx35 M8 CUS/12 150 x 150 x 75
5. 26 - 40 3Cx70 M10 CUS/17 200 x 200 x 100
6. 41 - 55 3Cx120 M12 CUS/22 400 x 400 x 125
7. 56 - 70 3Cx185 M16 CUS/28 450 x 450 x 150
8. 71 - 85 3Cx240 M20 CUS/30 500 x 500 x 200
9. 86 - 110 2x3Cx185 M20 CUS/33 600 x 600 x 200
10. 111 - 160 3x1Cx500 M20 CUS/34 600 x 200 x
200 (3
separate cable
boxes for the
3 single core
cables)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ISSUE
R8


SHEET 5 OF 5
INDUCTION MOTORS
10.0 PAINT AND FINISH
10.1 All motor parts exposed directly to atmosphere shall be finished and painted to
produce a neat and durable surface which would prevent rusting and corrosion.
The equipment shall be thoroughly degreased, all rust, sharp edges and scale
removed and treated with one coat of primer and finished with two coats of grey
enamel paint.
11.0 HEATING DURING IDLE PERIODS
11.1 For motors rated 30 kW and below, during idle periods, the stator winding will be
connected to a 24 V single phase, 50 Hz, AC supply for heating and elimination of
moisture. The supply will be connected between any two terminals.
11.2 Motors rated above 30 kW shall have space heaters suitable for 240V, single
phase, 50 Hz, AC supply. Space heaters shall have adequate capacity to maintain
motor internal temperature above dew point to prevent moisture condensation
during idle period. The space heaters shall be placed in easily accessible positions
in the lowest part of the motor frame.
12.0 ACCESSORIES
12.1 Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the
motor, for bolted connection of the PURCHASER'S earthing conductors as
specified in data sheet-A. These earthing points shall be in addition to earthing
stud provided in the terminal box.
12.2 Except when otherwise specified, the motors shall be provided with a bare shaft
extension having a key slot and a key at the driving end.
13.0 TESTS
13.1 Motor shall be subjected to all the routine tests as per applicable standard in the
presence of the PURCHASER'S representative. Copies of test certificates of type
and routine tests, shall be furnished as specified in the distribution schedule,
for the PURCHASER'S approval. The VENDOR shall ensure to use calibrated test
equipment/instruments having valid calibration test certificates from standard
laboratories traceable to national/international standards.
ISSUE
R8

TITLE
TCE-M4-203-01 2 X 800MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 1 OF 3
DATA SHEET-C
INDUCTION MOTORS
INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED BY THE VENDOR

AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT
1.0 Technical particulars as per data sheet B of tender specification. (Based on motor
manufacturer)
2.0 Type and frame size :
3.0 Starting time (Secs)
3.1 With 100% voltage at terminals
3.2 With minimum voltage at terminals (at ____ % Rated voltage)
3.3 With 110% voltage at terminals
4.0 Safe stall time at 100/110% rated voltage under hot/cold condition.
5.0 Type and size of cable for which gland is provided in the terminal box :
6.0 Type of bearings and expected life.
7.0 Total weight of motor (kg)
7.1 Weight of Stator (kg)
7.2 Weight of Rotor (kg)
8.0 Motor GD2 :
9.0 Efficiency (%)
9.1 Full Load Efficiency
9.2 75% Load Efficiency
ISSUE
R8
TITLE
DATA SHEET-C
INDUCTION MOTORS
10.0 Power Factor
10.1 Full Load Power Factor
10.2 75% Load Power Factor
11.0 Torque (% FLT)
11.1 Starting
11.2 Maximum (Pullout torque)
11.3 Pull up torque
12.0 Type of Enclosure
13.0 Cooling designation
14.0 Space heaters
14.1 Rated voltage/number
14.2 Rating total
14.3 Separate terminal box provided
15.0 Motor reactances (Pu)
15.1 Subtransient reactance
15.2 Transient reactance
15.3 Steady state reactance
16.0 Guaranteed losses (kW)
16.1 Iron loss
16.2 Copper loss
16.3 Friction, Windage & Stray losses.

ISSUE
R8
TITLE
DATA SHEET-C
INDUCTION MOTORS
17.0 Motor outline dimension drawing

(Number of copies as per distribution schedule)
18.0 Type test certificates (Number of copies as per distribution schedule)
19.0 Speed torque curve at rated & minimum starting voltage.
20.0 Current - speed curve.
21.0 Current - time curve.
22.0 Efficiency, power factor, slip, current against output curve.
23.0 Thermal withstand characteristic for motors of 100 kW & above - Hot & Cold.
24.0 Negative sequence current Vs time curve for motor of 100 kW & above.
25.0 Rotor voltage/Rotor current (for wound motors).
ISSUE
R8
.
SPEC NO. ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LIMITED VOLUME V B
2X 800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM
TCE-M4-219-01 SHEET 1 OF 6
CONTROL CABINETS
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the design, material, construction features,

manufacture, inspection and testing at the VENDOR'S / his SUB-
VENDOR'S works, delivery to site and performance testing of Control
cabinets upto 415V.
2.1 This design, material, construction, manufacture, inspection, testing

and performance of control cabinets shall comply with all currently
applicable statutes, regulations and safety codes in the locality where
the equipment will be installed. The equipment shall also conform to
the latest applicable standards mentioned in Data Sheet A2. Nothing in
this specification shall be construed to relieve the VENDOR of this
responsibility.
2.2 Supply items which are bought out by the VENDOR shall be procured
from approved manufacturers acceptable to the
PURCHASER/ENGINEER.
3.1 Control cabinets shall be sheet steel enclosed and shall be dust,
weather and vermin proof providing a degree of protection of IP 52 for
indoor use and IP 54 for outdoor use. Sheet Steel used shall be cold
rolled and at least 2.0mm thick and properly braced to prevent
wobbling.
3.2 Control cabinets shall be provided with hinged door(s) with padlocking
arrangement and suitable brackets/channels shall be provided for the
type of mounting specified in Data Sheet A1.
3.3 All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around
with neoprene gaskets. All accessible live connections shall be
shrouded and it shall be possible to change individual fuses, switches,
MCBs without danger of contact with live metal.
3.4 All live parts shall be provided with atleast phase to phase and phase
to earth clearances in air of 25 mm and 20mm respectively.
3.5 Adequate interior cabling space and suitable removable cable glands
shall be provided if specified in Data Sheet 1 Sr No.1.5 (C). Necessary
number of cable glands shall be supplied and fitted screwed-on type
and made of brass.
ISSUE
R7
TCE FORM NO.329R3

.
CONTROL CABINETS
3.6 Two earthing terminals shall be provided to suit the PURCHASER'S

earthing conductor.
3.7 All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated and then
applied two coats of zinc chromate primer and two coats of finishing
synthetic enamel paint, both inside and outside, of colour as specified
in Data Sheet A1. For chemical/corrosive areas epoxy paint shall be
used whenever specified in Data Sheet A1.
4.0 MAIN BUSBARS
4.1 Busbars shall be insulated and of aluminium alloy of E91E grade and
shall have adequate cross-section to carry the required continuous
currents such that the operating temperature of the busbars does not
exceed 850C.
5.0 MOTOR FEEDERS
5.1 Each motor to be controlled from the cabinet shall be provided with 3
pole/2 pole isolating switch, HRC fuses, contractors with thermal
overload relays and other equipment required for satisfactory control of
motors. When schematic drawings/bill of material is enclosed, all
equipment shown shall be supplied by the VENDOR. The isolating
switch and contactor shall be rated at least 20% more than the
connected motor full load current.
5.2 Unless otherwise specified motors rated 0.5KW and above being
controlled from the control cabinet will be rated for 415V, 3 phase, 50
Hz and motors rated below 0.5 KW will be 240V, 1 phase, 50 Hz.
6.0 SWITCHES/MCBS
6.1 Switches / MCBs / MPCBs /MCCBs shall be hand operated, air break,
heavy duty, quick make, quick break type conforming to applicable
standards mentioned in Data Sheet A2.
6.2 The rating of switch shall be so chosen as to get complete protection

by associated O/L relay or fuse under all normal/abnormal conditions
such as full load, overload, locked rotor, short circuit etc. MCBs /
MPCBs /MCCBs shall be provided with overload/short-circuit protective
device.
6.3 It shall be the responsibility of the VENDOR to fully coordinate the

overload and short circuit tripping of the MCBs / MPCBs /MCCBs with
ISSUE
R7
TCE FORM NO.329R3

.
CONTROL CABINETS
the downstream MCBs/fuses/motor starters, to provide satisfactory

discrimination.
6.4 Switch handle shall have provision for locking in both fully open and
fully closed positions. MCBs / MPCBs /MCCBs shall be provided with
locking facility when called for in Data Sheet A1.
7.0 CONTACTORS
7.1 Contactor type motor starters shall be of the full voltage, direct-on-line,
air break, single throw, electro-magnetic type unless otherwise
specified. Automatic star-delta type starters shall be provided when
specified.
7.2 Contactors shall be provided with at least 2 'NO' and 2 'NC' auxiliary
contacts.
7.3 Contactor shall be provided with a three element, positive acting,

ambient temperature compensated time lagged, hand reset type
thermal overload relay with adjustable settings to suit the rated motor
current.
8.0 FUSES
8.1 Fuses generally shall be of the HRC cartridge link type, mounted on
plug-in type of fuse bases having a rupturing capacity of 80 kA. Fuses
upto 63A may be of HRC cartridge screw-cap, D-type, having a
rupturing capacity of not less than 46 kA at 440V A.C. and 16 kA at
250V D.C.
8.2 Fuses shall be provided with visible operation indicators to show that
they have operated.
8.3 All accessible live connections shall be adequately shrouded, and it

shall be possible to change fuses with the circuit alive, without danger
of contact with live metal.
9.0 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
9.1 Current and voltage transformers shall be dry type. Unless otherwise
specified it shall be the responsibility of the VENDOR to ensure that the
class and VA burdens of the instrument transformers provided are
adequate for the relays and meters connected to these. Facilities shall
be provided for short circuiting and grounding the CT secondary at the
terminal blocks. Test links shall be provided in the CT secondary leads
to carryout current and phase angle measurement tests with CTs in ISSUE
R7
TCE FORM NO.329R3

.
CONTROL CABINETS
service. Voltage transformers shall be provided with suitably rated

primary and secondary rated fuses. The details of the instrument
transformer are subject to the PURCHASER's approval.
10.0 CONTROL AND AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
10.1 All AC control equipment shall be suitable for operation on 240V AC, 1
phase, 50 Hz system. This supply may be obtained from phase and
neutral when 4 wire 415V main supply is available. Otherwise, or when
control voltage, other than 240V is specified, a suitable transformer
shall be provided. The control transformer shall be complete with
isolation facilities and primary and secondary HRC fuses.
10.2 Separate circuits with switches, fuses etc. of adequate rating shall be
provided for control of space heater, through thermoster and panel
illumination etc.
11.0 RELAYS
11.1 Necessary auxiliary release for alarm, time-delay relays, voltage relays
as required for control and protection shall be mounted inside the
cabinet. Relays shall be equipped with externally reset, positive action
operation indicator. Voltage relays shall have sufficient thermal
capacity for continuous energization, using external resistors if
necessary.
11.2 Auxiliary relays shall be rated to operate satisfactorily between 80%

and 110%of the rated voltage.
11.3 Each relay shall be provided with at least two potential free contacts
(1NO+1NC) for the PURCHASER's use.
11.4 Make and type of relay shall be subject to the PURCHASER's

approval.
12.0 CONTROL AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
12.1 Control and selector switches shall be of the rotary type provided with
properly designated escutcheon plates clearly marked to show the
operating positions. Control switches shall have momentary contacts,
spring return to centre, with pistol grip handle. Selector switches shall
have stay put contacts with oval handles. The number of contacts and
their operation in each switch shall be as indicated in control schematic
(when enclosed) or shall be as per the requirements of the connected
ISSUE
R7
TCE FORM NO.329R3

.
CONTROL CABINETS
circuit. The switches shall be rated for minimum 10A at 240V A.C. and
1A inductive break at 220V D.C.
13.0 PUSH BUTTONS
13.1 All pushbuttons shall be of push to actuate type having 2 'NO' and 2
'NC' self reset contacts. They shall be provided with integral
escutcheon plates, engraved with their functions. Pushbuttons contacts
shall be rated for 10 Amps at 240V A.C. and 1 Amp inductive breaking
at 220V D.C.
14.0 INDICATING LAMPS
14.1 Indicating lamps of the Clustered Coloured LED type with coloured
Lens engraved “ON”,”OFF”,”TRIP”.
15.0 SPACE HEATER
15.1 Strip type space heaters of adequate capacity shall be provided inside
each cabinet. Heaters shall be complete with rotary type 'ON-OFF'
switch, HRC fuse on phase or a single-pole MCB with overload and
short circuit protection, link on the neutral and a thermostat to cut off
the heaters at 45 Degree Celsius and shall have continuously settable
range from 30 to 90 degree Celsius.
16.0 INTERIOR LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE
16.1 Control cabinet shall be provided with a 240V, 1 phase, 50 Hz, 40W
preferably fluorescent lighting fixture for interior illumination controlled
by a 'ON-OFF' switch / MCBs and 240V, 1 phase, 5/15 Amp., 3 pin
receptacle with Plug and Switch/MCB for Switching ON & OFF.
16.2 Power source for interior lighting and receptacles shall be completely
independent of control power source.
17.0 CABINET INTERNAL WIRING
17.1 Control cabinet shall be supplied completely wired, ready for the
PURCHASER'S external connections at the terminal blocks. All wiring
shall be carried out with 650/1100V grade, PVC insulated, stranded
conductors. Power circuits shall be wired with standard aluminium
conductors of adequate sizes to suit the rated circuit current; the
minimum size shall be 4 sq.mm. Control, alarm and indication circuits
shall be wired with stranded copper conductors of sizes not smaller
than 1.5 sq.mm. C.T. circuits shall be colored wired for R Y B phases
with stranded copper conductor of size, not smaller than 2.5 sq.mm. ISSUE
R7
TCE FORM NO.329R3

.
CONTROL CABINETS
17.2 Engraved identification ferrules, marked to correspond with the wiring

diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each wire. All wiring shall be
adequately rated for the circuit current, the minimum rating shall be
20A.
18.0 LABELS AND DIAGRAM PLATE
18.1 Every equipment mounted in the cabinet shall be provided with

individual labels with equipment designation/rating. Also, the cabinet
shall be provided on the front & Rear side with a non-rusting label
engraved with the designation of the cabinet as furnished by the
PURCHASER.
18.2 Inside the door a circuit diagram engraved on non-rusting metal / PVC
shall be fixed for reference.
19.0 DRAWINGS AND DATA
19.1 As part of the proposal, the BIDDER shall furnish the following
drawings and data for scrutiny.
a) Control cabinet general arrangement drawing showing

dimensioned views, cable entry location and mounting details.
b) Schematic wiring diagram of the control cabinet.
c) Bill of material listing equipment designation, make, type, rating

etc. of the various equipment mounted on the control cabinet.
20.0 TESTS & TEST REPORTS
20.1 Acceptance and routine tests for all supply equipments/component

parts shall be carried out as per the relevant standards for the
respective equipment. These test reports and available type test
reports shall be submitted to the PURCHASER before despatch of the
equipment.
20.2 Control cabinet shall be subjected to following tests:

a) High voltage test (2000 volts for 1 minute)
b) Megger test
c) Electrical control, interlock and sequential operation tests.
20.3 Calibration certificates. Instruments used for testing and inspection shall
have valid calibration and accuracy traceable to National Standards. ISSUE
R7
TCE FORM NO.329R3

.
TCE-M4-219-01 CONTROL CABINETS SHEET 1 OF 1
DATA SHEET -C
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR
1.0 Following data shall be submitted within 3 months after placing the order.
1.1 Schematic diagram indicating terminal numbers for external connections

and with a Bill of Material for all the equipment.
1.2 Control cabinet drawing showing outline dimensions, cable entry

openings, floor / wall / pedestal fixing arrangements, padlocking
arrangement, weights.
1.3 MANUFACTURER'S technical literature on various equipment mounted

on control cabinet.
2.0 Cabinet internal wiring diagram (This drawing shall be submitted only for
information and records and shall be based on a approved schematic
drawing. The correctness of this drawing shall be the responsibility of the
VENDOR).
3.0 Test certificates for the control cabinet and the various equipment
mounted therein shall be submitted atleast 2 weeks before despatch of
equipment.
Note The VENDOR should allow atleast 4 weeks time in his manufacturing
schedule for approval of the drawing by the PURCHASER.
R7
TCE FORM NO.329R3

TCE-M4-219-11 TITLE 2X 800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 1 OF 17
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements of design, materials,

manufacturing, testing and inspection at Vendor's works of Low Voltage
switchgear for voltage not exceeding 1000 V A C.
The design, manufacture and performance of equipment shall comply with

latest applicable Codes of Standards specified in Data Sheet-A2. In case of
conflict between standards and this specification, this specification shall
govern.
3.1 The major parameters of the switchgear and other required features are given
in data sheet - A1, A2 and A3. The bidder shall in his offer specifically
conform compliance of these data in full. Deviation if any should be
specifically brought out in the schedule of Technical Deviation.
3.2 The switchgear shall be indoor, metal enclosed, floor mounted, fully draw out
type, double front and modular design of uniform height not more than 2450
mm, made up of the requisite vertical sections, dust and vermin proof
construction with IP-54 degree of protection, unless otherwise stated.
3.3 Adjacent switchgear cubicles shall be provided with side sheets on either side
to ensure complete isolation. The switchgear shall be easily extendable on
both sides by the addition of vertical sections.
3.4 The bottom of the switchgear shall be fully covered by sheet steel.
3.5 Removable gland plates shall be provided for power and control cables. The
gland plates shall be 3mm thick for panel with breaker cubicles and 2mm thick
for other cubicles. The gland plates for single core cables shall be of non-
magnetic material.
3.6 All sheet steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, oil, grease, dirt
and swarf by pickling, emulsion cleaning etc. The sheet steel shall be
phosphated and then painted with two coats of zinc rich primer paints. After
application of the primer, two coats of finished synthetic enamel
ovenbaked/stoved, paint shall be applied or powder coated.
3.7 Each switchgear cubicle shall be fitted with a label in the front and back of the
cubicle. Each switchgear shall also be fitted with label indicating the
ISSUE
R7
CONSULTANTS: TCE Consulting Engineers Limited TCE FORM NO. 329 R4
switchgear designation, rating and duty. Each relay, instrument, switch, fuse
and other devices shall be provided with separate labels.
3.8 Operating devices shall be incorporated only in the front of the switchgear. No
equipment needing manual operation shall be located less than 250 mm
above ground level.
3.9 The switchgear shall be divided into distinct vertical sections comprising of
a) Individual feeder module which shall be integral multiples of basic

module, containing all associated equipment, enclosed in sheet steel
enclosure on all sides and the rear except cable alley side and
provided with hinged door on the front.
b) A completely metal enclosed, busbar compartment running

horizontally, and a vertical busbar compartment serving all modules in
vertical section.
c) A vertical cable alley covering the entire height, except horizontal

busbar compartment with minimum 250 mm width for MCC modules at
right hand side and minimum 200 mm for circuit breaker controlled
modules, with adequate number of slotted cable support arms.
d) A horizontal separate enclosure or enclosures separated by

hylum/FRP sheets for power and control buses with tap off
connections to each vertical section.
3.10 The circuit breakers shall be fully draw out type. The circuit breakers shall
have distinct service, test, isolated and maintainance positions. In the test
position the circuit breakers shall be capable of being tested for operation
without energising the power circuits. Four normally open auxiliary contacts
shall be provided for each of the services and test limit positions switches.
The test position should preferably be obtained without the need to

disconnect normal control connections and use extension cords for testing.
3.11 The current transformers shall be mounted on the fixed portion of the
switchgear but not directly on buses or the breaker truck.
3.12 The withdrawable chassis housing feeder for motor control equipment except
circuit breakers/common control transformers of big size, shall be of the fully
drawout, semi-drawout, or fixed type as specified in the Data Sheet-A1.
ISSUE
R7
3.12.1 Fully Drawout Type Withdrawable Chassis
In this type of construction it shall be possible to drawout the withdrawable

chassis without having to unscrew or unbolt any connections to the equipment
mounted on the withdrawable chassis. The power and control drawout type
connections shall be of the stab-in or sliding type. All drawout contacts,
including for auxiliary and control wiring shall be of self aligning type.
3.13 All identical equipment and corresponding parts including chassis of drawout
modules of the same size shall be fully interchangeable, without having to
carry out modifications.
3.14 The draw-out contacts shall be made of copper/ copper alloy/aluminium

faces, which shall be silver or tinplated.
3.15 If ventilating louvers are provided they shall be provided with fine-screened
brass or GI meshes from inside to prevent entry of vermin and dust.
3.16 Module Types
3.16.1 The various types of modules indicating the control requirements of each
type, together with the list of component equipment required for each type are
detailed in the enclosed drawings. These are as follows:
A - Incoming circuit - Isolating switch & fuse.

B - Incoming circuit - Circuit Breakers.
C - Incoming circuit - Isolating switch.
D - Voltage transformer circuit.
E - Outgoing feeder - Circuit breaker.
F - Outgoing feeder - Switch-fuse unit controlled.
G - Bus coupler
H - Auxiliary services - Common equipment for annunciation scheme.
J - Auxiliary services - Common equipment for space heater supply.
K - Motor control - Direct-on-line-non essential motors
L - Motor control - Direct-on-line essential motors
M - Motor control - Automatic Star-Delta motor(open-transition)
P - Motor control - Automatic Star-Delta motor (close-transition)
R - Motor control - Reversing control
3.16.2 Motor control modules are further differentiated by suffixes as described

below, unless otherwise stated in Data Sheets-A3.
Suffix in Denotion Suffix in Denotion

First (Control second (Motor kW
Digit location) digit rating range)
ISSUE
R7
1 Controlled 1 Up to 30 kW
from MCC
2 31 - 49 kW
3 50 -125kW
4 above 125 kW
2. Controlled 1 Upto 30 kW
remote from 2 31-49 kW
MCC 3 50-125 kW
4 above 125 kW
3.16.3 The switchgear shall be designed for bottom entry of cable. Incomers shall be
suitable for non segregated phase bus duct where the incoming supply to
switchgear is from the transformer. Motor control modules are further
differentiated by suffixes as described
3.17 Main And Auxiliary Buses
3.17.1 Busbars shall be of uniform cross section throughout the length of the
switchgear, and upto the incoming terminals of the incoming feeder circuit
breaker/ switch.
3.17.2 All busbars, shall be insulated with close fitting sleeve, all bus taps, joints shall
be insulated with moulded caps. If insulating sleeve is not coloured busbars
shall be colour coded with coloured bands at suitable intervals.
3.17.3 Busbars shall be adequately supported on insulators. These shall withstand

dynamic stresses due to short circuit currents specified.
3.17.4 Auxiliary Buses
Auxiliary buses for control power supply, space heater power supply or any
other specified service shall be provided. These buses shall be insulated,
adequately supported and sized to suit specific requirements. The material of
control power supply buses shall be electrolytic copper. The material for
space heater power supply buses shall be same as that for the main power
buses. Supply transformer(s), auxiliary busbars and necessary connections
to the supply transformers and associated circuits shall be in the VENDOR'S
scope.
3.18 SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND FEATURES
3.18.1 Withdrawal or engagement of circuit breakers or switch (isolator) shall not be

possible unless it is in the open position.
ISSUE
R7
3.18.2 Operation of circuit breaker shall not be possible unless it is fully in service
positions or in test position or is fully drawn out.
3.18.3 Circuit breaker cubicles shall be provided with safety shutters operated
automatically by the movement of the circuit breaker carriage, to cover the
exposed live parts when the breaker is withdrawn.
3.18.4 Caution name plate with inscription "Caution - Live Terminals" shall be
provided at all points where the terminals are likely to remain live and isolation
is possible only at remote end, e.g. incoming terminals.
3.18.5 A breaker of given rating shall be prevented from engaging with a stationery
element of higher rating.
4.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
4.1 Circuit breakers shall be provided with following accessories.
4.1.1 Accessories as asked in Data sheet - A1
4.1.2 Mechanically operated targets to show 'Open', 'Closed', 'Service' and 'Test'
positions of the circuit breaker.
4.1.3 Mechanically operated, red 'trip' push button, shrouded to prevent accidental
operation.
4.1.4 Locking facilities in the 'Service', 'Test', and 'Isolated', positions. In test
position the breaker will be tested without energising the power circuits. The
breaker shall remain fully housed inside the compartment in the test position.
4.1.5 Minimum 6 NO and 6 NC potential free auxiliary contacts, rated 10 A at 240V

A.C. and 1A (inductive breaking at 220 V D.C.)
4.1.6 'Red', 'green' and 'amber' indicating lamps to show 'Closed' 'Open', and 'Auto-
trip' conditions of the circuit breaker when breaker operation is controlled by a
control switch. Breakers in test and breaker in service indications shall be
provided.
4.1.7 Closing and trip coil shall operate satisfactorily under the following conditions
of supply voltage variation:
Closing coils - 85% to 110% of rated voltage.
Trip coils - 70% to 110% of rated voltage.

ISSUE
R7
4.1.8 Separate CTs shall be provided for protection & metering circuits and
protection shall be through numerical relays.
4.1.9 The breakers controlling motors shall operate satisfactorily under following
conditions:
a) Direct-on-line starting of the specified motor.

b) Breaking no load current of the specified motor.
4.2 SPRING OPERATED MECHANISM
The operating mechanism shall be manual as well as motor operated,

opening and closing springs, limit switches for automatic charging and all
necessary accessories. Facility for manual charging of the closing spring shall
be provided. The operating mechanism shall be trip-free and non-pumping
electrically. An antipumping relay to achieve electrical anti-pumping feature
even if the breaker has provision for anti-pumping by mechanical
arrangement.
Power operated mechanism shall be :
a) Provided with facilities for remote panel closing and opening operations
whenever specified in Data Sheet-A3 as per breaker module
designation and respective enclosed control scheme drawing.
The control scheme will be as follows for remote control :
Breaker Position Service Test
Selector Switch Local Remote Local Remote
1. Switchgear Protection Yes Yes Yes Yes

Tripping
2. Remote Interlock Yes Yes - -

Tripping
3. Switchgear Manual - - Yes -

Closing
4. Remote and - Yes - Yes

Auto Closing through
Interlocks
ISSUE
R7
5. Switchgear Manual Yes - Yes -

Tripping
6. Remote Manual Yes Yes - Yes

Tripping
7. Local P.B. Station of

Motor (For breaker
operated motors):
a) Closing for trial Yes - - -

run
b) Tripping Yes Yes Yes Yes
Power operating mechanisms shall be provided with the following additional

features:
b) Closing of the circuit breaker shall automatically initiate recharging of

the spring ready for the next closing stroke.
c) The motor shall be mechanically decoupled as soon as the emergency

manual charging handle is coupled.
5.0 PROTECTION COORDINATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Vendor to fully coordinate the overload and
short circuit tripping of the circuit breakers with the upstream and downstream
circuit breakers/fuses/motor starters, to provide satisfactory discrimination.
6.0 AIR BREAK SWITCHES
6.1 Air break switches shall be of the heavy duty, group operated load-break,
fault-make type, complying with the requirements of applicable standards
mentioned in Data Sheet-A2.
6.2 Continuous current rating of switches shall be as specified in Data Sheet-A3

or single line diagam enclosed with specification.
6.3 Whenever solid link are used for the connections between switches and
fuses, such links shall be fitted with insulated sleeves. Whenever the links are
of less than 100 mm length where sleeves cannot be fitted, taping is
acceptable.
ISSUE
R7
6.4 All live parts of the switch shall be shrouded.
6.5 Switch operating handle shall be suitable for padlocking in 'OFF' position.
6.6 It shall be possible to open the door only when the switch is in the 'off'
position.
6.7 Suitable means shall be provided to intentionally release the interlocks

specified in the preceeding clause 6.6 for making trip setting adjustments and
operation tests.
7.0 FUSES
7.1 Fuses generally shall be of the HRC cartridge fuse-link type having a certified
rupturing capacity of not less than 80 kA at 440V.
7.2 Fuses shall be provided with visible indication to show that they have
operated.
7.3 Fuse ratings chosen by the VENDOR for application in various circuits shall
be subject to the PURCHASER'S approval.
7.4 Fuses shall preferably be mounted in moulded plastic carriers and shall be
complete with fuse bases.
7.5 Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers, fuses shall be directly
mounted on plug-in type of bases. In such cases an insulated fuse pulling
handle shall be provided for each size of fuse for each switchboard.
7.6 Current time characteristics of fuses shall be furnished along with bid.
8.0 MOTOR STARTERS
8.1 CONTACTORS
8.1.1 Motor starter contactor shall be of the electromagnetic type rated for
uninterrupted duty as defined in applicable standards unless otherwise
specified in Data Sheet-A1.
8.1.2 Operating coils of contactors shall be suitable for operation from the control
supply system specified in Section-B or as per enclosed control schemes.
8.1.3 Class of coordination for starter module shall be class '2' as per IS-13947.
8.2 DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS

ISSUE
R7
8.2.1 Direct-on-line starters shall be suitable for Class AC 3 utilisation category as

specified in applicable standards, unless otherwise mentioned in Data Sheet-
A1.
8.3 AUTOMATIC STAR-DELTA STARTERS
8.3.1 Automatic star-delta starters shall comprise three sets of contactors one for
the line, one for the star point and one for the delta, and a timer to
automatically change the connections from star to delta.
8.3.2 Star-delta contactors shall be electrically interlocked to permit starting of the

motor in the proper sequence, namely star contactor closing, line contactor
closing, timer energised after time delay, timer contact de-energising the star
contactor, and delta contactor closing.
8.3.3 Star-delta starters shall be suitable for AC 3 utilisation category as specified in

applicable standards, unless otherwise mentioned in Data Sheet-A1.
8.4 REVERSING STARTERS
8.4.1 Reversing starters shall comprise forward and reverse contactors, electrically
interlocked with each other.
8.4.2 Reversing starters shall be suitable for Class AC 4 duty as specified in

applicable standards, unless otherwise mentioned in Data Sheet-A1.
8.5 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
8.5.1 Starters shall be complete with a three element, positive acting, ambient
temperature compensated, time lagged thermal overload relay with adjustable
settings and built in single phasing preventer. The setting range shall be
properly selected in accordance with the rating of the motor.
8.5.2 Thermal overload relays shall be hand reset type, unless otherwise specified
in Data Sheet-A1.
8.5.3 'Stop' push button of the starter and hand reset device shall be separate from
each other.
8.5.4 Overload relay hand reset push button shall be brought out on the front of the
compartment door.
8.6 SWITCH AND CONTACTOR RATINGS

ISSUE
R7
8.6.1 Switch and contactor rating for various motor starter modules shall be
selected by the bidder and indicated in the bid. BIDDER shall also select
appropriate ratings for HRC fuses and ranges for thermal overload relays and
indicate the same in the bid. These details shall be subject to the
PURCHASER'S approval.
8.7 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
8.7.1 Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) shall be provided when called for in
Data Sheet-A1, for use in lieu of switchfuse for the motor controls. The
MCCBs shall conform to the latest applicable standards.
8.7.2 MCCBs in AC circuits shall be of triple/four pole construction arranged for

simultaneous three/four pole manual closing and opening. If indicated in Data
Sheet-A1, power closing device for remote operation shall be provided.
Operating mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break and trip-free type.
The ON, OFF and TRIP positions of the MCCB shall be clearly indicated and
visible to the operator. Operating handle for operating MCCBs from door of
board shall be provided.
8.7.3 The instantaneous short circuit release shall be so chosen by the VENDOR
as to operate at a current in excess of the peak motor inrush current and
a range of settings shall be provided for the PURCHASER'S selection.
8.7.4 MCCB terminals shall be shrouded and designed to receive cable lugs for
cable sizes relevant to circuit ratings.
8.8 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
8.8.1 Miniature circuit breakers for use on motor space heater control circuits shall
comply with the requirements of applicable standards, unless otherwise
mentioned in Data Sheet-A1.
9.0 EARTHING
9.1 An earthing bus shall be provided at the bottom and extended throughout the
length of the switchgear. It shall be bolted/welded to the frame work of each
unit and each breaker earthing bar.
9.2 All non-current carrying metal work of the switchgear shall be effectively
bonded to the earth bus. Hinged doors shall be earthed through flexible
earthing braid.
ISSUE
R7
9.3 Positive earthing of the circuit breaker frame shall be maintained both in
service and test position.
10.0 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
10.1 The ratings of instrument transformers specified in Data Sheet - A1 and A3

are approximate. The BIDDER shall ensure that the specified ratings are
adequate for the relays and meters furnished by him. If specified ratings are
not adequate the BIDDER shall offer instrument transformers of required
rating.
10.2 The CTs and VTs shall be dry type and withstand momentary and short time
current ratings of the associated switchgear. For feeders with fuse, CTs shall
have withstand capacity equal to let-through current of associated fuse.
10.3 Unless otherwise specified minimum performance requirements of CT's &

VTs shall be as follows.
10.3.1 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Measuring CTs - 10VA, accuracy Class 1.0 and ISF of 5 Protective CTs - 10
VA, accuracy class of 5P-10.
CTs shall be provided with test links in both secondary leads for carrying out
current and phase angle measurement.
10.3.2 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
Measuring VT's - 50 VA per phase with accuracy class of 1.0.
Protective VT - 50 VA per phase with accuracy class of 3.0.
Dual purpose VT - 100 VA per phase and dual accuracy of 1.0/3.0 for
metering and protection respectively.
Voltage transformer shall have continuous over voltage factor of 1.2 and
short time over voltage factor of 1.5 for 30 seconds for effectively earthed
system and 1.9 for 8 hours for non-effectively earthed system.
Voltage transformers shall be complete with suitable rated primary, secondary

and tertiary fuses. Primary fuses shall have a rupturing capacity equal to the
rupturing capacity rating of the associated switchgear. Fuses shall be
provided on each sub circuit.
ISSUE
R7
It shall be possible to replace voltage transformers without having to de-

energise the main bus bars.
The terminals of V.T. secondary and tertiary windings which are required to
be connected to earth shall be earthed by an isolating link without a fuse.
11.0 SWITCHGEAR ACCESSORIES AND WIRING
11.1 Switchgear shall be supplied completely wired internally upto terminal blocks
ready for the PURCHASER's external cable connections at the terminal
blocks. Inter panel wiring between cubicles of same switchgear shall be
routed inside by the VENDOR.
11.2 All auxiliary wiring shall be carried out with 1100 volts grade, single core,
stranded copper conductor with PVC insulation. The sizes of wire shall be not
less than 2.5 mm² per lead of CT circuits and 2.5 mm² per lead of other
circuits.
11.3 Terminal blocks shall be of stud type, 1100 volts grade, 10 amps. rated
complete with insulated barriers. Terminal blocks for CTs and VTs shall be
provided with test links and isolating facilities and CT terminals shall have
short circuiting and earthing facility.
11.4 All spare contacts and terminals of cubicle mounted equipment and devices
shall be wired to terminal blocks.
11.5 Accuracy class for indicating instruments shall be 2.0 or better. Instruments
shall be 96 mm square 90° scale for semi-flush mounting with only flanges
projecting.
11.6 Relays shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting with only flanges projecting.
11.7 All protective relays shall be in draw-out cases with built-in test facilities.
Necessary test plugs shall be supplied loose and shall be included in the
VENDOR'S scope of supply. All auxiliary relays and timers shall be supplied
in non-draw-out cases. All relays shall be of self reset type except lockout
relay unless otherwise specified. Externally operated hand reset flag
indicators shall be provided on all relays and timers. Timers shall be of
electromagnetic or electronic type only.
11.8 Control and instrument switches shall be rotary type provided with escutcheon
plates clearly marked to show operating position and suitable for semiflush
mounting with only switch front plate and operating handle projecting out.
ISSUE
R7
11.9 Breaker control switches shall be pistol grip black and selector switches shall
be oval or knob, black. Breaker control switches shall be 3 position spring
return to neutral. Instruments selector switches shall be of the maintained
stay-put type. Contacts of the switches shall be spring assisted and contact
faces shall be with rivets of pure silver. The contact ratings shall be adequate
to meet the requirements of circuit capacity in which they are used. If
specified in data sheets, control switches with builtin flashing type discrepancy
lamp shall be provided to control circuit breaker.
11.10 Push buttons shall be provided wherever specified. They shall be provided
with inscription plates engraved with their functions. Push buttons shall be
rated for 10A at 240 AC and 1A at 220 VDC, with 2 No and 2NC contacts.
Start PB shall be green in colour and stop PB shall be red coloured stay put
type.
11.11 Indicating lamps shall be Cluster type LEDS.
11.12 Space heaters of adequate capacity shall be provided inside each panel.
They shall be suitable for 240 V, 1 ph, 50 cycles supply. They shall be
complete with MCB or HRC fuses, isolating switches and adjustable
thermostat.
11.13 Each switchgear panel shall be provided with 240 Volts, 1 phase. 50 cycles,
5 amps. 3 pin receptacle with switch located in a convenient position.
11.14 The single phasing preventer relay shall be provided when called for in data
sheet-A1 and shall have following characteristics.
- Operate for supply voltage unbalance of more than + 5% and when

relay internal wiring is open circuited.
- Not operate for 3 ph supply failure.
- Instantenous hand reset type
- Visual indication for operation
- Suitable for reversible and non-reversible motors
11.15 Transformers For Control, Space Heating And Annunciator Supplies
11.15.1 Adequately rated single phase, two winding, dry type transformers shall be
provided for providing supply to the switchgear control and alarm circuits,
space heaters provided in plant equipment and space heaters in the
switchgear and motor winding heating circuits.
ISSUE
R7
11.15.2 As specified in the enclosed module control wiring drawing/bill of material

separate control transformer shall be provided in each module to cater for
that particular load. Control transformer rating shall be adequate to cater for
all the control equipment connected across it. For control transformers in
each module, the minimum rating shall be as follows:-
Motor rating Control Control transformer

kW type rating VA
------------------- ------------- --------------------------
Upto and K-11 or 75
including 30 K-21 or
R21
L-11 or
L-21 100
Above 31 All types 300
11.15.3 All transformers of 500 VA and above shall be controlled by MCBs/ switches
and fuses on the primary and secondary side.
11.15.4 Common control transformer shall have fuses on all line leads of each
winding and control transformer in individual module shall have fuse in the
line lead of only secondary winding. The fuses shall be of proper rating to
protect the control transformers against over loads and short circuits. the
neutral or the earth lead shall have earth link instead of fuses.
11.16 Window Type Alarm Annunciator
11.16.1 The alarm annunciator if called for in Data Sheet-A shall consist of flush
mounted facia and shall have following features:-
- Fault indication by steady lit window
- Audible alarm on fault occurrence
- Acknowledgement, resetting and test
- Suitable for NC/NO initiating contacts
- Facility for separate audio visual alarm on control supply failure
11.16.2 The alarm annunciator scheme operation shall be as follows :

Visual Audible
alarm alarm
ISSUE
R7
----------- ------------
Normal OFF OFF
On occurrence of fault -
First fault Flashing ON
Subsequent faults Flashing ON
Accept fault -
First faults Steady OFF
Subsequent faults Steady OFF
Reset - Faults cleared OFF OFF
Faults not cleared Steady OFF
Lamp test Steady OFF
11.16.3 One no current transducer & one no voltage transducer for each incomer
and 3 nos. voltage transducers for each bus voltage shall be provided for
BMCCs and ESP MCCs.
11.16.4 Auto change over facility and manual live changeover facility shall be
provided for BMCCs and ESP MCCs.
11.16.5 Required status indications of 415V auxiliary supplies shall be provided for
control room CRTs.
12.0 CABLE TERMINATION
12.1 If asked for in Data Sheet-A1 necessary number of cable glands and lugs
shall be supplied for terminating power and control cables. Glands shall be of
heavy duty brass castings, machine finished and complete with check nut.
washers, neoprene compression ring etc. The lugs shall be tinned
copper/aluminium depending on cable conductor and of solderless crimping
type.
ISSUE
R7
13.0 LOCAL PUSH BUTTON STATIONS
13.1 The local P.B. stations shall be metal enclosed, provided with IP-55
protection, made up of diecast aluminium or 2 mm thick sheet metal.
13.2 The P.B. station shall be suitable for wall or structure mounting, provided with
lables, earthing terminals, suitable lugs glands.
13.3 Push buttons shall be fitted with 2 No and 2NC contacts (1A at 220V DC and
10A at 240V AC) with stop PB of stay put type and red in colour. Other PB's
shall be green in colour.
13.4 PB station shall be of one of the following types
Type A -Three PB's forward-reverse-Stop for reversible motors
Type B -Two PB's start-stop for non-reversible motors
Type C -One PB STOP for emergency
14.0 SPARE PARTS
The BIDDER shall furnish a list of recommended spare parts for five years
operation along with unit prices.
15.0 TESTS AND REPORTS
15.1 Type test reports for the switchgear and circuit breakers shall be furnished
along with the tender and subsequently.
15.2 The switchgear, circuit breakers and all associated equipment shall be tested
in accordance with relevant standards. All routine tests shall be carried out.
Type tests shall also be carried out if not tested previously.
15.3 Type and routine test report shall be submitted for the PURCHASER's
approval before the equipment is despatched. Bound copies of test reports
shall be furnished along with the switchgear.
15.4 All meters and other reference devices used for testing shall have valid
calibration from reputed national laboratories/institutes. Inspection by
Purchaser/ Engineer will not be carried out unless the vendor confirms that
calibrated equipment are ready for proceeding with the tests.
15.5 Equipment shall not be despatched unless the test certificates are duly
approved by the PURCHASER/ ENGINEER.
ISSUE
R7
DRAWINGS AND DATA
The following shall be furnished as part of the tender:
a) General arrangement showing plan, elevation and typical sectional

views.
b) Foundation plan showing location of fixing channels, floor openings

etc.
c) Schematic wiring drawings for each cubicle.
d) Technical literature on the equipment offered.
e) All drawings and data sheets shall be annotated in English.
f) Quality Assurance Plan.
ISSUE
R7
DATA SHEET-C
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR AFTER
AWARD OF THE CONTRACT
Time periods indicated below are for project with equipment delivery period of
12 months these will be proportionately revised as per agreed delivery period.
1.0 OVERLOAD RELEASE
(a) Characteristics
(b) Settings
2.0 SINGLE PHASING PREVENTERS
2.1 Make
2.2 Type designation
2.3 Rated voltage
3.0 AUXILIARY RELAYS AND TIMERS
3.1 Time delay range (for timers) Sec.
3.2 Resetting features
3.3 No. of contacts
3.3.1 Normally open/Normally closed
3.3.2 Contact rating A
3.4 Whether operation indicator YES/NO

is provided
4.0 CONTROL/SELECTOR SWITCH
4.1 Whether contact arrangement YES/NO

as given in control scheme
ISSUE
R7

5.0 LIST OF DRAWINGS
The VENDOR shall furnish the following drawings for each panel and
switchgear within the time indicated after placing the order. If a large number
of switchgears are involved, the PURCHASER will indicate the priorities.
5.1 Overall outline dimensions and general 2 months

arrangement including plan, front
elevation, rear & side elevations,
clearances required in front and back,
details of busduct connections, if any.
5.2 Switchgear layout plan including 2 months

floor openings, fixing arrangements
and loading details.
5.3 Schematic control diagrams to cover 3 months

controls, protection, interlocks,
instruments, space heaters, etc. for
each type of module
5.4 (a) Detailed internal wiring diagram 4 months

of each type of module, including
terminal block numbers, ferrule
numbers and the PURCHASER's
external cable connection
designations
(b) Itemised bill of material for each 4 months

module, listing all devices
mounted and also otherwise
furnished like cable glands,
indicating the MANUFACTURER's
type, rating, quantity & special
notes, if any.
5.5 Interpanel interconnection wiring 6 months

diagram including terminal numbers and
ferrule numbers
5.6 Switch development diagrams 6 months
ISSUE
R7

5.7 Each type of protection relay and cir- 6 months

cuit breaker release characteristics
5.8 Fuse characteristic curves for each 6 months

type and rating of fuse
5.9 Space heater ratings and numbers 6 months

provided per cubicle and the internal
distribution scheme for the same, for
each switchgear
NOTES:
(a) The VENDOR shall be entirely responsible for the correctness of the internal
wiring diagrams mentioned against Item 5.4.
(b) The VENDOR shall ensure that the characteristics of the CTs, fuses,
protection relays, VTs and all other devices offered by him are such as to be
suitable for the purpose for which they are intended.
(c) The VENDOR shall plan his manufacturing schedule so as to allow atleast 4
weeks time for approval of the drawings after their receipt by the
PURCHASER.
6.0 TEST CERTIFICATES
6.1 Type test certificates of all standard component parts, e.g. contactors,
breakers, switches, fuses, relays, CTs, VTs, and for the standard factory built
assembly shall be submitted by the VENDOR within 3 months from receipt of
order.
7.0 INSTRUCTION MANUALS
The VENDOR shall furnish specified number of copies of the instruction

manual which would contain detailed instructions for all operational &
maintenance requirement. The manual shall be furnished at the time of
despatch of the equipment and shall include the following aspects :
a) Outline dimension drawings showing relevant cross-sectional views,

earthing details and constructional features.
b) Rated voltages, current, duty-cycle and all other technical information

which may be necessary for correct operation of the switchgear.
ISSUE
R7

c) Catalogue numbers of all components liable to be replaced during the

life of the switchgear.
d) Storage for prolonged duration.
e) Unpacking.
f) Handling at site.
g) Erection.
h) Precommissioning tests.
i) Operating procedures.
j) Maintenance procedures.
k) Precautions to be taken during operation and maintenance work.
ISSUE
R7

.
TCE-M4-203-71 TITLE SHEET 1 OF 17

VARIABLE SPEED DC/AC DRIVES
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers requirements for the design; manufacture, testing
and supply of semiconductor (Thyristor/ Transistor) controlled variable speed
DC/AC drives, both analog & digital type.
1.2 The motors and Converter Transformer when forming part of Bidder’s scope,
shall meet the requirements given in following standard specifications:
a) Squirrel Cage Induction Motor : TCE-M4-203-01

(General Purpose)
b) Squirrel Cage Induction Motor : TCE-M4-203-02

(Special Purpose)
c) DC Motor : TCE-M4-203-11
d) Converter Transformer : TCE-M4-200-21
e) Induction motors for hazardous : TCE-M4-203-51

area (General purpose)

performance of AC/DC Drives shall comply with all currently applicable
statutes, regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will
be installed. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the
VENDOR of this responsibility.
2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the equipment / system shall conform to the latest
applicable standards as mentioned in enclosed Data Sheet-A.4
3.0 DESIGN BASIS FOR POWER SEMICONDUCTORS
3.1 Power semiconductors of reputed make either in stud mounting form or

disc/flat pack type can be offered based on the duty requirements specified in
Data Sheet A1 and to meet the technical and functional requirements.
3.2 The peak reverse voltage rating of each power semiconductor shall be as
follows:
3.2.1 Power Semiconductors Protected by RC Snubber
The following factors of safety shall be observed:

a) For converters operating in : 2.0 times peak of the No
rectifying mode only load source voltage.
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

b) For converters operating : 2.5 times peak of the no

both in rectifying and load source voltage
inverting modes
3.2.2 Power Semiconductors Protected by Avalanche Diodes
The BIDDER shall choose and recommend the factor of safety which
however, shall not be less than 1.5.
3.3 The current rating of the power semiconductor shall be estimated for the
specified duty class in Data Sheet A. In sizing the power semiconductor both
the forward voltage drop and the forward resistance shall be considered.
3.3.1 A derating of approximately 20% shall be made to take into account series
operation of devices.
3.4 The class of overload shall be one of the following:
- - - - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Duty Class Rated current values for converter (in percent of
rated direct current
- - - - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I 100 % Continuous
II 100 % Continuous
150 % overload for 1 minute once in period of 24 hours
III 100% continuous
150 % overload for 2 minute once in period of 24 hours
200 % overload for 10 seconds once in period of 24

hours
- - - - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3.5 For the cases where the power semiconductor chosen is of inadequate
current or voltage capacity the BIDDER shall conform to the following
guidelines:
3.5.1 Inadequate Current Capacity
a) If the power semiconductor is of stud mounting type, then current

sharing reactors shall be provided to prevent current missharing
between the power semiconductors connected in parallel.
b) If the power semiconductors in parallel are of capsule type, then, one

of the following options may be exercised:
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

i) Power semiconductors with adequate derating and the layout

configured so that current missharing between various power
semiconductors in parallel is minimised.
ii) Selection of power semiconductors so that their forward

voltages are within a tolerance band of 100 mV to 250 mV.
3.5.2 Inadequate Voltage Capacity
In this case the power semiconductors shall be connected in series with

adequate protection to prevent irregular voltage grading across each power
semiconductor during turn-on.
3.6 The converter shall be provided with adequate surge suppression circuitry at
the AC input, DC output and across the devices to limit the main voltage
surges, transformer switching surges, reverse recovery transients to less than
twice the peak value of line working voltage.
4.0 QUADRANTS OF OPERATION
The drive should be according to the no. of Quadrants specified in Data Sheet
A. The Quadrant Operation of the Drive will be according to the following
criteria.
a) One Quadrant Operation -> (I) : One Quadrant of operation means

only Motoring is required & the drive should operate in the Ist Quad.
b) Two Quadrant Operation -> (II) :- Two Quadrant Operation means the
drive should be able to control the motoring & Braking of the motor. It
can be of two types.
i) Voltage Positive & Current can charge Polarity i.e. Operating in

First & Second Quad.
ii) Current Positive & Voltage can charge Polarity i.e. operating in
first & fourth Quad.
c) Four Quad Operation -> (IV) :- The drive should be able to operate in
all four Quadrant i.e. the motor requires forward motoring, forward
braking, Reverse motoring & Reverse braking.
5.0 CONTROL FOR DC MOTORS
5.1 Armature Voltage Control Converter
5.1.1 This converter shall consist of, unless otherwise stated in Data Sheet-A, a
three phase full wave bridge circuit.
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

5.1.2 Each arm of the bridge can have a number of power semiconductors both in
series and/or in parallel. The design basis for such cases shall be in
conformity with Clause 3.0 of this specification.
5.1.3 If the drive operates in the first quadrant only, a free wheeling diode may be
provided for the purpose of allowing decay of energy during the condition of
braking of the drive. This diode may be housed within the same cubicle as
the bridge converter.
5.1.4 Redundancy shall be provided as follows:
a) For power semiconductors in parallel one additional parallel three

phase full wave bridge arm shall be provided as redundant element.
b) For power semiconductors in series, at least 2% of the total thyristors

in series for each parallel arm shall be provided.
The factors of safety to be observed in such designs shall be in conformity to

Clause 3.0 of this specification.
5.2 Field Excitation Control Converter
5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in Data Sheet A, this converter shall be powered
from a single phase line-to-line source tapped at the three-phase incomer to
the armature voltage control converter with adequate isolation.
5.2.2 Unless otherwise stated in Data Sheet-A, this converter shall be a bridge of
diodes of adequate capacity.
5.3 Transducers
5.3.1 Armature Circuit
a) For drives where accuracy of speed control is better than 0.5%, the
actual speed of the drive shall be measured by a tacho-generator of
suitable rating, and type (Digital pulse tacho or analog tacho).
b) For drives where accuracy of speed control required can exceed 2%

or more, measuring the current by a current transformer on the AC
side of the converter can be accepted.
c) For drives whose accuracy of speed should not exceed 2% it is

necessary that a suitable DC shunt of 75 mV and adequate current
capacity shall be provided.
5.3.2 Field Circuit
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

For Drives where there is a possibility of field circuit failing, then in such cases
transducers should be provided.
6.0 FREQUENCY CONVERTERS FOR SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION

MOTORS
6.1 Configuration
Frequency converters shall have one of the two configurations given below:
a) Current source inverter.
b) Voltage source inverter.
6.2 DC Link
6.2.1 Current Source Inverter
a) The smoothing reactor shall be sized to avoid conditions of

discontinuous current operation of the frequency converter at its
lowest frequency of operation, which shall not be less than 5 Hz.
b) The smoothing reactor shall be uniformly insulated and shall be

protected for voltage surges occurring during sudden load throw-off.
c) The smoothing reactor shall be made from electrolytic grade

copper/aluminium and shall be epoxy encapsulated with suitable class
of resin decided from techno-economic considerations and
performance requirements in conformity with IEC-146.
6.2.2 Voltage Source Inverter
a) The smoothing reactor shall conform to requirements specified in

Clause 6.2.1
b) The DC capacitor shall be shunt connected at the input to the inverter.

It shall be sized so that the reactive power requirements of the motor
during its total range of operation is met. Further, the following
aspects shall be observed:
i) As per standards, the nominal value of capacitance referred to

the temperature of 250C shall be within tolerance range of
10%. At the design ambient temperature, the value of
capacitance and the tolerance range shall be such as to meet
the normal operation/performance requirements of the
frequency converter.
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

ii) As per standards, the dissipation factor of each unit of the

capacitor shall be less than 1% at 250C. However, the design
ambient shall be such as to meet the normal
operational/performance requirements of the frequency
converter.
iii) The impregnant used for the capacitor shall be non-

inflammable, non PCB dielectric liquid.
iv) The voltage rating of each capacitor shall be selected based

on considerations of life expectancy, overvoltage during
regeneration of energy, design ambient temperature, ripple
voltage etc.
6.3 Inverter
6.3.1 The inverter system suitable for three phase output shall consist of the
following subsystems:
a) The basic inverter circuit consisting of the switching device say

Thyristors/Transistors/IGBT/MOSFET, connected so as to supply
three phase power.
b) The logic network to enable rapid transition of the main inverter

switching devices from on-state to off-state.
c) Suitable feedback system to allow balance of reactive power flow

during load power factor fluctuation as well as regeneration.
d) The filter system of the inverter output to supress 5th, 7th, 11th, 13th
harmonics at the output of the inverter to less than 5% of the
fundamental amplitude.
e) The ripple control system to limit current ripple to 4% at the input

terminals of the inverter caused by distorted current output.
6.3.2 The output frequency of inverter shall be controlled to within the limits
6.4 Inverter for AC drive
6.4.1 Current Source Inverter
a) Constant Torque Operation
The current output by the DC link shall be accurately monitored so that

the ratio of the terminal voltage of the motor and the corresponding
frequency remains constant and the duty cycle requirements indicated
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

in Data Sheet A are met. Necessary protective features for tripping

the frequency converter, alarm/annunciation and fault diagnostics shall
be provided.
b) Constant Horsepower Operation
In this type of operation, the motor’s internal voltage shall be

maintained within + 1% while the frequency of the inverter is varied to
meet the duty cycle requirements indicated in Data Sheet A.
Necessary protective features for tripping the frequency converter,
alarm/annunciation and fault diagnostics shall be provided.
6.4.2 Voltage source Inverter
a) Constant Torque Operation
The DC voltage input to the inverter shall be accurately monitored to

maintain the ratio the terminal voltage of the motor to frequency at the
rated/design value so that the duty cycle requirements indicated in
Data Sheet A are met. The DC voltage input shall be maintained
within + 1% of the required value. Should this fall for any reason,
necessary action for tripping the frequency converter, and initiation of
annunciation/alarm and fault diagnostic shall be provided.
b) Constant Horsepower Operation
In this type of operation, the voltage at the terminals of the motor shall
be maintained within +1% of the rated value while the frequency of the
inverter is varied to meet the duty cycle requirements indicated in Data
Sheet A. Necessary protective features for tripping the frequency
converter , initiation of alarm/annunciation and fault diagnostic shall be
provided.
6.5 Output Overcurrent Limit
Unless otherwise stated, the inverter shall be capable of being temporarily

overloaded to 150% of its full load ampere capacity for sixty (60) seconds
beyond which a current limit action shall be initiated and an alarm contact
initiated for annunciation.
6.6 Control Modules
6.6.1 All elements of the control system shall be mounted on epoxy laminate
boards and each board shall be a plug in module mounted on a standard
nineteen inch rack which shall be accessible from the front. Each card shall
have LED indication on its front plate to indicate normal condition of the card.
Readily accessible and clearly marked test pins shall be provided at the
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

important points on the cards to enable signal analysis. The BIDDER shall
furnish the signal input to the card.
6.6.2 The epoxy laminates shall be free from manufacturing errors and shall be
designed to prevent incorrect insertion in the card rack. The copper side of
the card shall be suitably lacquered to prevent oxidation. The gap between
two cards shall be sufficient to permit adequate ventilation.
6.6.3 Adjustments susceptible to change by accidental contact shall be lockable.
7.0 CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
7.1 Short time voltage dips upto 80% of nominal (e.g. in case of large motor start-
up connected to same bus) shall not cause the control system to stop
functioning and shall not trip the drive system.
7.2 The drive motor shall be speed regulated corresponding to 4-20mA or 0-10V
reference input signal. Upon complete loss of users speed reference signal,
the drive shall automatically run at constant speed as determined by the last
speed reference available prior to loss of the signal.
7.3 The required provision for interfacing with PLC/DCS, including details of
communication module and data transfer facility, I/O details shall be furnished
by the Bidder.
8.0 DRIVES WITH WOBBULATION CONTROL
Drives used in application like synthetic fibre projects should have the main
feature of Wobbulation control as specified in the data sheet.
The Wobbulation control should consist of a generation of a modulated

frequency, in converters feeding traversing drives. The drive should produce
a triangular voltage of variable frequency and amplitude, which is
superimposed on the frequency set-points voltage in the analog frequency
generator.
9.0 PROTECTION
9.1 Protection of Power Semiconductor
a) Each power semiconductor shall be protected against short circuit.

The fuse shall be sized so that its I2t does not exceed the I2t
characteristic of the power semiconductor itself. The voltage and
current rating of the fuse shall match the duty on the power
semiconductor. The arc voltage, due to melting of the fuse shall not
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

exceed the repetitive peak reverse voltage of the power

semiconductor.
b) All fuses shall have a trip indicator to operate a suitable microswitch

with at least 1 NO + 1 NC potential free contacts for annunciation
and/or tripping.
c) A fast tripping feeder circuit breaker shall be used in case fuses for
short circuit protection of thyristors are not used.
9.2 Protection of Converter System for DC Drive
9.2.1 Armature Circuit
The basic protection to be provided are as follows:
a) Earth fault relay

b) Thermal overload relay
Other optional protections that are required shall be considered in scope of

supply as listed in Data Sheet A.
9.2.2 Field Circuit
The basic protection to be provided are as follows:
a) Minimum excitation limit relay
b) Thermal overload relay
c) Earth Fault Relay
Other optional protections that are required shall be considered in scope of

supply as listed in Data Sheet A.
9.3 Protective Systems for AC Inverter Drive
a) Fuses for all power semiconductors and/or other devices like

commutation chokes, capacitors etc. which are not adequately
protected against flow of abnormal currents.
b) Under voltage and over voltage protection on the input side. Loss of
input voltage to inverter shall entail tripping of the inverter.
c) Protection for all control cards, power supply stabilisers, filter circuits
etc. Protection shall be provided such that failure of a part does not
cause damage elsewhere in the system.
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

d) Polarising relay to prevent reversal of polarity on the input side of the

inverter.
e) Protection of inverter thyristor, commutating circuits and other inverter

elements during regenerative operation of the inverter and also during
sudden load throw-off.
f) Besides the above, the following protective systems shall be supplied

if called for in Data Sheet A.
i) Current limit fuses at the output of the inverter.
ii) Commutation circuit undervoltage
iii) Inverter overfrequency
iv) Programmable overcurrent
v) Phase sequence/loss of phase protection
vi) Earth fault protection
vii) DC link overvoltage protection
viii) Specific motor protection
ix) Incoming line surge protection
x) Ventilation Loss
xi) Over temperature
9.4 All controls, indication, Metering, Annunciation on the Drive Panel, will be as
10.0 COOLING OF POWER CONVERTERS
10.1 Power semiconductors shall be mounted on heatsink which can be individual

or common to a number of devices. Adequate provision for clamping and
mounting the power semiconductors shall be available.
10.2 Cooling of power semiconductors can either be natural air cooled or forced air
cooled. The BIDDER shall recommend the type of cooling. However, for
power converters which exceed capacities of 2 kA continuous load,
alternative cooling methods as oil or water cooling shall be considered. The
power semiconductors shall preferably be double side cooled.
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

10.3 Auxiliary power supply for the forced cooling system shall be drawn from the
alternatives specified in Section-B. All equipment required for safe and
correct operation as drive motor, blower/pump, cooling water/oil header,
water/oil distribution piping, daioniser system, flow monitors etc. as applicable
shall be considered in the BIDDER’s scope of supply.
11.0 SWITCHING DEVICES
11.1 Switching devices as circuit breakers, isolators, contactors; switch-fuse units

etc. shall be considered in the scope of supply as specified in Section-C of
this specification and Data Sheet A-3.
11.2 The switching devices shall be enclosed in a separate enclosure forming the
set of panels for the power converters. They shall have adequate clearance
both with adjacent devices and metalwork at earth potential. Connection
between devices shall be by adequate size of electrolytic grade of
copper/aluminium strips. These connections shall be adequately braced and
insulated.
The controller should have modular construction to facilitate maintenance.
12.1 Busbars
12.1.1 Power connections shall be of the bolted type and mating surfaces shall be
tinned.
12.1.2 The bus bars running to various converters shall be suitably designed to
ensure equal sharing between the parallel strings and prevent mechanical
stress on the fuse.
12.1.3 All bus bars shall be adequately insulated for full circuit voltage by insulating
tapes and similar insulating material.
12.1.4 In case aluminium bus bars are specified, care shall be taken to ensure that
bimetallic connections are provided wherever necessary.
12.1.5 All cubicles shall have copper earth buses of adequate size running the entire
cubicle height along the sides.
12.2 Cubicle
12.2.1 Cubicles housing the power semiconductors and drive level control system
shall conform to IP 42 degree of protection to enclosures.
12.2.2 Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and shall comprise rigid
welded structural frames enclosed completely with cold rolled sheet steel of
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

thickness no less than 2.5 mm for front and rear portions and 2.0 mm for
sides, top and bottom portions. There shall be sufficient re-inforcement to
provide level surfaces, resistance to vibrations and rigidity during
transportation and installation.
12.2.3 All doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketed all round with
neoprene gaskets. Ventilating louvers shall have screens and filters. The
screens shall be made of either brass or GI wire mesh.
12.2.4 Design, material selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in a

neat appearance inside and outside with no welds, rivets or belt heads
apparent from outside, with all exterior surfaces true and smooth.
12.3 Painting
12.3.1 All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with the following
procedure and in accordance with IS:6005 “Code of Practice for Phosphating
Iron and Steel”.
12.3.2 Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.
12.3.3 Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by
washing with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.
12.3.4 After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water
followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and even drying.
12.3.5 The phosphate coating shall be followed by the application of two coats of
ready mixed stoving type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be “flash
dried” while the second coat shall be stoved.
12.3.6 After application of the two coats of primer finishing synthetic enamel paint
shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat
shall be applied after completion of tests.
12.3.7 The final finished thickness of paint film on steel shall not be less than 100
microns and shall not be more than 150 microns.
12.3.8 Finished painted surface of panels shall present an aesthetically pleasing

appearance free from dents and uneven surface.
12.3.9 A small quantity of finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touching up
required at site after the installation of the panels.
12.4 Bins and Printed Circuit Cards
12.4.1 Individual bins shall be mounted on a swingable frame so that the

connections at the rear are also accessible.
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

12.4.2 Self retaining thumb head screws shall be needed for holding the bins in
position.
12.4.3 Adequate number of card/bin extenders for testing of PCBs shall be provided,
each with flexible cables at least two metres long. These extenders shall be
of a universal type suitable for use with any card / bin as the case may be.
12.4.4 All adjustments which are to be made while changing a card shall be outside
in a separate module preferably plugged into the regulator bin.
12.4.5 Locking of individual cards in a bin shall preferably be through self retaining
thumb-head screws.
12.4.6 Control modules shall be in the form of plug in packages, plugged into a
module bin. Each plug in unit shall consist of a strong frame on which a
printed circuit board would be permanently screwed. The plug connections
shall only be of the pin type.
12.4.7 The printed circuit board (P.C.B.) shall be made of glass fibre filled with epoxy
laminates. The plug in unit shall be screwed to the basic socket in the module
bin with long through bolts and knurled heads.
12.4.8 The front plates of the plug in unit shall have the switches, the potentiometers,
miniature monitoring meters, test points etc. Each plug in unit shall have its
own identification legend.
12.4.9 All plug in units shall be polarized to prevent incorrect insertions into the
module bin.
12.4.10 The gap between two plug in units inside a bin shall be sufficient to permit
adequate ventilation.
12.4.11 The copper side of the printed circuit board shall be lacquered to prevent
oxidation.
12.4.12 Each side of the printed circuit board shall have a shield cover to prevent
inter circuit and external interference.
12.4.13 The P.C.B. shall be mounted on P.C.B. guides fixed on standard racks and
the shield properly grounded.
12.4.14 Control circuit test points shall be easily accessible for monitoring and
maintenance.
12.5 Annunciation
12.5.1 The annunciator shall work on DC power supply as specified in Data Sheet-A.
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

12.5.2 Each annunciator window shall have two lamps connected in parallel which
operate at not more than 75% of their rated voltage.
12.5.3 Window shall be arranged in a logical group.
12.5.4 The annunciator shall have a module construction with glass epoxy plug in
cards.
12.5.5 Alarm bell/siren shall be continuously rated and shall have a series
resistance.
12.5.6 The annunciator shall have the following facilities.
a) First in sequence, memory reset.
b) Fleeting faults shall be memorised.
c) Test Feature.
12.5.7 There shall be a three tier system of protection and annunciation:
a) Alarm both audible and visual.
b) Warning with delayed shut down –time delay through a timer of range
0-60 sec.
c) Disturbance associated with failures of systems elsewhere.
12.6 Meters
12.6.1 Individual meters shall be provided for speed reference, speed feed back,
current reference, current feedback, pulse output, and regulated power supply
voltages.
12.6.2 All meters shall be identical and fed through individual buffer I.C. amplifiers.
12.6.3 All meters shall be the circular scale type having a full scale deflection of
2700.
12.6.4 All meters shall conform to at least accuracy class 1.0
12.6.5 All meters with their individual buffer amplifier cards shall be housed in
separate bin. It is recommended that the buffer amplifiers all be housed on a
single/two card/s and this card/s be itself/themselves housed in the regulator
bin.
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

Sensitive signal leads in that case will not have to traverse from one bin to
another, only noise insensitive buffer amplifier output leads will need to go to
the meter bin.
12.6.6 Selector switches if used with any meters shall have pistol grip handles.
12.7 Wiring
12.7.1 Stranded, flexible copper cable of 2.5 sq.mm shall be used for C.T. circuits
and 1.5 sq.mm for other control circuits. However for PCB terminals 0.75
sq.mm may be accepted.
12.7.2 Ultra flexible cables shall be used for all connections from a fixed part to a
movable member. In addition, a hanging loop of sufficient length shall be
provided to avoid any cable stressing.
12.7.3 All terminal boards for outgoing connections shall be at a height of at least
250 mm from the cubicle floor, and preferably tilted at an angle of 450 to the
horizontal for ease of connections. Similarly, connection of the incoming
power cables to the bus bars shall be done at a height of at least 250 mm
from the cubicle floor.
12.7.4 Item designation and location marking shall be in line with IEC
recommendations.
12.7.5 Device labeling shall be on its fixed mounting and not on the device itself such
that labeling remains even when the device is replaced. Metallic labels/paper
labels or sticker shall be accepted.
13.0 TESTING
All routine tests shall be carried out on various devices / assemblies in line
with codes & standards indicated in data sheet-A4. Type Tests shall be
carried out wherever indicated in Data sheet-A1 to A3 and / or in Section ‘C’
13.1 Tests on Power Semiconductors
All power semiconductors selected shall be subject to quality assurance tests

to check on the characteristics submitted by the successful BIDDER on
samples. The BIDDER and/or his sub-vendor shall allow PURCHASER’S
authorised representative to witness the tests. Details of the test are to be
agreed between the PURCHASER and the BIDDER. The broad outlines of
the tests to be conducted are as follows:
a) Off state voltage and reverse voltage
b) Critical rate of rise of off state voltage
c) On state voltage
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

d) Thermal resistance
e) Surge on-state current
f) Triggering data
g) Recovery charge and recovery time
h) Critical rate of rise of on-state current
i) Switching losses
j) Environmental Tests
13.2 Tests on Converters
Converter with its enclosure and cooling system shall be connected to a

dummy load. A variable voltage source on the source side shall be adjusted
so that the specified current rating of the converter at no-delay of the firing
angle (in case thyristors) shall be passed. At the end of stipulated period of
test a timer shall cut-off the source. The load side and source side current
shall be measured/recorded during the testing phase. The temperature of the
case and the heat sink and wound components like chokes shall be suitably
recorded. The temperature decay measurement/recording shall continue for
the off-duty cycle at agreed intervals. During the course of test the cooling
system shall be operative.
The following tests shall be conducted: (IEC 61800-2)
a) Checking of the setting of the protection devices and their functioning.
b) Checking of the auxiliary devices and their functioning.
c) Speed regulation of the drive shall be observed at different output

voltage and frequency settings (for AC drives).
d) Determination of the power losses at specified loads (By

Calculation).(Type Test)
e) Load test or rated current test for large converters (above 1 MW).
f) Insulation test
g) Temperature rise (Type Test).
h) Light load & Functional Test.
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

i) Observation of various wave forms i.e. current and voltage.
13.3 Other Composite Test at No-load
a) Environmental tests on printed circuit boards, pulse transformers etc.
b) Other tests as may be agreed on various converter subsystems.
13.4 Acceptance Test
These shall be conducted at the works of the VENDOR’S and/or his sub-
vendor to ascertain that performance stipulated in this specification has been
honoured (e.g. overcurrent capability, measurement of ripple voltage &
current, P.F. measurement, Audible noise, etc). Dummy loads as required for
the purpose of simulating the operation conditions at the VENDOR’s works
shall be considered in scope of this specification. However, should this not be
possible, testing at site with the actual load shall be conducted to prove the
performance of the power converters.
13.5 All the meter, instruments, devices used for the testing purpose shall be
properly calibrated by standard authorised agencies which shall be traceable
to National Standards. For each such instrument proper validity of calibration
shall be documented by Vendor.
14.0 HARMONICS LIMITATIONS
When specified in Data Sheet A, the harmonics generated on source (Input)

side (Both AC/DC drive) and output side (For AC drive only) shall be
restricted to the following limits: (IEEE-519 for source side and IEC-61800 for
load side)
a) Voltage Harmonics Source side Load side

Maximum 5% Maximum 5%(THD)
b) Current Harmonics Source side

5th Maximum 30%
7th Maximum 20%
11th Maximum 10%
Bidder shall indicate clearly the method of achieving above requirement.
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.

DATA SHEET – C
DATA TO BE SUBMITTED BY VENDOR
1.0 Following data shall be submitted within the period specified in Section C,
after placing the order, for the PURCHASER’S approval.
1.1 General arrangement drawings showing outline dimensions, cable entry

openings, fixing/foundation details, weights and door openings.
1.2 Front & cross section views showing arrangement details of equipment and
terminals and with a Bill of Material for all equipment.
1.3 Schematic diagram indicating terminal number for external connections &
block diagram of control system.
1.4 MANUFACTURER’S technical literature on various equipments supplied.
2.0 Wiring diagram of complete inverter. This shall be based on approved

schematic drawing. The correctness of this drawing shall be the responsibility
of the VENDOR.
3.0 Test certificates for the cabinet and all individual equipments and
performance load tests shall be submitted atleast 2 weeks before dispatch of
equipment.
4.0 Operation and maintenance manuals shall be furnished with the equipment.
5.0 Detailed drawing of converter showing layout of power semiconductors,

fuses, heat sinks, cooling system etc.
6.0 Details of testing procedures for power semiconductors and power converters
as per Standards/Code of Practice for approval.
7.0 Shipping details of the equipment.
ISSUE
R1
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC.NO.
ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LTD. VOLUME V B
TITLE
TCE-M4-203-02 2X 800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 1 OF 4
INDUCTION MOTORS
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENT FOR HV MOTORS
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers requirements of HV induction motors. These are in

addition to the requirements of specification No.TCE.M4-203-01. Clauses of
this specification which are not applicable for any motor are mentioned in Data
Sheet-A1 of TCE.M4-203-01.
1.2 In case of conflict between TCE.M4-203-01 or applicable standard and this

specification, this specification shall govern.
2.1 Motors shall be capable of starting and accelerating the load with the applicable
method of starting, without exceeding acceptable winding temperatures, when
the supply voltage is 80% of the rated voltage.
2.2 Motors shall be capable of satisfactory operation at full load at a supply

voltage of 80% of the rated voltage for 5 minutes, commencing from hot
condition.
2.3 Motors shall withstand the voltage and torque stresses developed due to the
vector difference between the motor residual voltage and the incoming supply
voltage equal to 150% of the rated voltage, during fast change over of buses. The
duration of this condition is envisaged for a period of one second.
2.4 The locked rotor current of the motors shall not exceed the following values
which are inclusive of 20% tolerance.
2.4.1 600% of full load current for motors upto and including 1500 kW.
2.4.2 450% of full load current for motors above 1500 kW.
2.5 The locked rotor withstand time under hot conditions at 110% rated voltage shall
be more than the starting time at minimum permissible voltage (clause 2.1
above) by atleast three seconds or 15% of the accelerating time whichever is
greater. Provision of speed switch shall be avoided to the extent possible. In case
the speed switch is required, it shall be indicated out by the bidder in his offer.
When a speed switch is mounted on the motor shaft , the same shall remain
closed for speeds lower than 20% and open for speeds above 20% of the
rated speed. The speed switch shall be capable of withstanding 120% over
speed in either direction of rotation. If the speed switch requires any auxiliary
voltage, it shall be suitable for the auxiliary voltage specified in Section-B -
Project Information of the specification
ISSUE
R8
SPEC.NO.
TITLE
INDUCTION MOTORS
3.0 INSULATION TREATMENT
3.1 Motors shall be given power house treatment. Additional treatments to withstand
heavily salt polluted or similar atmospheric conditions shall be given based on the
location indicated in Data Sheet-A
4.0 ACCESSORIES
4.1 EMBEDDED TEMPERATURE DETECTORS (ETD'S)
Atleast six resistance type temperature detectors for the stator winding each
having D.C. resistance of 100 ohms at 0oC, embedded in the stator winding at
locations where highest temperatures may be expected, shall be provided. The
material of the ETD's shall be platinum. One ETD shall be provided for each of the
motor bearing & shall be wired upto the terminal box. The temperature detectors
shall be of 3 wire , duplex type.
4.2 BEARING THERMOMETERS
4.2.1 Each bearing shall be provided with a dial type thermometer. Each
thermometer shall consist of 2 potential free contacts. They shall be
designed to close independently at two different temperatures - one for 'Alarm'
and another for 'Trip'.
4.2.2 The contact rating of the potential free contacts shall be 1A at 240V AC & 0.1A at
220V DC.Any auxiliary supply ,if required shall be indicated by the bidder.
4.2.3 The thermometers shall be located at a convenient height for easy reading
and handling.
4.2.4 One bearing shall be insulated to prevent shaft currents.
4.3 DRAIN PLUGS
Motors shall be provided with drain plugs, so located to drain water, resulting
from condensation or due to other causes ,from all pockets in the motor casing.
4.4 FLOW SWITCHES
Flow switches shall be provided for monitoring cooling water flow if CACW
motors are specified.
4.5 VIBRATION PADS

ISSUE
Vibration pads shall be provided when called for in the specification.
R8
SPEC.NO.
TITLE
INDUCTION MOTORS
5.0 TERMINAL BOX
5.1 Separate terminal boxes shall be provided for each of the following :
5.1.1 Stator Leads
5.1.2 Rotor leads (wound motors)
5.1.3 Space Heaters
5.1.4 Temperature Detectors
5.2 The three phases shall be segregated by barriers of metal or fibre glass.
5.3 The cable box design shall be suitable for any type of cable termination kits
available.
6.0 EARTHING PAD
The earthing pads shall be of non-corrodible metal welded or brazed at two

locations on opposite sides complete with suitable bolt and washers for
connecting the PURCHASER'S earthing flat.
7.0 RATING PLATE
7.1 The following details, in addition to those specified in applicable standards shall
be included on the rating plate.
7.1.1 Temperature rise of windings in degree centigrade at rated load, rated voltage,
frequency and ambient conditions and the method of measuring temperature
rise. (Thermometer/ Winding resistance).
7.1.2 Type of bearings, recommended lubricant, lubricating interval & re-lubricating

quantity.
8.0 TESTS
8.1 Type test certificates for similar motors shall be furnished with the Bid.
8.2 Extra price for performing type tests on the motor as per applicable standard shall
be quoted.
8.3 If specified in data sheet-A, for motors rated 3.3 kV and above, the induced
shaft voltage shall be measured at the manufacturer's works during shop
testing. The maximum value of induced voltage in the motor shaft shall not
exceed 250mV.
ISSUE
R8
SPEC.NO.
TITLE
INDUCTION MOTORS
8.4 The polarisation index test shall be carried out on all motors rated at 3.3 kV and
above. The minimum value of the polarisation index shall be 2 when determined
as per IS-7816.
8.5 Coils of HV motors shall be tested as per IEC-34-15.
8.6 Loss tangent measurement of coils for motors rated 6.6 kV & above shall be done
as per IS-13508.
8.7 All other routine tests shall be carried out as per applicable standards.
9.0 The type of enclosure for outdoor and indoor motors is specified as IPW55 (totally
enclosed weather proof) and IP55 (totally enclosed).
10.0 The type of duty is given as follows:
a) Continuous motor rating shall be at least 15% above the load demand of driven
equipment at duty point and the contractor shall furnish the sizing calculations for
purchaser’s review and approval
b) Motor rating shall be such that it is not overloaded at any operating point of
driven equipment from zero to full load.
c) All motors shall be designed to withstand 120% of rated speed without any
mechanical damage for 2 min.
d) The breakaway torque, pull up torque and pullout torque of motors shall be
properly coordinated with the requirement of driven equipment to ensure smooth
and rapid starting and steady state conditions.
ISSUE
R8
TITLE 2X 800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM
INDUCTION MOTORS
DATA SHEET-C
INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED BY THE VENDOR
A .DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED FOR PURCHASER'S APPROVAL.
1.0 Technical particulars as per data sheet-B of TCE.M4.203-01 & 02
2.0 Bearing temperature indicator
2.1 Type and make
2.2 Number
2.3. Number of contacts in each indicator
2.4 Contact rating at 220V DC at 240V AC
3.0 A separate dimensioned outline and

general arrangement drawing of motor
shall be furnished indicating the following:
Name of Manufacturer,
Wight of motor (kg.)
Centre line of motor
Foundation details,
Openings ,embedment details in foundation for entry of
all cables such as power,space heater,etd etc.
Connection details of motor i.e, start/delta ,
terminal markings, clearance between phase,
disconnecting facilities and direction
of cable entry and cable glands (if provided).
3.1 Dimensions of terminal boxes for main

power leads, space heater leads and ETD
leads.
3.2 Size, type and overall diameter of cable

for which terminal boxes are suitable.
3.3 Openings and embedments in foundation

for cable entry for power leads, space
heater leads, ETD leads and earthing
conductor, etc. with relative locating
dimensions and sizes in all views of motor.
ISSUE
3.4 Location of bearing thermometers and R8

INDUCTION MOTORS
DATA SHEET-C
pockets for the same.
3.5 No. & type (NO/NC) of contacts

provided on bearing thermometers.
3.6 Location and size of earthing

terminals/holes in earthing pads.
3.7 Coupling type, diameter of shaft

extension, dimensions of key slot
and details of half coupling
(if specified).
3.8 The following additional data/details should be

shown on the motor drawing, when applicable.
3.9 Cooling water requirement for water cooled

bearing (Lts/min).
3.10 Cooling water requirement for water cooled

windings (Lts/min).
3.11 Required pressure of cooling water (kg/cm2).
3.12 Required maximum temperature of cooling water (oC).
3.13 Weight of cooler if removable (kg).
3.14 Oil level sight gauges for oil lubricated bearings
B. DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED FOR INFORMATION.
1.0 Insulation
1.1 Material and treatment of insulation
2.0 Winding
2.1 Stator winding
(a) Connection
(b) Resistance/phase
2.2 Rotor winding ISSUE

R8

INDUCTION MOTORS
DATA SHEET-C
(a) Connection
(b) Resistance/phase
3.0 Bearing
3.1 DE Bearing
3.1.1 Type, No. & make
3.1.2 Lubricant
3.1.3 Initial quantity
3.1.4 Relubricating interval
3.1.5 Relubricating quantity
3.1.6 Anticipated life
3.2 NDE Bearing
3.2.1 Type, No. & make
3.2.2 Lubricant
3.2.3 Initial quantity
3.2.4 Relubricating interval
3.2.5 Relubricating quantity
3.2.6 Anticipated life
4.0 Motor bearing lubrication system -

Self lubrication/Forced oil lubrication
4.1 Forced oil lubrication system (if provided)
a) Whether this is compatible

with forced oil lubrication
system of driven equipment.
If NO, furnish the following

details for motor bearing
i) Type, make and specification of oil

ii) Flow rate (Ltrs/Sec) ISSUE
iii) Pressure (Kg/cm2) R8

INDUCTION MOTORS
DATA SHEET-C
iv) Quantity of lube oil pump sets

provided for each motor
v) Local control panel provided for
forced oil lubrication system of each
motor
vi) Make, type and name plate
particulars of lube oil pumps &
415V, 3 phase, 50Hz motors.
vii) Filters - Make & type
5.0 Air temperature detector (Internal)

(CACA/CACW motor)
5.1 Type & make
5.2 Number
5.3 Number of contacts in each indicator
5.4 Contact rating at - 220V DC

- 240V AC
6.0 Terminal box
6.1 Location of main terminal box

viewed from non drive end (Right/Left)
7.0 No load current of motor at rated

voltage & frequency (for each type
of motor)
8.0 Limiting rotor temperature for

determining safe stall time
10.0 Instruction Manual (Number of copies as per

distribution schedule)
ISSUE
R8

.
SPEC NO. ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY VOLUME V B
LIMITED
TITLE 2X 800 MW TPP NEAR KRISHNAPATNAM SHEET 1 OF 4
TCE-M4-203-06
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE ACTUATORS
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements of motor operated valve

actuators with and without integral starters.
2.1 The design, manufacture and performance of the valve actuator and its
accessories shall comply with all currently applicable statutes,
regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be
installed. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the
VENDOR of this responsibility.
2.2 All codes and standards referred to in the specification shall be

understood to be the latest version on the date of offer made by the
BIDDER unless otherwise indicated.
3.0 MOTOR OPERATED VALVE ACTUATOR
3.1 Each valve actuator motor operating mechanism shall essentially

consist of the following components:
(a) AC electric motor

(b) Reduction gear unit (with thrust bearing if required)
(c) Torque switch mechanism
(d) Limit switch mechanism
(e) Hand wheel, for manual operation
(f) Valve position indicator
(g) Manual-Auto lever with suitable locking arrangement
(h) Valve position transmitter (To be provided only if called for in
data sheet-A1)
(i) Space heater for enclosure
(j) Thermostat if called for in data sheet A1
3.2 For valve actuator with integral starter The following components in
addition to those indicated in clause 3.1 shall be provided
(a) Integral reversing contactor starter complete with overload

relays of suitable range and adequately rated control fuses
(b) Local / Remote selector switch
(c) Local control switch / push buttons

ISSUE
R4
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
LIMITED
TCE-M4-203-06
(d) 415V / 110 V - 240V AC control & space heating transformer or

if space heater is rated for 110V AC, space heating supply shall
be derived from 415V / 110V control transformer (Control
transformer required for 415V, 3 phase, 3-wire system only).
For 3-phase, 4-wire system control supply and space heating
supply shall be 240 V AC derived between phase-neutral
(e) A white lamp for supervision of main supply. To be provided

locally. (white lamp may not be required locally as the actuator is
controlled remotely from plant DCS)
(f) A potential free contact shall be provided to annunciate over

load trip / main supply failure on remote panel.
(g) A blinker relay and lamp shall be provided such that the lamp
shall blink as long as the actuator is running ; either to close or
to open position.
(h) Two (2) DC interposing relays for matching the low voltage of
remote commands with the control voltage. The command
signal voltage and the control voltages will be, as indicated in
Data Sheet-A1.
4.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
4.1 The constructional and technical requirements of actuators including

motor shall be as per IS 9334, except as noted in this specification.
4.2 Reversing Contactor Starters For Valve Actuators
4.2.1 Forward and reverse contactors shall be mechanically and electrically

interlocked with each other.
4.2.2 The contactors shall have a minimum thermal rating of 9A and shall be
suitable for class AC4 duty as specified in applicable standards. The
contactor shall have 20% margin over the rated current of the motor.
4.2.3 The thermal overload relays provided with the reversing starters shall
be three element, positive acting, hand reset type, ambient
temperature compensated, time lagged, thermal overload relay with
adjustable settings and built in single phasing preventer. The setting
range shall be properly selected in accordance with the rating of the
motor.
ISSUE
R4
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
LIMITED
TCE-M4-203-06
4.2.4 ‘Stop’ push button of the starter and hand reset push button for the
thermal overload relay shall be separate from each other.
4.2.5 Overload relay hand reset push button shall be brought out to the front
and made easily accessible.(auto reset facility for overload relay can be
acceptable)
4.2.6 Overload relay shall be provided with at least one ‘NO’ and one ‘NC’ or
one change-over contact.
5.0 TESTS
5.1 The routine and acceptance tests specified in IS 9334 shall be

conducted on each valve actuator. In addition to the above tests the
following shall also be conducted as part of routine tests.
5.1.1 Visual checks of workmanship, dimensions, component assembly,

number of torque and limit switches, cable entry and valve position
transmitter.
5.1.2 Mechanical checks of gear ratio and torque clutch operation.
5.1.3 Wiring check as per approved VENDOR drawing.
5.1.4 Resistance values of potentiometric type position transmitter and 4-

20mA dc signal of transducer type position transmitter shall be
measured at various positions of the valves.
5.1.5 Insulation resistance test ( Meggering) using 1000V megger for power
terminals and 500V megger for control terminals.
5.1.6 High voltage test at 1.5 kV AC for 1 sec.
5.1.7 Performance test (at no load) to check the operation of the actuator
limit switches and torque switches. Measurement of torque and motor
currents shall be done and the values at which the torque switch
operates, noted.
ISSUE
R4
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
LIMITED
TCE-M4-203-06
5.1.8 For actuator with integral starters, all the above tests shall be
performed in addition to the following :-
(a) The wiring of the starter shall be checked as per the approved
VENDOR drawing
(b) The operation of the starter shall be checked.
(c) Tests as per standards indicated in data sheet - A3.
5.2 Type test certificates for type tests carried out as per IS 9334 on similar
actuators shall be furnished for PURCHASER’S review. If type test has
not been carried out on similar actuators, then VENDOR shall carry out
the tests.
5.3 All instruments used for testing shall have valid calibration certificates,
which shall be produced at the time of inspection.
5.4 All test reports shall be submitted for PURCHASER’s approval.
ISSUE
R4
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
LIMITED
TCE-M4-203-06 TITLE DATA SHEET - C SHEET 1 OF 1
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR AFTER

AWARD OF THE CONTRACT
1.0 The VENDOR shall furnish the following drawings / documents / data
for each type of valve actuator in his scope of supply :
1.1 Drawings for Approval
(a) Drawing indicating overall dimensions and mounting details of

valve actuator on the valve
(b) Detailed internal wiring diagram of the actuator and limit switch
development diagram
(c) Detailed Bill of Materials of all electrical items indicating clearly

make, type, ratings, etc.
(d) Terminal box details.
1.2 Drawings / Data for Information
(a) Type test certificates of similar valve actuators and also for all
individual electrical components used.
(b) Valve Actuator catalogues and operating and maintenance

manual
(c) Gear ratio, motor shaft speed and output shaft speed.
(d) Full load current and starting current of the valve actuator
motors
1.3 Final Test Certificates for Approval
(a) Routine and acceptance test certificates of the valve actuators
(b) Equipment shall not be despatched unless the test certificates

are duly approved by the PURCHASER.
ISSUE
R4
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TITLE SHEET 1 OF 4
TCE-M4-203-11 D.C. MOTORS
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, material, construction features,

manufacture, inspection and testing at the VENDOR's/his SUB-
VENDOR's works, delivery to site and performance testing of D C
Motors for general purpose.

performance of D C Motors shall comply with all currently applicable
statutes, regulations and safety codes in the locality where the
equipment will be installed. The equipment shall also conform to the
latest applicable standards. Nothing in this specification shall be
construed to relieve the VENDOR from this responsibility.
2.2 All codes and standards referred to in the specification shall be

understood to be the latest version on the date of offer made by the
BIDDER unless otherwise indicated.
3.0 DRIVEN EQUIPMENT
3.1 When this specification forms part of the driven equipment specification,
information not given in Data Sheet-A1 will be governed by the driven
equipment specification.
3.2 Motors shall be capable of satisfactory operation for the application and
duty as specified in the Data Sheet-A1 and as required by the driven
equipment.
4.1 Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in the
expected life span when operated continuously at a supply voltage within
+10 to –15 % from the motor rated voltage or as specified in Data Sheet-
A1.
4.2 Motors shall be capable of starting and accelerating the load with the
applicable method of starting, without exceeding acceptable winding
temperatures, when the supply voltage is in the range 85% of the rated
motor voltage to maximum permissible voltage specified in Data Sheet-
A1.
ISSUE
R7
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TITLE SHEET 2 OF 4
5.0 TEMPERATURE RISE
5.1 The temperature rise shall be in accordance with the relevant standards.
5.2 For motors specified for outdoor installation, account shall be taken of
heating due to direct exposure to solar radiation.
5.3 The field windings for the motors shall be continuously rated without
forced ventilation.
Motors weighing more than 25 Kg shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs

or other means to facilitate safe lifting.
7.0 BRUSHES AND BRUSH GEAR
7.1 Brush materials with large brush contact area for good commutation
under high acceleration and overload conditions should be provided.
7.2 The brushes shall be of electric graphite of high quality. The pressure on
the brush shall be adjustable, if necessary.
7.3 The brush holder to which the brushes are fixed should be so
constructed that the brushes touch the commutator face evenly.
Individual brush holders shall be with drawable without disturbing any
other part of the machine.
7.4 There shall be provision for holding off each brush from commutator to
facilitate maintenance.
7.5 The brush rocker should be split to facilitate easy erection and
dismantling which will enable the brush rocker to be adjusted to its
correct position.
7.6 When specified in Data Sheet-A1, motors located in acid fume area shall
be specifically treated against corrosion from acid fumes and shall be
provided with sealed bearings.
ISSUE
R7
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TITLE SHEET 3 OF 4
8.0 TERMINAL BOX
8.1 Terminal box shall be weather proof construction designed for outdoor
service to eliminate entry of dust and water. Gaskets of neoprene or
approved equivalent shall be provided at cover joints and between box
and motor frame.
8.2 All terminals should be brought out to the terminal box. The terminals
shall be stud type with necessary plain washers, spring washers and
check nuts. The construction of terminal box shall be such that the
terminals are easily accessible. The terminals themselves shall be such
as to facilitate easy change of connections in the box without disturbing
any internal connections in the machine.
9.0 ACCESSORIES
9.1 Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of

the motor for bolted connection of the PURCHASER's earthing
conductors, as specified in the Data Sheet-A1. These earthing points
shall be in addition to the earthing stud provided in the terminal box.
9.2 Except when otherwise specified, the motors shall be provided with a
bare shaft extension having a key slot and a key at the driving end.
9.3 When the motor half coupling is supplied by the PURCHASER or driven
equipment VENDOR, the motor VENDOR shall strictly adhere to the
dimensional requirements and other instructions related to accessory.
10.0 STARTER PANEL
10.1 Starter panel when included in motor VENDOR's scope shall meet the
following requirements.
10.2 The constructional features of these panels shall comply with the
requirements of specification TCE.M4-219-01, Section-D.
10.3 The starter for motor feeders shall preferably be housed within the main
panel. If starting resistors are provided in the power circuits, the same
can be located in a separate box which will be placed near the main
panel.
ISSUE
R7
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TITLE SHEET 4 OF 4
10.4 The motor Starter shall be provided with the following.
a) Switch, fuses, air break contactors.
b) Thermal overload relays (for alarm only)
c) Starting resistors with associated timers.
d) ON, OFF and fault indicating lamps.
e) Necessary auxiliary contactors for fault alarm circuit.
f) 240V space heating circuit (240V supply to be arranged by

VENDOR).
g) ON, OFF PBs for testing purposes.
h) One shunt, ammeter and one shunt for providing remote ammeter.
i) Suitable circuitry to receive ON, OFF commands from remote

panel, interlocks, off command from local Push button station etc.
j) MCB for space heating circuit.
11.0 FIELD RHEOSTAT
Field rheostat for adjusting the motor speed at site, to match the
requirement of the driven equipment, shall be provided by the motor
VENDOR and it shall be mounted in the starter panel. If starter panel is
not in motor VENDOR’s scope, the field rheostat shall be supplied as a
loose item.
ISSUE
R7
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE-M4-203-11 TITLE SHEET1 OF 1

DATA SHEET-C
D.C. MOTORS
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR

For approval:
1. Motor GD² (Kg.m²).
2. Motor outline dimension drawing (Number of copies as per distribution

schedule).
3. Type and routine test certificates (Number of copies as per distribution

schedule).
4. Electrical time constant in seconds (te).
5. Mechanical time constant in seconds (tm).
6. Field time constant in seconds (tf).
7. Starter data / drawings.
7.1 Detailed design calculations for starting current and selection of starting
resistance values.
7.2 Schematic drawing.
7.3 General arrangement / foundation drawings.
8. Field rheostat details
For information:
10. Type and frame size
11. Starting time in seconds.
12. Safe stall time at 100% rated voltage and under hot condition.
13. Make and type of bearings and expected life.
14. Total weight of motor (kg).

ISSUE
R7
TCE FORM 329 R3

Vol V BOP

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vol V BOP

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANDHRA PRADESH POWER DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LTD.

2X800 MW COAL FIRED POWER PLANT

BALANCE OF PLANT SYSTEMS & EQUIPMENT

TCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS LTD

VOLUME SPECIFICATION REV. TITLE

I TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 - SCOPE OF ENQUIRY

- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

II TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 - PROJECT INFORMATION

- SCOPE, TERMINAL POINTS AND

- GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

- QUALITY ASSURANCE RQUIREMENTS

- SCHEDULES INCLUDING PRICE

III TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 MECHANICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL SYSTEM

V TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

VI TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 CIVIL WORKS REQUIREMENTS

VOLUME V: ELECTRICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

SECTION SPECIFICATION REV. TITLE NO. OF

D3.00 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 ELECTRICAL SCOPE 08

D3.01 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 400 KV SWITCHYARD 33

DATA SHEET A3.01 24

D3.02 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 POWER TRANSFORMERS 12

DATA SHEET A3.02 10

D3.03 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 SERVICE TRANSFORMERS 07

DATA SHEET A3.03 02

D3.04 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 NEUTRAL EARTHING EQUIPMENT 02

DATA SHEET A3.04 03

D3.05 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 HT SWITCHGEAR 20

DATA SHEET A3.05 04

D3.06 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 LT SWITCHGEAR /MCC 15

DATA SHEET A3.06 04

D3.07 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 SEGREGATED / NON-SEGREGATED PHASE 03

DATA SHEET A3.07 02

D3.08 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 UPS SYSTEM 01

DATA SHEET A3.08 03

D3.09 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 CONTROL PANELS/JB/PB 05

DATA SHEET A3.09 01

D3.10 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 MOTORS & ACCESSORIES 07

DATA SHEET A3.10 04

D3.11 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 CABLES & CABLE CARRIER SYSTEMS 11

DATA SHEET A3.11 02

D3.12 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 DC SYSTEM 12

DATA SHEET A3.12 04

D3.13 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION 08

DATA SHEET A3.13 04

D3.14 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 LIGHTING SYSTEM 15

DATA SHEET A3.14 02

D3.15 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 10

DATA SHEET A3.15 02

D3.16 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 ELEVATORS 03

DATA SHEET A3.16 03

D3.17 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 05

DATA SHEET A3.17 07

D3.18 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 CONSTRUCTION POWER SUPPLY 02

D3.19 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 SPARES, MAINTENANCE TOOLS & TACKLES 15

D3.20 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED AFTER 04

D3.21 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 CODES & STANDARDS 13

D3.22 TCE.5103A-H-500-001 R0 ELECTRICAL LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 07

VOLUME V: ELECTRICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

SECTION SPECIFICATION REV. TITLE NO. OF

D3.22 TCE-M4-203-01 R8 INDUCTION MOTORS 5

D3.23 TCE-M4-219-01 R7 CONTROL CABINETS 6

D3.24 TCE-M4-219-11 R7 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 18

D3.25 TCE-M4-203-71 R1 VARIABLE SPEED DC/AC DRIVES 19